JP7740419B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, improving the efficiency of gaming machine development, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, and providing gaming machines that are considerate of players (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

JP 2011-172988 A

Further technological improvements are desired for gaming machines such as those described above, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, improving the efficiency of gaming machine development, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, providing gaming machines that are considerate of players, and providing a more sound gaming experience.

The present invention has been made to solve at least some of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized in the following forms.

[form]
a predetermined detection means for detecting a predetermined operation;
a game value granting means electrically connected to the predetermined detection means and executing a process for granting a game value for a game;
a game media providing means electrically connected to the game value providing means and configured to perform a process for providing game media;
a processing execution means electrically connected to the game value providing means by a signal line capable of transmitting various signals, and which executes a specific processing which is a processing different from the processing for providing the game medium;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming value providing means
a first reference information storage means for storing reference information used in a process for awarding a game value to the game, the reference information being referenced in response to detection by the predetermined detection means;
a first transmitting means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means to the processing executing means after a predetermined supply of power to the gaming machine has started and before the execution of a predetermined game processing for progressing a game is started;
a second transmitting means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on information acquired based on detection by the predetermined detecting means to the processing executing means;
Equipped with
The processing execution means
a second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value providing means;
an execution means for executing the specific process based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means;
a processing result information storage means for storing processing result information which is information relating to the processing result of the specific processing performed by the execution means;
Equipped with
the game value providing means is provided in a main control means for progressing the game, and the processing execution means is provided in a performance control means for controlling the performance,
the processing execution means is configured to make it impossible to rewrite the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means of the game value granting means,
This gaming machine is
When a predetermined abnormality occurs, information corresponding to the predetermined abnormality is transmitted from the game value providing means, and the information corresponding to the predetermined abnormality is stored in the processing execution means;
This gaming machine is
When erasing information acquired based on the execution of a game, the information used to control the progress of the game is erased.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The above configuration can prevent malfunctions in gaming machines.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface that are variably displayed on a pattern display device. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in jackpot lotteries, etc. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning/losing table for the lottery to open electric gimmicks. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of a main control device and the configuration of an inspection machine. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of the processing contents in the gaming history management chip and the inspection machine. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of an input port provided in a main MPU. An explanatory diagram explaining the ball entry detection process performed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing the goal determination process executed by the main MPU. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating how the presence or absence of a goal is detected. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a CPU of the game history management chip. A block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device and the configuration of the inspection machine provided in a pachinko machine of aspect 6 of the first embodiment. An explanatory diagram showing the processing contents of the gaming history management chip and inspection machine of aspect 6 of the first embodiment. A block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device and the configuration of the inspection machine provided in a pachinko machine of aspect 7 of the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic overview of the processing in the gaming history management chip and inspection machine of aspect 7 of the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in aspect 11 of the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an outline of the processing in the main MPU in aspect 11 of the first embodiment. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in aspect 12 of the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process performed by the main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the game history processing executed by the main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of specific processing executed by the main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 23 of the first embodiment. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in aspect 37 of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 46 of the first embodiment. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of a part of the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in aspect 50 of the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 56 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of an information display unit. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing how gaming history information is displayed on an information display unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which setting information is displayed on an information display unit in a setting change mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which setting information is displayed on an information display unit in a setting change mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which setting information is displayed on an information display unit in a setting change mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which setting information is displayed on an information display unit in a setting change mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which setting information is displayed on an information display unit in a setting change mode. FIG. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 74 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of a main ROM; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of a main RAM. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a memory map of a main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU in aspect 74 of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU in aspect 75 of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU in aspect 76 of the first embodiment. This is a process diagram showing the work process when an administrator changes the lottery settings of a pachinko machine. This is a process diagram showing the work process when an administrator checks the lottery settings of a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing a part of the main processing executed by the main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 87 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by the main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 87 of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 87 of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a part of the main processing executed by the main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 88 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 10 is a flowchart showing a part of the main processing executed by the main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 89 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 10 is a flowchart showing a part of a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 90 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 91 of the first embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a change in the display mode of the information display unit. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a change in the display mode of the information display unit when the number of particles passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000; 10 is a time chart showing an example of a change in the display mode of the information display unit when the number of particles passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000; 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 97 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 97 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 98 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 98 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 100 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 100 of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 100 of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 100 of the first embodiment.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS An embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
B. Application to other configurations:
C. Regarding inventions extracted from the above embodiments:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as a "pachinko machine") according to a first embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a generally rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a gaming hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the gaming hall's island equipment. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported to the inner frame 13 by metal hinges 16. Control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, an audio/light-emitting control device, and a display control device, are located on the back of the inner frame 13. Details of these control devices will be described later. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window 18 is formed in approximately the center of the front door frame 14. Resin parts and decorative illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided around the window 18 of the front door frame 14. The decorative illumination parts are composed of light-emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means serves to enhance the presentation effect by lighting up or flashing during each play played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, etc. In addition, a glass unit 19 consisting of two sheets of glass is disposed on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the open window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and players of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as loaned balls loaned from a loaner machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the player operating the operating handle 25, and launches the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 toward the front of the game board. The lower tray 21 is located below the upper tray 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. An outlet 22 is formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged to the outside from the lower tray 21.

A performance operation button 24 is provided at the front of the periphery of the upper tray 20 as an operation receiving means. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit that allows the player to perform input operations for the game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects that operation.

Furthermore, an operating handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates the operating handle 25, gaming balls are launched from the gaming ball launching mechanism toward the front of the gaming board in response to the operation. Inside the operating handle 25 are a touch sensor 25a for enabling the gaming ball launching mechanism to operate, a wait button 25b that the player presses to stop the gaming ball launching mechanism from launching gaming balls, and a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 through changes in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a turns on. When the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in response to the amount of rotation, and gaming balls are launched from the gaming ball launching mechanism toward the front of the gaming board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the back of the pachinko machine 10. Control devices for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 are located on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanical units are provided on the rear surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 is equipped with a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board that has the function of managing the main control of the game and the function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing (also called traces of opening or traces of unsealing). For example, a seal sticker is affixed to the openable part, and the word "unsealed" appears when the board box is opened.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio and light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio and light emission control device 90 controls light-emitting means such as speakers and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on commands sent from the audio and light emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes an LCD display that displays symbols and images for effects.

The third control unit 53 is equipped with a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for the payout of prize balls. When a command to launch game balls is input from the main control device 60, the launch control device 80 controls the game ball launching mechanism to launch game balls with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Additionally, the back of the inner frame 13 is equipped with several devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a tank 54 that is continuously replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the amusement hall, a tank rail 55 connected below the tank 54 and having a gently sloping surface to allow game balls to flow downstream, a case rail 56 connected vertically downstream of the tank rail 55, and a payout device 71 that receives game balls from the case rail 56 and pays out a predetermined number of game balls in response to commands from the payout control device 70.

Next, we will explain the game board. The game board is removably attached to the front of the inner frame 13.

Figure 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to define part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. Game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism are guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the top of the game area PA, after which they flow down the game area PA. Multiple nails 42 are planted in the game area PA approximately perpendicular to the game board 30, and various devices such as windmills are also arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The gaming board 30 is provided with a general winning slot 32, a first starting slot 33, a second starting slot 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. The gaming board 30 also has a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 has a special symbol unit 37, a general symbol unit 38, and a round display section 39.

General winning openings 32 are openings through which game balls can enter, and multiple openings are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters a general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71. In this embodiment, three general winning openings 32a, 32b, and 32c are provided as general winning openings 32. Hereinafter, general winning opening 32a will also be referred to as the first winning opening 32a, general winning opening 32b will also be referred to as the second winning opening 32b, and general winning opening 32c will also be referred to as the third winning opening 32c.

The first starting hole 33 is an entrance through which game balls can enter. The first starting hole 33 is located at the bottom center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting hole 34 is an entrance through which game balls can enter, and is located on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed. The second starting hole 34 is also provided with an electric device 34a, which is a normal electric device.

The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates vertically. The through gate 35 is the gate that triggers the execution of a lottery to open the electric device 34a. Specifically, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control unit 60 uses this passage as an opportunity to conduct an internal lottery (electric device release lottery). If the result of the internal lottery is a winning entry to the electric device release, the electric device 34a transitions to an electric device release state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Because the through gate 35 is located upstream of the second start opening 34 in the flow direction of the gaming ball, a gaming ball that passes through the through gate 35 can flow down the game area PA after passing through and enter the second start opening 34. Note that in this embodiment, even if a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, no prize balls are paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state, preventing game balls from entering the large winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). If the jackpot lottery results in a large winning or small winning, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode that executes the opening and closing process of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36. Specifically, when the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 transitions from a closed state, in which game balls cannot enter, to an open state, in which game balls can enter, and then transitions back to the closed state after a predetermined condition is met. In this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 gaming balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

In addition, an outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various ball inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

In this embodiment, game balls that enter the first starting hole 33, the second starting hole 34, the first winning hole 32a, the second winning hole 32b, the third winning hole 32c, the big winning hole 36a, and the outlet hole 43 are configured to merge into a discharge passage provided on the back of the game board 30, and this discharge passage is equipped with a discharge passage detection sensor that detects the game balls. As will be described later, in this embodiment, by detecting the game balls with the discharge passage detection sensor, it is possible to determine the number of game balls that have been launched onto the game board 30.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which multiple segment light-emitting elements are arranged in a predetermined pattern.

The first pattern display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying a first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is displayed in a variable or static manner based on a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33. When a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 is held, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a variable or predetermined first pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a static first pattern corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is held in response to a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 33 is also referred to as a game round for the first starting hole.

The second pattern display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying a second pattern. The second pattern is a pattern that is displayed in a variable or static manner based on a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34. When a jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34 is held, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a variable or predetermined second pattern as the display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a static second pattern corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is held in response to a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 34 is also referred to as a game round for the second starting hole.

Here, the time from when the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the change time. Specifically, the time from when the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display unit 37a starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the first change time, and the time from when the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display unit 37b starts to change until it is displayed stationary is also referred to as the second change time.

The special symbol unit 37 further includes a first pending display unit 37c and a second pending display unit 37d, each consisting of an LED lamp, located adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

The first reserve display unit 37c displays the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 33 by changing the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the first starting hole 33 can be reserved.

The second reserve display unit 37d displays the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 34 by changing the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the second starting hole 34 can be reserved.

The general map unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display unit in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined pattern. When a lottery to open an electric feature is held, triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the general map unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to light up, flash, or display in a predetermined pattern. When the lottery to open an electric feature is completed, the general map unit 38 displays in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light-emitting display unit with multiple LED lamps arranged in a predetermined pattern, and displays the number of rounds that will occur in the open/close execution mode, or a corresponding display. A round is a game in which the open/close door 36b remains open until one of the following conditions is met: either a predetermined maximum duration has elapsed, or a predetermined maximum number of game balls have entered the variable winning device 36. The number of rounds varies depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 begins displaying the number of rounds when the open/close execution mode is initiated, and ends when the open/close execution mode ends.

The special drawing unit 37, the regular drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured as segment displays or light-emitting displays using LED lamps, but may also be configured as various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery results, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is positioned approximately in the center of the play area PA. The variable display unit 40 is equipped with a pattern display device 41. The pattern display device 41 is equipped with a liquid crystal display. The display content of the pattern display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device equipped in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured with various display devices, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first pattern display unit 37a displays a variable or predetermined display based on a game ball entering the first start opening 33, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. Furthermore, when the second pattern display unit 37b displays a variable or predetermined display based on a game ball entering the second start opening 34, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to displaying a variable or predetermined display of the pattern triggered by a game ball entering the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, but also displays effects during the open/close execution mode to which the game enters when a jackpot is won. Details of the pattern display device 41 are explained below.

Figure 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the variably displayed patterns and display surface 41a on the pattern display device 41. Figure 4(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the variably displayed patterns on the pattern display device 41. As shown in Figure 4(a), patterns representing the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. Note that the variably displayed patterns may be patterns in which each of the numbers 1 to 8 is accompanied by an image of a character or the like.

Figure 4(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3, left, center, and right, are displayed on the display surface 41a. Each symbol column Z1 to Z3 contains the numbers 1 to 8 shown in Figure 4(a) arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol column is displayed in a variable display in which it scrolls from top to bottom or bottom to top periodically. As shown in Figure 4(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol column is displayed stopped on the pay line L. Specifically, when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, a variable display is initiated in which the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction periodically. Then, the scrolling symbols switch from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol column Z1, symbol column Z3, and symbol column Z2, until a predetermined symbol is displayed statically in each of symbol columns Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of symbols ends and the static display is achieved, if the result of the jackpot lottery by main control device 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be formed on activated line L. For example, a combination of the same symbols will be formed on activated line L. Note that the manner in which the variable display of symbols on symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described manner, and various other variations in the variable display of symbols are possible, such as the number of symbol columns, the number of activated lines, the direction in which the variable display of symbols in the symbol columns is displayed, and the number of symbols in each symbol column.

Here, a play round is one unit of processing for notifying a player of the results of a jackpot lottery for special information acquired based on a winning entry in either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies a player of the results of one jackpot lottery for one piece of special information for each play round. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a winning entry in either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, it causes the segment display to change display in either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b for each play round, and then stops displaying the segment display so that it displays a value corresponding to the lottery result for the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a win at either the first start slot 33 or the second start slot 34, it causes the symbol display device 41 to variably display a predetermined symbol sequence for each play, and then statically displays the symbol sequence so that it corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. The time required for one play is also referred to as the unit play time. The unit play time is made up of the variable time, which is the time from when the variable display begins to when the predetermined lottery result is statically displayed, and the static time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is statically displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a first hold display area Ds1 and a second hold display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. The first hold display area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls based on winning at the first start port 33. The second hold display area Ds2 displays the number of reserved balls based on winning at the second start port 34. Note that in this embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls that have won at the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is a maximum of four each.

A2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, a description will be given of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

Figure 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes an audio and light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 is equipped with a main control board 61 that is responsible for the main control of games. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62 that is composed of elements with multiple functions. The MPU 62 is equipped with a CPU 62x that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 64 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when the CPU 62x executes programs stored in the ROM 63, and an input/output port 62a. The MPU 62 also is equipped with a game history management chip 300 and an inspection terminal 65.

The game history management chip 300 calculates various game history information (described below) based on game ball entry information for the starting gate, winning gate, and gate (hereinafter collectively referred to as "entry gates"). The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history management chip 300 to an inspection machine (described below). Details of the game history management chip 300 and the inspection terminal 65 will be described later.

The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit that functions as a random number generator. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by other elements.

The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 and a power outage monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85. The main control board 61 receives a stable 24V DC power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power outage monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, dispensing control device 70, etc., and supplies power to each device. In this embodiment, the power supply device 85 is also equipped with a capacitor 87, which continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time in the event of a power outage or when the power switch is turned OFF.

Also connected to the input side of the MPU 62 are ball entry detection sensors provided at each entry port. Specifically, the main entry port detection sensor 44a, which detects game balls that have entered the main entry port 36a, the first entry port detection sensor 44b, which detects game balls that have entered the first entry port 33, the second entry port detection sensor 44c, which detects game balls that have entered the second entry port 34, the first entry port detection sensor 44d, which detects game balls that have entered the first entry port 32a, the second entry port detection sensor 44e, which detects game balls that have entered the second entry port 32b, the third entry port detection sensor 44f, which detects game balls that have entered the third entry port 32c, the through gate detection sensor 44g, which detects game balls that have passed through the through gate 35, and the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, which detects game balls that have passed through the discharge passage described above. Based on signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 determines whether a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area PA has entered a start port or a prize port, and whether the gaming ball has passed through a through gate or a discharge passage. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the gaming ball's entry into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34.

Connected to the output side of the MPU 62 are a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric device drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34, and the main display unit 45. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drive units through these driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 controls the drive of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Furthermore, if the electric role opening lottery results in a win, the MPU 62 controls the drive of the electric role drive unit 44b so that the electric role 34a is opened. Furthermore, in each game, the MPU 62 controls the display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b on the main display unit 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, controls the display of the round display unit 39 on the main display unit 45.

The payout control device 70 and the audio/light emission control device 90 are also connected to the transmitting side of the MPU 62. For example, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 references the command information storage area of the ROM 63. Specifically, if a game ball has entered the general prize entry port 32, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls. If a game ball has entered the first start port 33, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls. If a game ball has entered the second start port 34, the main control device 60 sends a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 1 game ball. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is activated when predetermined launch conditions are met. The launch control device 80 is also connected to the control handle 25. As described above, the control handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a wait button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When a player grips the control handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on. When the player rotates the control handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation, and game balls are launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

The audio and light emitting control device 90 receives various commands sent from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received commands. Specifically, based on the various commands received from the main control device 60, the audio and light emitting control device 90 controls the operation of various lamps 47, consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, the operation of the speaker 46, and also controls the display control device 100. In addition, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the audio and light emitting control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the audio and light emitting control device 90 controls the various lamps 47, speaker 46, display control device 100, etc. to perform game performance that reflects the operation.

The display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90. Specifically, based on various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90, the display control device 100 determines the symbol fluctuation time on the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination that will ultimately be stopped and displayed, as well as whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect that will be executed while the first LCD symbol or the second LCD symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Note that in this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first LCD symbol or the second LCD symbol is displayed in a static manner, is fixed. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

Figure 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in the jackpot lottery, etc. The various counters are provided in various counter areas of RAM 64, and are used by MPU 62 when performing the jackpot lottery, setting the display on main display unit 45, and setting the pattern display on pattern display device 41. Specifically, jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. jackpot type counter C2 is used to allocate jackpot types. Reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether a reach will occur when the pattern sequence displayed on pattern display device 41 is changed to a miss.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Furthermore, the fluctuation type counter CS is used to determine the fluctuation time in the first and second symbol display sections 37a and 37b of the main display section 45, and the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, the electric device release counter C4 is used for the electric device release lottery to determine whether or not the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 is opened.

Each of counters C1-C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to its counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a specified area of RAM 64.

The RAM 64 also has a reserve information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reserve information storage area 64b has a first reserve area Ra and a second reserve area Rb. In this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and change type counter CS at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the first reserve area Ra of the reserve information storage area 64b. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and change type counter CS at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the second reserve area Rb of the reserve information storage area 64b.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will now be explained. As mentioned above, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the jackpot lottery. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Furthermore, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area of ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area of ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the order obtained when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. The jackpot random number counter C1 that has been moved to the execution area AE is then compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur.

Next, we will explain the details of the jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the type of jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 39, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referenced.

Next, we will explain the details of the reach random number counter C3. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether a reach will occur when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c and then compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of ROM 63 to determine whether a reach has occurred. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c and then compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of ROM 63 to determine whether a reach has occurred. However, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the mode transitions to open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The term "reach" refers to a display state in which, for some of the multiple symbol columns displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, some combinations of symbols that may result in a jackpot are displayed as static symbols, and in this state, the remaining symbol columns display varying symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a symbol combination that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of identical symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 4(b), a symbol is first displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z3, forming a reach line. While the reach line is formed, the symbol is displayed as varying symbols in symbol column Z2, resulting in a reach. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is displayed as static symbols in symbol column Z2.

The reach effect also includes a reach effect in which, when a reach line has been formed, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with varying symbols, and a predetermined character or other moving image is displayed in the background screen, or a reach effect is achieved by reducing or hiding the symbol combination that forms the reach line and then displaying a predetermined character or other moving image across substantially the entire display surface 41a. Furthermore, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, the reach random number counter C3 or another counter may be used to determine whether to display a preview using a predetermined image, such as a predetermined character.

Next, the change type counter CS will be explained in detail. The change type counter CS is used by the MPU 62 when determining the change time in the first and second pattern display units 37a and 37b, and the change time of the patterns on the pattern display device 41. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated during the remaining time within that normal processing. The buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained when determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation display in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b and when the pattern display device 41 begins to fluctuate. When determining the fluctuation time in the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b, a fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area of ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric role release counter C4 will be explained. The electric role release counter C4 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 465, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The electric role release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of RAM 64 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric role release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d is moved to the electric role execution area 64e, and then a lottery is held in the electric role execution area 64e using the value of the electric role release counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric role 34a to an open state. For example, if C4 = 0 or 1, the electric role 34a is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the electric role 34a is maintained in a closed state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric role release counter C4, and variable type counter CS corresponds to special information in this invention. Also, at least one of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is also referred to as reserved information.

Next, we will explain the hit/miss table. The hit/miss table is table data used to check against the jackpot random number counter C1 when a jackpot lottery is held based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has two lottery modes set for the jackpot lottery; a low probability mode and a high probability mode; when a jackpot lottery is held in low probability mode, the hit/miss table for the low probability mode is referenced, and when a jackpot lottery is held in high probability mode, the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced.

Figure 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table. Figure 7(a) shows the win/loss table for low probability mode (for low probability mode), and Figure 7(b) shows the win/loss table for high probability mode.

As shown in Figure 7(a), the hit/miss table for the low probability mode has five values from 0 to 4 set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) is a miss. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 7(b), the hit/miss table for the high probability mode has 16 values from 0 to 15 set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 is a miss. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/loss table for the low probability mode is included in the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/loss table for the high probability mode. However, as long as the result of the jackpot lottery shows a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/loss table in this embodiment, a "small win" may also be set as a result of the big win lottery.

A "small win" is a win/loss result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, in which the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to either the lottery mode or the support mode. In contrast, a "miss" is a win/loss result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and further does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or the support mode.

Next, the types of jackpots will be explained. Multiple types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, multiple types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes.
(1) The number of times (number of rounds) that the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed in the opening/closing execution mode
(2) The manner of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode. (3) The lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) for the big win lottery after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

As a mode of controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening and closing execution mode, a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of game balls entering (winning) the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, a single opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode can be set to continue for 30 seconds or until 10 game balls have entered the opening and closing door 36b. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, a single opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode can be set to continue for 1.6 seconds or until 10 balls have entered the opening and closing door 36b.

The opening time limit for one opening of the opening/closing door 36b and the number of balls that can be opened per opening are arbitrary, as long as the frequency of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, the opening time limit for one opening may be longer or the number of balls that can be opened per opening may be set higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. To clearly distinguish between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that no winning occurs in the variable winning device 36.

In this embodiment, the opening and closing execution mode does not have multiple types of winning modes, and the opening and closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode described above. In other words, a single opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 game balls have entered the opening and closing door 36b.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign a jackpot type. The jackpot type assignment corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an assignment table in the assignment table storage area of ROM 63.

Figure 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the allocation table. Figure 8(a) shows the allocation table for the first starting port, and Figure 8(b) shows the allocation table for the second starting port. The allocation table for the first starting port is referenced when drawing a jackpot based on a game ball entering the first starting port 33, and the allocation table for the second starting port is referenced when drawing a jackpot based on a game ball entering the second starting port 34.

As shown in the allocation table for the first starting hole in Figure 8(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting hole 33 are set as 16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, and 8R regular jackpot.

A 16R probability variable jackpot and an 8R probability variable jackpot are jackpots in which the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode, the win/lose lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-frequency support mode.

The 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are jackpots in which the opening and closing control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the win/lose lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the low-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting slot, of the jackpot type counter C2 values from "0-39," "0-13" corresponds to a 16R special jackpot, "14-27" corresponds to an 8R regular jackpot, "28-33" corresponds to a 16R regular jackpot, and "34-39" corresponds to an 8R regular jackpot.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has four types of jackpots. This diversifies the types of jackpots. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the 16R probability jackpot is the most advantageous to the player, followed by the 8R probability jackpot, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. By providing multiple types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage to the player in this way, monotony in the game is prevented and it is possible to increase attention to the game.

As shown in the allocation table for the second starting port in Figure 8 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34 are set to be a 16R variable probability jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot. In the allocation table for the second starting port, of the jackpot type counter C2 values of "0 to 39," "0 to 27" corresponds to a 16R variable probability jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to an 8R normal jackpot.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the allocation of jackpot types in the event of a jackpot differs between a jackpot based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 and a jackpot based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 34, providing a clear difference in the advantages to the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referenced.

In the pachinko machine 10, as the support mode of the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above-mentioned (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode can be set so that the frequency with which the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 opens per unit time is relatively high or low when compared with a situation in which game balls continue to be released into the game area PA in the same manner.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role release in the electric role release lottery using the electric role release counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. The probability of winning the electric role release in the electric role release lottery is higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric role release 34a per time is set longer when the electric role release is won than in the low frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs in high-frequency support mode and the electric role 34a opens multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state may be set to be shorter than the opening time of one electric role. Furthermore, in high-frequency support mode, the time between one electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery may be set to be relatively shorter than in low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in meeting the conditions for obtaining special information.

Figure 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table (win/loss table for the lottery to open an electric reel) used when conducting the lottery to open an electric reel.

Figure 9(a) shows a win/loss table for the electric feature release lottery (for low-frequency support mode) used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 9(a), the win/loss table for the electric feature release lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values, 0 and 1, set as the electric feature release counter C4 values that result in a win for the electric feature release. 464 values, from 2 to 465, are set as the electric feature release counter C4 values that result in a loss. In other words, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35 in low-frequency support mode and the electric feature release lottery is executed, the electric feature release is won with a probability of 1 in 233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric feature release lottery is won in low-frequency support mode, the electric feature 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

Figure 9(b) shows a win/loss table for the electric feature release lottery (for high-frequency support mode) used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 9(b), the win/loss table for the electric feature release lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 set as the electric feature release counter C4 values that result in a win for the electric feature release. Four values from 462 to 465 have been set as the electric feature release counter C4 values that result in a loss. In other words, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 35 in high-frequency support mode and the electric feature release lottery is executed, the electric feature release is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric feature release lottery is won in high-frequency support mode, the electric feature 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning/losing table for the electric device opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 than the low-frequency support mode.

Figure 10 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 and the inspection device 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the MPU 62, CPU 62x, ROM 63, and RAM 64 will also be referred to as the main MPU 62, main CPU 62x, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 has a prize ball count data storage area and a calculation execution condition storage area.

The prize ball number data storage area stores the number of game balls (prize ball number data) that are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters each ball entrance. In this embodiment, the prize ball number data storage area stores the following prize ball number data:
Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 (number of first starting hole prize balls P ₁ ): 3
Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34 (number of second starting hole prize balls P ₂ ): 3
Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the first prize opening 32a (number of first prize opening balls P _N1 ): 10
Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the second prize opening 32b (number of second prize opening balls P _N2 ): 10
Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the third prize opening 32c (number of third prize opening balls P _N3 ): 10
Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the big prize opening 36a (number of big prize opening balls P _S ): 15

The main MPU 62 determines the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters each ball entrance by referencing the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage area of the main ROM 63.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63 is sent to the game history management chip 300 during the initial setup process executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. This allows the game history management chip 300 to grasp the prize ball count data set in this pachinko machine 10.

The calculation execution condition memory area stores calculation execution conditions that are the conditions under which the gaming history management chip 300 starts calculations to calculate gaming history information. In this embodiment, the calculation execution condition stored is that the number of gaming balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500. The calculation execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are sent to the gaming history management chip 300 during the initial setup process that is executed after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. This allows the gaming history management chip 300 to grasp the calculation execution conditions that have been set for this pachinko machine 10.

The gaming history management chip 300 is a semiconductor chip that calculates various gaming history information based on the information on gaming balls entering each entrance and stores the calculated gaming history information. The gaming history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires information on gaming balls entering each entrance from the CPU 62x, a register 304 that stores the number of gaming balls that have entered each entrance, a prize ball number data memory 306 that stores prize ball number data acquired from the main ROM 63, a calculation execution condition memory 307 that stores calculation execution conditions acquired from the main ROM 63, a CPU 308 that controls the entire gaming history management chip 300 and calculates gaming history information based on the number of gaming balls that have entered each entrance and the number of prize balls set for each entrance when the calculation execution condition is met, and a calculation result memory 309 that stores the calculated gaming history information.

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65.

The inspection machine 320 is equipped with a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is memory for temporarily storing various data, a display unit 328 that displays the game history information received from the game history management chip 300, and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 11 is an explanatory diagram that shows a schematic diagram of the processing performed by the gaming history management chip 300 and the inspection machine 320.

Buffer 302 is located between CPU 62x of the main MPU 62 and register 304, and acquires ball entry information for each ball entry port from CPU 62x. Specifically, buffer 302 has multiple bits corresponding to each ball entry port, and CPU 62x turns ON ("1") the bit corresponding to the ball entry port where it determines that a game ball has entered. For example, when CPU 62x determines that a game ball has entered first starting port 33, it turns ON ("1") the bit in buffer 302 corresponding to first starting port 33.

The buffer 302 also has bits for determining the game mode and the state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as the game state) when a game ball enters each entry port. In this embodiment, the buffer 302 has bits for determining whether the machine is in normal mode (a mode that is not in high probability mode, high frequency support mode, or open/close execution mode), bits for determining whether the machine is in high probability mode, bits for determining whether the machine is in high frequency support mode, bits for determining whether the machine is in open/close execution mode, bits for determining whether the first reserved number is at its upper limit, bits for determining whether the second reserved number is at its upper limit, bits for determining whether the front door frame 14 is open, and bits for determining whether the pachinko machine 10 is experiencing an error such as a malfunction. For example, if the CPU 62x determines that the machine is in normal mode when a game ball enters the first start port 33, it turns ON ("1") the bit in the buffer 302 for determining whether the machine is in normal mode.

Register 304 stores the number of game balls that have entered each entrance. Specifically, register 304 is composed of multiple counters corresponding to each entrance, and when it is determined that a bit in buffer 302 contains ball entry information (i.e., the bit is ON), 1 is added to the counter value corresponding to the bit determined to contain ball entry information. In this embodiment, register 304 is composed of a non-volatile register that can retain its memory even when the power supply is cut off.

In this embodiment, the register 304 stores the following values by means of counters corresponding to the respective entrances.
Number of game balls entering the large prize opening 36a = Number of balls entering the large prize opening N _S
Number of game balls entering the first starting hole 33 = Number of balls entering the first starting hole N ₁
Number of game balls entering the second starting hole 34 = Number of balls entering the second starting hole N ₂
Number of game balls entering the first winning opening 32a = Number of balls entering the first winning opening N _N1
Number of game balls entering the second winning opening 32b = Number of balls entering the second winning opening N _N2
Number of game balls entering the third winning opening 32c = Number of balls entering the third winning opening N _N3
Number of game balls that passed through the through gate 35 = Number of balls that passed through the through gate _NG
Number of game balls passing through the discharge passage = Number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT
As described above, the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage is equal to the number of game balls shot onto the game board 30 .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the register 304 stores the number of game balls that have entered each ball entrance for each game state.
The number of game balls that entered each entrance during normal mode. The number of game balls that entered each entrance during high probability mode. The number of game balls that entered each entrance during high frequency support mode. The number of game balls that entered each entrance during open/close execution mode. The number of game balls that entered the first start opening 33 during normal mode and while the first reserved number is at the upper limit. The number of game balls that entered the second start opening 34 during normal mode and while the second reserved number is at the upper limit. The number of game balls that entered each entrance while the front door frame 14 is open. The number of game balls that entered each entrance during an error.

For example, if it is determined that the bit corresponding to the first start port 33 in the buffer 302 contains ball entry information (the bit is ON), and if it is determined that the bit that determines whether or not normal mode is in effect contains information (the bit is ON), then 1 is added to the value of the first start port ball entry counter, which is a counter that stores the number of game balls that have entered the first start port 33, and 1 is added to the value of the first start port ball entry counter during normal mode, which is a counter that stores the number of game balls that have entered the first start port 33 during normal mode.

The prize ball count data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing the prize ball count data set in the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306. Therefore, the content of the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 is the same as the content of the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63.

The calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is a memory for storing calculation execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10. As described above, the calculation execution conditions are conditions for starting calculations to calculate game history information. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the calculation to calculate game history information is set to start each time the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the calculation execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted by the CPU 62x to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307. Therefore, the content of the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is the same as the content of the calculation execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63. Note that the number of game balls that have passed through or entered a place other than the discharge passage may be stored as the criterion for the calculation execution condition, or a number other than 500 may be stored as the criterion.

The CPU 308 determines whether or not the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 are met, and if it determines that the calculation execution conditions are met, calculates various pieces of game history information based on the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 and the number of game balls that have entered each entrance stored in the register 304. In this embodiment, the CPU 308 calculates the following values as game history information each time the value of the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT stored in the register 304 reaches 500:

・Ratio of prize balls = Number of prize balls paid out by the operation of the prize balls (number of prize balls) / Total number of prize balls paid out (total number of prize balls)
=(N ₂ ×P ₂ +N _S ×P _S )/(N _N1 ×P _N1 +N _N2 ×P _N2 +N _N3 ×P _N3 +N ₁ ×P ₁ +N ₂ ×P ₂ +N _S ×P _S )
・Continuous feature ratio = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by continuous feature operation (Number of consecutive feature prize balls) / Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (Total number of prize balls)
=(N _S ×P _S )/(N _N1 ×P _N1 +N _N2 ×P _N2 +N _N3 ×P _N3 +N ₁ ×P ₁ +N ₂ ×P ₂ +N _S ×P _S )
・Ball payout rate (total)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls) / Number of game balls shot onto the game board 30 = (N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3 + N ₁ × P ₁ + N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S ) / N _OUT

The above values are calculated based on the following criteria.
・The number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of the device (number of prize balls)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of the electric device 34a as a normal electric device and the variable winning device 36 as a special electric device = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the second starting hole 34 and the large winning hole 36a = N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S
・The number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of consecutive devices (number of consecutive device prize balls)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of the variable winning device 36 as a special electric device = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the large winning opening 36a = N _S × P _S
The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering the first to third winning slots 32a to 32c = N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3
- Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first to third prize openings 32a to 32c, the first start opening 33, the second start opening 34, and the large prize opening 36a = N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3 + N ₁ × P ₁ + N _{2 × P 2 +} N _S × P _S

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the following game history information is calculated based on the number of game balls that enter each entrance counted for each game state.

・Payout ratio (in normal mode)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first starting port 33 during normal mode / Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first starting port 33 during normal mode + Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first to third winning ports 32a to 32c during normal mode / Payout rate (during normal mode)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during normal mode / Number of game balls fired onto the game board 30 during normal mode / Payout rate (during high frequency support mode)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during the high frequency support mode / Number of game balls fired onto the game board 30 during the high frequency support mode BY (during normal mode)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first to third prize openings 32a to 32c during normal mode + Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first start opening 33 during the period in normal mode when the first reserved number is at the upper limit + Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the second start opening 34 during the period in normal mode when the second reserved number is at the upper limit / Number of game balls shot onto the game board 30 during normal mode · BY _MIN (during normal mode)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first to third winning slots 32a to 32c during normal mode / Number of game balls fired onto the game board 30 during normal mode. Ball entry rate while front door frame is open = Number of game balls that entered each winning slot while the front door frame 14 was open / Number of game balls fired onto the game board 30. Ball entry rate during error = Number of game balls that entered each winning slot during an error / Number of game balls fired onto the game board 30. Note that the above game history information is an example, and other game history information may also be calculated.

After calculating the various pieces of gaming history information described above, the CPU 308 stores the calculated pieces of gaming history information in the calculation result storage memory 309 and resets the values of each counter in the register 304 to "0." Note that, hereinafter, the various pieces of gaming history information calculated each time 500 gaming balls are launched onto the gaming board 30 will be collectively referred to as the "short-term gaming history information group."

Calculation result storage memory 309 is a memory that stores the game history information calculated by CPU 308, and in this embodiment is configured as non-volatile memory that can retain its memory even when power is cut off. Calculation result storage memory 309 also stores information regarding the order in which the short-term game history information groups were written. If there is no free area to write the calculated short-term game history information group, CPU 308 stores the calculated short-term game history information group in the area where the short-term game history information group with the oldest written order is stored. In other words, calculation result storage memory 309 is configured to overwrite the short-term game history information group in order, starting with the oldest (first-in, first-out method), and always stores the most recent short-term game history information group.

In this embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 has a capacity capable of storing 1,200 sets of short-term gaming history information calculated every time 500 gaming balls are launched onto the gaming board 30. For example, if gaming balls are launched for 10 consecutive hours in one day, 60,000 gaming balls will be launched in one day, and 120 sets of short-term gaming history information will be stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 per day. Therefore, the calculation result storage memory 309 is capable of storing sets of short-term gaming history information for the most recent 10 days.

When the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 has been connected to the inspection terminal 65, it sends a transmission request command to the gaming history management chip 300 requesting the transmission of gaming history information. When the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, it transmits the gaming history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. As a result, the inspection machine 320 acquires the gaming history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 and displays the acquired gaming history information on the display unit 328.

In this way, in this embodiment, every time the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500, i.e., every time 500 game balls are launched onto the game board 30, game history information such as the combination ratio is calculated and stored in the calculation result storage memory 309. The calculated game history information is then displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320.

A3. Details of various processes executed in the gaming machine:
Next, we will explain each process executed by the MPU 62 (CPU 62x in this embodiment). The processes executed by the MPU 62 are roughly divided into main processes that are started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processes that are started periodically (every 4 msec in this embodiment).

First, we will explain the main processing with reference to the flowchart in Figure 12.

Figure 12 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main MPU 62. In step S10101, an initial setting process is executed. Specifically, the initial settings of each control device upon power-on and the validity of data stored in RAM 64 are executed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the initial setting process executes a process to transmit calculation data to the gaming history management chip 300. Specifically, the calculation data (prize ball count data and calculation execution conditions) stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the gaming history management chip 300. As described below, upon receiving the calculation data, the gaming history management chip 300 stores the prize ball count data and calculation execution conditions in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 and the calculation execution condition storage memory 307, respectively, and transmits a setting completion command to the main MPU 62 indicating that storage is complete. After executing step S10101, the process proceeds to step S10102.

In step S10102, it is determined whether a setting completion command has been received. If it is determined in step S10102 that a setting completion command has been received (S10102: YES), the process proceeds to step S10103, where interrupt permission is set to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10102 that a setting completion command has not been received (S10102: NO), the process of step S10102 is executed again. In other words, until a setting completion command is received, the process does not proceed to step S10103, and interrupt permission is not set to allow timer interrupt processing to occur.

After executing step S10103, the remaining processing of steps S10104 to S10107 proceeds. In other words, the main MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing as described below, but there will be remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time will vary depending on the completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but this irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining processing of steps S10104 to S10107. In this respect, the remaining processing of steps S10104 to S10107 can be said to be non-periodic processing that is executed irregularly.

In the remaining processing, first, in step S10104, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S10105, random number initial value update processing is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S10106, fluctuation counter update processing is executed to update the fluctuation type counter CS. These update processing executes a process of reading the current numerical information from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 64, incrementing the read numerical information by 1, and then overwriting the counter from which it was read. In this case, when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Then, in step S10107, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing the processing in step S10107, the process returns to step S10104, and the processing in steps S10104 to S10107 is repeated.

Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x in this embodiment).

Figure 13 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 62. This timer interrupt process is initiated at a specific interval (4 msec intervals in this embodiment).

The timer interrupt process first executes a lottery random number update process in step S10201. The lottery random number update process updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric feature release counter C4. Specifically, the current numerical information is read sequentially from the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric feature release counter C4, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, after which it is overwritten onto the counter from which it was read. In this case, when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S10202.

In step S10202, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in the random number initial value update process, and then the process proceeds to step S10203, where the fluctuation type counter CS is updated in the fluctuation type counter update process. Then the process proceeds to step S10204.

In step S10204, port output processing is executed. In port output processing, if output information was set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to provide output corresponding to that output information to the various drive units 36c, 34b. For example, if information is set to switch the large prize opening 36a to an open state, output of a drive signal to the variable prize opening drive unit 36c is initiated, and if information is set to switch it to a closed state, output of the drive signal is stopped. Furthermore, if information is set to switch the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 to an open state, output of a drive signal to the electric device drive unit 34b is initiated, and if information is set to switch it to a closed state, output of the drive signal is stopped. Then, proceed to step S10205.

In step S10205, a read process is performed. During the read process, signals other than the ball-entering signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S10206.

In step S10206, the signals received from each goal detection sensor 44a-44h are read, and a goal detection process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the read information. The details of this goal detection process will be explained in detail later. Then, proceed to step S10207.

In step S10207, the ball entry detection information is output to a bit in the buffer 302 of the game history management chip 300. Specifically, the bit corresponding to the ball entry port determined to have received the game ball in the ball entry detection process in step S10206 is turned ON ("1"), and the bit corresponding to the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON ("1"). Then, the process proceeds to step S10208.

In step S10208, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of a specified timer counter stored in the main RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S10209, where the output setting process for the prize ball command is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S10210.

In step S10210, a ball entry process for the start port is executed in response to a game ball entering the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. In the ball entry process for the start port, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 are obtained based on the determination that a game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the obtained counter values are stored in the pending information storage area 64b of RAM 64. After executing step S10210, the process proceeds to step S10211.

In step S10211, a through gate ball entry process is executed in response to a gaming ball entering (passing through) the through gate 35. In the through gate ball entry process, the value of the variable type counter CS is obtained based on the determination that a gaming ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35, and the obtained counter value is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of RAM 64. After executing step S10211, the process proceeds to step S10212.

In step S10212, a game round control process is executed to control the game for each game round. The game round control process includes the jackpot lottery and display control of the first and second symbol display units 37a and 37b. After executing step S10212, the process proceeds to step S10213.

In step S10213, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. The game state transition process executes a process to transition the game state to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, etc. After executing step S10213, the process proceeds to step S10214.

In step S10214, an electric role support process is executed to control the electric role device 34a. In the electric role support process, a determination is made as to whether or not the electric role device 34a should be opened (an electric role device opening lottery), and if it is determined that the electric role device 34a should be opened, the electric role device 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step S10214, the process proceeds to step S10215.

In step S10215, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a process is executed to launch a game ball into the game area PA when the player operates the operating handle 25. After executing step S10215, the process proceeds to step S10216.

In step S10216, external information setting processing is executed to control the start and end of external signal output according to the results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt processing. After step S10216 is executed, this timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, we will explain the goal detection process executed in step S10206 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 13).

The ball entry detection process involves checking the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 44a-44h. This check involves checking the input port 62b of the input/output ports 62a of the main MPU 62. Before explaining the ball entry detection process, we will explain the configuration of the input port 62b provided on the main MPU 62 with reference to Figure 14.

Figure 14 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the input port 62b provided on the main MPU 62. The input port 62b is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can handle eight types of signals simultaneously. An area storing information of "0" or "1" depending on the voltage of each signal is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. In other words, these areas include the 0th bit D0 through the 7th bit D7.

In addition, although more than eight types of signals are input to input port 62b, in order to limit the number of signals input simultaneously to eight, the group of signals to be input to input port 62b is switched through switching control by the driver IC. During the ball entry detection process, the group of signals to be input to input port 62b is set for each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h.

When this setting is made, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the large prize entry opening detection sensor 44a, the first bit D1 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the first start opening detection sensor 44b, the second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the second start opening detection sensor 44c, the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the first prize entry opening detection sensor 44d, the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the second prize entry opening detection sensor 44e, the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the third prize entry opening detection sensor 44f, the sixth bit D6 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the through gate detection sensor 44g, and the seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the discharge passage detection sensor 44h.

In this case, when each of the ball entry detection sensors 44a-44h does not detect the passage of a game ball, it outputs a HIGH level signal indicating that it is not currently detecting the ball entry signal. When it detects the passage of a game ball, it outputs a LOW level signal indicating that it is currently detecting the ball entry signal. However, the main control board 151 is provided with an inversion circuit, which inverts the signal state before each of the detection signals is input to input port 62b. When input port 62b receives a LOW level signal through the inversion circuit, it stores "0" information (data 0 or absence information) in the corresponding bit, and when it receives a HIGH level signal through the inversion circuit, it stores "1" information (data 1 or presence information) in the corresponding bit.

In other words, when the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h do not detect the passage of a game ball, the corresponding bit stores "0," which indicates that no detection is in progress, and when the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h detect the passage of a game ball, the corresponding bit stores "1," which indicates that detection is in progress.

In addition, each ball entry detection sensor 44a-44h may be configured to output a LOW level signal as a ball entry signal while not detecting the passage of a game ball, and to output a HI level signal as a ball entry signal while detecting the passage of a game ball. In this case, the above-mentioned inversion circuit may be omitted.

Figure 15 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the scoring detection process executed by the main MPU 62. Figure 15(a) is a flowchart illustrating the scoring detection process executed by the main MPU 62. Figure 15(b) is an explanatory diagram schematically illustrating the scoring determination area used in the scoring detection process. In the scoring detection process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 15(a), first, in step S10301, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 is transferred to the first scoring determination area WA1 in the register of the main MPU 62. The first scoring determination area WA1 is composed of 8 bits as shown in Figure 15(b-1), and has a data capacity sufficient to store all of the information stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. In this case, the storage source bits in bits 0 to 7, D0 to D7, and the storage destination bits in the first scoring area WA1 are predetermined in a one-to-one correspondence; for example, the information in bit 0, D0, is always stored in a specified bit in the first scoring area WA1.

Then, in step S10302, a wait process for ball entry detection is executed. During this wait process, the main MPU 62 waits without executing any processing until a predetermined wait time has elapsed. In this pachinko machine 10, this wait time is set to 10 μsec. However, the specific wait time can be any value as long as it does not interfere with the execution of periodic timer interrupt processing and can fully achieve the effects of setting this wait process, described below. However, a range of 2 μsec to 500 μsec is preferable, and a range of 10 μsec to 100 μsec is more preferable.

By the way, it takes at least 1.2 μsec to execute one step of processing. Therefore, even if step S10302 is not set, a forced wait time of 1.2 μsec occurs between step S10301 and step S10303. In this regard, step S10302 not only sets the minimum time required to execute the process, but also sets an additional wait time between the processing of step S10301 and the processing of step S10303.

In the following step S10303, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 is transferred to the second ball entry determination area WA2 in the register of the main MPU 62. Incidentally, since the information in the input port 62b is updated at intervals shorter than the time between the completion of step S10301 and the start of step S10303, the information transferred from the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 in step S10303 may be different from that in step S10301.

Like the first scoring area WA1, the second scoring area WA2 is composed of 8 bits as shown in Figure 15 (b-2), and has a data capacity large enough to store all of the information stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. In this case, the source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the destination bits in the second scoring area WA2 are predetermined in a one-to-one correspondence, and the relationship between the source bits and destination bits is the same as in the first scoring area WA1.

Then, in step S10304, the goal determination process is executed, and the goal detection process ends. This goal determination process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 16.

Figure 16 is a flowchart showing the ball entry determination process executed by the main MPU 62. In the ball entry determination process, first, in step S10401, the ball entry determination counter stored in the main RAM 64 is set to 8. The numerical information of the ball entry determination counter corresponds to the bits of each of the eight ball entry ports. Specifically, in this embodiment, the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter, "8," corresponds to the 0th bit D0 of the large prize entry port 36a; "7," corresponds to the 1st bit D1 of the first starting port 33; "6," corresponds to the 2nd bit D2 of the second starting port 34; "5," corresponds to the 3rd bit D3 of the first prize entry port 32a; "4," corresponds to the 4th bit D4 of the second prize entry port 32b; "3," corresponds to the 5th bit D5 of the third prize entry port 32c; "2," corresponds to the 6th bit D6 of the through gate 35; and "1," corresponds to the 7th bit D7 of the discharge passage. In the following step S10402, the information of the bits corresponding to the current numerical information of the goal determination counter in the first goal determination area WA1 and the second goal determination area WA2 is obtained. The information obtained in this case is information read from the same bit in input port 62b.

In the following step S10403, an AND operation is performed on each piece of information obtained in step S10402, and the result of the AND operation is stored in a register. In step S10404, the result of the AND operation is stored in the corresponding bit of the first post-computation area WA3 or the second post-computation area WA4, which corresponds to the side of the area that differs from the side where the information resulting from the AND operation in the previous timer interrupt processing was stored. As shown in Figures 15(b-3) and 15(b-4), the first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4 are composed of 8 bits, and have a data capacity sufficient to store all of the information resulting from the AND operation between each bit of the first post-computation area WA1 and each bit of the second post-computation area WA2. In this case, the order of the bits in the first post-computation area WA1 and the second post-computation area WA2 that were subject to the AND operation is uniquely determined from the order of the bits in the first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4.

Then, in step S10405, the information of the bit corresponding to the current numerical information of the goal determination counter is read from either the first post-calculation area WA3 or the second post-calculation area WA4, which is the side where the information resulting from the AND process in the goal determination process in the previous timer interrupt process was stored. Then, in step S10406, an inversion process is performed to invert the read information between "0" and "1".

Then, in step S10407, an AND operation is performed on the information resulting from the AND operation in step S10403 and the information resulting from the inversion operation in step S10406, and in the following step S10408, it is determined whether the result of the AND operation is "1", which corresponds to the ball entry detection start information. If it is determined in step S10408 that the result of the AND operation is "1", processing proceeds to step S10409 and subsequent steps.

In step S10409, it is determined whether the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter indicates a bit corresponding to either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. If it corresponds to either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, in step S10410, the start port ball entry flag stored in the main RAM 64 is set to "1", and in step S10411, the numerical information of the three prize ball counter stored in the main RAM 64 is incremented by 1.

The start hole entry flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 62 to identify the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, and to identify a state in which processing corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, other than the execution of a prize ball, should be performed. Incidentally, because the first start hole 33 and the second start hole 34 are each provided with ball entry detection sensors 44b, 44c, it is possible for a ball entry into the first start hole 33 and a ball entry into the second start hole 34 to be detected simultaneously within a single timer interrupt process. Therefore, to accommodate this, start hole entry flags are provided corresponding to the number of start holes 33, 34; specifically, two start hole entry flags are provided. The three prize ball counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 62 to identify the number of times a three prize ball command, which instructs the execution of three prize balls, should be output.

If a negative judgment is made in step S10409, step S10412 determines whether the numerical information of the current ball entry judgment counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the large prize opening 36a (variable prize opening device 36). If it corresponds to the variable prize opening 36, step S10413 sets the large prize opening ball entry flag stored in the main RAM 64 to "1", and step S10414 adds 1 to the numerical information of the 15 prize ball counter stored in the main RAM 64.

The large prize entry ball flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 62 to identify the entry of a game ball into the variable prize entry device 36, and is a flag that allows the main MPU 62 to identify a state in which processing corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the variable prize entry device 36, other than the execution of a prize ball, should be executed. The 15 prize ball counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 62 to identify the number of times a 15 prize ball command, which instructs the execution of 15 prize balls, should be output.

If a negative judgment is made in step S10412, step S10415 determines whether the numerical information of the current ball entry judgment counter indicates a bit corresponding to through gate 35. If it corresponds to through gate 35, step S10416 sets the through passage flag provided in main RAM 64 to "1".

The through-passing flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 62 to identify that a gaming ball has passed through the through gate 35, and also to identify that the main MPU 62 is in a state where processing corresponding to the gaming ball entering the through gate 35 should be executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S10415, step S10417 determines whether the numerical information of the current winning ball judgment counter indicates a bit corresponding to any of the first winning slot 32a, second winning slot 32b, and third winning slot 32c. If it corresponds to any of the first winning slot 32a, second winning slot 32b, and third winning slot 32c, step S10418 sets the general winning slot winning ball flag provided in the main RAM 64 to "1," and step S10419 increments the numerical information of the three prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 64 by 1.

The general prize slot ball entry flag is a flag used by the main MPU 62 to identify the entry of game balls into the first prize slot 32a, the second prize slot 32b, or the third prize slot 32c. Incidentally, because the first prize slot 32a, the second prize slot 32b, and the third prize slot 32c are each equipped with ball entry detection sensors 44d, 44e, and 44f, it is possible for ball entries into the first prize slot 32a, the second prize slot 32b, and the third prize slot to be detected simultaneously within a single timer interrupt process. Therefore, to accommodate this, general prize slot ball entry flags are provided corresponding to the number of general prize slots 32a, 32b, and 32c; specifically, three flags are provided. The 10-prize ball counter is a counter used by the main MPU 62 to identify the number of times a three-prize ball command, which commands the execution of 10 prize balls, should be output.

If a negative judgment is made in step S10417, this means that the ball entered this time corresponds to the discharge passage, so in step SAD20, the discharge passage passage flag stored in the main RAM 64 is set to "1". The discharge passage passage flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 62 to identify that the game ball has passed through the discharge passage.

If a negative judgment is made in step S10408, or after executing any of the processes in steps S10411, S10414, S10416, S10419, and S10420, the process proceeds to step S10421. In step S10421, the goal determination counter is decremented by 1, and then in step S10422, it is determined whether the goal determination counter is "0".

If the goal determination counter is not "0", steps S10402 to S10420 are executed for the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the goal determination counter updated in step S10421. If steps S10402 to S10420 have been executed for the number of times the numerical information set in step S10401 has been set, a positive determination is made in step S10422, and the goal determination process ends.

Next, with reference to Figure 17, we will explain how the ball entry detection process (Figure 15) is executed to detect whether or not a ball has entered the general entry port 32, variable entry device 36, first start port 33, second start port 34, through gate 35, and discharge passage.

Figure 17 is an explanatory diagram that explains how the presence or absence of a goal is detected. First, with reference to Figure 17(A), the timing for monitoring the detection results (hereinafter also referred to as goal information) from goal detection sensors 44a to 44h will be explained. Figure 17(A) is a timing chart that explains the timing for monitoring each goal information item.

As shown in Figure 17 (A), in a configuration in which the timer interrupt process (Figure 13) is initiated at a cycle of T1 (specifically, 4 msec), the process of monitoring the goal scoring information is performed twice (steps S10301 and S10303) during each timer interrupt process. The process of monitoring each set of goal scoring information is performed at different times, but the process of monitoring the goal scoring information for the first side (step S10301) is performed when a time T2 has elapsed since the timer interrupt process was initiated.

In this case, the timing at which the ball entry detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process is before processes whose processing times are prone to fluctuate, such as the game round control process and the electric support process, and furthermore, the processes executed in the timer interrupt process before the ball entry detection process are processes whose processing times are relatively less likely to fluctuate. Therefore, the period until the process of monitoring the first ball entry information in each processing round of the timer interrupt process begins is the same, approximately the same, or similar at T2. Therefore, of the processes that monitor a set of ball entry information included in each processing round of the timer interrupt process, the process of monitoring the first ball entry information is executed periodically.

Furthermore, among the processes for monitoring each set of scoring information, a wait process for scoring detection (step S10302) is executed between the process for monitoring the leading scoring information (step S10301) and the process for monitoring the trailing scoring information (step S10303). However, this wait process simply waits until a certain wait time T3 has elapsed without executing any processing. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of scoring information included in each processing session of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the trailing scoring information is executed periodically.

Next, with reference to Figure 17(B), we will explain the calculations performed when a goal determination is made. Figure 17(B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the calculations performed when a goal determination is made. Note that while various calculations are actually performed in units of one bit, the following explanation will explain the calculations in units of one byte. However, a configuration in which calculations are actually performed in units of one byte as described below may also be used.

In the case of Figure 17 (B), first, in the process of monitoring the ball entry information from the first side during the nth timer interrupt process, "00100000" is set in the first ball entry determination area WA1, as shown in Figure 17 (B1). In this case, the ball entry information from the third winning hole detection sensor 44f of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h indicates that a game ball has been detected (hereinafter also referred to as "ball entry information"), and the ball entry information from the other sensors indicates that a game ball has not been detected (hereinafter also referred to as "no ball entry information").

Furthermore, in the process of monitoring the subsequent ball entry information in the nth timer interrupt process, as shown in Figure 17 (B2), "10100000" is set in the second ball entry determination area WA2. In this case, of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h and the third winning opening detection sensor 44f each indicate ball entry information, while the other sensors indicate no ball entry information.

When the information in the first goal scoring determination area WA1 and the second goal scoring determination area WA2 is set as described above, the result of the AND operation will be "00100000," as shown in Figure 17 (B3), and this information will be set in the first post-calculation area WA3 as the goal scoring information monitoring result in the nth timer interrupt processing. Note that if the goal scoring information monitoring result in the n-1th timer interrupt processing is set in the first post-calculation area WA3, the goal scoring information monitoring result in the nth timer interrupt processing will be set in the second post-calculation area WA4. The goal scoring determination process is performed using the goal scoring information monitoring result in the n-1th time and the goal scoring information monitoring result in the nth time, but the details of this process will be omitted here.

Next, in the process of monitoring the ball entry information from the other side during the n+1th timer interrupt process, "10100110" is set in the first ball entry determination area WA1, as shown in Figure 17 (B4). In this case, of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the third winning hole detection sensor 44f, the second starting hole detection sensor 44c, and the first starting hole detection sensor 44b each indicate a ball entry, while the other sensors indicate a no-ball entry.

Furthermore, in the process of monitoring the subsequent ball entry information in the n+1th timer interrupt process, as shown in Figure 17 (B5), "10100010" is set in the second ball entry determination area WA2. In this case, of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the third winning hole detection sensor 44f, and the first starting hole detection sensor 44b each indicate a ball has entered, while the other sensors indicate a no-ball entry.

When the information in the first scoring determination area WA1 and the second scoring determination area WA2 is set as described above, the result of the AND operation is "10100010" as shown in Figure 17 (B6), and this information is set in the second post-calculation area WA4 as the result of monitoring the scoring information in the timer interrupt processing of the n+1th processing round.

Then, in the ball entry determination process (Figure 16) for the n+1th timer interrupt process, the results of the ball entry information monitoring for the nth timer interrupt process are first read from the first post-calculation area WA3, and an inversion process is performed on the read monitoring result information. This results in "11011111," as shown in Figure 17 (B7). The result of the inversion process is then ANDed with the results of the ball entry information monitoring for the n+1th timer interrupt process. This results in "10000010," as shown in Figure 17 (B8). In this case, the ball entry determination process determines that the discharge passage detection sensor 44h has detected a game ball entry, and also determines that the first start port detection sensor 44b has detected a game ball entry.

Also, as shown in Figure 17 (B4), in the process of monitoring the leading ball entry information during the n+1th timer interrupt process, the second start gate detection sensor 44c indicates that a ball has entered the game, but this is caused by electrical noise. In this case, even if a switch from no-ball entry information to ball entry information is confirmed, it is not immediately determined that a ball has entered the game; rather, it is determined that a ball has entered the game if the ball entry information is confirmed multiple times. Therefore, as shown in Figure 17 (B5), in the process of monitoring the trailing ball entry information during the n+1th timer interrupt process, the second start gate detection sensor 44c indicates that a ball has not entered the game, and the occurrence of electrical noise is not treated as a game ball entering the game.

In addition, the third winning hole detection sensor 44f indicates a ball has entered the game during both the process of monitoring one set of ball entry information during the nth timer interrupt process and the process of monitoring one set of ball entry information during the n+1th timer interrupt process. This indicates that the sensor is continuing to detect a game ball whose entry has already been detected. In this case, the occurrence of a ball is determined on the condition that the monitoring result of the ball entry information during the nth timer interrupt process is "0," so a single game ball entering the game is not treated as multiple balls entering the game.

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 44a-44h are monitored. If a ball entry corresponding to the awarding of a game ball occurs, the 3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, and 15 prize ball counter are incremented according to the location of the ball entry. If any of these counters is 1 or greater, a prize ball command is set in the prize ball command output setting process (step S10209) in the timer interrupt process (Figure 13), and the set prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 70. In this case, the prize ball command output setting is performed only once per processing of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, for example, even if the 15 prize ball counter is 2 or greater, only one 15 prize ball command is sent per processing. However, this is not limited to this, and a predetermined number of prize ball commands (e.g., two or three) may be sent per processing.

It is also possible that the 3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, and 15 prize ball counter are all equal to or greater than "1." In this case, the output of the prize ball command with the greater number of prize balls will take priority. In other words, the output of the 15 prize ball command will take priority over the output of the 10 prize ball command and the output of the 3 prize ball command, and the output of the 10 prize ball command will take priority over the output of the 3 prize ball command.

When the 15 prize ball counter is "1" or greater and a 15 prize ball command is set as the output target, the 15 prize ball counter is decremented by 1. Also, when the 10 prize ball counter is "1" or greater and a 10 prize ball command is set as the output target, the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1. Also, when the 3 prize ball counter is "1" or greater and a 3 prize ball command is set as the output target, the 3 prize ball counter is decremented by 1.

Next, we will explain the processing executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300. In this embodiment, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes the following main processing when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

Figure 18 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300.

In step S10501, it is determined whether calculation data including prize ball count data and calculation execution conditions has been received. If it is determined in step S10501 that calculation data has been received (S10501: YES), the process proceeds to step S10502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10501 that calculation data has not been received (S10501: NO), the process of step S10501 is executed again. In other words, the process continues in an infinite loop without proceeding to the next step S10502 until calculation data is received.

In step S10502, the received prize ball count data is stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306. Then, proceed to step S10503, where the received calculation execution conditions are stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307. Then, proceed to step S10504.

In step S10504, a setting completion command is sent to the main CPU 62x, indicating that storage of the prize ball count data in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 has been completed and storage of the calculation execution conditions in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 has been completed. Then, proceed to step S10505.

In step S10505, it is determined whether the bit in buffer 302 contains ball entry information received from the main CPU 62x (the bit has a "1" stored in it). If it is determined in step S10505 that the bit in buffer 302 contains ball entry information received from the main CPU 62x (S10505: YES), the process proceeds to step S10506, where 1 is added to the counter in the register corresponding to the bit in buffer 302. Specifically, for example, if the bit in buffer 302 corresponding to the first starting hole ball entry information is "1" and the bit corresponding to normal mode is "1", 1 is added to the counter in register 304 corresponding to the number of balls entering the special prize hole N _S , and 1 is added to the counter corresponding to the number of balls entering the special prize hole during normal mode. Then, the process proceeds to step S10507. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10505 that there is no ball entry information received from the main CPU 62x in the bit of the buffer 302 (S10505: NO), the process proceeds to step S10507 without executing step S10506.

In step S10507, it is determined whether or not the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 has been met. In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT stored in the register 304 is 500, i.e., whether or not the number of game balls launched onto the game board 30 has reached 500. In step S10507, if it is determined that the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 has been met (S10507: YES), the process proceeds to step S10508.

In step S10508, calculations are performed to calculate various game history information based on the prize ball count data stored in prize ball count data storage memory 306 and the number of game balls that have entered each entrance stored in register 304. Then, the process proceeds to step S10509, where the calculated various game history information is stored in calculation result storage memory 309. Then, the process proceeds to step S10510, where the number of game balls that have entered each entrance stored in register 304 is cleared to 0. Then, the process proceeds to step S10511.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10507 that the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 are not met (S10507: NO), the process proceeds to step S10511 without executing steps S10508 to S10510.

In step S10511, it is determined whether a transmission request command for game history information has been received from the inspection machine 320. If it is determined that a transmission request command has been received (S10511: YES), the process proceeds to step S10512, where the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320. The inspection machine 320 displays the received game history information on the display unit 328. After executing step S10512, the process returns to step S10505, and the processing from step S10505 onwards is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10511 that a transmission request command for game history information has not been received from the inspection machine 320 (S10511: NO), the process returns to step S10505 without executing the processing of step S10512, and the processing from step S10505 onwards is repeated.

As explained above, according to this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 can calculate game history information, which is information that correlates with the behavior of game balls in games that have been played. If the gaming machine has been illegally modified, the calculated game history information may be an unnatural value that differs from the expected value. Therefore, by checking the game history information, an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of games can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 includes a calculation result storage memory 309 that stores the calculated game history information in a non-volatile manner. Because the game history information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in a game that has been played, the game history information differs for each pachinko machine 10 and is unique to that pachinko machine 10. In other words, the game history information reflects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. According to this embodiment, the game history information that reflects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 of the game history management chip 300, which is stored inside the housing of the pachinko machine 10 main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected by obtaining the game history information from the pachinko machine 10 main body itself. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a gaming hall, information regarding the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be obtained by a hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, because pachinko machines 10 are circulated from one place to another, they may be left disconnected from a hall computer. In such cases, conventional pachinko machines 10 are unable to retain information regarding the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment stores game history information, which reflects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, in the calculation result memory 309 of the game history management chip 300 housed inside the housing of the pachinko machine 10. This allows game history information to be acquired from the pachinko machine 10 even when the pachinko machine 10 is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can always maintain a one-to-one association between the pachinko machine 10 and game history information, regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether installed in a gaming hall or in circulation), and can manage and inspect the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. This improves the soundness of gameplay.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 and the main CPU 62x are both mounted on the main MPU 62 and are configured to operate from the same power source. Therefore, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a gaming hall and the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 is calculated by a hall computer, even if a malfunction occurs in the power system of the hall computer or in the processing of the hall computer, the game history information can be calculated as long as power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. If the main CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated from different power sources, a malfunction in the power supply to the game history management chip 300 could result in a malfunction in which the game history information cannot be calculated even though a game is being played by the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the main CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated from the same power source, and therefore the game history information can be calculated as long as a game is playable. This improves the reliability of the game history information.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 is stored inside the board box, a space where traces of opening and closing (also known as traces of opening or unsealing) remain. Therefore, physical contact with the calculation result storage memory 309 leaves traces of the board box being opened. Therefore, if the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is altered through physical contact with the calculation result storage memory 309, it is possible to determine this alteration from the traces on the board box. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the game history information can be prevented. Pachinko machines 10 are often circulated, and therefore come into various external contact during distribution. However, since the calculation result storage memory 309 is stored inside the board box, where traces of opening and closing remain, unauthorized alteration of the game history information by someone can be prevented, even in a situation where pachinko machines 10 are circulated frequently. Furthermore, because the gaming history information is information acquired based on games that have been played, it is possible to use the gaming history information to manage and inspect the gaming characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, according to this embodiment, by preventing unauthorized alteration of the gaming history information that reflects the gaming characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 can be managed and inspected appropriately. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 acquires the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage area of the main ROM 63, thereby being able to calculate the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 regarding the prize balls paid out. Furthermore, even if different prize ball count data is set for each type (model) of pachinko machine 10, the game history management chip 300 can calculate correct game history information using the prize ball count data set for each type of pachinko machine 10. If the game machine has been illegally modified, the calculated game history information may be an unnatural value that differs from the expected value. Therefore, by confirming correct game history information, an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can appropriately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of gameplay can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the main CPU 62x sends a signal including the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage area of the main ROM 63 to the game history management chip 300. Therefore, even if the game history management chip 300 is configured in such a way that it cannot access the prize ball count data storage area of the main ROM 63, or in such a way that it cannot grasp the storage location (memory address) of the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage area of the main ROM 63, the game history management chip 300 can obtain the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage area of the main ROM 63.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the main processing of the master CPU 62x, the timer interrupt process is not permitted to be interrupted and the game ball launch control process included in the timer interrupt process is not executed until a setting completion command is received. In other words, game balls are not launched until the prize ball count data has been completely stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306, which prevents game balls from being omitted from the calculation of game history information by the game history management chip 300.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, game history information is calculated and stored for each period until 500 game balls are detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h. Therefore, even if there is variation in the time it takes for each pachinko machine 10 to detect 500 game balls, game history information that is not affected by that variation can be calculated and stored. In other words, even if there is a difference in the frequency at which game balls are fired, highly accurate game history information that is less affected by this can be calculated and stored. Furthermore, the required storage capacity can be reduced compared to a configuration in which ball entry information for each ball entry port is stored as is.

Different types (models) of pachinko machines 10 have different gameplay characteristics, and therefore the optimal conditions for executing calculations to calculate game history information also differ. For this reason, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of pachinko machine 10. According to this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, and can therefore execute calculations to calculate game history information when the calculation execution conditions set for each type (model) of pachinko machine 10 are met.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, after the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 performs calculations to calculate the game history information, it erases the number of game balls that have entered each entrance (counter value) stored in the register 304, making it possible to store information regarding the number of game balls that have entered the register 304 again. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the register 304.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the gaming history information of the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320, which enables the inspection machine 320 to display the gaming history information of the pachinko machine 10. The inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can then check the gaming history information displayed on the inspection machine 320.

A4. Other aspects of the first embodiment:
<Aspect 1>
In the first embodiment, the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 was set to 500 game balls detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h. However, the calculation execution condition may also be set to a time interval for executing the calculation. For example, the time interval for executing the calculation may be set to one hour, and the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 may calculate the game history information every hour. An inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check the detailed game history information calculated every hour and appropriately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, since different types (models) of pachinko machines 10 have different game characteristics, the optimal conditions (time intervals) for executing calculations to calculate game history information also differ. For this reason, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even in this aspect 1, the game history management chip 300 acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, and can execute calculations when the calculation execution conditions set for each type (model) of pachinko machine 10 are met.

The CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 may also be configured to measure the elapsed time since the calculation was performed and determine whether or not the player is playing, suspending measurement of the elapsed time during periods when it is determined that no play is being performed. Specifically, for example, if there is no ball-winning information in the bits of the buffer 302 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., three minutes), it may determine that no play is being performed and suspend measurement of the elapsed time, and if ball-winning information is confirmed in the bits of the buffer 302, it may determine that play has resumed and resume measurement of the elapsed time. With this configuration, gaming history information can be calculated only for periods when play is actually being performed.

The elapsed time may be measured using a timer counter, or by providing an RTC (Real-Time Clock) and using the RTC's date and time information. It may also be configured to calculate game history information at predetermined times.

<Aspect 2>
In the first embodiment, the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 was set to the number of game balls detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h reaching 500. However, the calculation execution condition may also be set to the detection of a power interruption. Specifically, when the power outage monitoring circuit 86 detects a power interruption, it outputs a signal indicating the occurrence of a power interruption to the game history management chip 300. Upon receiving this signal, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 determines that a power interruption has occurred and calculates game history information. In this configuration, the register 304 is composed of volatile memory, and the ball count information is erased. This configuration allows the game history information to be calculated based on the number of game balls detected during the period from when power was supplied to the pachinko machine 10 was first supplied to the pachinko machine 10 until the power interruption occurred. In other words, the game history information is calculated for each period from the opening to the closing of business hours of the game hall, meaning that the game history information is calculated for each business day of the game hall. Therefore, inspectors of the pachinko machine 10 can easily ascertain whether or not there has been a change in the characteristics of the game history information across the business days of the gaming hall, and can appropriately determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified, etc. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, by configuring the chip with a capacitor 87 that supplies power to the gaming history management chip 300 even after a power outage occurs, the CPU 308 can reliably complete the calculation of gaming history information and the storage of the gaming history information in the calculation result storage memory 309.

<Aspect 3>
In the first embodiment, the master CPU 62x may be configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309, and the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41. With this configuration, the game history information is displayed on the symbol display device 41 of the pachinko machine 10, allowing an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 to check the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 without using a dedicated device for checking the game history information (such as the inspection device 320). Note that it is preferable that the master CPU 62x be configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309 but not be able to change data, etc. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being destroyed or rewritten due to noise, program bugs, etc.

<Aspect 4>
In the first embodiment, the main CPU 62x may be configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309, and an LED lamp may be provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 (e.g., a predetermined location on the main display unit 45) to indicate that the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 does not satisfy a predetermined condition. For example, the LED lamp may be configured to illuminate when a specific value included in the game history information (e.g., a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, or a payout ratio (during normal mode)) falls outside a predetermined range. This configuration allows a pachinko machine inspector to easily identify a pachinko machine 10 in which a specific value included in the game history information falls outside the predetermined range. Furthermore, by checking the game history information of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved. In particular, if the nails near the first starting hole 33 or the general winning holes (the first to third winning holes 32a to 32c) have been tampered with, the payout ratio (in normal mode) will fall outside the predetermined range (e.g., 0.60 to 0.70) assumed when the pachinko machine was designed. Therefore, by configuring the LED lamp to light up when the payout ratio (in normal mode) is no longer within the predetermined range (e.g., 0.60 to 0.70), it is possible to properly determine whether the nails near the first starting hole 33 or the general winning holes (the first to third winning holes 32a to 32c) have been tampered with.

Furthermore, the light emission mode (color) of the LED lamp may be determined depending on the degree of deviation of a specific value included in the gaming history information (e.g., the combination ratio, consecutive combination ratio, or payout ratio (in normal mode)) from a predetermined range. For example, the first LED lamp may be configured to emit blue light when the combination ratio is within a predetermined range (0.70 or less), purple light when the combination ratio is 0.71 to 0.80, and red light when the combination ratio is 0.81 to 1.00. The second LED lamp may be configured to emit blue light when the consecutive combination ratio is within a predetermined range (0.60 or less), purple light when the combination ratio is 0.61 to 0.70, and red light when the combination ratio is 0.71 to 1.00. Alternatively, the third LED lamp may be configured to emit blue light when the payout ratio (in normal mode) is within a predetermined range (0.60 to 0.70), purple light when the payout ratio (in normal mode) is between 0.71 and 0.80, and red light when the payout ratio (in normal mode) is between 0.81 and 1.00. This configuration allows an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 to easily determine how much a specific value included in the game history information deviates from the predetermined range. Preferably, the main CPU 62x can access the calculation result storage memory 309 but cannot change data. This configuration prevents the game history information from being destroyed or overwritten due to noise, program bugs, or other factors.

<Aspect 5>
In the first embodiment, the calculation data (prize ball number data and calculation execution conditions) stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 during the initial setting process executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x), but the game history management chip 300 may be configured to be able to access the prize ball number data storage area and the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, and the game history management chip 300 may access the main ROM 63 immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to obtain the calculation data (prize ball number data and calculation execution conditions), and store the obtained calculation data in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 and the calculation execution condition storage memory 307. With such a configuration, the processing load on the main MPU 62 can be reduced.

<Aspect 6>
In the first embodiment, the gaming history management chip 300 is configured to calculate gaming history information such as the ratio of winning devices, but the number of winning balls per 500 balls stored in the register may be stored as is, and the inspection machine 320 may calculate the gaming history information. This configuration can reduce the processing load on the gaming history management chip 300. Details of aspect 6 will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

Figure 19 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 and the inspection device 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of aspect 6 of the first embodiment.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 has a prize ball count data storage area and a storage execution condition storage area.

As in the first embodiment above, the prize ball count data storage area stores the number of game balls (prize ball count data) that are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters each ball entrance. Also, as in the first embodiment above, the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63 is sent to the game history management chip 300 during the initial setup process that is executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. This allows the game history management chip 300 to grasp the prize ball count data that has been set in this pachinko machine 10.

The memory execution condition memory area stores memory execution conditions that are the conditions under which the game history management chip 300 executes the memory process described below. In this mode 6, the memory execution condition is stored as the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaching 500. This memory execution condition stored in the main ROM 63 is sent to the game history management chip 300 during the initial setup process that is executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. This allows the game history management chip 300 to grasp the memory execution conditions that have been set for this pachinko machine 10.

The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires game ball entry information for each entry port from the CPU 62x, a register 304 that stores the number of game balls that have entered each entry port, a prize ball number data memory 306 that stores prize ball number data acquired from the main ROM 63, a memory execution condition memory 307a that stores memory execution conditions acquired from the main ROM 63, a CPU 308 that controls the overall game history management chip 300, and a ball number memory 309a that sequentially stores the numbers of game balls that have entered each entry port stored in the register 304. The above-mentioned storage process is a process of storing the numbers of game balls that have entered each entry port stored in the register 304 in the ball number memory 309a.

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment 6, the number of winning balls information stored in the winning ball number storage memory 309a and the number of winning balls data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 are transmitted to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65.

The inspection machine 320 is equipped with a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is memory for temporarily storing various data, a display unit 328 that displays various information, and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10.

In this aspect 6, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 has been connected to the inspection terminal 65, it sends a transmission request command to the game playing history management chip 300 requesting the transmission of the number of balls entered and the number of prize balls data. When the CPU 308 of the game playing history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, it transmits the number of balls entered stored in the number of balls entered storage memory 309a and the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. The inspection machine 320 then calculates the game playing history information based on the received number of balls entered and the number of prize balls data, and displays the calculated game playing history information on the display unit 328.

Figure 20 is an explanatory diagram that schematically illustrates the processing details of the gaming history management chip 300 and the inspection machine 320 in aspect 6 of the first embodiment.

The processing performed by the buffer 302 and register 304 is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so a detailed description will be omitted.

The prize ball count data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing the prize ball count data set in the pachinko machine 10. In this mode 6, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306. Therefore, the content of the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 is the same as the content of the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63.

The memory execution condition storage memory 307a is a memory for storing the memory execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10. When the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the memory execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted by the CPU 62x to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the memory execution condition storage memory 307a. Therefore, the contents of the memory execution conditions stored in the memory execution condition storage memory 307a are the same as the contents of the memory execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63.

The CPU 308 determines whether the stored execution condition stored in the stored execution condition memory 307a is met, and if it determines that the stored execution condition is met, stores information regarding the number of game balls entering each entry port stored in the register 304 in the entry ball number memory 309a, and resets the value of each counter in the register 304 to "0." In this aspect 6, the CPU 308 stores information regarding the number of game balls entering each entry port stored in the register 304 in the entry ball number memory 309a each time the value of the number of game balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT stored in the register 304 reaches 500. Note that, hereinafter, information regarding the number of game balls entering each entry port counted while 500 game balls are launched onto the game board 30 is also referred to as a "short-term entry ball number information group."

Memory 309a for storing the number of scoring balls is a memory that sequentially stores information about the number of scoring balls stored in register 304 (short-term scoring ball information group). In this embodiment, it is configured as a non-volatile memory that can retain its memory even when the power supply is cut off. Memory 309a for storing the number of scoring balls also stores information about the order in which the short-term scoring ball information group was written. If there is no free area to write a short-term scoring ball information group, CPU 308 stores the short-term scoring ball information group in the area where the short-term scoring ball information group with the oldest written order is stored. In other words, memory 309a for storing the number of scoring balls is configured to overwrite the oldest short-term scoring ball information group in order (first-in, first-out method), so that the most recent short-term scoring ball information group is always stored.

In this aspect 6, the memory for storing the number of game balls 309a has a capacity capable of storing 1,200 sets of short-term game ball count information, which is information about the number of game balls that enter each game ball entry port counted while 500 game balls are launched onto the game board 30. For example, if game balls are launched for 10 consecutive hours in one day, 60,000 game balls will be launched in one day, and 120 sets of short-term game ball count information will be stored in the memory for storing the number of game balls 309a in one day. Therefore, the memory for storing the number of game balls 309a can store sets of short-term game ball count information for the most recent 10 days.

As described above, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 has been connected to the inspection terminal 65, it sends a transmission request command to the gaming history management chip 300. When the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, it transmits the short-term ball count information group and the prize ball count data to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. The inspection machine 320 then calculates gaming history information such as the ratio of special devices based on the short-term ball count information group and the prize ball count data, and displays the calculated gaming history information on the display unit 328.

Specifically, in this aspect 6, the inspection machine 320, like the CPU 308 in the first embodiment described above, is capable of calculating one short-term gaming history information group for one short-term ball entry count information group, and is also capable of adding up the number of game balls that have entered each entry port stored in each of multiple short-term ball entry count information groups and using this added number of game balls to calculate long-term gaming history information (long-term gaming history information group). In other words, the inspection machine 320 in this aspect 6 is capable of calculating not only short-term gaming history information groups based on the number of game balls that have entered each entry port over a short period in which 500 game balls have been launched, but also long-term gaming history information groups based on the number of game balls that have entered each entry port over a long period in which, for example, 600,000 game balls (approximately 10 days' worth) have been launched.

In addition, in this aspect 6, the following configuration may also be adopted.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured to display the received group of short-term ball entry count information on the display unit 328. The inspection machine 320 may also be configured to receive each counter value stored in the register 304 and display each received counter value on the display unit 328.

In addition, instead of a configuration in which the gaming history management chip 300 transmits the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320, a configuration in which the main CPU 62x transmits the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63 to the inspection machine 320 may be used. With this configuration, the prize ball count data storage memory 306 can be omitted, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the gaming history management chip 300.

Furthermore, the storage execution conditions stored in the storage execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 may be configured to set a time interval for executing the storage process. For example, one hour may be set as the time interval for executing the storage process, and the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 may be configured to execute the storage process every time one hour has passed.

Furthermore, the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 may be set to the detection of a power outage. Specifically, when the power outage monitoring circuit 86 detects a power outage, it outputs a signal indicating that a power outage has occurred to the gaming history management chip 300, and the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300, upon receiving the signal, determines that a power outage has occurred and executes storage processing.

In addition, in aspect 6, the calculations for calculating the gaming history information are performed by the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320, but some or all of the calculations may be performed by the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300, and the gaming history information resulting from the calculations may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

<Aspect 7>
In the first embodiment, the gaming history management chip 300 is configured to calculate gaming history information such as the ratio of winning combinations, but the configuration may also be such that the ball entry information is stored as is in the buffer, and the inspection machine 320 calculates gaming history information based on the ball entry information. This configuration reduces the processing load on the gaming history management chip 300. Details of aspect 7 will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

Figure 21 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 and the inspection device 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of aspect 7 of the first embodiment.

In this aspect 7, the main MPU 62 is equipped with an RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) that outputs date and time information to the gaming history management chip 300. The RTC 96 is equipped with a backup power supply, and can update the date and time information even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 has a prize ball count data storage area. Note that in this mode 7, there is no calculation start condition storage area.

As in the first embodiment above, the prize ball count data storage area stores the number of game balls (prize ball count data) that are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters each ball entrance. Also, as in the first embodiment above, the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63 is sent to the game history management chip 300 during the initial setup process that is executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. This allows the game history management chip 300 to grasp the prize ball count data that has been set in this pachinko machine 10.

The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires game ball entry information for each entry port from the CPU 62x, a prize ball count data storage memory 306 that stores prize ball count data acquired from the main ROM 63, a CPU 308 that controls the overall game history management chip 300, and an entry information storage memory 309b that sequentially stores game ball entry information for each entry port stored in the buffer 302.

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 to the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment 7, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the winning ball information stored in the winning ball information storage memory 309b and the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 are transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

The inspection machine 320 is equipped with a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is memory for temporarily storing various data, a display unit 328 that displays various information, and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10.

In this aspect 7, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 has been connected to the inspection terminal 65, it sends a transmission request command to the game playing history management chip 300 requesting the transmission of ball scoring information, etc. and prize ball count data. When the CPU 308 of the game playing history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, it transmits the ball scoring information, etc. stored in the ball scoring information storage memory 309b and the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. The inspection machine 320 then calculates game playing history information based on the received ball scoring information, etc. and prize ball count data, and displays the calculated game playing history information on the display unit 328.

Figure 22 is an explanatory diagram that shows a schematic overview of the processing performed by the gaming history management chip 300 and inspection machine 320 in aspect 7 of the first embodiment.

The processing performed in buffer 302 is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so further explanation will be omitted.

The goal information storage memory 309b sequentially stores goal information stored in the buffer 302 and information about the game status when the game ball entered the game. In this embodiment, it is configured with non-volatile memory that can retain its memory even when the power supply is cut off. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when goal information and information about the game status are stored, the date and time information when the game ball entered each goal opening is added and stored. The goal information storage memory 309b also stores information about the order in which goal information, etc. was written. If there is no free area to write goal information, etc., the CPU 308 stores the goal information, etc., in the area where the oldest goal information, etc., is stored. In other words, the goal information storage memory 309b is configured to overwrite the oldest goal information, etc., in order (first-in, first-out method), so that the most recent goal information, etc., is always stored.

The prize ball count data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing the prize ball count data set in the pachinko machine 10. In this aspect 7, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306. Therefore, the content of the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 is the same as the content of the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63. Furthermore, in this aspect 7, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection device 320.

As described above, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 has been connected to the inspection terminal 65, it sends a transmission request command to the game playing history management chip 300 requesting the transmission of ball entry information and prize ball count data. When the CPU 308 of the game playing history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, it transmits the ball entry information, game status information, and date and time information stored in the ball entry information storage memory 309b, as well as the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306, to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. The inspection machine 320 then calculates game playing history information based on the received information and displays the calculated game playing history information on the display unit 328.

Specifically, the inspection machine 320 of this aspect 7 is not only capable of calculating gaming history information (short-term gaming history information group) based on the number of balls that enter each entrance over a short period in which 500 gaming balls are shot, but is also capable of calculating gaming history information (long-term gaming history information group) based on the number of balls that enter each entrance over a long period in which, for example, 600,000 gaming balls (approximately 10 days' worth) are shot. In other words, it is possible to calculate gaming history information for any period of time.

Furthermore, in this aspect 7, since date and time information (year, month, day, and time information) is added to the ball entry information, etc., the inspection machine 320 can calculate the gaming history information by specifying a date and time range for which the gaming history information is to be calculated, within the range of the date and time information added to the received ball entry information, etc. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can perform a detailed inspection based on the gaming history information for which a date and time range is specified.

In addition, in this aspect 7, the following configuration may also be adopted.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured to display the received ball entry information, etc., on the display unit 328. With this configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can also ascertain the date and time when a game ball was detected by each ball entry detection sensor.

In addition, instead of a configuration in which the gaming history management chip 300 transmits the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320, a configuration in which the main CPU 62x transmits the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63 to the inspection machine 320 may be used. With this configuration, the prize ball count data storage memory 306 can be omitted, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the gaming history management chip 300.

In addition, in aspect 7, the calculations for calculating the gaming history information are performed by the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320, but it is also possible to have the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 perform some or all of the calculations, and transmit the gaming history information resulting from the calculations to the inspection machine 320.

<Aspect 8>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, the calculation execution conditions or storage execution conditions are stored in the main ROM 63, and the gaming history management chip 300 acquires these conditions from the main ROM 63. However, the gaming history management chip 300 may also be configured to initially store these conditions in non-volatile memory. This configuration prevents the occurrence of a situation in which inappropriate calculation execution conditions or storage execution conditions are stored in the main ROM 63, making it impossible to properly store gaming history information or scored ball count information. For example, this prevents the occurrence of a situation in which an extremely short period (e.g., the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT = 5) is stored as the calculation execution condition or storage execution condition, resulting in only an extremely short period (e.g., about one hour) of gaming history information or scored ball count information being stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 or scored ball count storage memory 309a.

<Aspect 9>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, the gaming history management chip 300 is configured to include functions for storing the number of gaming balls that have entered each entry port, calculating gaming history information such as the ratio of game devices, and storing the calculated gaming history information. However, the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the gaming history management chip 300) may also include some of these functions. Alternatively, the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the gaming history management chip 300) may include all of these functions without including the gaming history management chip 300. This configuration eliminates the need for a separate gaming history management chip 300, thereby reducing manufacturing costs. However, including the gaming history management chip 300 reduces the processing load on the main CPU 62x.

<Aspect 10>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, the gaming history management chip 300 may be configured to have some or all of the functions of a functional unit other than the gaming history management chip 300 (for example, the inspection machine 320 or the main CPU 62x), or some or all of the functions of the gaming history management chip 300 may be configured to be provided by a functional unit other than the gaming history management chip 300. For example, if the gaming history management chip 300 is configured to have some of the functions of the inspection machine 320, the processing load and manufacturing costs of the inspection machine 320 can be further reduced, and if the inspection machine 320 is configured to have some of the functions of the gaming history management chip 300, the processing load and manufacturing costs of the gaming history management chip 300 can be further reduced.

<Aspect 11>
In the first embodiment, the gaming history management chip 300 is configured to calculate gaming history information such as the ratio of winning combinations, but the main CPU 62x may calculate the gaming history information without providing the gaming history management chip 300. Details of mode 11 will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

Figure 23 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 11 of the first embodiment. This aspect 11 differs from the first embodiment (Figure 5) in that it does not include a game history management chip 300 and that the main RAM 64 includes a ball count storage area and a calculation result storage area.

The main CPU 62x updates the number of game balls entering each entrance stored in the entrance ball number storage area of the main RAM 64 based on the game ball entry information received from the input/output port 62a. Then, when the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 are met, it performs calculations based on the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 and the number of game balls entering each entrance stored in the entrance ball number storage area of the main RAM 64 to calculate game history information, and stores this game history information in the calculation result storage area of the main RAM 64. A detailed explanation is provided below.

24 is an explanatory diagram schematically illustrating an overview of the processing in the main MPU 62 in aspect 11 of the first embodiment. The main CPU 62x determines whether or not the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 is met, and if it determines that the calculation execution condition is met, stores information regarding the number of game balls that have entered each entrance, stored in the cache of the main CPU 62x, in the entering ball number storage area of the main RAM 64. In this aspect 11, the main CPU 62x stores information regarding the number of game balls that have entered each entrance, in the entering ball number storage area of the main RAM 64, every time the value of the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT stored in the cache of the main CPU 62x reaches 500. As mentioned above, the information regarding the number of game balls that enter each entry port counted while the 500 game balls are launched onto the game board 30 is also referred to as the "short-term entry number information group."

The number of scoring balls storage area of the main RAM 64 is an area that sequentially stores information about the number of scoring balls (short-term scoring ball number information group). The number of scoring balls storage area of the main RAM 64 also stores information about the order in which the short-term scoring ball number information group was written. If there is no free area to write a short-term scoring ball number information group, the main CPU 62x stores the newly written short-term scoring ball number information group in the area where the oldest written short-term scoring ball number information group is stored. In other words, the number of scoring balls storage area of the main RAM 64 is configured to overwrite the oldest short-term scoring ball number information group in order (first-in, first-out method), so that the most recent short-term scoring ball number information group is always stored.

In this aspect 11, the entering ball count storage area of the main RAM 64 has a capacity capable of storing 1,200 sets of short-term entering ball count information, which is information about the number of entering balls into each entry port counted while 500 game balls are launched onto the game board 30. For example, if game balls are launched for 10 consecutive hours in one day, 60,000 game balls will be launched in one day, and 120 sets of short-term entering ball count information will be stored in the entering ball count storage area of the main RAM 64 per day. Therefore, the entering ball count storage area of the main RAM 64 can store sets of short-term entering ball count information for the most recent 10 days.

The main CPU 62x then calculates a new set of short-term game history information for each newly stored set of short-term game ball count information each time the calculation execution conditions are met. Furthermore, the main CPU 62x adds up the number of game balls entering each entry port stored in each of the multiple short-term game ball count information groups, including the newly stored short-term game ball count information group, each time the calculation execution conditions are met, and uses this added number of game balls to calculate long-term game history information (long-term game history information group). In other words, the main CPU 62x in this aspect 11 can calculate not only a short-term game history information group based on the number of game balls entering each entry port over a short period in which 500 game balls were fired, but also a long-term game history information group based on the number of game balls entering each entry port over a long period in which, for example, 600,000 game balls (approximately 10 days' worth) were fired. The calculated game history information is then stored in the calculation result storage area of the main RAM 64.

The calculation result storage area of the main RAM 64 is composed of an area that sequentially stores short-term gaming history information groups and an area that stores long-term gaming history information groups. The area that sequentially stores short-term gaming history information groups also stores information regarding the order in which the short-term gaming history information groups were written. If there is no free area to write a short-term gaming history information group, the main CPU 62x stores the newly calculated short-term gaming history information group in the area that stores the short-term gaming history information group with the oldest written order. In other words, the area that sequentially stores short-term gaming history information groups of the main RAM 64 is configured to overwrite the oldest short-term gaming history information group first (first-in, first-out method), so that the most recent short-term gaming history information group is always stored. The area that stores the long-term gaming history information group is overwritten with a newly calculated long-term gaming history information group each time the calculation execution condition is met. In other words, the area that stores the long-term gaming history information group will store the latest long-term gaming history information group calculated based on multiple short-term ball scoring information groups, including the latest short-term ball scoring information group.

When the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 has been connected to the inspection terminal 65, it sends a transmission request command to the main CPU 62x. When the main CPU 62x receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, it transmits the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 to the inspection machine 320. The inspection machine 320 then displays the received game history information on the display unit 328.

In addition, in this aspect 11, when a predetermined operation is performed to display the game history information on the pattern display device 41, the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 is output to the audio and light control device 90 via the input/output port 62x and displayed on the pattern display device 41.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 11, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the backup power supplied from the capacitor 87 is configured to retain the short-term ball count information group and game history information stored in the main RAM 64 for several days.

With this configuration, the main CPU 62x, which is a single processing unit, executes processes for progressing the game, such as the jackpot lottery process, and processes for calculating and storing game history information. This eliminates the need for a dedicated game history management chip 300 for calculating and storing game history information, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, the main RAM 64 is configured to store a group of short-term ball entry information, which is information regarding the number of game balls that entered each entry port counted while 500 game balls were launched onto the game board 30.This makes it possible to calculate the most recent group of short-term game history information and long-term game history information while significantly reducing the memory capacity required for the main RAM 64, compared to a configuration in which game ball entry information is stored in its original format (for example, a configuration in which it is stored in the format of the game ball entry information stored in the game ball entry information storage memory 309b in Figure 22).

The main CPU 62x is not limited to being configured to calculate both short-term gaming history information and long-term gaming history information as gaming history information, but may be configured to calculate only one of these.

<Aspect 12>
25 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 12 of the first embodiment. The difference from the above-mentioned aspect 11 (FIG. 23) is that the main MPU 62 is provided with a flash memory 64x, which is a rewritable non-volatile memory that can retain its memory even when the power supply is cut off. This flash memory 64x is provided with a ball entry number storage area for storing the short-term ball entry number information group in the above-mentioned aspect 11, and a calculation result storage area for storing the short-term game history information group and the long-term game history information group in the above-mentioned aspect 11.

The main CPU 62x in this mode 12 is configured to store the short-term ball count information group and the calculated game history information in flash memory 64x each time the calculation execution conditions are met.

This configuration reduces the manufacturing costs of the pachinko machine 10 compared to a configuration that includes a game history management chip 300. Furthermore, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off for an extended period of time, the short-term ball entry count information group and game history information are retained. Therefore, no matter what state the pachinko machine 10 is in (for example, a distribution state where no power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 for an extended period of time), it is possible to always maintain a one-to-one link between the pachinko machine 10 and the game history information, and the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be managed and inspected.

In addition, since there is no need to provide an area in the main RAM 64 for storing the short-term ball entry number information group and game history information, the storage capacity of the main RAM 64 can be reduced, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the pachinko machine 10.

<Aspect 13>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, the main control device 60 may be configured to be able to switch between a game mode, which is a mode in which a game progress process, which is a process for progressing a game, can be executed, and an inspection mode, which is a mode in which game history information is output to the inspection machine 320. The game progress process is a process that is executed based on the detection of a game ball by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, and includes a jackpot lottery process, an electric role release lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a process for displaying a variable pattern on the main display unit 45, and a process for opening and closing the opening/closing door 36b and the electric role device 34a.

In addition, in inspection mode, the game progress process may not be executed even if a gaming ball passes through the area detected by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h.

Specifically, for example, when the system transitions to inspection mode, the inspection mode flag in the main control device 60, which determines whether or not the system is in inspection mode, turns ON. The main control device 60 then determines whether or not the inspection mode flag is ON, and if it determines that the inspection mode flag is ON, it does not proceed to the processing flow for executing the normal game progress processing, but instead proceeds to the processing flow for inspection mode. As a result, even if the main control device 60 receives a signal from the ball entry detection sensors 44a-44h indicating that a game ball has been detected, it is configured not to execute processing based on the reception of that signal (for example, processing to obtain the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, processing to pay out prize balls, processing to send commands to the sound and light emission control device 90, etc.).

This configuration makes it possible to execute in test mode processes that are undesirable for execution in parallel with game progress processing, or processes that are likely to cause malfunctions when executed in parallel with game progress processing. Furthermore, this configuration means that game progress processing is not executed in test mode, so when developing a program for processing to be executed in test mode, there is no need to consider countermeasures for when game progress processing is executed in parallel, which significantly improves the efficiency of developing programs for processing to be executed in test mode.

Furthermore, the content of the game history information changes when a game ball is detected and game progress processing is executed. Therefore, if a configuration were adopted in which processing to output game history information was executed in parallel with game progress processing, the game progress processing would be executed while an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 was inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 using the game history information, causing the content of the game history information to change from time to time, making it difficult to carry out the inspection smoothly. In contrast, with the configuration of aspect 13, the game history information is output in an inspection mode in which game progress processing is not executed, even if a game ball has passed through a specified area, so it is possible to prevent the content of the game history information from changing while it is being output. As a result, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can carry out the inspection smoothly.

Note that the manner in which the gaming history information is output in the inspection mode is not limited to outputting the gaming history information to the inspection device 320 and displaying it, and other manners are also possible. For example, the gaming history information may be output to the symbol display device 41 and displayed.

In addition, the information output in the inspection mode is not limited to game history information, and may be other information. For example, it may be other information based on the detection of game balls by the ball entry detection sensors 44a-44h, such as game ball entry information or information on the number of game balls that have entered.

<Aspect 14>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, in a configuration in which the main control device 60 can switch between a game mode and an inspection mode, if an inspector performs a predetermined operation (hereinafter also referred to as a "mode switching operation") to transition from the game mode to the inspection mode while the game progress processing in the game mode is being executed, the configuration may be such that the game mode is transitioned to the inspection mode when the game progress processing being executed has been completed up to a predetermined processing stage.

Specifically, for example, if a mode switching operation is performed by pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button during game progress processing in game mode, processing will be completed up to a predetermined processing stage for each game progress processing being executed (jackpot lottery processing, electric role release lottery processing, prize ball payout processing, pattern change display processing on the main display unit 45, opening and closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b and electric role device 34a, etc.). Then, once the game progress processing is completed up to a predetermined processing stage, processing after that processing stage will not be executed and the system will enter a standby state. Then, when all of the game progress processing being executed has been completed up to the predetermined processing stage, the system will transition from game mode to inspection mode.

This configuration reduces the occurrence of processing problems when transitioning to inspection mode compared to a configuration in which the game mode is transitioned to inspection mode immediately after a mode switching operation is performed, regardless of whether the ongoing game progress processing has completed up to a predetermined processing stage.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the game mode is switched to the inspection mode immediately after a mode switching operation is performed, regardless of whether the ongoing game progress processing has completed up to a predetermined processing stage, if a mode switching operation is performed while the main display unit 45 is executing a pattern change display process as part of the game progress processing in game mode, the game mode will switch to the inspection mode in the middle of the pattern change display on the main display unit 45, making it difficult to control the timing of the pattern stop and the pattern change time. In contrast, with the configuration of aspect 14, for example, if a mode switching operation is performed while the pattern change display process is being executed in game mode, the game mode will switch to the inspection mode when the pattern change display process has ended and the processing has completed up to the processing stage where the patterns have stopped. This makes it possible to prevent processing malfunctions such as difficulty in controlling the timing of the pattern stop and the pattern change time.

In addition, when transitioning (returning) from inspection mode to game mode, the remaining game progress processing steps that were scheduled to be executed before transitioning to inspection mode may be executed. This configuration can prevent players from feeling uncomfortable when the game progress processing they were hoping for ends in an incomplete state.

Furthermore, if a mode switching operation is performed while game progress processing is being executed in game mode, the system may be configured to transition from game mode to inspection mode when all of the game progress processing currently being executed is completed. This configuration can prevent processing errors from occurring when the game progress processing is resumed.

Furthermore, if a mode switching operation is performed during game progress processing in game mode, the game execution processing may be interrupted, and information that enables the interrupted game progress processing to be resumed may be stored in the main RAM 64, and once this storage is complete, the system may transition from game mode to inspection mode. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 quickly transitions from game mode to inspection mode, making it possible to inspect many pachinko machines 10 in a short period of time.

Furthermore, the mode switching operation for transitioning from game mode to inspection mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, and may be performed in other ways. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the mode switching button. Furthermore, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the same processing as when the mode switching operation is performed may be performed.

<Aspect 15>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, in a configuration in which the main control device 60 can switch between game mode and inspection mode, if an automatic return condition is met during inspection mode, that is, 10 minutes have passed since the transition to the inspection mode, the configuration may be such that the device transitions from inspection mode to game mode even if a predetermined operation for transitioning from inspection mode to game mode (for example, an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switch button) has not been performed.

With this configuration, if 10 minutes have passed since the transition to inspection mode, the system is configured to transition from inspection mode to game mode even if the specified operation for transitioning from inspection mode to game mode has not been performed. This reliably prevents the machine from returning to game mode without performing the specified operation. For example, even if an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 inspects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 using the game play history information output in inspection mode and then forgets to perform the specified operation, the machine will return to game mode 10 minutes after transitioning to inspection mode. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which the pachinko machine 10 does not return to a game mode in which game progress processing can be executed, preventing the player from playing the pachinko machine 10.

The automatic recovery condition is not limited to 10 minutes having passed since the transition to the inspection mode, and may be other conditions. For example, it may be 5 minutes having passed since the transition to the inspection mode, or 10 minutes having passed since the inspection device 320 was removed from the inspection terminals 65.

Furthermore, the specified operation for transitioning from inspection mode to game mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switch button, and may be in other forms. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the mode switch button.

<Aspect 16>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, a RAM clear button for initializing the main RAM 64 may be provided on the main control device 60, and when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button (hereinafter also referred to as an "erase operation") is performed, the information stored in the main RAM 64 may be erased (initialized).

Furthermore, the main control device 60 may be configured to be able to switch between game mode and inspection mode. Furthermore, in a state after transitioning to inspection mode but before transitioning to game mode, such as during inspection mode, or when the power is turned off after transitioning to inspection mode, the information stored in the main RAM 64 may not be erased even if an erasure operation is performed by pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button.

With this configuration, even if an erase operation is performed to erase information stored in the main RAM 64 after transitioning to inspection mode but before transitioning to game mode, the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not erased. Therefore, even if an erase operation is accidentally performed in an attempt to transition to game mode after transitioning to inspection mode but before transitioning to game mode, the information can be prevented from being accidentally erased.

For example, in a configuration in which the erasure operation for erasing information stored in the main RAM 64 is the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, and the operation for switching between game mode and inspection mode is the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switch button, there is a risk that when attempting to switch from inspection mode to game mode by pressing the power button while pressing the mode switch button, the player may accidentally press the RAM clear button while pressing the power button. However, with the configuration of aspect 16, even if an erasure operation of accidentally pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button is performed after switching to inspection mode but before switching to game mode, it is possible to prevent the information from being accidentally erased.

More specifically, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which the game progress processing being executed in game mode is temporarily stopped when transitioning from game mode to inspection mode, and information for resuming the stopped game progress processing after returning to inspection mode is stored in the main RAM 64, if a player intends to press the power button while pressing the mode switch button to return from inspection mode to game mode, but accidentally presses the RAM clear button while pressing the power button, the information for resuming the game progress processing will be erased, making it impossible to resume the game progress processing after returning to inspection mode, which could be detrimental to the player. In contrast, the configuration of aspect 16 prevents the information stored in the main RAM 64 from being accidentally erased, even if the player accidentally presses the power button while pressing the RAM clear button in an attempt to transition to game mode after transitioning to inspection mode but before transitioning to game mode. This prevents the player from being disadvantaged.

The game history information may also be stored in the main RAM 64. With this configuration, there is no need to provide a separate dedicated memory for storing game history information, which reduces the manufacturing costs of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, when an erasure operation is executed, the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 is not erased regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (such as whether the power is on or off, or whether it is in game mode or inspection mode), and only information other than the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 (such as information stored to resume game progress processing) may be erased (initialized). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the intentional erasure of game history information that deviates from a predetermined specified range.

Note that the erase operation is not limited to pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, and may be performed in other ways. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the RAM clear button.

<Aspect 17>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, in a configuration in which the main control device 60 can switch between a game mode and an inspection mode, when the main control device 60 transitions from the game mode to the inspection mode, it may transmit a game stop command to the audio and light-emitting control device 90, which is a command indicating that the game will be switched to the inspection mode and the game progress process will be temporarily stopped, and the game progress process that was being executed may be temporarily stopped in the inspection mode. Specifically, for example, if the main control device 60 transitions to the inspection mode while the main display unit 45 is displaying a varying pattern, it may turn off the display on the main display unit 45 and stop counting the time the patterns are varying on the main display unit 45. Furthermore, when the main control device 60 transitions from the inspection mode to the game mode, it may transmit a game resume command to the audio and light-emitting control device 90, which is a command indicating that the game will be switched to the game mode and the game progress process will be resumed.

The audio and light emitting control device 90 is configured to temporarily stop the currently running presentation when it receives a game stop command, and then resume the temporarily stopped presentation when it receives a game resume command. With this configuration, even when the main control device 60 transitions between game mode and inspection mode, it is possible to synchronize the game progress processing performed by the main control device 60 (e.g., the process of displaying changing patterns on the main display unit 45) with the presentation controlled by the audio and light emitting control device 90 (e.g., the process of displaying changing patterns on the pattern display device 41), preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable after transitioning to game mode.

The audio and light control device 90 may be configured not to stop the ongoing presentation even when it receives a game stop command. Specifically, for example, if a game stop command is received while the pattern display device 41 is displaying changing patterns, the device may continue to control the changing pattern display on the pattern display device 41, while displaying a layer of another image (for example, a black image) on top of the layer displaying the changing patterns. However, because the control of the changing pattern display on the pattern display device 41 continues, the changing pattern display continues below the black image layer. Then, when the pattern change time on the pattern display device 41 has elapsed, the changing pattern display below the black image layer ends, but the patterns do not stop but continue to sway slightly.

When a game resume command is received from the main control unit 60, the black image layer that was displayed above the layer displaying the changing symbols is removed, and the symbol layer is displayed again. At this time, the main control unit 60 transitions (returns) from inspection mode to game mode, and resumes the game progress processing (changing symbol display on the main display unit 45) that was stopped.

The main control device 60 then resumes the display of the changing patterns on the main display unit 45, where it had stopped counting the changing time, and when the remaining changing time has elapsed, that is, when it is time to stop the changing patterns on the main display unit 45, it sends a pattern stop command to the audio and light control device 90. Having received this pattern stop command, the audio and light control device 90 sends a pattern stop command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 completely stops the patterns that had been displayed in a slightly swaying manner on the pattern display device 41.

With this configuration, when the main control device 60 is in inspection mode, the display on the main display unit 45 is turned off, and the display on the symbol display device 41 displays a black image. When the main control device 60 transitions from inspection mode to game mode, the display of the changing symbols on the main display unit 45, which had stopped counting the change time, resumes, and the symbols on the symbol display device 41 display a changing or slightly swaying display. The symbols on the symbol display device 41 also stop when the symbols on the main display unit 45 stop. This means that the display of the changing symbols on the main display unit 45 and the display of the changing symbols on the symbol display device 41 can be synchronized. Furthermore, since control of the currently running effects is not stopped even when a game stop command is received, malfunctions caused by temporarily stopping the control of the currently running effects can be prevented. For example, when control of effects is resumed after temporarily stopping control of effects, a discrepancy in the timing of multiple effects being executed, or a discrepancy between the video displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the audio output from the speaker 46, may occur.

In addition, if the main control device 60 is configured not to send a pattern stop command to the audio/luminescence control device 90 even when it is time to stop the pattern change on the main display unit 45, the pattern change display on the pattern display device 41 will continue to fluctuate slightly, and the pattern on the pattern display device 41 will stop when it receives a change command sent from the main control device 60 or a standby command sent when no hold information is stored.

<Aspect 18>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 when a predetermined time is reached. Specifically, for example, the game mode may be switched to the inspection mode when 11:10 PM is reached, and the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41. With this configuration, the game history information of each pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 around 11:10 PM after the gaming hall closes, so that an inspector of the pachinko machines 10 can quickly inspect and check the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 after the gaming hall closes, without having to go through the trouble of switching each pachinko machine 10 from the game mode to the inspection mode.

Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 in response to receipt of a predetermined signal from the hall computer. With this configuration, for example, all pachinko machines 10 installed in a gaming hall can be switched to inspection mode all at once, and the game history information of each pachinko machine 10 can be displayed on each symbol display device 41. This allows pachinko machine 10 inspectors to quickly inspect and confirm the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 without having to go through the trouble of switching each pachinko machine 10 from game mode to inspection mode.

<Aspect 19>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, the game history information may be configured to be always displayed on the symbol display device 41. With such a configuration, the player or inspector can always check the game history information, and if an abnormality occurs, such as the game history information deviating from a predetermined range, the abnormality can be noticed immediately. As a result, the soundness of the game can be quickly ensured.

<Aspect 20>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, a seven-segment display made up of seven light-emitting diodes may be provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the seven-segment display may display information related to the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10. For example, when the main control device 60 transitions from the above-mentioned game mode to the inspection mode, the seven-segment display may be configured to display whether the combination ratio, payout ratio (in normal mode), etc. stored in the pachinko machine 10 are within a predetermined range.

More specifically, for example, when the main control device 60 transitions from game mode to inspection mode, a "1" is displayed on the seven-segment display, indicating that a display regarding the reel ratio will be made. If the reel ratio is within a predetermined range (specifically, if the reel ratio is 0.700 or less), an "O" indicating OK is displayed on the seven-segment display. On the other hand, if the reel ratio is not within the predetermined range, an "E" indicating an error is displayed on the seven-segment display. After the reel ratio display is made, a "2" is displayed on the seven-segment display, indicating that a display regarding the consecutive reel ratio will be made. If the consecutive reel ratio is within the predetermined range (specifically, if the consecutive reel ratio is 0.600 or less), an "O" indicating OK is displayed on the seven-segment display. On the other hand, if the consecutive reel ratio is not within the predetermined range, an "E" indicating an error is displayed on the seven-segment display. After the continuous feature ratio is displayed, the seven-segment display will display "2", indicating that the payout ratio (in normal mode) will be displayed, and if the payout ratio (in normal mode) is within a specified range (specifically, if the payout ratio (in normal mode) is within the range of 0.60 to 0.70), the seven-segment display will display "O", indicating OK; on the other hand, if the payout ratio (in normal mode) is not within the specified range, the seven-segment display will display "E", indicating an error.

This configuration makes it possible to quickly and easily check game history information such as the ratio of winning devices. Furthermore, because the seven-segment display consumes little power, it is possible to check game history information using only the small amount of power provided by capacitors and batteries installed inside the pachinko machine 10, even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

In addition, the seven-segment display may be configured to constantly display information related to the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10. This configuration allows for quick and easy inspection of game history information, such as the ratio of winning combinations, without switching from game mode to inspection mode. Even in pachinko machines 10 that do not have an inspection mode, this allows for quick and easy inspection of game history information, such as the ratio of winning combinations. Furthermore, if the seven-segment display is configured to be located on the back of the pachinko machine 10, the seven-segment display is out of the player's field of vision, preventing the player from being distracted by the display on the seven-segment display and losing focus on the game. Meanwhile, when an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 inspects the game history information of the pachinko machine 10, he or she simply rotates the pachinko machine main body 12, which is supported by the hinge 15, toward himself or herself and checks the display on the seven-segment display located on the back of the pachinko machine main body 12, thereby allowing for quick and easy inspection of game history information, such as the ratio of winning combinations. Instead of a seven-segment display, other displays capable of displaying game history information in a recognizable manner may be used, such as a segment display made up of a number of light-emitting diodes other than seven.

<Aspect 21>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, the audio and light emitting control device 90 may be configured to calculate the game history information. Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x of the main control device 60 may be configured to transmit a signal including the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 during the initial setting process to the audio and light emitting control device 90, and the audio and light emitting control device 90 may be configured to calculate the game history information based on the acquired prize ball number data and the game ball entry information transmitted from the main control device 60, and to display the calculated game history information on the pattern display device 41.

With this configuration, even if the audio and light emitting control device 90 is unable to access the prize ball count data storage area of the main ROM 63, or is unable to grasp the storage location (memory address) of the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage area of the main ROM 63, the audio and light emitting control device 90 can still obtain the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage area of the main ROM 63, and calculate the game history information. Furthermore, because the audio and light emitting control device 90 calculates the game history information instead of the main control device 60, the processing load on the main control device 60 can be significantly reduced.

<Aspect 22>
The first embodiment and other aspects described above can be applied not only to the pachinko machine 10 that can switch from the game mode to the inspection mode, but also to a gaming machine that can switch from the game mode to another mode. For example, they can be applied to a gaming machine that has a game status display mode that can display the status of processing related to the game, such as the status of the high probability mode flag or the high frequency support mode flag, the contents of stored pending information, etc.

<Aspect 23>
26 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. In this aspect 23, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x calculates the above-mentioned game history information. The main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (a first area and a second area). The first area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for loading programs and the like for executing processes related to game progress, and the second area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for loading programs and the like for executing processes for calculating and displaying game history information (hereinafter also referred to as game history processes). When executing processes related to game progress (processes other than game history processes), the main CPU 62x writes information only to the first area of the main RAM 64, and when executing game history processes, it writes information only to the second area of the main RAM 64.

The first area of the main RAM 64 is also used as an 8-bit ball entry detection information storage area, stack area, etc., which will be described later. The second area of the main RAM 64 is also used as an 8-bit buffer area, prize ball tally buffer, calculation buffer, calculation result buffer, stack area, etc., which will be described later. These will be described in more detail later.

In addition, the input/output port 62a is connected to the game history information display unit 45z. The game history information display unit 45z is composed of four 7-segment displays and is provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10. As will be described later, the game history information calculated by the main CPU 62x is displayed on this game history information display unit 45z.

Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the master MPU 62 (master CPU 62x) in mode 23 of the first embodiment. Note that in this mode, the timer interrupt processing is initiated at a 4 msec cycle, as in the first embodiment. Differences from the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (Figure 13) described above include the content of the ball entry detection processing shown in step S10606, the addition of a game history process for calculating and displaying game history information as the final process of this timer interrupt processing (step S10616), and the omission of the ball entry detection information output process (step S10207 in Figure 13), which outputs ball entry detection information to the game history management chip. The remaining processing is the same as that described in the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (Figure 13). The ball entry detection processing of step S10606 shown in Figure 27 and the game history process of step S10616 are described below.

Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in mode 23 of the first embodiment. In this ball entry detection process in mode 23, if the previous (previous) timer interrupt process determines that there is no information ("0") in the bit of input port 62b, the current timer interrupt process determines that there is information ("1") in the bit of input port 62b, and the timer interrupt process subsequently determines that there is information ("1") in that bit again, then it is determined that a game ball has entered the ball entry hole corresponding to that bit. An example of the ball entry detection process is described below.

In step S10701, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 (Figure 14) of the input port 62b (hereinafter referred to as "scoring information") is read, and in step S10702, the read scoring information is stored in the first buffer, which is an 8-bit buffer. In other words, the first buffer is a buffer for storing scoring information read from each bit of the input port 62b during the current timer interrupt process. The second buffer, described below, is an 8-bit buffer for storing scoring information read from each bit of the input port 62b during the previous timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the first and second buffers are located in the first area of the main RAM 64. After executing step S10702, the program proceeds to step S10703.

In step S10703, the ball entry determination counter stored in the main RAM 64 is set to 8. Then, the process proceeds to step S10704. The numerical information of the ball entry determination counter corresponds to the bits of each of the eight ball entry ports, similar to the ball entry determination counter (step S10401) used in the ball entry determination process (Figure 16) of the first embodiment described above. Specifically, in this embodiment, the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter, "8," corresponds to the 0th bit D0 of the large prize entry port 36a; "7" corresponds to the 1st bit D1 of the first starting port 33; "6" corresponds to the 2nd bit D2 of the second starting port 34; "5" corresponds to the 3rd bit D3 of the first prize entry port 32a; "4" corresponds to the 4th bit D4 of the second prize entry port 32b; "3" corresponds to the 5th bit D5 of the third prize entry port 32c; "2" corresponds to the 6th bit D6 of the through gate 35; and "1" corresponds to the 7th bit D7 of the discharge passage.

In step S10704, it is determined whether or not there is scoring determination information in the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the scoring determination counter in the second buffer, i.e., whether or not the scoring determination information stored in that bit is "1". If it is determined in step S10704 that the scoring determination information is not "1" (S10704: NO), proceed to step S10705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10704 that the scoring determination information is "1" (S10704: YES), proceed to step S10710 without executing the processes from step S10705 to step S10709 described below.

In step S10705, it is determined whether or not there is scoring determination information in the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the scoring determination counter in the first buffer, i.e., whether or not the scoring determination information stored in that bit is "1". In step S10705, if it is determined that the scoring determination information is "1" (S10705: YES), proceed to step S10706. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10705 that the scoring determination information is not "1" (S10705: NO), proceed to step S10710 without executing the processes from step S10706 to step S10709 described below.

In step S10706, it is determined whether or not there is scoring determination information in the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the scoring determination counter in the current input port 62b, i.e., whether or not the scoring determination information stored in that bit is "1". In step S10706, if it is determined that the scoring determination information is "1" (S10706: YES), proceed to step S10707. On the other hand, if it is determined that the scoring determination information is not "1" (S10706: NO), proceed to step S10710 without executing the processes from step S10707 to step S10709 described below.

In step S10707, it is determined which type of entry port the current numerical information of the entry determination counter indicates the bit corresponding to, and a ball entry flag indicating that the game ball has entered the entry port corresponding to that bit is turned ON. Specifically, for example, if it is determined that the current numerical information of the entry determination counter indicates the bit corresponding to the special entry port 36a, the special entry port entry flag indicating that the game ball has entered the special entry port 36a is turned ON. Furthermore, for example, if it is determined that the current numerical information of the entry determination counter indicates the bit corresponding to the second entry port 34, the second entry port entry flag indicating that the game ball has entered the second entry port 34 is turned ON. After executing step S10707, proceed to step S10708.

In step S10708, the numerical information of the prize ball counter corresponding to the ball entry port where the ball entry flag was turned ON in step S10707, i.e., where it was determined that a game ball entered, is incremented by 1. Specifically, for example, if the large prize entry port ball entry flag is turned ON, the 15 prize ball counter is incremented by 1, and if the second start port ball entry flag is turned ON, the 3 prize ball counter is incremented by 1. After executing step S10708, proceed to step S10709.

In step S10709, the goal determination counter is decremented by 1, and then in step S10710, it is determined whether the goal determination counter is "0".

If it is determined in step S10710 that the goal-scoring counter is not "0" (S10710: NO), steps S10704 to S10708 are executed for the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the goal-scoring counter updated in step S10709. If steps S10704 to S10708 have been executed for the number of times the numerical information set in step S10703 has been executed, the goal-scoring counter will become "0," a positive determination is made in step S10710 (S10710: YES), and the process proceeds to step S10711.

In step S10711, the 8-bit scoring determination information stored in the first buffer is stored (copied) in the second buffer. As a result, the scoring determination information obtained from input port 62b in the current timer interrupt process will be referenced in the scoring detection process in the next timer interrupt process. After executing step S10711, proceed to step S10712.

In step S10712, ball entry detection information indicating that a game ball has been detected in the ball entry detection process of this timer interrupt process is stored in a ball entry detection information storage area capable of storing 8-bit information. Specifically, the ball entry detection information storage area stores, for each bit corresponding to each of the eight ball entry ports, a "1" if the ball entry flag is ON, and a "0" if the ball entry flag is OFF. For example, if the result of executing the ball entry detection process in this timer interrupt process is that the main prize entry port entry flag and the second start port entry flag are ON, and the ball entry flags corresponding to the other ball entry ports are OFF, the 8-bit ball entry detection information "00000101" is stored in the ball entry detection information storage area. This 8-bit ball entry detection information stored in the ball entry detection information storage area is referenced in the game history process described below. After step S10712 is executed, this ball entry detection process ends.

Figure 29 is a flowchart showing the game history processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. This game history processing calculates the role ratio and consecutive role ratio, and executes processing to display these on the game history information display unit 45z. Specifically, the role ratio is calculated, and the calculated role ratio is displayed for 5 seconds on the game history information display unit 45z. Then, the consecutive role ratio is calculated, and the calculated consecutive role ratio is displayed for 5 seconds on the game history information display unit 45z. Then, the role ratio is calculated again, and the calculated role ratio is displayed for 5 seconds on the game history information display unit 45z. In this way, the role ratio and consecutive role ratio are alternately displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. An example of a specific process is described below.

In step S10801, a save process is executed to save information stored in the registers in the master CPU 62x (hereinafter referred to as register information) to the stack area in the second area of the master RAM 64. In this mode 23, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27), before the game history process (step S10616 in FIG. 27) is executed, a process related to the progress of the game (steps S10601 to S10615 in FIG. 27), which is a process other than the game history process, is executed. Therefore, in this save process, the register information related to the progress of the game is saved to the stack area in the second area of the master RAM 64. Specifically, the value of the stack pointer in the master CPU 62x (the address value indicating the top level of the stack area in the first area) is saved (pushed) to the bottom of the stack area in the second area of the master RAM 64. Then, the stack pointer of the master CPU 62x is set to the address value indicating the top level of the stack area in the second area of the master RAM 64. Thereafter, the register information stored in the registers within the master CPU 62x is sequentially saved (pushed) to the stack area (the top level of the stack area in the second area of the master RAM 64) indicated by the stack pointer set in the master CPU 62x. By executing this saving process, the address value of the stack area in the second area of the master RAM 64 is set in the stack pointer of the master CPU 62x, allowing the master CPU 62x to execute the process of calculating and displaying the game history information described below using the second area of the master RAM 64. After executing step S10801, proceed to step S10802.

In step S10802, it is determined whether the abnormal flag stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is ON. The abnormal flag is a flag that is set ON when the prize ball tally value, described below, is an abnormal value. If it is determined in step S10802 that the abnormal flag is ON (S10802: YES), the process proceeds to step S10803, where the prize ball tally value is cleared to 0. Then, the process proceeds to step S10804, where the abnormal flag is set OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S10805. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10802 that the abnormal flag is not ON (S10802: NO), the process proceeds to step S10805 without executing the processing of steps S10803 and S10804.

In step S10805, an OR operation is performed for each corresponding bit in the scoring detection information storage area and the buffer area, and the result of each OR operation (logical sum) is stored (overwritten) in the corresponding bit in the buffer area. Details of this process will be described later. The buffer area is an area that can store the same 8 bits of information as the scoring detection information storage area, and is located in the second area of the main RAM 64. After executing step S10805, proceed to step S10806.

In step S10806, it is determined whether or not there is scoring detection information in at least one of the eight bits in the buffer area (whether or not one or more bits store a "1"). If it is determined in step S10806 that there is scoring detection information in at least one bit in the buffer area (S10806: YES), proceed to step S10807.

In step S10807, a target setting process is executed to set the eight bits in the buffer area to be the target of the prize ball tallying process, which will be described later. In this embodiment, two consecutive bits are set as the target of the prize ball tallying process in one target setting process. Furthermore, as described below, when the target setting process is executed in the next or subsequent timer interrupt process, the two consecutive bits adjacent to the two bits set in the previous target setting process are set as the target of the prize ball tallying process. In this manner, the two bits targeted for the prize ball tallying process are sequentially shifted to the adjacent bits. Note that after the last two bits of the eight bits are set as the target of the prize ball tallying process, the first two bits are again set as the target of the prize ball tallying process in the next target setting process. In this manner, in this embodiment, the order of the two bits to be set as the target of the prize ball tallying process from the eight bits in the buffer area is predetermined. After executing step S10807, the process proceeds to step S10808, where the prize ball tallying process corresponding to the set bits is executed. Here, a specific example of the processing from steps S10805 to S10808 will be explained using Figure 30.

Figure 30 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of specific processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. As described above, the ball entry detection information storage area is an 8-bit storage area provided in the first area of the main RAM 64, with each bit corresponding to a ball entry port. Specifically, in this aspect, the 0th bit D0 of the ball entry detection information storage area corresponds to the large prize port 36a, the first bit D1 to the first start port 33, the second bit D2 to the second start port 34, the third bit D3 to the first prize port 32a, the fourth bit D4 to the second prize port 32b, the fifth bit D5 to the third prize port 32c, the sixth bit D6 to the through gate 35, and the seventh bit D7 to the discharge passage.

The buffer area is an 8-bit memory area provided in the second area of the main RAM 64, with each bit corresponding to a ball entry port. Specifically, in this embodiment, the 0th bit D0 of the buffer area corresponds to the large prize entry port 36a, the first bit D1 to the first start port 33, the second bit D2 to the second start port 34, the third bit D3 to the first prize entry port 32a, the fourth bit D4 to the second prize entry port 32b, the fifth bit D5 to the third prize entry port 32c, the sixth bit D6 to the through gate 35, and the seventh bit D7 to the discharge passage. In other words, each bit in the buffer area corresponds to each bit in the ball entry detection information storage area.

In the ball entry detection process described above (Figure 28), when it is determined that a gaming ball has entered an entry port such as the large prize entry port 36a, the bit of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area that corresponds to the entry port into which it is determined that the gaming ball has entered is turned ON ("1").

Figure 30 (A1) shows an example of processing when the nth timer interrupt processing is executed. In this nth timer interrupt processing, the ball entry detection processing determines that game balls have entered the second starting hole 34 and the first winning hole 32a, and the values of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area are "00001100." Furthermore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area before the OR processing are executed are "00000000." Therefore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area after the OR processing are executed are "00001100." As a result, the ball entry detection information in the ball entry detection information storage area, which is updated each time the timer interrupt processing is executed, is set as the processing target for the prize ball counting processing described below and is held in the buffer area until that processing is executed.

During the nth timer interrupt process, of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is performed, the two consecutive bits, bit 0 D0 and bit 1 D1, are set as the targets for the prize ball counting process.

In the prize ball tallying process, if the 0th bit D0 (the bit corresponding to the large prize opening 36a) set as the processing target for the prize ball tallying process is "1", "15" is added to the total number of prize balls and the number of consecutive prize balls stored in the prize ball tallying buffer. On the other hand, if the 0th bit D0 is "0", this addition is not performed. In this embodiment, the prize ball tallying buffer is configured as a ring buffer, and is configured to store the number of prize balls paid out during the most recent specified period. Furthermore, the number of consecutive prize balls is the number of game balls paid out as prize balls due to the operation of the consecutive prize opening, and means the number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the large prize opening 36a.

Furthermore, in the prize ball tallying process, if the first bit D1 (the bit corresponding to the first starting hole 33) set as the processing target for the prize ball tallying process is "1", "3" is added to the total number of prize balls stored in the prize ball tallying buffer. On the other hand, if the first bit D1 is "0", this addition is not performed.

In the example shown in Figure 30 (A1), the 0th bit D0 is "0" and the 1st bit D1 is also "0", so the above-mentioned addition is not performed.

After the prize ball counting process is executed, the two bits (bit 0 D0 and bit 1 D1) in the buffer area that are set as targets for the prize ball counting process are cleared to 0.

Figure 30 (A2) shows an example of processing when the n+1th timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n+1th timer interrupt processing, the ball entry detection processing determines that a gaming ball has entered the second winning slot 32b, and the values of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area are "00010000". Furthermore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area before the OR processing are executed are "00001100", the same as the values in the buffer area after the prize ball counting processing in the nth timer interrupt processing described above. Therefore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area after the OR processing are executed are "00011100".

During the n+1th timer interrupt process, of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is performed, the two consecutive bits, the second bit D2 and the third bit D3, are set as the processing targets for the prize ball counting process.

In the prize ball tallying process, if the second bit D2 (the bit corresponding to the second start port 34) set as the processing target for the prize ball tallying process is "1", "3" is added to the total number of prize balls and the number of special prize balls stored in the prize ball tallying buffer. On the other hand, if the second bit D2 is "0", this addition is not performed. The number of special prize balls is the number of game balls paid out as prize balls due to the operation of the special device, and refers to the number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the second start port 34 and the large prize port 36a.

Furthermore, in the prize ball tallying process, if the third bit D3 (the bit corresponding to the first winning slot 32a) set as the processing target for the prize ball tallying process is "1", "10" is added to the total number of prize balls stored in the prize ball tallying buffer. On the other hand, if the third bit D3 is "0", this addition is not performed.

In the example shown in Figure 30 (A2), the second bit D2 is "1", so "3" is added to the total number of prize balls and the number of bonus prize balls. Also, the third bit D3 is "1", so "10" is added to the total number of prize balls.

After the prize ball counting process is executed, the two bits (second bit D2 and third bit D3) in the buffer area that are set as targets for the prize ball counting process are cleared to 0.

Figure 30 (A3) shows an example of processing when the n+2th timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n+2th timer interrupt processing, the ball entry detection processing determines that a gaming ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35, and the values of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area are "01000000". Furthermore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area before the OR processing are executed are "00010000", the same as the values in the buffer area after the prize ball counting processing in the n+1th timer interrupt processing described above. Therefore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area after the OR processing are executed are "01010000".

During the n+2th timer interrupt process, of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is performed, two consecutive bits, the fourth bit D4 and the fifth bit D5, are set as the targets for the prize ball counting process.

During the prize ball tallying process, if the fourth bit D4 (the bit corresponding to the second winning slot 32b) set as the processing target for the prize ball tallying process is "1", "10" is added to the total number of prize balls stored in the prize ball tallying buffer. On the other hand, if the fourth bit D4 is "0", this addition is not performed.

Furthermore, in the prize ball tallying process, if the fifth bit D5 (the bit corresponding to the third winning slot 32c) set as the processing target for the prize ball tallying process is "1", "10" is added to the total number of prize balls stored in the prize ball tallying buffer. On the other hand, if the fifth bit D5 is "0", this addition is not performed.

In the example shown in Figure 30 (A3), the fourth bit D4 is "1", so "10" is added to the total number of winning balls. Also, the fifth bit D5 is "0", so the above-mentioned addition is not performed.

After the prize ball counting process is executed, the two bits (fourth bit D4 and fifth bit D5) in the buffer area that are set as targets for the prize ball counting process are cleared to 0.

Figure 30 (A4) shows an example of processing when the n+3th timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n+3th timer interrupt processing, the ball entry detection processing determines that a gaming ball has entered the large prize opening 36a, and the values of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area are "00100001." Furthermore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area before the OR processing are executed are "01000000," the same as the values in the buffer area after the prize ball counting processing in the n+2th timer interrupt processing described above. Therefore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area after the OR processing are executed are "01100001."

During the n+3 timer interrupt process, of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is performed, two consecutive bits, the sixth bit D6 and the seventh bit D7, are set as the processing targets for the prize ball counting process.

However, in this embodiment, the sixth bit D6 corresponds to the through gate 35, and the seventh bit D7 corresponds to the discharge passage. Furthermore, no prize balls are set in the through gate 35 or the discharge passage. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the sixth bit D6 and the seventh bit D7 are set as targets for the prize ball tallying process, they are not added to the total number of prize balls, etc., in the prize ball tallying process. After that, the two bits (the sixth bit D6 and the seventh bit D7) set as targets for the prize ball tallying process in the buffer area are cleared to 0.

Then, in the n+4th timer interrupt process, bit 0 D0 and bit 1 D1 are again set as the processing targets for the prize ball tallying process. Similar processing is then repeatedly executed. However, as described below, if there is no ball entry detection information in the bits of the buffer area (all bits are "0"), the target setting process (step S10807) and the prize ball tallying process (step S10808) are not executed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if there is no ball entry detection information in the bits of the buffer area (all bits are "0"), and at least one bit in the buffer area again contains ball entry detection information, and the target setting process is executed, the two bits set as the processing targets for the prize ball tallying process in the previous target setting process are stored, and the two consecutive bits located next to those two bits are set as the processing targets for the prize ball tallying process. Furthermore, if the two bits set as targets for the prize ball counting process in the previous target setting process are the sixth bit D6 and the seventh bit D7, then the two consecutive bits, the zeroth bit D0 and the first bit D1, are set as targets for the prize ball counting process.

As explained above, in this embodiment, two of the eight bits in the buffer area are set as the target for prize ball tallying processing in one timer interrupt process. Therefore, if there is ball detection information in at least one bit in the buffer area, the timer interrupt process will be executed four times, and the prize ball tallying processing will be executed for all eight bits in the buffer area.

Return to the explanation of Figure 29. After executing the prize ball tallying process in step S10808, proceed to step S10809.

In step S10809, a calculation result display control process is executed. Specifically, control is executed to display the value (the calculated game history information, which is the combination ratio or consecutive combination ratio) stored in the calculation result buffer described below on the game history information display unit 45z. After executing step S10809, the process proceeds to step S10810.

In step S10810, it is determined whether it is time to execute a calculation process to calculate game history information. Specifically, it is determined that it is time to execute the calculation process when a predetermined time (30 minutes in this embodiment) has elapsed since the pachinko machine 10 was powered on, or when 5 seconds have elapsed since the previous execution of the calculation process. If it is determined in step S10810 that it is time to execute the calculation process (S10810: YES), the program proceeds to step S10811. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10810 that it is not time to execute the calculation process (S10810: NO), the program proceeds to step S10813 without executing the processes of steps S10811 and S10812, which will be described later.

In step S10811, the type of gaming history information to be calculated in the calculation process (task 1 and task 2, described below) is set. In this mode, the type of gaming history information to be calculated is alternately set to the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio. Then, the process proceeds to step S10812, where task 1 is specified as the next task to be executed in the task processing (step S10814, described below). After executing step S10812, the process proceeds to step S10813.

In step S10813, a process is executed to restore the register information saved in the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64 during the above-mentioned saving process to the register of the main CPU 62x. Specifically, the saved register information is restored (popped) to the register of the main CPU 62x, sequentially, starting from the stack area indicated by the stack pointer set in the main CPU 62x (the top level of the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64). Then, the value of the stack pointer saved at the bottom of the stack area of the second area (the address value indicating the top level of the stack area of the first area) is restored (popped) to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x. By executing this restoration process, the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x is set to the address value of the stack area of the first area of the main RAM 64, allowing the main CPU 62x to once again execute processing related to the progress of the game using the first area of the main RAM 64. Then, this game history process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S10806, if it is determined in step S10806 that there is no ball-entry detection information in the bits of the buffer area (all bits are "0") (S10806: NO), proceed to step S10814.

In step S10814, one of the following three tasks is executed if one is specified. If no task is specified, task 3 is executed. In other words, instead of executing the three tasks sequentially in one timer interrupt process, only one of the three specified tasks is executed in one timer interrupt process.

[Task 1]
The dividend and divisor required to calculate the game history information set as the calculation target are saved in the calculation buffer. Specifically, for example, if it is set to calculate a feature ratio, the number of feature prize balls is saved as the dividend and the total number of prize balls is saved as the divisor in the calculation buffer. Also, for example, if it is set to calculate a consecutive feature ratio, the number of consecutive feature prize balls is saved as the dividend and the total number of prize balls is saved as the divisor in the calculation buffer. Thereafter, task 2 is designated as the next task to be executed when the process proceeds to step S10806 in the next or subsequent timer interrupt processing.

[Task 2]
The dividend stored in the calculation buffer is divided by the divisor, and the calculation result (quotient) is stored in the calculation result buffer. After that, task 3 is designated as the next task to be executed when the process proceeds to step S10806 in the next or subsequent timer interrupt processing.

[Task 3]
It is determined whether the prize ball tally values (number of prize balls for special feature devices, number of consecutive prize balls for special feature devices, total number of prize balls) are valid, and if it is determined that they are not valid, an abnormality flag is set ON, and then task 3 is designated as the next task to be executed when the process proceeds to step S10806 in the next or subsequent timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prize ball tally values are valid, the abnormality flag is not set ON, and task 3 is designated as the next task. Here, cases where the prize ball tally values are invalid include cases where there is a contradiction in the prize ball tally values, such as when the number of prize balls for special feature devices exceeds the total number of prize balls, when the number of consecutive prize balls for special feature devices exceeds the total number of prize balls, or when the number of consecutive prize balls for special feature devices exceeds the number of prize balls for special feature devices.

After executing the specified task out of the three tasks described above, the process proceeds to step S10809 described above, where the value (role ratio or consecutive role ratio) stored in the calculation result buffer is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. In this embodiment, the first 7-segment display constituting the game history information display unit 45z displays information indicating the type of game history information, and the remaining three 7-segment displays display the values of the game history information.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment described above, the processing related to game progress included in the timer interrupt processing (processing other than game history processing) is programmed to complete in a shorter time than the time until the next timer interrupt processing starts (4 msec in this embodiment), but the time required for the processing related to game progress to complete varies depending on the status of game progress. On the other hand, since the game history processing is processing unrelated to game progress, it is preferable to prioritize the time for executing the processing related to game progress in one timer interrupt processing over the time for executing the game history processing. Furthermore, the progress of game play is not affected even if the various processes included in the game history processing (e.g., prize ball tallying processing for each bit, calculation processing, etc.) are not configured to be executed continuously and completed in one timer interrupt processing. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the execution time of the processing related to game progress reaches its maximum depending on the status of game progress, the execution time of one timer interrupt processing (execution time of processing related to game progress + execution time of processing for game history) is shorter than the time until the next timer interrupt processing starts. The divided processing is executed in one timer interrupt processing, and the various processing is completed by executing the timer interrupt processing multiple times. As a result, according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the processing for game history while ensuring the time required to execute the processing related to game progress in one timer interrupt processing.

Specifically, according to this aspect, one execution of the timer interrupt process can execute one of the two tasks (task 1 and task 2) that make up the arithmetic process, which is the process of calculating game history information. By executing the timer interrupt process twice, both tasks that make up the arithmetic process are executed. This reduces the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process compared to a configuration in which both tasks are executed in one execution of the timer interrupt process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process from becoming longer than the 4 msec interval (hereinafter also referred to as the interrupt interval) between starts of execution of the timer interrupt process, making it impossible to execute the timer interrupt process at 4 msec intervals.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, a series of processes with a predetermined execution order is divided into multiple tasks, and in one execution of the timer interrupt process, one of the multiple tasks is executed, and then the task to be executed after that task is specified. Therefore, even a series of processes that, if incorporated into the timer interrupt process, would require longer time to execute the timer interrupt process than the interrupt interval of the timer interrupt process can be incorporated into the timer interrupt process and executed. Specifically, according to this aspect, even in a gaming machine configured such that, if incorporated into the timer interrupt process, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process would be longer than 4 msec, the arithmetic process for calculating game history information can be incorporated into the timer interrupt process, which is executed at 4 msec intervals. Furthermore, since the progress of the game is not affected even if not all tasks of the arithmetic process for calculating game history information are executed in one execution of the timer interrupt process, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be allocated to the execution time of other processes included in the timer interrupt process, thereby improving the design flexibility of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in one execution of the timer interrupt process, two bits out of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area are set as the processing targets for the prize ball tallying process, and the prize ball tallying process can be executed for the set processing target bits. By executing the timer interrupt process multiple times, the prize ball tallying process is executed for all eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area. Therefore, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be shortened compared to a configuration in which the prize ball tallying process is executed for all eight bits D0 to D7 in one execution of the timer interrupt process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for execution of the timer interrupt process from becoming longer than the 4 msec interval at which the timer interrupt process starts to be executed, making it impossible to execute the timer interrupt process at 4 msec intervals.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when two bits from the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area are set as the processing target for the prize ball counting process, they are set in a predetermined order. This eliminates the need to perform a determination process to determine which bit to set as the processing target for the prize ball counting process, simplifying the process and thereby improving processing speed. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity required to store information such as programs and parameters required to perform the determination process.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the main CPU 62x can execute the timer interrupt process four times in a time shorter than the shortest interval between two consecutive game balls entering a single ball entry port (approximately 18 msec in this embodiment), and therefore can execute the prize ball tallying process (step S10808 in FIG. 29) for all eight processing target candidates (bits D0-D7 in the buffer area) in a time shorter than this shortest interval. Therefore, even if two game balls enter the same ball entry port consecutively, even if the entry detection information updated based on the detection of the first game ball at that ball entry port is set as the processing target and the prize ball tallying process is executed, and then the entry detection information corresponding to the remaining ball entry ports is set as the processing target and the prize ball tallying process is executed, the prize ball tallying process can be completed for all of this entry detection information before the next game ball is detected at that ball entry port. In other words, by the time the ball entry detection information updated based on the detection of the second game ball entering the ball entry opening is set as the processing target and the prize ball tallying process is executed, the prize ball tallying process for the ball entry detection information updated based on the detection of the first game ball entering the ball entry opening will have already been completed. The effects of this configuration are explained below.

In a configuration like this, where the ball entry detection information uses binary information of "0" or "1" indicating whether a game ball has entered a certain entry port, if the prize ball counting process is not performed on the ball entry detection information that was updated from "0" to "1" based on the entry of the first game ball into a certain entry port by the time the entry of the second game ball into that entry port is detected at that entry port, the ball entry detection information corresponding to that entry port will still be "1" when the entry of the second game ball is detected at that entry port, and the entry of the second game ball cannot be recorded. In other words, even though two game balls have entered that entry port in succession, the ball entry detection information corresponding to that entry port cannot be distinguished from a situation where only one game ball has entered that entry port, and the prize ball counting process will treat it as a situation where one game ball has entered that entry port. As a result, the prize ball counting process may not be able to record the accurate number of prize balls.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, when the entry of the second game ball is detected at the entry port, the prize ball tallying process is executed on the entry detection information that has already been updated by the entry of the first game ball at the entry port, and since the entry detection information is set to "0," it is possible to record the entry of the second game ball. As a result, it is possible to record the accurate number of prize balls in the prize ball tallying process. This makes it possible to use binary information, "0" or "1," indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the game, as the entry detection information while ensuring accuracy in the prize ball tallying process, thereby reducing the memory capacity required to store the entry detection information and improving the processing speed of the prize ball tallying process.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the gaming history processing (FIG. 29) includes a save process (step S10801 in FIG. 29) in which information held in a register within the master CPU 62x and used to execute processing related to game progress is written to a stack region in the second area of the master RAM 64. Therefore, when the master CPU 62x starts the gaming history processing, if the register within the master CPU 62x holds information for executing processing related to game progress that was being executed immediately before the start of the gaming history processing, the information can be temporarily moved (saved) by writing it to the stack region in the second area of the master RAM 64. Therefore, the information for executing processing related to game progress that was held in the register within the master CPU 62x can be erased, and when the master CPU 62x executes the gaming history processing, the information for executing the gaming history processing can be held in the register within the master CPU 62x.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the game history processing (FIG. 29) includes a restoration process (step S10813 in FIG. 29) that causes the information written to the stack region of the second area of the main RAM 64 during the save process to be stored in the register of the main CPU 62x. Therefore, when the game history processing is terminated, the information for executing processing related to game progress is again stored in the register of the main CPU 62x, and the processing related to game progress that was being executed before the start of the game history processing can be executed again from the state it was in immediately before the start of the game history processing.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the save process and restore process are included in the game history process, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which processes related to game progress other than the game history process can be executed without any problems even if only the program for executing the game history process is deleted. In other words, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the game history process without modifying the program for executing processes related to game progress other than the game history process. As a result, it is possible to minimize design changes, for example, when improving the gaming machine so that it does not execute the game history process, or when developing a new gaming machine based on the gaming machine that does not execute the game history process.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the main CPU 62x writes information in the game history processing only to the second area of the main RAM 64, thereby preventing information written in the first area of the main RAM 64 from being overwritten by the execution of the game history processing. Therefore, in a configuration in which processing related to game progress is executed using the first area of the main RAM 64, it is possible to prevent the game history processing from affecting the processing related to the game progress.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the main CPU 62x writes information in processing related to game progress only to the first area of the main RAM 64, thereby preventing information written in the second area of the main RAM 64 from being overwritten by the execution of processing related to game progress. Therefore, in a configuration in which processing for game history is executed using the second area of the main RAM 64, it is possible to prevent processing related to game progress from affecting the processing for game history.

In addition, this embodiment is provided with an 8-bit buffer area capable of storing ball-entry detection information, so the ball-entry detection information stored in the ball-entry detection information storage area, which is updated each time the timer interrupt process is executed, can be set as the processing target for the prize ball counting process and retained until that process is executed.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, when the prize ball counting process (step S10808) is executed in one timer interrupt process, the calculation process (tasks 1 and 2 in step S10814) is not executed. In other words, since both the prize ball counting process and the calculation process are not executed in one timer interrupt process, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process from becoming longer than the interrupt interval of the timer interrupt process, which would result in the timer interrupt process being unable to be executed at that interrupt interval. Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the prize ball counting process, in which the game ball entry status and processing load are correlated, is executed with priority over the calculation process in which the game ball entry status and processing load are not correlated. This prevents the interval between executions of the prize ball counting process from becoming too long, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the prize ball count value, which is the processing result of the prize ball counting process, from being unable to accurately reflect the game ball entry status. Specifically, for example, it is possible to prevent the next game ball from entering the ball entry port corresponding to a bit in the buffer area before the prize ball counting process is executed for that bit, resulting in two game balls being treated as one game ball.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, when the prize ball tallying process (step S10808) is not executed and it is determined that it is time to execute the calculation process (step S10810: YES), the calculation process (tasks 1 and 2 in step S10814) is executed. Therefore, neither the prize ball tallying process nor the calculation process is executed in a single timer interrupt process, and in this situation, instead of the prize ball tallying process and the calculation process, another process independent of these processes (in this embodiment, the process for determining the validity of the prize ball tally value (task 3 in step S10814)) can be executed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when either the prize ball tallying process or the calculation process is executed in a single timer interrupt process, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process is configured to be shorter than the interrupt interval. Therefore, by executing a process with a shorter processing time than the prize ball tallying process and the calculation process in a situation where neither the prize ball tallying process nor the calculation process is executed, it is possible to reliably prevent the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process from being longer than the interrupt interval.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, although it is possible to calculate two types of game history information, the combination ratio and the consecutive combination ratio, the calculation process in one timer interrupt process executes the calculation of either the combination ratio or the consecutive combination ratio. Therefore, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be shortened compared to a configuration in which the calculation process in one timer interrupt process executes the calculation of two types of game history information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process from becoming longer than the interrupt interval, preventing the timer interrupt process from being able to be executed at the specified interrupt interval. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main RAM 64 for temporarily storing the calculated game history information.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, in the ball entry detection process, if the ball entry determination information for a bit corresponding to each ball entry port changes from "0" to "1" to "1," it is determined that a game ball has entered the ball entry port corresponding to that bit. Therefore, as with the first embodiment described above, the occurrence of erroneous detection due to electrical noise can be suppressed.

<Aspect 24>
In the above-mentioned aspect 23, the game history information is configured to calculate the ratio of game features and the ratio of consecutive game features, but the game history information to be calculated is not limited to these, and various game history information shown in the first embodiment can be calculated. For example, the ball output rate and payout ratio shown in the first embodiment may be calculated. In this case, the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (the number of game balls that have been shot onto the game board 30) may also be calculated, similar to the prize ball counting process described above (step S10808 in FIG. 29 ).

<Aspect 25>
In the game history processing of the above-mentioned mode 23 (Figure 29), if it is determined in step S10802 that the abnormality flag is ON, the prize ball tally value is cleared (step S10803) and the abnormality flag is turned OFF (step S10804). However, if the abnormality flag is turned ON a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period, information indicating that an abnormality has occurred may be displayed on the game history information display unit 45z.

<Aspect 26>
In the above-mentioned aspect 23, the calculation process, which is the process of calculating the game history information, is configured to be divided into multiple tasks for execution, but the type of process to be divided into multiple tasks is not limited to this calculation process, and various processes can be configured to be divided into multiple tasks for execution. For example, in a configuration in which the content of the effect to be executed is set by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90, the process of setting the content of the effect may be configured to be divided into multiple tasks for execution.

<Aspect 27>
In the above-described aspect 23, two bits out of eight bits in the buffer area are set as the processing targets for the prize ball counting process. However, the number of bits to be processed is not limited to two and may be other numbers. For example, five bits may be set as the processing targets in one timer interrupt process. Also, all eight bits may be set as the processing targets in one timer interrupt process. Furthermore, only certain bits out of the eight bits (for example, six bits from bit 0 D0 to bit 5 D5 in which prize balls are set) may be set as the processing targets, and two bits may be set as the processing targets in one timer interrupt process.

<Aspect 28>
In the above-mentioned aspect 23, the first area of the main RAM 64 is allocated as a memory area for executing processing related to the progress of the game, and the second area of the main RAM 64 is allocated as a memory area for executing processing for the game history, but the second area of the main RAM 64 may also be allocated as a memory area for executing processing other than processing for the game history.

The main RAM 64 may also be configured to be divided into three or more areas. For example, the third area of the main RAM 64 may be assigned as a memory area for executing processing to output game history information to the outside.

<Aspect 29>
In the above-mentioned aspect 23, the saving process and the restoration process are included in the game history process, but the saving process and the restoration process may be included in a process other than the game history process. For example, the saving process and the restoration process may be included in a process that is scheduled to be deleted when the design of the gaming machine is changed.

<Aspect 30>
In the above-described embodiment 23, the game history processing is incorporated into the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27), but the game history processing may also be incorporated into the main processing (FIG. 12). Also, in the above-described embodiment 23, the game history processing is incorporated into the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27) as processing separate from processing related to game progress. However, processing other than the game history processing may also be incorporated into the timer interrupt processing as processing separate from processing related to game progress. For example, a transmission processing that transmits information regarding the game status to a hall computer installed in a gaming hall at a predetermined timing may be incorporated into the timer interrupt processing as processing separate from processing related to game progress. Also, various processing separate from processing related to game progress may be incorporated into the main processing.

<Aspect 31>
In the above-described aspect 23, the gaming history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x executes the gaming history processing (FIG. 29) to calculate the gaming history information. However, the gaming history management chip 300 may be provided, and the main CPU 62x executes the gaming history processing (FIG. 29) to calculate the gaming history information. With this configuration, the gaming history information can be calculated in two systems, so that even if a malfunction occurs in one system, the gaming history information can still be calculated. Furthermore, if the gaming history information calculated from the two systems is compared and a notification (display) is given as to whether or not these values match, it becomes possible to confirm the reliability and accuracy of the calculated gaming history information.

The gaming history management chip 300 may also be configured to calculate gaming history information by executing the gaming history processing (Figure 29) described in aspect 23 above.

<Aspect 32>
In step S10805 of the game history processing (Figure 29) of the above-mentioned aspect 23, the information stored in each bit of the ball entry detection information storage area (Figure 30) provided in the first area of the main RAM 64 is read out using OR processing.However, instead of this configuration, an 8-bit storage area (hereinafter also referred to as the second ball entry detection information storage area) corresponding to the ball entry detection information storage area may be provided in the second area of the main RAM 64, and the information stored in each bit of the ball entry detection information storage area provided in the first area of the main RAM 64 may be duplicated (copied) to the second ball entry detection information storage area provided in the second area of the main RAM 64, and the information of each duplicated bit may be read out using OR processing in step S10805.

The ball entry detection information storage area may also be configured to be located in the second area of the main RAM 64.

<Aspect 33>
In step S10814 of the gaming history processing ( FIG. 29 ) of the above-described aspect 23, if the calculation process (task 1 or task 2) for calculating gaming history information is not executed, the process for determining the validity of the prize ball tally included in task 3 is always executed. However, the process for determining the validity of the prize ball tally may be executed only once each time new gaming history information is calculated. Specifically, for example, after determining the validity of the prize ball tally in task 3, a determined flag indicating that the determination has been completed is set to ON. When task 3 is next executed, if the determined flag is ON, the process for determining the validity of the prize ball tally is not executed. Then, when task 1 is executed again, the determined flag may be set to OFF. This configuration makes it possible to determine the validity of the prize ball tally, which is the basis for calculating gaming history information, and ensure the validity of the gaming history information, while further shortening the processing time required to complete one gaming history processing.

<Aspect 34>
In step S10810 of the game history processing ( FIG. 29 ) of the above-described aspect 23, the timing to execute the calculation process is determined to be appropriate when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 minutes) has elapsed since the pachinko machine 10 was powered on, or when five seconds have elapsed since the previous execution of the calculation process, and the game history information is calculated. However, instead of this configuration, the timing to execute the calculation process for the first time may be determined immediately after power-on, without waiting for the predetermined time to elapse, and thereafter, the timing to execute the calculation process may be determined every five seconds since the previous execution of the calculation process. In this configuration, the calculated game history information may be displayed on the game history information display unit 45z as a flashing display until the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally reaches 60,000. After the total number of prize balls reaches 60,000, the calculated game history information may be displayed on the game history information display unit 45z as a solid display. This configuration makes it easy to determine whether a sufficient amount of statistical data has been accumulated to serve as the prize ball tally, which is the basis for calculating the displayed game history information. In addition, instead of the total number of winning balls, the display may be switched from flashing to lit based on the aggregate value of the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (the number of game balls that have been launched onto the game board 30).

<Aspect 35>
In step S10807 of the game history processing (FIG. 29) of the above-mentioned aspect 23, the multiple processing candidates for the prize ball tallying process are configured to be pre-fixed as eight bits in the buffer area. However, it is also possible to divide the eight bits in the buffer area into two groups of four, select one of the two groups as the multiple processing candidates for the prize ball tallying process, and set two bits from the four bits belonging to the selected group as the processing targets for the prize ball tallying process. However, as in the above-mentioned aspect 23, the multiple processing candidates for the prize ball tallying process are configured to be pre-fixed as eight bits in the buffer area, eliminating the need to select one of the two groups, thereby simplifying the processing and thereby improving processing speed. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity required to store information such as programs and parameters required to select one of the two groups.

<Aspect 36>
In the game history process of the above-mentioned aspect 23 (FIG. 29), the number and type of tasks (various processes) to be executed in the game history process in the current timer interrupt process may be determined based on the remaining time until the start of the next timer interrupt process. With this configuration, it is possible to execute tasks by effectively utilizing the remaining time until the start of the next timer interrupt process.

<Aspect 37>
31 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 37 of the first embodiment. In this aspect 37, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x is configured to execute the process for calculating and displaying the above-mentioned game history information (game history process). Similarly to the above-mentioned aspect 23 (FIG. 26), the main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (a first area and a second area). The first area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for storing programs for executing processes related to the progress of games and various flags (such as a high probability mode flag and a high frequency support mode flag), while the second area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for storing programs for executing processes for calculating and displaying the game history information (game history process) and various numerical information (such as the above-mentioned prize ball tally, ball count information, and game history information such as the ratio of winning balls). Then, as in the above-mentioned mode 23 (Figure 26), when the main CPU 62x is executing processing related to the progress of the game (processing other than processing for the game history), it writes information only to the first area of the main RAM 64, and when it is executing processing for the game history, it writes information only to the second area of the main RAM 64.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 31 , the main MPU 62 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is provided with a flash memory 64x, which is a rewritable, non-volatile memory that can retain its memory even when power is cut off. In this embodiment, a NAND-type flash memory is used as the flash memory 64x, but a NOR-type flash memory may also be used. In the game history process, the main CPU 62x of this embodiment executes a process of writing various numerical information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 to the flash memory 64x at predetermined timing. Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x executes a process of writing various prize ball tally values, etc. to the flash memory 64x each time the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally value reaches 500. In other words, the flash memory 64x stores various numerical information (game history information such as prize ball tally value, ball count information, and bonus feature ratio) acquired based on the execution of games.

In this way, with this configuration, various numerical information obtained based on the execution of games (game history information such as prize ball totals, ball count information, and bonus feature ratios) is stored in flash memory 64x, so this numerical information can be retained even if the power supply to pachinko machine 10 is cut off for an extended period of time. For example, even if power is not supplied to pachinko machine 10 for an extended period of time during distribution, it is possible to check whether normal gameplay has been performed on that pachinko machine 10 based on the various numerical information stored in flash memory 64x.

<Aspect 38>
In the above aspect 37, a depressible flash memory clear button may be provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, and when the flash memory clear button is pressed continuously for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), the information stored in the flash memory 64x (such as the prize ball tally, number of balls entered, and game history information such as the ratio of special devices) may be erased.

Specifically, for example, an erasure processing IC chip capable of executing an erasure process to erase information stored in flash memory 64x is provided, and a high-level signal is input to the input terminal of the erasure processing IC chip while the flash memory clear button is pressed. The erasure processing IC chip is then configured to execute an erasure process to erase the information stored in flash memory 64x based on the high-level signal input to the input terminal remaining for 10 seconds. With this configuration, compared to a configuration in which information stored in flash memory 64x is erased by processing by the main CPU 62x, it is possible to erase information stored in flash memory 64x while minimizing the impact on game execution processing by the main CPU 62x and the operation of the main RAM 64.

Furthermore, the flash memory clear button may be configured to be stored inside a space that leaves evidence of opening. Specifically, for example, the flash memory clear button may be stored inside a circuit board box that has a seal attached that leaves evidence of opening, and the button cannot be pressed unless the seal is removed and the circuit board box is opened.

According to this configuration, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of a pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to open the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the flash memory clear button, which leaves evidence of opening on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, based on whether or not there are any evidence of opening on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether or not the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 has been opened and the information stored in the flash memory 64x has likely been erased.

If a pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, by illegally altering the nails), the effects of the illegal modifications will be apparent in the game that is played, and may also be apparent in the information (for example, the ratio of winning combinations) stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10. A person inspecting whether a pachinko machine 10 is operating normally (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") can discover any illegal modifications made to the pachinko machine 10 by checking the information stored in the flash memory 64x. For this reason, there may be someone (hereinafter also referred to as an "illegal person") who wishes to erase the information in order to prevent an inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified.

However, with this configuration, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, it is necessary to open the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the flash memory clear button. This leaves evidence of the opening on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10, so even if an unauthorized person erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x, there will remain evidence that the information may have been erased in order to conceal the fraud. This makes it more difficult to conceal unauthorized modifications made to the pachinko machine 10, and ultimately reduces the motivation to make unauthorized modifications to the pachinko machine 10, thereby improving the soundness of gaming.

It should be noted that pachinko machines 10 are sometimes traded and circulated, and a person wishing to distribute a pachinko machine 10 that has already been played on (a so-called used pachinko machine) may have a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system were established in which only a person with a legitimate reason for wishing to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as a "legitimate person") could erase any traces of the board box being opened, it would be possible to ensure the integrity of play while promoting the smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10. Specifically, for example, by establishing a distribution system in which only the legitimate manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10 can affix a new seal, it would be possible to ensure the integrity of play while promoting the smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10.

The configuration for erasing information stored in flash memory 64x based on the operation of the flash memory clear button is not limited to the above configuration, and various other configurations can be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which information stored in flash memory 64x is erased when the flash memory clear button is pressed a predetermined number of times (e.g., five times) within a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). Alternatively, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which an IC chip for erasure processing is not provided, and the primary CPU 62x monitors whether the flash memory clear button is pressed, and when the flash memory clear button is pressed continuously for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), an erasure program for erasing the information stored in flash memory 64x is executed to erase the information.

Furthermore, the flash memory clear button is not limited to being stored inside a circuit board box with a seal attached, but may be stored in a space that leaves traces of opening (also known as traces of opening or closing). For example, the flash memory clear button may be stored inside a space covered by a lid member, and the flash memory clear button cannot be operated unless at least a portion of the lid member is destroyed to open the space. In such a configuration, the lid member must be destroyed to open the space in order to operate the flash memory clear button. Therefore, when the flash memory clear button is pressed, the destroyed lid member remains as evidence that the space containing the flash memory has been opened. Furthermore, for example, the flash memory clear button may be stored inside a circuit board box formed by multiple case bodies (e.g., a box-shaped case body and a lid-shaped case body that can seal the open portion of the box-shaped case body) joined by a joint (crimped portion), and a predetermined portion of the joint (crimped portion) must be destroyed to separate the multiple case bodies that make up the circuit board box. With this configuration, operating the flash memory clear button requires destroying a specific portion of the joint (crimped portion) to separate the multiple case bodies and open the board box. Therefore, when the flash memory clear button is pressed, the joint (crimped portion) where the specific portion was destroyed remains as a sign that the board box was opened. Furthermore, the flash memory clear button may be configured to be housed inside a board box joined by the above-described joint (crimped portion), and a seal that leaves a sign of its removal by leaving an adhesive layer on the bonded object when peeled may be affixed across the boundary between the multiple case bodies. With this configuration, when the flash memory clear button is pressed, in addition to the joint (crimped portion) where the specific portion was destroyed as a sign of the board box being opened, other signs of the board box being opened, such as the seal being peeled or cut at the boundary between the case bodies, remain.

<Aspect 39>
In the above-mentioned aspect 37, the above-mentioned inspection machine 320 (Figure 10) for inspecting whether various game history information is within a normal range may be connected to the inspection terminal 65 provided on the main MPU 62, and when a predetermined signal (for example, an erase command) is received from the inspection machine 320, the information stored in the flash memory 64x (game history information such as prize ball tally, number of balls entered, and ratio of special devices) may be erased.

Specifically, for example, as in the above-described aspect 38, an erasure processing IC chip capable of executing erasure processing to erase information stored in flash memory 64x is provided, and when an erasure command is sent from inspection device 320 connected to inspection terminals 65, the erasure command is input to an input terminal of the erasure processing IC chip. Then, based on receiving the erasure command from the input terminal, the erasure processing IC chip executes erasure processing to erase the information stored in flash memory 64x.

With this configuration, the erasure processing IC chip erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x upon receiving an erasure command from the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminals 65. This allows anyone who owns the inspection device 320 to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. In other words, it is possible to restrict the erasure of information by anyone who does not own the inspection device 320.

If the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, the nails are illegally altered), the illegal modifications may affect the game that is played, and may also affect the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the ratio of winning combinations, etc.). An inspector who inspects whether the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally can discover any illegal modifications to the pachinko machine 10 by, for example, connecting the inspection device 320 to the inspection terminal 65 and checking the information stored in the flash memory 64x with the inspection device 320. For this reason, there may be someone (a fraudulent person) who wishes to erase the information to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified.

However, with this configuration, erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x requires an inspection device 320 that can be connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, by restricting who can have the inspection device 320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized persons from erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x, which in turn makes it possible to prevent the emergence of motivations to make unauthorized modifications to the pachinko machine 10, thereby improving the soundness of gaming.

It should be noted that pachinko machines 10 may be traded and circulated from one place to another, and a person wishing to distribute a pachinko machine 10 that has already been played on (a so-called second-hand pachinko machine 10) may have a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of that pachinko machine 10 before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system is established in which only those with a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of a pachinko machine 10 (for example, the manufacturer of that pachinko machine 10) and the above-mentioned inspectors have access to the inspection machine 320, it will be possible to promote the smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10 while ensuring the integrity of gaming.

Furthermore, when information stored in flash memory 64x is erased, the information stored in flash memory 64x may be transmitted to an inspection device 320 connected to inspection terminal 65 prior to the erasure.

Specifically, for example, upon receiving an erase command from the input terminal, the above-mentioned erasure processing IC chip transmits a transmission start command to the inspection device 320, indicating that it will begin transmitting the information stored in flash memory 64x. Upon receiving the transmission start command, the inspection device 320 transitions to a reception ready mode in which it can receive information, and transmits a reception ready command to the erasure processing IC chip, indicating that it is in reception ready mode. Upon receiving the reception ready command, the erasure processing IC chip begins transmitting the information stored in flash memory 64x. Upon completing transmission of the information, the erasure processing IC chip transmits a transmission completion command to the inspection device 320. Upon receiving the transmission completion command, the inspection device 320 checks the received information for errors such as missing data, and if no errors are found, transmits a reception completion command to the erasure processing IC chip. Upon receiving the reception completion command, the erasure processing IC chip executes an erasure process to erase the information stored in flash memory 64x.

With this configuration, even if information stored in flash memory 64x is erased by an erroneous operation against the will of the person who owns inspection device 320, the information erased from flash memory 64x will remain in inspection device 320, and the information can be confirmed by inspection device 320.

The configuration for erasing information stored in flash memory 64x upon receiving a predetermined signal from inspection device 320 is not limited to the above configuration, and various other configurations can be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which an erasure process IC chip is not provided, and the primary CPU 62x monitors whether an erasure command has been received from inspection device 320 connected to inspection terminals 65, and, upon receiving the erasure command, executes an erasure program for erasing the information stored in flash memory 64x, thereby erasing the information. Furthermore, upon receiving an erasure command from inspection device 320, the primary CPU 62x may transmit the information stored in flash memory 64x to the inspection device 320, and then executes an erasure program for erasing the information, thereby erasing the information stored in flash memory 64x.

In this embodiment, the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased using an inspection device 320 that checks whether various pieces of gaming history information are within normal ranges. However, this is not limited to the configuration using an inspection device 320; it is also possible to erase information stored in the flash memory 64x using a dedicated terminal for erasing the information.

<Aspect 40>
In the above-mentioned aspect 37, when a flash memory clear button stored inside the space where traces of opening remain is pressed continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) and a predetermined signal (for example, an erase command) is received from the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, the information stored in the flash memory 64x (such as the prize ball tally, number of balls entered, and game history information such as the ratio of special devices) may be erased.

Specifically, for example, as in aspect 38 above, an erasure processing IC chip capable of executing an erasure processing to erase information stored in flash memory 64x is provided, and a high-level signal is input to the input terminal of the erasure processing IC chip while the flash memory clear button is pressed. Then, based on the high-level signal input to the input terminal remaining for 10 seconds, the erasure processing IC chip transitions to an erasure processing execution standby mode in which it can execute an erasure processing to erase information stored in flash memory 64x. When the erasure processing IC chip receives an erasure command from the inspection machine 320 in this erasure processing execution standby mode, it executes an erasure processing to erase the information stored in flash memory 64x.

According to this configuration, the flash memory clear button is stored inside the circuit board box, which leaves evidence of opening. Therefore, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10, the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 must be opened and the flash memory clear button must be operated, leaving evidence of opening on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, the erasure processing IC chip erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x upon receiving a predetermined signal from the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, so that anyone who possesses the inspection device 320 can erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. Therefore, based on whether or not there are evidence of opening on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether or not the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 may have been opened and the information stored in the flash memory 64x may have been erased, and it is also possible to restrict the erasure of that information by anyone without the inspection device 320.

If the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, the nails are illegally altered), the illegal modifications may affect the game that is played, and may also affect the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the ratio of winning combinations, etc.). An inspector who inspects whether the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally can discover any illegal modifications to the pachinko machine 10 by, for example, connecting the inspection device 320 to the inspection terminal 65 and checking the information stored in the flash memory 64x with the inspection device 320. For this reason, there may be someone (a fraudulent person) who wishes to erase the information to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified.

However, with this configuration, erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x requires an inspection device 320 connectable to the inspection terminals 65 of the pachinko machine 10. Restricting who can have the inspection device 320 can prevent unauthorized individuals from erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x. Even if an unauthorized individual were to obtain the inspection device 320, they would need to open the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the flash memory clear button to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. This would leave evidence of the opening on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10, suggesting that even if the information stored in the flash memory 64x was erased, this would leave evidence that the information may have been erased to conceal fraud. This prevents unauthorized individuals from erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x and makes it more difficult to conceal unauthorized modifications to the pachinko machine 10. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the motivation to make illegal modifications to the pachinko machine 10, thereby improving the integrity of gaming.

It should be noted that pachinko machines 10 may be traded and circulated from one place to another, and a person wishing to distribute a pachinko machine 10 that has already been played on (a so-called second-hand pachinko machine 10) may have a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of that pachinko machine 10 before distributing it. Therefore, if only those with a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of a pachinko machine 10 (for example, the manufacturer of that pachinko machine 10) and the inspectors described above can possess the inspection machine 320, and if a distribution system is established in which only legitimate parties can erase evidence of the board box being opened, it will be possible to promote the smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10 while ensuring the integrity of play.

The configuration for erasing information stored in flash memory 64x when the flash memory clear button accepts a predetermined operation and receives a predetermined signal from inspection machine 320 is not limited to the above configuration, and various other configurations can be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the erasure process IC chip transitions to the above-mentioned erasure process execution standby mode when the flash memory clear button is pressed a predetermined number of times (e.g., five times) within a predetermined time period (e.g., 10 seconds). Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which, when an erasure command is received from inspection machine 320, the erasure process IC chip transitions to the above-mentioned erasure process execution standby mode, and when the flash memory clear button is pressed continuously for a predetermined time period (e.g., 10 seconds) in the erasure process execution standby mode, the erasure process is executed to erase the information stored in flash memory 64x. Furthermore, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which an erasure process IC chip is not provided, and the primary CPU 62x executes a function equivalent to that of the erasure process IC chip to erase the information stored in flash memory 64x.

Furthermore, similar to the above-described aspect 39, when information stored in flash memory 64x is erased, the information stored in flash memory 64x may be transmitted to inspection device 320 connected to inspection terminal 65 prior to the erasure. With this configuration, even if the information stored in flash memory 64x is erased by an erroneous operation against the will of the owner of inspection device 320, the information erased from flash memory 64x remains on inspection device 320, and can therefore be confirmed by inspection device 320.

<Aspect 41>
In the above aspect 37, an operation panel that accepts input of authentication information (e.g., a PIN number) and a display that displays the input authentication information may be provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, and when the authentication information input by the operation panel matches the authentication information that is individually set for the pachinko machine 10, the information stored in the flash memory 64x (such as the prize ball total, ball count information, and game history information such as the ratio of special devices) may be erased.

Specifically, for example, as in aspect 38 above, an erasure processing IC chip capable of executing erasure processing to erase information stored in flash memory 64x is provided, and authentication information entered via the operation panel is input to the input terminal of the erasure processing IC chip. The erasure processing IC chip then determines whether the authentication information entered via the operation panel matches the authentication information stored in the ROM of the erasure processing IC chip, and if it determines that they match, executes erasure processing to erase the information stored in flash memory 64x.

According to this configuration, the erasure processing IC chip erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on a match between the authentication information received by the reception means and the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10. This allows anyone who has the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, someone who knows the PIN number set in the pachinko machine 10) to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. In other words, it is possible to restrict the erasure of information by anyone who does not have the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10.

If a pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, the nails are illegally altered), the effects of the illegal modifications will be apparent in the game that is played, and may also be apparent in the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the ratio of winning combinations, etc.). An inspector who inspects whether a pachinko machine 10 is operating normally can discover any illegal modifications made to the pachinko machine 10 by checking the information stored in the flash memory 64x. For this reason, there may be someone (a fraudulent person) who wishes to erase the information to prevent an inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified.

However, with this configuration, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, it is necessary to have the authentication information set on the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, by restricting who can have the authentication information set on the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent unauthorized persons from erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x, which in turn makes it possible to prevent the emergence of motivations to make unauthorized modifications to the pachinko machine 10, thereby improving the soundness of gaming.

It should be noted that pachinko machines 10 may be traded and circulated from one place to another, and a person wishing to distribute a pachinko machine 10 that has already been played on (a so-called second-hand pachinko machine 10) may have a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of that pachinko machine 10 before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system were established in which only a person with a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of that pachinko machine 10 (for example, the manufacturer of that pachinko machine 10) could have the authentication information set on that pachinko machine 10, it would be possible to promote the smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10 while ensuring the integrity of gaming.

The authentication information entered to erase information stored in flash memory 64x is not limited to a PIN; various types of authentication information can be used. For example, authentication information can include authentication characters (passwords, passphrases) that are a combination of multiple character strings, barcodes with specific patterns, passwords generated according to predetermined rules (e.g., one-time passwords), and biometric authentication information of a specific person (fingerprints, irises, vein patterns, etc.).

<Aspect 42>
In the above-mentioned aspect 37, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game including the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, etc.) is erased, and the information stored in the second area (information obtained based on the executed game, such as the prize ball tally, the number of balls entered, game history information such as the ratio of special devices, etc.) may be configured not to be erased.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON, the main CPU 62x determines whether the RAM clear button is pressed, and if it determines that the RAM clear button is pressed, it erases the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64, but does not erase the information stored in the second area.

This configuration makes it possible to erase the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of games) while leaving the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game). Specifically, for example, when a malfunction occurs in the control of game execution or when an amusement hall opens or closes for business, there is a desire to erase the information used to control the execution of games and initialize the control of the gaming machine, but not to erase the information acquired based on the executed game. With this configuration, by operating the RAM clear button, it is possible to erase the information used to control the execution of games while leaving the information acquired based on the executed game, and initialize the control of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, in addition to the RAM clear button described above, a second RAM clear button for erasing information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and when the second RAM clear button is pressed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) while the power to the pachinko machine 10 is ON, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may be erased.

Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x monitors whether the second RAM clear button is pressed, and if it determines that the second RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds), it erases the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 from the information stored in the main RAM 64.

With this configuration, information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game) that cannot be erased by operating the RAM clear button can be erased by operating the second clear button.

Furthermore, the second RAM clear button may be configured to be stored inside a space that leaves evidence of opening. Specifically, for example, the second RAM clear button may be stored inside a circuit board box to which a seal that leaves evidence of opening has been affixed, and the button cannot be pressed unless the seal is removed and the circuit board box is opened.

According to this configuration, in order to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to open the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the second RAM clear button, which leaves traces of opening on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, based on whether or not traces of opening remain on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether or not the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 has been opened and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 has likely been erased.

If the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, the nails are illegally altered), the illegal modifications will affect the game that is played, and may also affect the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the ratio of winning devices, etc.). An inspector who checks whether a game is being played normally on the pachinko machine 10 can discover any illegal modifications made to the pachinko machine 10 by checking the information stored in the flash memory 64x and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. For this reason, there may be someone (a fraudulent person) who wishes to erase the information to prevent an inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified.

However, with this configuration, in order to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, it is necessary to open the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the second RAM clear button. This leaves evidence of the opening on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10, so even if a fraudulent person erases the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, there will remain evidence that the information may have been erased in order to conceal fraud. This makes it more difficult to conceal fraudulent modifications made to the pachinko machine 10, and ultimately reduces the motivation to make fraudulent modifications to the pachinko machine 10, thereby improving the soundness of gaming.

Note that pachinko machines 10 are sometimes traded and circulated, and a person wishing to distribute a pachinko machine 10 that has already been played on (a so-called used pachinko machine) may have a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10 before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system were established in which only a person (a legitimate person) with a legitimate reason for wanting to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10 could erase traces of the opening of the circuit board box, it would be possible to promote the smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10 while ensuring the integrity of play. Specifically, for example, by establishing a distribution system in which only the legitimate manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10 can affix a new seal, it would be possible to promote the smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10 while ensuring the integrity of play.

The space in which traces of opening (also known as traces of unsealing or traces of opening and closing) remain can be configured in any of the various ways described in aspect 38 above.

<Aspect 43>
In the above-mentioned aspect 37, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, and when the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, but the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not erased.On the other hand, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is performed, and when the RAM clear button remains pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is not erased, but the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is erased.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON, the main CPU 62x determines whether the RAM clear button is pressed, and if it determines that the RAM clear button is pressed, it monitors whether the RAM clear button remains pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). If it determines that the RAM clear button has been released within the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the main CPU 62x erases the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64, but does not erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. On the other hand, if it determines that the RAM clear button has remained pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the main CPU 62x does not erase the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64, but erases the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64.

With this configuration, by performing different operations on the RAM clear button, it is possible to select the information to be erased from the information stored in the main RAM 64. In other words, the information to be erased can be selected without providing any other operation unit (e.g., a button) for selecting the information to be erased, thereby simplifying the structure of the pachinko machine 10.

Specifically, for example, if a malfunction occurs in controlling game execution or at the start or end of business hours of an amusement parlor, and you want to erase the information used to control game execution (the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) and initialize the control of the gaming machine, you can turn on the power to the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button, and ensure that the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). On the other hand, if you want to erase the information acquired based on the game that was executed (the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64) and start selling the gaming machine anew, you can turn on the power to the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button, and ensure that the RAM clear button remains pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). In this way, by performing different operations on the RAM clear button, it is possible to select the information to be erased from the information stored in the main RAM 64.

Note that while the process of erasing information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is being executed, the above-mentioned game history process cannot be executed, which may result in errors in the number of game balls entering each ball entry port and the total number of winning balls. Therefore, by configuring the system so that game play does not begin until the erasure process is complete (for example, by preventing the launch of game balls), the occurrence of such errors can be prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is performed and the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and further, it is determined whether the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is valid. If it is determined to be valid, the information is not erased, and if it is determined to be invalid, the information is erased. This configuration can prevent gameplay from starting while the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is still invalid. Note that cases in which the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is invalid include, for example, when the number of prize balls for a special feature exceeds the total number of prize balls, when the number of consecutive prize balls for a special feature exceeds the total number of prize balls, or when the number of consecutive prize balls for a special feature exceeds the number of prize balls for a special feature, resulting in a discrepancy in the prize ball count.

<Aspect 44>
In the above-mentioned aspect 37, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, and when the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, but the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not erased.On the other hand, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is performed, and the RAM clear button remains pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), not only is the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 erased, but the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may also be erased.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main CPU 62x determines whether the RAM clear button is pressed, and if it determines that the RAM clear button is pressed, it erases the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. Furthermore, the main CPU 62x monitors whether the RAM clear button remains pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), and if it determines that the RAM clear button has been released within the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), it does not erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. On the other hand, if it determines that the RAM clear button has remained pressed for the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the main CPU 62x also erases the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64.

With this configuration, similar to the above-described aspect 43, it is possible to select the information to be erased from the information stored in the main RAM 64 by performing different operations on the RAM clear button. Furthermore, by performing the operation of turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button and keeping the RAM clear button pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), it is possible to erase both the information stored in the first area and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64.

Note that while the process of erasing information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is being executed, the above-mentioned game history process cannot be executed, which may result in errors in the number of game balls entering each ball entry port and the total number of winning balls. Therefore, by configuring the system so that game play does not begin until the erasure process is complete (for example, by preventing the launch of game balls), the occurrence of such errors can be prevented.

<Aspect 45>
In the above aspect 37, when the RAM clear button located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is pressed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may be erased.

Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x monitors whether the RAM clear button is pressed, and if it determines that the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds), it erases the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 from the information stored in the main RAM 64.

This configuration makes it possible to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 without providing a separate operation unit (e.g., a button) for erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. Note that while the process of erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is being executed, the above-mentioned game history process cannot be executed temporarily, which may result in errors in the number of game balls entering each ball entry port, the total number of winning balls, etc. Therefore, by temporarily halting game play (e.g., temporarily preventing the launch of game balls) from the start to the end of the execution of the erasure process, the occurrence of such errors can be suppressed.

<Aspect 46>
In each of the above aspects, a configuration may be adopted in which, when information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game, such as the prize ball tally, ball count information, game history information such as the ratio of winning balls, and other information acquired based on the executed game), information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, such as the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag) is erased. In other words, when a predetermined operation for erasing information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is performed or when a predetermined signal for erasing information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is received from another device (e.g., the inspection machine 320), not only is the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 erased, but the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 may also be erased without fail.

This configuration can prevent the occurrence of a situation in which information acquired based on an executed game (information stored in the second area of main RAM 64) is erased, but information used to control the execution of the game (information stored in the first area of main RAM 64) is not erased and remains unchanged. Specifically, for example, since the information acquired based on an executed game serves as collateral for determining the fairness of the game executed on the pachinko machine 10, when this collateral information is erased, it is preferable to initialize the game status of the pachinko machine 10 by erasing information used to control the execution of the game on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, information related to the high probability mode flag and high frequency support mode flag that indicate the game status). According to this configuration, when information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64) is erased, the information used to control the execution of the game (information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) is also erased. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as is because the information used to control the execution of the game (information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) is not erased even though the information used to ensure the fairness of the game has been erased.

Furthermore, for example, if a configuration were adopted in which information acquired based on a game played (information stored in the second area of main RAM 64) was erased but information used to control the execution of the game (information stored in the first area of main RAM 64) was not erased and instead remained as is, the high probability mode or high frequency support mode may be maintained in the pachinko machine 10 even though the information acquired based on the game played (information stored in the second area of main RAM 64) was erased. In this case, when a game is played on the pachinko machine 10, the game starts in the high probability mode or high frequency support mode when the amount of information acquired based on the game played is insufficient to serve as statistical data, which increases the likelihood that game history information such as the ratio of bonus items will be calculated as biased values. Therefore, as in this embodiment, when information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game, such as the prize ball tally, ball count information, game history information such as the device ratio, etc.) is erased, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, such as the high probability mode flag and high frequency support mode flag) is also erased, making it possible to prevent game history information such as the device ratio from being calculated as a biased value.

A variety of operating modes can be used to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. For example, a RAM clear button located on the back of the pachinko machine 10 can be pressed while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM clear button is left pressed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds), a second RAM clear button located separately on the back of the pachinko machine 10 can be pressed while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, or both the RAM clear button and the second RAM clear button can be pressed while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

Furthermore, for example, if the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is performed, and the RAM clear button is no longer pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, including the high probability mode flag and high frequency support mode flag, etc.) is erased, while the information stored in the second area (information obtained based on the executed game, such as the prize ball tally, ball count information, game history information such as the ratio of winning balls, etc.) may not be erased.

This configuration makes it possible to erase the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of games) while leaving the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game). Specifically, for example, when a malfunction occurs in the control of game execution or when an amusement hall opens or closes for business, there is a desire to erase the information used to control the execution of games and initialize the control of the gaming machine, but not to erase the information acquired based on the executed game. With this configuration, by operating the RAM clear button, it is possible to erase the information used to control the execution of games while leaving the information acquired based on the executed game, and initialize the control of the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in this embodiment. The main CPU 62x executes this main processing when the power is turned on.

In step S10901, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is pressed. If it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button is not pressed (step S10901: NO), the process proceeds to step S10902, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button is pressed (step S10901: YES), the process proceeds to step S10903, where it is determined whether the RAM clear button remains pressed.

If it is determined in step S10903 that the RAM clear button is no longer pressed, that is, if it is determined that the RAM clear button is no longer pressed (step S10903: NO), the process proceeds to step S10904, where the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased and initial setting processing for that first area is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S10908, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10903 that the RAM clear button is still pressed (step S10903: YES), the process proceeds to step S10905, where it is determined whether the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds).

If it is determined in step S10905 that the RAM clear button has not been pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) (step S10905: NO), the process returns to step S10903, where it is determined whether the RAM clear button continues to be pressed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10905 that the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) (step S10905: YES), the process proceeds to step S10906. In other words, if the RAM clear button has not been pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the process proceeds to step S10904 described above, and if the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the process proceeds to step S10906 described below.

In step S10906, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and initial setting processing for the first area is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S10907, where the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and initial setting processing for the second area is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S10908, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button is not pressed (step S10901: NO), the process proceeds to step S10902, where it is determined whether the information stored in the second area of main RAM 64 is valid. Specifically, it is determined whether the prize ball tally (number of prize balls for special feature games, number of consecutive prize balls for special feature games, total number of prize balls), which is the information stored in the second area of main RAM 64, is valid. Here, a case where the prize ball tally is invalid is when there is a contradiction in the prize ball tally, such as when the number of prize balls for special feature games exceeds the total number of prize balls, when the number of consecutive prize balls for special feature games exceeds the total number of prize balls, or when the number of consecutive prize balls for special feature games exceeds the number of prize balls for special feature games. If it is determined in step S10902 that the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is invalid (step S10902: NO), the process proceeds to steps S10906 and S10907 described above, where the information stored in the first area and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 are erased. Then, the process proceeds to step S10908. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10902 that the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is valid (step S10902: YES), the process proceeds directly to step S10908.

In step S10908, interrupt permission is set to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. After step S10908 is executed, the remaining processing of steps S10909 to S10912 follows. Since the remaining processing of steps S10909 to S10912 is the same as the remaining processing of steps S10104 to S10107 in Figure 12 described above, a description of this processing will be omitted.

According to the processing flow described above, when the process of erasing information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information obtained based on the executed game, such as the prize ball tally, ball count information, and game history information such as the ratio of special devices) (processing of step S10906) is executed, the process of erasing information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, such as the high probability mode flag and high frequency support mode flag) (processing of step S10907) is also executed.

<Aspect 47>
In each of the above aspects, a configuration may be adopted in which, when information stored in the flash memory 64x (information acquired based on the executed game, such as the prize ball tally, the number of balls entered, and game history information, including the ratio of special devices) is erased, information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, such as the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag) is also erased. In other words, when an operation for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is executed or when a predetermined signal for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is received from another device (for example, the inspection machine 320), not only is the information stored in the flash memory 64x erased, but the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is also erased without fail.

This configuration can prevent the occurrence of a situation in which information acquired based on an executed game (information stored in flash memory 64x) is erased, but information used to control the execution of the game (information stored in the first area of main RAM 64) is not erased and remains unchanged. Specifically, for example, since the information acquired based on an executed game serves as collateral for determining the fairness of the game executed on the pachinko machine 10, when this collateral information is erased, it is preferable to initialize the game status of the pachinko machine 10 by erasing information used to control the execution of the game on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, information related to the high probability mode flag and high frequency support mode flag indicating the game status). According to this configuration, when information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in flash memory 64x) is erased, the information used to control the execution of the game (information stored in the first area of main RAM 64) is also erased. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as is because the information used to control the execution of the game (information stored in the first area of main RAM 64) is not erased even though the information used to ensure the fairness of the game has been erased.

Furthermore, when information stored in flash memory 64x (information acquired based on the executed game) is erased, in addition to information stored in the first area of main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, such as the high probability mode flag and high frequency support mode flag), information stored in the second area of main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game) may also be erased.

<Aspect 48>
In some of the above-mentioned embodiments, the main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (a first area and a second area), and the first area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for storing programs for executing processes related to the progress of the game and various flags (such as a high probability mode flag and a high frequency support mode flag), and the second area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for storing programs for executing processes for calculating and displaying game history information (game history processing) and various numerical information (game history information such as the above-mentioned prize ball tally, number of balls entered, and special device ratio), but instead of this configuration, a configuration may be used in which a RAM that performs the functions of the first area of the main RAM 64 (a RAM used for game progress processing) and a RAM that performs the functions of the second area of the main RAM 64 (a RAM used for game history processing) are separately provided.

<Aspect 49>
Among the above-described embodiments, in an embodiment including a flash memory 64x, the flash memory 64x may be configured to be stored in a space that leaves evidence of opening (e.g., a circuit board box with a seal attached). With this configuration, in order to tamper with the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 would need to be opened, leaving evidence of opening on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10. That is, based on whether or not evidence of opening remains on the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether or not the circuit board box of the pachinko machine 10 has been opened and the information stored in the flash memory 64x may have been tampered with. This makes it difficult to conceal tampering with the information stored in the flash memory 64x, thereby reducing the motivation to tamper with the information stored in the flash memory 64x and improving the integrity of the game.

The space in which traces of opening (also known as traces of unsealing or traces of opening and closing) remain can be configured in any of the various ways described in aspect 38 above.

<Aspect 50>
33 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of a part of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 50. The main MPU 62 in this aspect is provided with a ball entry detection IC 62c between the input/output port 62a and the main CPU 62x.

The ball entry detection IC 62c is electrically connected to each ball entry detection sensor 44a-44h via the input/output port 62a, and determines whether a game ball has entered each entry port based on the signals received from each ball entry detection sensor 44a-44h, and outputs information indicating the result of this determination (ball entry information, which is information regarding whether a game ball has entered each entry port) to the main CPU 62x and the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. Specific details are explained below.

Each ball entry detection sensor 44a-44h, which detects the entry of a game ball into each entry port, is electrically connected to eight input bits, numbered D0 through D7, provided in input port 62b. These eight input bits D0 through D7 are electrically connected to eight input bits R0 through R7 provided in entry ball detection IC 62c. In this embodiment, a low-level signal is always input to each of the eight input bits R0 through R7 provided in entry ball detection IC 62c. When a game ball enters an entry port, the entry ball detection sensor detects the entry of a game ball into that entry port, and the signal input to the input bit of the eight input bits R0 through R7 corresponding to that entry ball detection sensor rises from low to high.

The ball entry detection IC 62c determines whether a game ball has entered each entry gate based on the signals output from each entry gate detection sensor 44a-44h. In this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c monitors eight input bits R0-R7 corresponding to each of the eight entry gate detection sensors 44a-44h. When it detects a rising edge from a low level to a high level in the signal input to each input bit, it determines that a game ball has entered the entry gate corresponding to that input bit. However, if it detects a rising edge but the high level state does not continue for a predetermined period, or if it detects a rising edge but the rising edge occurred within a predetermined interval from the most recent falling edge, it determines that the detected rising edge is likely noise and therefore that a game ball has not entered the entry gate corresponding to that input bit. Various methods can be used to determine whether a game ball has entered each entry gate, including, for example, the method similar to the ball entry determination process described above (Figures 16 and 17).

The ball entry detection IC 62c determines whether or not a gaming ball has entered each entry port at predetermined intervals, and outputs the ball entry information indicating the results of this determination via serial transmission to the main CPU 62x and also to the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. In this embodiment, since eight ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are provided, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry information (8 bits of ball entry information) indicating whether or not a gaming ball has entered each of the eight entry ports at predetermined intervals (every 4 ms). Specifically, the ball entry detection IC 62c constantly outputs a low-level signal, and at predetermined intervals (every 4 ms) after determining whether a ball has entered the game, it outputs a 50 μs high-level signal as a start bit, then outputs eight bits of a 50 μs high-level signal (ball entered) or low-level signal (ball not entered) corresponding to whether a game ball has entered each of the eight entry ports, and finally outputs a 50 μs low-level signal as a stop bit.

The main CPU 62x receives ball entry information from the ball entry detection IC 62c and executes processing related to the progress of the game, such as the jackpot lottery described above and the payout of prize balls, based on the received ball entry information for each entry port. The main CPU 62x also executes the game history processing described above (Figure 29), and executes processing related to the calculation and display of game history information such as the payout rate (total), feature ratio, and consecutive feature ratio. The main CPU 62x then stores the numerical information used in the calculation process of the game history information and the calculated game history information in flash memory 64x.

Next, we will explain the inspection using an inspection device 320 that can receive the ball entry information output from the ball entry detection IC 62c.

In this embodiment, while a game is being played on the pachinko machine 10, that is, while a player or inspector is operating the operating handle 25 of the pachinko machine 10 to launch game balls onto the game board 30 and play the game as usual, the inspector uses the inspection device 320 to inspect whether legitimate play is being played on the pachinko machine 10 during this inspection period. This is explained in detail below.

The inspection machine 320 can execute a ball entry information reception mode in which it receives ball entry information for each ball entry port from the ball entry detection IC 62c; a ball entry port information setting mode in which it sets ball entry port information, which is information about the type of ball entry port and the number of winning balls provided in the pachinko machine 10; and a game history information calculation mode in which it calculates the various game history information described above based on the received ball entry information and the set ball entry port information.

When inspecting whether legitimate play is being played on a pachinko machine 10, an inspector connects the connection cable 329 of the inspection device 320 to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, and operates the operation unit 327 of the inspection device 320 to switch the inspection device 320 to the ball-entering information reception mode described above. The player or inspector then operates the operation handle 25 of the pachinko machine 10 being inspected to launch game balls onto the game board 30, and continues playing the game as usual.

When the inspection device 320 switches to the goal information receiving mode, it outputs a high-level signal to the output permission signal line 329b in the connection cable 329. The output permission signal line 329b is electrically connected to the output permission determination bit 62d of the goal detection IC 62c via the inspection terminal 65. The goal detection IC 62c determines whether a high-level signal has been input to the output permission determination bit 62d, and outputs the above-mentioned goal information via the inspection terminal 65 to the information transmission signal line 329a in the connection cable 329 via serial transmission communication only during the period when it determines that a high-level signal has been input to the output permission determination bit 62d.

In the ball entry information reception mode, the inspection machine 320 receives ball entry information corresponding to eight entry ports at predetermined intervals, and measures (counts) and stores the number of game balls that have entered each entry port. The inspection machine 320 then displays information indicating the number of game balls that have entered each entry port that has been measured (counted) on the display unit 328. In other words, each time a game ball enters an entry port as the player or inspector plays a game, 1 is added to the information indicating the number of game balls that have entered each entry port, which is displayed on the display unit 328. As a result, the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320 will display the number of game balls that have entered each entry port after switching to the ball entry information reception mode.

After a sufficient inspection period (e.g., approximately 10 hours) has elapsed, the inspector operates the operation unit 327 of the inspection machine 320 to end the entrance information reception mode, and the inspection machine 320 then transitions to the entrance information setting mode.

When the inspection machine 320 transitions to the entrance information setting mode, it displays an input screen on the display unit 328 for the inspector to input the entrance type and number of prize balls for each entrance. In this embodiment, the inspection machine 320 receives 8 bits of entrance information at predetermined intervals in the entrance information receiving mode, and therefore the display unit 328 displays an input screen for the inspector to input the entrance type and number of prize balls for each of the eight entrances. Note that the entrance type refers to the type of entrance at which each entrance detection sensor 44a-44h, such as the first start entrance 33, the second start entrance 34, the large prize entrance 36a, and the discharge passage, is installed, and the number of prize balls refers to the number of prize balls paid out when one game ball enters an entrance.

By operating the operation unit 327, the inspector inputs ball entrance information (ball entrance type information and prize ball number information) for each ball entrance into the inspection machine 320. Specifically, the inspector obtains information such as which bit in the ball entrance information output from the ball entrance detection IC 62c corresponds to which type of ball entrance (type information) and information such as how many prize balls should be set for each type of ball entrance (prize ball number information) from the specifications or instruction manual of the pachinko machine 10, and inputs this information into the inspection machine 320. When the inspector has finished inputting the ball entrance information, the inspection machine 320 transitions to game play history information calculation mode.

When the inspection machine 320 transitions to the game history information calculation mode, it calculates the various game history information described above based on the number of game balls that entered each entrance measured (counted) in the ball entry information reception mode, and the type information and number of winning balls information set in the entrance information setting mode. For example, the inspection machine 320 calculates the above-mentioned ball payout rate (total), feature ratio, and consecutive feature ratio. Once the inspection machine 320 has completed calculating the various game history information, it displays the calculated various game history information on the display unit 328.

By checking the various gaming history information displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320, the inspector can confirm whether legitimate gaming was being carried out during the inspection period.

As explained above, according to this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry information to the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 without going through the main CPU 62x, so that the inspection device 320 can receive ball entry information that is not affected by the main CPU 62x.

For example, if, instead of adopting the configuration of this embodiment, a configuration were adopted in which ball-entering information was output via the main CPU 62x to the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, and if the main CPU 62x had a malfunction or been illegally tampered with, the malfunction or illegal tampering could affect the ball-entering information output to the inspection device 320. Furthermore, the reliability of the game history information calculated and displayed by the main CPU 62x could be reduced due to the influence of a malfunction or illegal tampering of the main CPU 62x.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry information to the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 without going through the main CPU 62x. Therefore, even if the main CPU 62x has a malfunction or has been tampered with, the ball entry information output to the inspection device 320 will not be affected by the malfunction or tampering. As a result, the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 can execute processing based on ball entry information that has not been affected by the malfunction or tampering. Specifically, the inspection device 320 can calculate game history information based on ball entry information that has not been affected by the main CPU 62x. Therefore, even if the main CPU 62x may have a malfunction or been tampered with and the game history information calculated and displayed by the main CPU 62x is unreliable, an inspector inspecting the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can use the inspection device 320 to confirm game history information that has not been affected by the main CPU 62x. As a result, the integrity of gameplay can be ensured.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry ports to the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 using a serial transmission method.Therefore, compared to a configuration in which ball entry information is output using a parallel transmission method, for example, the configuration of the inspection terminal 65 that passes the ball entry information to the inspection device 320 can be simplified, and the configuration of the inspection device 320 that receives the ball entry information can be simplified.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which ball entry information corresponding to each of multiple ball entry ports is output using a parallel transmission method, the inspection terminal 65 must be equipped with an output section (e.g., output bits) corresponding to the number of ball entry ports. Similarly, the inspection device 320 must be equipped with an input section (e.g., input bits) corresponding to the number of ball entry ports. Furthermore, because the number of ball entry ports provided on a pachinko machine 10 differs depending on the type (model) of pachinko machine 10, it becomes necessary to prepare an inspection device 320 equipped with a different number of input sections for each type (model) of pachinko machine 10.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c includes a means for outputting ball entry information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry ports to the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 via a serial transmission method. Therefore, the inspection terminal 65 may be configured to include at least one output unit capable of outputting ball entry information via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry ports provided in the pachinko machine 10. This simplifies the configuration of the inspection terminal 65. Similarly, the inspection device 320 may be configured to include at least one input unit capable of inputting the ball entry information output via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry ports provided in the pachinko machine 10. This simplifies the configuration of the inspection device 320. Furthermore, even when the inspection device 320 is connected to pachinko machines 10 with different numbers of ball entry ports, the inspection device 320 can input ball entry information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry ports via a serial transmission method. In other words, the inspection machine 320 can be used with other pachinko machines 10 that have a different number of ball entrances. As a result, the versatility of the inspection machine 320 can be increased.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry information to the inspection device 320 only when it receives a Hi-level signal from the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. This prevents the ball entry information of the pachinko machine 10 from being output to the outside unless the Hi-level signal is being received. This prevents the ball entry information of the pachinko machine 10 from being analyzed and misused by malicious individuals.

<Aspect 51>
In the above-mentioned aspect 50, in the entrance information setting mode of the inspection machine 320, the inspector operates the operation unit 327 to manually input the entrance information into the inspection machine 320, but instead of this configuration, the inspection machine 320 may receive the entrance information from the pachinko machine 10 and set it.

Specifically, for example, when the inspection device 320 transitions to the entrance gate information setting mode, it sends a signal requesting the transmission of entrance gate information (entrance gate information transmission request command) to the entrance gate detection IC 62c via the connection cable 329 and the inspection terminal 65. Upon receiving this signal (entrance gate information transmission request command), the entrance gate detection IC 62c transmits the entrance gate information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection device 320 via the inspection terminal 65 and the connection cable 329. The inspection device 320 sets the entrance gate information received from the entrance gate detection IC 62c for each entrance gate and ends the entrance gate information setting mode.

As explained above, according to this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry port information (number of prize balls information and type information) to the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, thereby eliminating the need to manually input ball entry port information (number of prize balls information and type information) into the inspection device 320 and preventing incorrect ball entry port information (number of prize balls information and type information) from being input to the inspection device 320. As a result, the inspection device 320 is able to calculate game history information based on the ball entry information and accurate ball entry port information (number of prize balls information and type information).

In this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c is configured to transmit the ball entry information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection device 320 upon receiving a predetermined signal (ball entry information transmission request command). However, instead of this configuration, the ball entry detection IC 62c may be configured to transmit the ball entry information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection device 320 when the connection cable 329 of the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 (i.e., when it detects that the connection cable 329 of the inspection device 320 has been connected to the inspection terminal 65). With this configuration, the inspection device 320 can quickly execute processing that requires the ball entry information after the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ball entrance detection IC 62c is configured to transmit the ball entrance information to the inspection device 320, but instead of this configuration, the main CPU 62x may read the ball entrance information stored in the main ROM 63 and transmit it to the inspection device 320.

<Aspect 52>
In the above-described embodiment 50, the ball-entry detection IC 62c is configured to output the ball-entry information via the inspection terminal 65 by serial transmission only during the period when it determines that a high-level signal is being input to the output permission determination bit 62d. However, other configurations may be used instead. For example, the ball-entry detection IC 62c may be configured to output the ball-entry information via the inspection terminal 65 by serial transmission only during the period when it determines that a signal of a predetermined pattern is being input to the output permission determination bit 62d. Furthermore, for example, the ball-entry detection IC 62c may be configured to output the ball-entry information via the inspection terminal 65 by serial transmission only when it determines that a signal of a predetermined pattern is being input to the output permission determination bit 62d. Furthermore, for example, a predetermined switch may be provided on the inspection terminal 65, and when it is determined that a cable terminal of a predetermined shape is connected to the inspection terminal 65 and the predetermined switch is pressed down, the ball entry detection IC 62c may be configured to output ball entry information via the inspection terminal 65 using serial transmission communication.

<Aspect 53>
In the above-mentioned aspects 50 to 52, the inspection device 320 may be configured to transition to the goal entry information receiving mode after the goal entry information setting mode has been completed. With this configuration, the type of each goal entry is set at the time of transition to the goal entry information receiving mode, so that the type of each goal entry and the number of goals entered can be displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection device 320 during the goal entry information receiving mode.

As a result, the inspector can determine which type of entry port the game ball entered even while in the ball entry information reception mode. Furthermore, the inspector can confirm whether the ball entry information output from the ball entry detection IC 62c is authentic by checking whether the information displayed on the display unit 328 (type of entry port and number of balls entered) matches the visually confirmed number of game balls that actually entered each entry port.

<Aspect 54>
In the above aspects 50 to 53, the inspection machine 320 may be configured to transition to a game history information reception mode, which is a mode for receiving game history information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10, when the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, and then transition to the above-mentioned ball entrance information setting mode, ball entrance information reception mode, and game history information calculation mode.

Specifically, for example, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 has been connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, it transitions to the game history information reception mode. Once the inspection machine 320 transitions to the game history information reception mode, it transmits a signal requesting the transmission of game history information (a game history information transmission request command) to the main CPU 62x via the connection cable 329 and the inspection terminal 65. Upon receiving this signal (game history information transmission request command), the main CPU 62x transmits the game history information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 and the connection cable 329. Once the inspection machine 320 stores the game history information received from the main CPU 62x in RAM 326, it terminates the game history information reception mode and transitions to the entrance information setting mode.

When the inspection device 320 transitions to the entrance information setting mode, it sends a signal requesting the transmission of entrance information (entrance information transmission request command) to the main CPU 62x via the connection cable 329 and the inspection terminal 65. Upon receiving this signal (entrance information transmission request command), the main CPU 62x transmits the entrance information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection device 320 via the inspection terminal 65 and the connection cable 329. Once the inspection device 320 has set the entrance information received from the main CPU 62x for each entrance, it ends the entrance information setting mode and transitions to the entrance information receiving mode.

When the inspection machine 320 switches to the ball entry information reception mode, it receives ball entry information corresponding to the eight entry ports at predetermined intervals and measures (counts) and stores the number of game balls that have entered each entry port. The inspection machine 320 then displays information indicating the number of game balls that have entered each entry port that it has measured (counted) on the display unit 328. In other words, each time a game ball enters an entry port as the player or inspector plays a game, 1 is added to the information indicating the number of game balls that have entered each entry port, which is displayed on the display unit 328. As a result, the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320 will display the number of game balls that have entered each entry port after switching to the ball entry information reception mode.

After a sufficient inspection period (for example, approximately 10 hours) has elapsed, the inspector operates the operation unit 327 of the inspection machine 320 to end the ball-going information reception mode, and the inspection machine 320 transitions to the game history information calculation mode.

When the inspection machine 320 transitions to the gaming history information calculation mode, it calculates the various gaming history information described above based on the number of gaming balls that entered each entry port measured (counted) in the entry information reception mode and the type information and number of winning balls information set in the entry port information setting mode. For example, the inspection machine 320 calculates the above-mentioned ball payout rate (total), feature ratio, and consecutive feature ratio. When the inspection machine 320 has completed calculating the various gaming history information, it displays on the display unit 328 the various gaming history information calculated in the gaming history information calculation mode and the various gaming history information received in the gaming history information reception mode (the gaming history information stored in flash memory 64x). That is, the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320 displays game history information covering the inspection period during which the connection cable 329 of the inspection machine 320 was connected to the pachinko machine 10 and received ball entry information in ball entry information reception mode, as well as game history information covering a predetermined period in the past that has been calculated by the main CPU 62x of the pachinko machine 10 and stored in the flash memory 64x.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 can receive and display the game history information (hereinafter also referred to as first game history information) stored in the flash memory 64x. The inspection device 320 can also execute processing based on the ball entry information received during the inspection period. Specifically, the inspection device 320 can calculate game history information based on the ball entry information received during a specified inspection period while connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, and display the game history information (hereinafter also referred to as second game history information). Therefore, for example, an inspector inspecting the pachinko machine 10 can compare the first game history information stored in the flash memory 64x provided in the pachinko machine 10 with the second game history information based on the ball entry information received by the inspection device 320 during the specified inspection period.

Here, if a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 10 or unauthorized modifications (such as nail tampering) are made to the pachinko machine 10, causing a change in the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, a difference may arise between the first game history information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 (game history information calculated by the main CPU 62x based on ball entry information over a predetermined period in the past) and the second game history information calculated by the inspection machine 320 based on ball entry information over a predetermined inspection period. Therefore, by noting the difference between the two pieces of game history information, an inspector inspecting the pachinko machine 10 can inspect whether a malfunction or unauthorized modifications (such as nail tampering) have occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured to receive and set the entrance information in the entrance information setting mode described above, and then transition to a game history information reception mode to receive the game history information. The inspection machine 320 may also be configured to calculate the game history information for the inspection period in the game history information calculation mode described above, and then transition to a game history information reception mode to receive the game history information stored in flash memory 64x.

<Aspect 55>
In the above-described aspects 50 to 54, the number of ball entry ports provided in the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to eight, but may be nine or more, or seven or less. The ball entry detection IC 62c may be configured to output ball entry information corresponding to the number of ball entry ports. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 has seven or fewer ball entry ports, the ball entry detection IC 62c may be configured to output ball entry information using the first half of the eight bits output via serial transmission. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 has nine or more ball entry ports, the ball entry detection IC 62c may be configured to output ball entry information corresponding to nine or more ball entry ports by multiple 8-bit serial transmission outputs. Furthermore, the ball entry detection IC 62c may be configured to output 16-bit, 32-bit, or other ball entry information at once via serial transmission.

<Aspect 56>
In the above-mentioned aspect 23, the main CPU 62x is configured to execute the game history processing as one process included in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23: step S10616), but instead of this configuration, the CPU 62x may be configured to execute the game history processing during the remaining time of the above-mentioned main processing, rather than executing it as a timer interrupt processing.

Figure 34 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the primary CPU 62x in mode 56. In step S11001, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, initial setting of each control device upon power-on and determination of the validity of data stored in RAM 64 are executed. After executing step S11001, the process proceeds to step S11002, where interrupt permission is set to allow timer interrupt processing (Figure 13) to occur.

After executing step S11002, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S11003 to S11007. That is, the main CPU 62x is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing as described above, but there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next. This remaining time will vary depending on the completion time of each timer interrupt processing, and this irregular time (remaining time) is used to repeatedly execute the processing (remaining processing) of steps S11003 to S11007.

In step S11003, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S11004, where a random number initial value update process is performed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and to step S11005, where a fluctuation counter update process is performed to update the fluctuation type counter CS. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 64, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, after which the read numerical information is overwritten on the counter from which it was read. In this case, when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S11006.

In step S11006, the above-mentioned gaming history processing (Figure 29) is executed. As described above, the gaming history processing includes multiple tasks (task 1 and task 2 in step S10814 in Figure 29) that are executed sequentially to complete the calculation of gaming history information. The main CPU 62x executes some of the multiple tasks in one execution of the gaming history processing included in the remaining processing. In other words, the main CPU 62x completes the calculation of the gaming history information set as the calculation target by executing the gaming history processing multiple times. After executing step S11006, the process proceeds to step S11007, where an interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from a state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing the processing of step S11007, the process returns to step S11003, and the processing of steps S11003 to S11007 is repeated.

As explained above, according to this embodiment, the remaining processing, including the gaming history processing, is repeatedly executed during the remaining time in the main processing (the period from the end of execution of one timer interrupt processing to the start of execution of the next timer interrupt processing), thereby preventing the execution of the remaining processing, including the gaming history processing, from starting even when the execution of one timer interrupt processing has not yet finished. In other words, by prioritizing the execution of the timer interrupt processing and repeatedly executing the remaining processing, including the gaming history processing, during the period when the timer interrupt processing is not being executed, it is possible to quickly calculate gaming history information.

Furthermore, if the configuration of this embodiment were not adopted and a configuration were adopted in which the game history processing was executed as part of the timer interrupt processing, the time required from start to finish of one execution of the timer interrupt processing would be longer. For example, even if a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of execution of one timer interrupt processing and it is time to start execution of the next timer interrupt processing, the execution of the first timer interrupt processing may not have finished yet, and the next timer interrupt processing may not be able to start until the execution of the first timer interrupt processing has finished. In this case, there is a risk that the delay in starting execution of the next timer interrupt processing will cause problems with the progress of the game.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the game history processing is executed as part of the remaining processing, which shortens the time required from start to finish of one execution of the timer interrupt processing compared to a configuration in which the game history processing is executed as part of the timer interrupt processing. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which, for example, a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of execution of one timer interrupt processing, and it is time to start execution of the next timer interrupt processing, but the execution of the first timer interrupt processing has not yet finished. This prevents a situation in which the execution of the next timer interrupt processing cannot start until the execution of the first timer interrupt processing finishes. In this way, according to this embodiment, it is possible to efficiently and quickly calculate game history information by repeatedly executing the remaining processing, including the game history processing, during periods when timer interrupt processing is not being executed, while preventing malfunctions in game progress caused by delays in the start of execution of the next timer interrupt processing.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the gaming history processing includes multiple tasks (task 1 and task 2 in step S10814 of FIG. 29 ) that are executed sequentially to complete the calculation of gaming history information. The main CPU 62x executes some of the multiple tasks in one execution of the gaming history processing. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which all of the multiple tasks are executed in one execution of the gaming history processing, the time required from start to finish of one execution of the gaming history processing can be shortened. Specifically, for example, even if a condition for starting execution of timer interrupt processing is met during execution of the gaming history processing, the currently executing gaming history processing ends in a short time, thereby shortening the time from the satisfaction of the condition to the start of execution of the timer interrupt processing. As a result, it is possible to quickly calculate gaming history information by repeatedly executing the remaining processing, while suppressing the occurrence of malfunctions due to delays in the start of execution of the timer interrupt processing.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the length of the remaining time changes depending on the length of time required from the start to the end of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, for example, as the length of one timer interrupt process increases, the remaining time from the end of that timer interrupt process to the start of the next timer interrupt process decreases; conversely, as the length of one timer interrupt process decreases, the remaining time from the end of that timer interrupt process to the start of the next timer interrupt process increases. If the remaining time is short, the number of times the game history process is executed can be reduced; conversely, if the remaining time is long, the number of times the game history process is executed can be increased. In other words, the number of times the game history process is executed can be changed depending on the length of the remaining time.

<Aspect 57>
In the first embodiment and each of the above aspects, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to have a plurality of settings with different probabilities of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery. Specifically, for example, even in the same low probability mode, the main control device 60 may be configured to have six levels of lottery settings ("lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6") with different probabilities of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery. This will be explained in detail below.

The main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is equipped with six types of win/loss tables for low probability modes corresponding to each of the six lottery settings, from "Lottery Setting 1" to "Lottery Setting 6." The main control device 60 then executes the jackpot lottery by referencing the win/loss table corresponding to the set lottery setting. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is set to lottery setting 1 and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the main control device 60 executes the jackpot lottery by referencing the win/loss table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 1.

In this embodiment, the hit/miss table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 1 has five values, 0 to 4, set as the values that will result in a jackpot out of the jackpot random number counter C1 values from 0 to 1199. Furthermore, the hit/miss table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 2 has six values, 0 to 5, set as the values that will result in a jackpot out of the jackpot random number counter C1 values from 0 to 1199. Furthermore, the hit/miss table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 3 has seven values, 0 to 6, set as the values that will result in a jackpot out of the jackpot random number counter C1 values from 0 to 1199. Furthermore, the hit/miss table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 4 has eight values, 0 to 7, set as the values that will result in a jackpot out of the jackpot random number counter C1 values from 0 to 1199. Additionally, the hit/miss table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 5 has nine values from 0 to 8 set as the values that will result in a jackpot out of the jackpot random number counter C1 values from 0 to 1199. Additionally, the hit/miss table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 6 has ten values from 0 to 9 set as the values that will result in a jackpot out of the jackpot random number counter C1 values from 0 to 1199.

In other words, in this mode, the larger the number following "lottery setting," the higher the probability of winning the jackpot lottery in low probability mode.

In this embodiment, regardless of which of the six lottery settings is selected, the jackpot lottery is executed in high probability mode by referencing the same win/lose table. In other words, in high probability mode, the probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery is the same regardless of the lottery setting. However, in another embodiment, even in high probability mode, the higher the number following "lottery setting," the higher the probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery.

In this embodiment, the six-level lottery setting change is configured to be executable when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. This is explained in detail below.

In this embodiment, the main control board 61 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a keyhole and a button for changing settings. When an administrator managing the pachinko machine 10 wants to change the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, they first insert a setting change key into the keyhole while the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Then, when the inserted key is turned to the setting change side (for example, clockwise) and the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in setting change mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 is activated in setting change mode, information indicating the current lottery setting (hereinafter also referred to as setting information) is displayed in the above-mentioned game history information display unit 45z. For example, if the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is "Lottery Setting 1," "1" is displayed in the game history information display unit 45z. Then, each time the administrator presses the setting change button, the setting information displayed in the game history information display unit 45z switches in the following order: "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "1" → "2"...

When the setting information displayed on the game history information display unit 45z is set to the administrator's desired value, if the administrator turns the setting change key from the setting change side to the original position, the lottery setting will be changed to the setting information displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. Specifically, for example, if the administrator presses the setting change button and turns the setting change key from the setting change side to the original position when "6" is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z, the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 will be changed to "lottery setting 6."

In this way, according to this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in a jackpot lottery can be changed by changing the lottery settings in the pachinko machine 10. As a result, even for the same pachinko machine 10, the probability that the variable winning device 36, which serves as a special electric device, will be activated as a result of a jackpot lottery changes, so the values of the above-mentioned device ratio and consecutive device ratio calculated as gaming history information will converge to values corresponding to the new changed lottery settings. In other words, by changing the lottery settings in the pachinko machine 10, the gaming history information of the pachinko machine 10, such as the device ratio and consecutive device ratio, will change. In other words, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed by the simple method of changing the lottery settings in the pachinko machine 10.

In each aspect described below, the information that forms the basis for calculating the above-mentioned gaming history information, such as ball entry information for each entry port, number of balls entered, and total winning balls, is also referred to as "basic gaming history information."

<Aspect 58>
In the above-mentioned aspect 57 (a configuration in which the lottery settings for the jackpot lottery can be changed), when the lottery settings in the pachinko machine 10 are changed, the basic game history information stored in various memories (main RAM 64, flash memory 64x, etc.) before the lottery settings were changed may be erased, and the game history information may be calculated and displayed based on the basic game history information stored in various memories after the lottery settings have been changed.

The reason for this configuration will be explained below. When the lottery settings in the pachinko machine 10 (settings for the probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery) are changed, the probability that the variable winning device 36, which serves as a special electric device, will operate changes, and the values of the above-mentioned device ratio and consecutive device ratio calculated as game history information will converge to values corresponding to the new changed lottery settings. In other words, the values to which the device ratio and consecutive device ratio should converge will change before and after the change in the lottery settings.

If a configuration were adopted in which the basic game history information stored before the lottery setting was changed was not erased even after the lottery setting was changed, and the basic game history information acquired after the lottery setting was changed was stored, the influence of the basic game history information stored before the lottery setting was changed would be included when calculating the game history information, and it may take some time for the original characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 after the lottery setting was changed to be reflected in the game history information.

In this embodiment, when the lottery settings are changed, the basic game history information stored before the lottery settings were changed is erased, and the game history information is calculated and displayed based on the basic game history information acquired and stored after the lottery settings were changed.

According to this embodiment, game history information such as the ratio of winning combinations and the ratio of consecutive winning combinations quickly converges to values corresponding to the changed lottery settings, allowing the pachinko machine 10 inspector to quickly confirm the game history information corresponding to the lottery settings currently set for the pachinko machine 10.

<Aspect 59>
In the above-mentioned aspect 57 (configuration in which the lottery settings for the jackpot lottery can be changed), even after the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed, the basic game history information stored in various memories before the lottery settings were changed is not erased, but the basic game history information acquired after the lottery settings are changed is added to and stored in various memories, and the game history information is calculated and displayed based on the basic game history information stored in various memories regardless of whether it was before or after the lottery settings were changed.

This aspect makes it possible to calculate and display gaming history information that includes the effects of changes to the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm whether the total gaming history information, including the effects of the change to the lottery settings, falls within an appropriate range as a result of the change to the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 being operated at the gaming hall.

<Aspect 60>
In the above-mentioned aspect 57 (configuration in which the lottery settings for the jackpot lottery can be changed), when the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed, the basic game history information stored before the lottery settings were changed may be erased, and the basic game history information obtained after the lottery settings were changed may be stored, and the game history information may be calculated and displayed based on the stored basic game history information.

In such a configuration, if the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed again before the basic game history information acquired and stored after the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 have been accumulated to a predetermined amount, information indicating that the lottery settings have been changed in a short period of time (hereinafter also referred to as short-term change information) may be recorded and the short-term change information may be displayed.

Specifically, for example, if the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed again before the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally value as basic gaming history information acquired and stored after the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 have reached 1,000, short-term change information indicating that the lottery settings have been changed in a short period of time is recorded, and this short-term change information is displayed on the gaming history information display unit 45z. Furthermore, for example, the gaming history information display unit 45z may be provided with an LED lamp for displaying short-term change information, and the LED lamp may be illuminated when short-term change information is recorded.

According to this aspect, an inspector of a pachinko machine 10 can check whether a change to the lottery settings has been made in a short period of time by checking whether short-term change information is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from intentionally changing the lottery settings.

Specifically, for example, before an inspector inspects a pachinko machine 10, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 may change the lottery settings again, erasing the basic game history information and game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10, even though not many games have been played on the pachinko machine since the win probability was changed. However, according to this aspect, if the lottery settings are changed again within a short period of time, even though not many games have been played on the pachinko machine 10 since the lottery settings were changed, the above-mentioned short-term change information is recorded and displayed. Therefore, by checking the short-term change information, the inspector can recognize that the lottery settings may have been changed within a short period of time with the fraudulent intent of erasing the basic game history information and game history information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from changing the lottery settings with the fraudulent intent.

In addition, if the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed again before a predetermined time has passed since the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 were changed, information indicating that the lottery settings were changed within a short period of time (short-term change information) may be recorded and the short-term change information may be displayed. With this configuration, even if no play is played on the pachinko machine 10 between changes to the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, the short-term change information will not be displayed as long as a predetermined time has passed between the lottery setting changes. Therefore, even if a relatively long period of time has passed between changes to the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent an inspector from mistaking that the lottery settings may have been changed within a short period of time with fraudulent intent, even if no play is played on the pachinko machine 10 between the changes.

<Aspect 61>
In the above-mentioned aspect 57 (configuration capable of changing the lottery setting for the jackpot lottery), the basic game history information and the basic game history information for the most recent multiple periods, with the past lottery setting being the boundary, may be stored and displayed. When the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the basic game history information and the basic game history information for the oldest period of the most recent multiple periods that have already been stored may be erased, and the basic game history information acquired after the current lottery setting change may be stored.

In such a configuration, if the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed again before the basic game history information acquired and stored after the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 have been accumulated to a predetermined amount, information indicating that the lottery settings have been changed in a short period of time (hereinafter also referred to as short-term change information) may be recorded and the short-term change information may be displayed.

Specifically, for example, if the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed again before the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally value as basic gaming history information acquired and stored after the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 have reached 1,000, short-term change information indicating that the lottery settings have been changed in a short period of time is recorded, and this short-term change information is displayed on the gaming history information display unit 45z. Furthermore, for example, the gaming history information display unit 45z may be provided with an LED lamp for displaying short-term change information, and the LED lamp may be illuminated when short-term change information is recorded.

According to the present embodiment described above, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check the game history information for each of the most recent multiple periods, bounded by past changes to the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, the inspector can check whether there was a situation in which the game history information was not within the appropriate range during the process of past changes to the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check whether a change to the lottery settings has been made in a short period of time by checking whether short-term change information is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from intentionally changing the lottery settings.

Specifically, for example, before a pachinko machine 10 is inspected by an inspector, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 may repeatedly change the lottery settings in a short period of time, erasing the basic game history information and game history information for the pachinko machine 10 over the most recent multiple periods. However, according to this embodiment, if the lottery settings are repeatedly changed in a short period of time, the above-mentioned short-term change information is recorded and displayed. Therefore, by checking the short-term change information, the inspector can recognize that the lottery settings may have been changed in a short period of time with fraudulent intent. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from changing the lottery settings with fraudulent intent.

In addition, if the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed again before a predetermined time has passed since the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 were changed, information indicating that the lottery settings were changed within a short period of time (short-term change information) may be recorded and the short-term change information may be displayed. With this configuration, even if no play is played on the pachinko machine 10 between changes to the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, the short-term change information will not be displayed as long as a predetermined time has passed between the lottery setting changes. Therefore, even if a relatively long period of time has passed between changes to the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent an inspector from mistaking that the lottery settings may have been changed within a short period of time with fraudulent intent, even if no play is played on the pachinko machine 10 between the changes.

<Aspect 62>
In the above-mentioned aspect 57 (configuration in which the lottery settings for the jackpot lottery can be changed), after the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed, the basic game history information that was stored before the lottery settings were changed is not erased but is saved (memorized) until a sufficient amount of basic game history information, which is the basis for calculating the game history information, has been accumulated as statistical data.

Furthermore, until the basic game history information acquired and stored after the lottery settings are changed has accumulated to a predetermined amount sufficient for statistical data, the game history information calculated based on the basic game history information stored before the lottery settings are changed may be displayed in a flashing manner on the game history information display unit 45z. After the basic game history information acquired and stored after the lottery settings are changed has accumulated to a sufficient amount for statistical data, the game history information may be calculated based on the basic game history information acquired and stored after the lottery settings are changed, and the calculated game history information may be displayed in a lit manner on the game history information display unit 45z.

Specifically, for example, the gaming history basic information stored before the lottery settings were changed is configured to remain stored and not erased until the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally value as the gaming history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery settings were changed reaches 60,000. Then, until the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally value as the gaming history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery settings were changed reaches 60,000, the gaming history information calculated based on the gaming history basic information stored before the lottery settings were changed is displayed in a flashing manner on the gaming history information display unit 45z. After the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally value as the gaming history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery settings were changed reaches 60,000, the gaming history basic information stored before the lottery settings were changed is erased, and the gaming history information is calculated based on the gaming history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery settings were changed, and the calculated gaming history information is displayed in a lit state on the gaming history information display unit 45z.

This aspect prevents the basic game history information stored before the lottery settings are changed from being intentionally erased by changing the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if a configuration were adopted in which the basic game history information acquired and stored before the lottery settings were changed were erased immediately after the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 were changed, there is a possibility that the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 could change the lottery settings before the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by an inspector, erasing the basic game history information and game history information stored before the lottery settings were changed. In contrast, this aspect prevents the basic game history information stored before the lottery settings were changed from being erased until a predetermined amount of basic game history information acquired and stored after the lottery settings were changed has been accumulated as statistical data. This prevents the administrator of the pachinko machine from intentionally changing the lottery settings.

Furthermore, by checking whether the game history information displayed on the game history information display unit 45z is flashing or lit, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can easily determine whether the basic game history information acquired and stored after the lottery settings were changed has accumulated to a predetermined amount sufficient as statistical data.

In addition, various criteria other than the total number of winning balls can be used as the conditions for erasing the basic game history information stored before the lottery settings were changed and for switching from a flashing display to a steady display. For example, the total number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (the number of game balls that have been launched onto the game board 30) may be used as the criterion.

<Aspect 63>
In the above-mentioned aspect 57 (a configuration in which the lottery setting for the jackpot lottery can be changed), the configuration may be such that the basic gaming history information and the gaming history information for the most recent multiple periods, with the past change in the lottery setting as a boundary, are stored and displayed. When the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the basic gaming history information and the gaming history information for the oldest period of the most recent multiple periods that have already been stored are not erased until the basic gaming history information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 has been changed has accumulated to a predetermined amount that is sufficient as statistical data, and the basic gaming history information and the gaming history information for the oldest period of the most recent multiple periods that have already been stored are erased after the basic gaming history information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 has been changed has accumulated to a predetermined amount that is sufficient as statistical data.

Specifically, for example, when the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed, the gaming history basic information and gaming history information for the oldest of the most recent multiple periods that have already been stored may not be erased until the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally value as the gaming history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 were changed reaches 60,000; and the gaming history basic information and gaming history information for the oldest of the most recent multiple periods that have already been stored may be erased after the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally value as the gaming history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 were changed reaches 60,000.

According to this aspect, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check the game history information for each of the most recent multiple periods, with the boundaries being past changes to the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, the inspector can check whether there was a situation in which the game history information was not within the appropriate range during the process of past changes to the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the basic gaming history information and gaming history information for the most recent multiple periods bounded by past lottery setting changes from being intentionally erased due to repeated changes to the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10.

For example, if a configuration were adopted in which the basic game history information and game history information for the oldest of the most recent periods bounded by a past change in lottery settings were erased immediately after the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 were changed, there is a possibility that the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 could repeatedly change the lottery settings before the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by an inspector, thereby erasing the basic game history information and game history information for the most recent periods of the pachinko machine 10.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the basic game history information and game history information for the oldest of the most recent periods bounded by past lottery setting changes are not erased until the basic game history information acquired and stored after the lottery setting change has accumulated to a predetermined amount sufficient as statistical data, thereby preventing the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from intentionally changing the lottery settings.

<Aspect 64>
In the above-mentioned aspect 57 (configuration in which the lottery settings for the jackpot lottery can be changed), the acquired basic gaming history information can be stored separately for each lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of acquisition, and the gaming history information can be calculated and displayed for each lottery setting.

Specifically, for example, when the basic gaming history information is stored in various memories, it is stored with additional information that can identify the lottery setting at the time the basic gaming history information was acquired. Then, when calculating and displaying the gaming history information, the basic gaming history information can be extracted for each lottery setting, and the gaming history information for each lottery setting can be calculated and displayed.

In another specific configuration, various memories may be provided with storage areas corresponding to each lottery setting, and the acquired basic game history information may be stored in the storage area corresponding to the currently set lottery setting. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 is set to lottery setting 1, the acquired basic game history information is stored in the storage area corresponding to lottery setting 1, and if the pachinko machine 10 is set to lottery setting 2, the acquired basic game history information is stored in the storage area corresponding to lottery setting 2. Then, when calculating and displaying the game history information, the game history information for each lottery setting may be calculated and displayed based on the basic game history information stored in each storage area.

With this configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm each piece of gaming history information calculated for each lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, such as gaming history information calculated based on basic gaming history information acquired when the pachinko machine 10 is set to lottery setting 1, or gaming history information calculated based on basic gaming history information acquired when the pachinko machine 10 is set to lottery setting 2. By checking whether each piece of gaming history information calculated for each lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 falls within an appropriate range, the inspector can confirm whether there are any lottery settings in the pachinko machine 10 for which the gaming history information does not fall within the appropriate range.

<Aspect 65>
In the above-mentioned aspect 57, the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the game history information display unit 45z, but a lottery setting display unit that displays the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 separately from the game history information display unit 45z.

<Aspect 66>
In each of the above embodiments, the calculated numerical values of the gaming history information itself are displayed on the gaming history information display unit 45z, but the numerical values of the gaming history information itself may not be displayed, and information indicating whether or not the numerical values of the gaming history information fall within a predetermined range may be displayed on the gaming history information display unit 45z or another display unit. For example, whether or not the combination ratio and consecutive combination ratio as the gaming history information fall within a predetermined range may be displayed by the color of an illuminating LED lamp.

<Aspect 67>
In each of the above aspects, the game history information display unit 45z provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured with four 7-segment displays arranged adjacent to each other in a horizontal row. Note that the game history information display unit 45z not only displays game history information, but also displays setting information instead of game history information during a setting change mode in which lottery settings are changed, and therefore will hereinafter also be referred to simply as the "information display unit 45z."

Figure 35 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the information display unit 45z in aspect 67. The information display unit 45z is configured with four seven-segment displays 45z1-45z4 arranged adjacent to each other in a horizontal row. Each of the seven-segment displays 45z1-45z4 has seven segment light-emitting elements A-G and a DP light-emitting element that indicates a decimal point. Depending on whether or not these light-emitting elements are illuminated, various numbers, letters, symbols, etc., such as "1," "2," "3," "4," "5," "6," "7," "8," "9," "0," "b," "L.", and "6." can be displayed. In this aspect, the seven segment light-emitting elements A-G and the DP light-emitting element are configured with red LEDs (light-emitting diodes).

In the following, the 7-segment display 45z1 located at the left end will also be referred to as the left-end 7-segment display 45z1, the 7-segment display 45z2 located adjacent to the right of the left-end 7-segment display 45z1 will also be referred to as the left-center 7-segment display 45z2, the 7-segment display 45z3 located adjacent to the right of the left-center 7-segment display 45z2 will also be referred to as the right-center 7-segment display 45z3, and the 7-segment display 45z4 located adjacent to the right of the right-center 7-segment display 45z3 and located at the right end will also be referred to as the right-end 7-segment display 45z4.

As shown in FIG. 35, when displaying game history information, the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 and the left-center 7-segment display 45z2 are used as areas (type information display areas) that display type information, which is information for identifying the type of game history information being displayed. Furthermore, the right-center 7-segment display 45z3 and the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 are used as areas (numeric information display areas) that display numerical information for the game history information corresponding to the type displayed in the type information display area. Specific examples of game history information displayed on the information display unit 45z are described below.

Figure 36 is an explanatory diagram showing how game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z. Note that in Figure 36, lit segment light emitting units and DP light emitting units are shown filled in with black, while unlit segment light emitting units and DP light emitting units are shown as white instead of filled in with black. The same applies to Figure 37 and subsequent figures.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the main control device 60 always displays the game history information on the information display unit 45z in a state other than the setting change mode in which the lottery setting is changed. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the main control device 60 calculates the above-mentioned ball payout rate (in normal mode) as the game history information, and displays the calculated ball payout rate (in normal mode) on the information display unit 45z. The ball payout rate (in normal mode) is defined as follows:
・Ball payout rate (in normal mode)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during normal mode / Number of game balls fired onto the game board 30 during normal mode (= Number of game balls that passed through the discharge passage during normal mode (Number of outs during normal mode))
As mentioned above, "normal mode" refers to a mode that is not a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or a jackpot-based opening/closing mode. In the following, the ball payout rate (normal mode) will also be referred to as "base (normal mode)."

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the main control device 60 divides the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT into sections each time it reaches 60,000 balls, and calculates a base (during normal mode) for each section. The information display unit 45z then alternately displays two types of bases (during normal mode) for different sections that are the subject of the calculation. Specifically, the information display unit 45z of this embodiment displays the following two types of bases (during normal mode):

・"bL": Base being measured (in normal mode)
The ball discharge rate calculated in the current section until the number of balls passing through the discharge passage currently being measured _NOUT reaches 60,000 (in normal mode)
・"b6": Measured base (in normal mode)
The ball discharge rate (in normal mode) calculated in the section immediately preceding the section currently being measured, in which the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT reaches 60,000.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the information display unit 45z alternates between displaying "Base currently being measured (in normal mode)" and "Base already measured (in normal mode)" every five seconds.

When the information display unit 45z displays "Base being measured (in normal mode)," it displays "bL." in the type information display area and displays the two-digit value of "Base being measured (in normal mode)" in the numeric information display area. Specifically, when "bL." is displayed in the type information display area, the segment light emitting units C, D, E, F, and G of the leftmost seven-segment display 45z1 are illuminated, and the segment light emitting units D, E, F, and DP light emitting unit of the center-left seven-segment display 45z2 are illuminated. The center-right seven-segment display 45z3 and the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4, which constitute the numeric information display area, display the numeric information of "Base being measured (in normal mode)." Note that in this embodiment, the calculated "Base being measured (in normal mode)" is rounded to two decimal places and multiplied by 100, and the integer portion of this value is displayed in the numeric information display area. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the information display unit 45z displays information such as "bL.35," which means that the value of the "base during measurement (in normal mode)" rounded to two decimal places is "0.35." Furthermore, if the value of the "base during measurement (in normal mode)" rounded to two decimal places is "1.00" or greater, multiplying this by 100 will result in a value of 100 or greater, so in this case the information display unit 45z displays information such as "bL.99."

When the information display unit 45z displays "Measured Base (in normal mode)," it displays "b6." in the type information display area and displays the two-digit value of "Measured Base (in normal mode)" in the numeric information display area. Specifically, when "b6." is displayed in the type information display area, the segment light emitting units C, D, E, F, and G of the leftmost seven-segment display 45z1 are illuminated, and the segment light emitting units A, C, D, E, F, G, and DP light emitting unit of the center-left seven-segment display 45z2 are illuminated. The center-right seven-segment display 45z3 and the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4, which form the numeric information display area, display the numeric information of "Measured Base (in normal mode)." Note that in this embodiment, the calculated "Measured Base (in normal mode)" is rounded to two decimal places and multiplied by 100, and the integer portion of this value is displayed in the numeric information display area. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the information display unit 45z displays information such as "b6.35," which means that the value of the "measured base (in normal mode)" rounded to two decimal places is "0.35." Furthermore, if the value of the "measured base (in normal mode)" rounded to two decimal places is "1.00" or greater, multiplying this by 100 will result in a value of 100 or greater, so in this case the information display unit 45z displays information such as "b6.99."

In addition, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the information display unit 45z displays game history information, even if the number to be displayed in the numerical information display area is a single-digit value, the right-center seven-segment display 45z3 displays a "0" to display the number in two digits. For example, if the value of the "Base during measurement (in normal mode)" rounded to the third decimal place is "0.07," multiplying this by 100 results in 7, so in this case the information display unit 45z displays information such as "bL.07."

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when displaying game history information, "bL." and "b6." are displayed alternately in the category information display area of the information display unit 45z, and no category information other than these two is displayed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when displaying game history information, the following light-emitting units of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 and the left-center 7-segment display 45z2 that make up the category information display area are not used (do not emit light):
[Light-emitting section of type information display area not used when displaying game history information]
Segment light emitting sections A, B and DP light emitting section of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 Segment light emitting section B of the center left 7-segment display 45z2

In other words, when displaying game history information, only the following light-emitting sections of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 and the left-center 7-segment display 45z2 that make up the category information display area are used (light-emitting).
[Light-emitting section of type information display area used when displaying game history information]
- Segment light emitting parts C, D, E, F, G of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1
- Segment light-emitting sections A, C, D, E, F, G and DP light-emitting section of the left-center 7-segment display 45z2.For reference, Figure 36 shows the light-emitting sections of the type information display area used when displaying game history information in a cross-hatched manner.

Next, we will explain the display mode of the information display unit 45z during the setting change mode, which changes the lottery settings described above. In this mode, during the setting change mode, the information display unit 45z displays setting information, which is information indicating the current lottery settings or information indicating the changed lottery settings. Specific details are explained below.

Figures 37 and 38 are explanatory diagrams showing how setting information is displayed in the information display unit 45z during setting change mode. Figures 37 and 38 show how "1" to "6" are displayed as setting information (numerical information) indicating the lottery setting in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z.

As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is activated in setting change mode, the information display unit 45z displays numerical information indicating the current lottery setting in the numerical information display area. Then, when the administrator presses the setting change button, the information display unit 45z displays numerical information indicating the changed lottery setting in the numerical information display area. Then, when the administrator turns the setting change key from the setting change side to its original position, the setting change mode ends, and the information display unit 45z again displays the game history information in the numerical information display area.

In this embodiment, during setting change mode, "-- (two hyphens)" is displayed in the type information display area of the information display unit 45z, and setting information between "1" and "6" is displayed in the numerical information display area. The display pattern "-- (two hyphens)" displayed in the type information display area during setting change mode is not displayed when displaying information related to the type of game history information.

Specifically, during the setting change mode, the segment light emitting portion G of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1, which constitutes the type information display area of the information display unit 45z, emits light, and the segment light emitting portion G of the center left 7-segment display 45z2 emits light. In other words, during the setting change mode in this pachinko machine 10, only the light emitting portions used when displaying game history information are used. In other words, light emitting portions not used when displaying game history information are not used during the setting change mode either.

In addition, in this embodiment, of the right-center 7-segment display 45z3 and the right-most 7-segment display 45z4 that constitute the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z, the right-center 7-segment display 45z3 is not used, and only the right-most 7-segment display 45z4 is used to display numerical information indicating the lottery setting. In other words, the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z is capable of displaying two-digit numerical information, but during setting change mode, the first-digit right-center 7-segment display 45z3 does not display "0" but is turned off, and only the second-digit right-most 7-segment display 45z4 displays numerical information of any of "1" to "6" indicating the lottery setting.

As explained above, according to this embodiment, the display mode of the category information display area is clearly different when numerical information of game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z and when numerical information related to lottery settings is displayed. Therefore, for example, it is possible for the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 to clearly distinguish and recognize whether numerical information of game history information or numerical information related to lottery settings is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from mistaking the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area for numerical information of game history information or numerical information related to lottery settings.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the light-emitting elements in the category information display area that are not used when displaying game history information (segment light-emitting elements A, B, and the DP light-emitting element of the left-most seven-segment display 45z1, and segment light-emitting element B of the center-left seven-segment display 45z2) are not used even during setting change mode, so the category information display area has unused light-emitting elements (hereinafter referred to as unused light-emitting elements). Therefore, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in an unused light-emitting element in the category information display area, the display mode in the category information display area is not affected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a malfunction in a light-emitting element in the category information display area will affect the display mode.

Furthermore, for example, since the light-emitting elements (LEDs) that are unused light-emitting sections do not need to emit light, the components required to make those light-emitting elements emit light can be omitted. This allows for reduced costs for the information display section 45z.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the number of digits of the displayed numerical value will differ when the numerical information display area displays numerical information related to game history information and when the numerical information display area displays numerical information related to lottery settings. Therefore, even if a malfunction occurs in the display of the category information display area, the administrator can clearly distinguish and recognize whether the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area is game history information or setting information. In other words, when a two-digit number is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z, the administrator can determine that the number displayed in the numerical information display area is game history information, and when a single-digit number is displayed in the numerical information display area, the administrator can determine that the number displayed in the numerical information display area is setting information.

<Aspect 68>
In the above-mentioned aspect 67, the information display unit 45z is configured to display a lit "-- (two hyphens)" in the type information display area during the setting change mode. However, instead of this configuration, the information display unit 45z may be configured to display a flashing "-- (two hyphens)" in the type information display area during the setting change mode.

With this configuration, the display mode of the category information display area will be more clearly different when the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z displays numerical information for game history information and when it displays numerical information for lottery settings. Therefore, for example, it is possible for the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 to more clearly distinguish and recognize whether the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z displays numerical information for game history information or numerical information for lottery settings. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from mistaking the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area for numerical information for game history information or numerical information for lottery settings.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, during the setting change mode in which numerical information related to the lottery settings is displayed in the numerical information display area, "-- (two hyphens)" flashes in the type information display area, alerting the pachinko machine 10 administrator that this is an important situation in which changes to the lottery settings must be made with caution.

<Aspect 69>
In the above-described aspect 67, the information display unit 45z is configured to display "-- (two hyphens)" in the type information display area while in the setting change mode, but instead of this configuration, it may be configured so that nothing is displayed in the type information display area while in the setting change mode. This will be specifically described below.

Figures 39 and 40 are explanatory diagrams showing how setting information is displayed on the information display unit 45z during setting change mode. These figures show how "1" to "6" are displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z as numerical information indicating the lottery setting. Also, as shown in Figure 39, in this embodiment, during setting change mode, all segment light emitting units and DP light emitting units of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 and the left-center 7-segment display 45z2, which constitute the type information display area of the information display unit 45z, are turned off. In other words, as described above, during setting change mode, nothing is displayed in the type information display area of the information display unit 45z.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the display mode of the category information display area is clearly different when numerical information of game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z and when numerical information related to lottery settings is displayed. Therefore, for example, it is possible for the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 to clearly distinguish and recognize whether numerical information of game history information or numerical information related to lottery settings is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from mistaking the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area for numerical information of game history information or numerical information related to lottery settings.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, even if a malfunction occurs in which some of the light-emitting elements (segment light-emitting elements A-G, etc.) that make up the category information display area do not emit light, the display mode of the category information display area will differ between when it is displaying game history information and when it is displaying lottery setting information, as long as there is no serious malfunction in which all of the light-emitting elements do not emit light. Therefore, according to this aspect, even if a malfunction occurs in which some of the light-emitting elements (LEDs) that make up the category information display area do not emit light, as long as there is no serious malfunction in which all of the light-emitting elements do not emit light, the administrator can distinguish between whether the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area is game history information or lottery setting information. In other words, if at least some of the light-emitting elements in the category information display area are emitting light, the administrator can determine that the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is game history information, and can determine that the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is lottery setting information only when all of the light-emitting elements that make up the category information display area are unlit.

<Aspect 70>
In the above-described aspect 67, the information display unit 45z is configured to light up "-- (two hyphens)" in the type information display area during the setting change mode, but instead of this configuration, the type information display area may be configured to switch between a plurality of display patterns in a short period of time (for example, every 0.5 seconds) during the setting change mode. This will be specifically described below.

Figure 41 is an explanatory diagram showing how setting information is displayed in the information display unit 45z during setting change mode. In the example shown in Figure 41, "1" is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z as numerical information indicating the lottery setting. In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, during setting change mode, the type information display area of the information display unit 45z alternates between the following two display patterns, which are switched every 0.5 seconds:

Display pattern A of type information display area:
Display pattern B in the type information display area: The segment light emitting sections C, D, E, and G of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 are lit (light-emitting), and all light emitting sections of the middle left 7-segment display 45z2 are turned off.
A display pattern in which all light-emitting sections of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 are turned off and the segment light-emitting sections C, D, E, and G of the middle left 7-segment display 45z2 are turned on (illuminated).

The above-mentioned display patterns A and B are display patterns that are not displayed in the type information display area when displaying game history information. Furthermore, in display patterns A and B, only the light-emitting elements that are used when displaying game history information are used. In other words, in display patterns A and B, light-emitting elements that are not used when displaying game history information are not used.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the display mode of the category information display area is clearly different when numerical information of game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z and when numerical information related to lottery settings is displayed. Therefore, for example, it is possible for the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 to clearly distinguish and recognize whether numerical information of game history information or numerical information related to lottery settings is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from mistaking the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area for numerical information of game history information or numerical information related to lottery settings.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, during the setting change mode in which numerical information related to the lottery settings is displayed in the numerical information display area, the display pattern in the type information display area changes dynamically, thereby alerting the pachinko machine 10 administrator that this is an important state in which changes to the lottery settings must be made with caution.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the light-emitting elements in the category information display area that are not used when displaying game history information (segment light-emitting elements A, B, and the DP light-emitting element of the leftmost seven-segment display 45z1, and segment light-emitting element B of the center-left seven-segment display 45z2) are not used even during setting change mode, so the category information display area has unused light-emitting elements (hereinafter referred to as unused light-emitting elements). Therefore, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in an unused light-emitting element in the category information display area, the display mode in the category information display area is not affected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a malfunction in a light-emitting element in the category information display area will affect the display mode.

Furthermore, since the light-emitting elements (LEDs) that are unused light-emitting sections do not need to emit light, the components required to make these light-emitting elements emit light can be omitted. This reduces the cost of the information display section 45z.

In this embodiment, during the setting change mode, two display patterns are alternately displayed in the type information display area of the information display unit 45z, but three or more display patterns may also be displayed in a sequentially switched and repeated manner.

<Aspect 71>
In each of the above aspects, if the "number of game balls that passed through the discharge passage during normal mode (number of outs during normal mode)" being measured is less than 6,000, for example, "bL." in the type information display area may be configured to flash, and if it is 6,000 or more, to be displayed steadily. With this configuration, a person who sees the flashing display of "bL." in the type information display area can recognize that the "number of game balls that passed through the discharge passage during normal mode (number of outs during normal mode)" being measured is less than 6,000, and that the value displayed in the numerical information display area is the "base during measurement (during normal mode)" calculated when a sufficient amount of statistical data has not been accumulated.

Also, the "bL." in the type information display area may be displayed as a lit indicator, and if the "number of game balls that passed through the discharge passage during normal mode (number of outs during normal mode)" being measured is less than 6,000, the number in the numerical information display area may be displayed as a flashing indicator, and if it is 6,000 or more, the number may be displayed as a lit indicator. With this configuration, a person who sees the flashing number in the numerical information display area can recognize that the "number of game balls that passed through the discharge passage during normal mode (number of outs during normal mode)" being measured is less than 6,000, and that the number displayed in the numerical information display area is the "base during measurement (during normal mode)" calculated when a sufficient amount of statistical data has not yet been accumulated.

Also, if the "number of game balls that passed through the discharge passage during normal mode (number of outs during normal mode)" being measured is less than 6,000, for example, the "bL." in the category information display area and the number in the numerical information display area may be configured to flash, and if it is 6,000 or more, the number may be configured to remain lit. With this configuration, a person who sees the flashing "bL." in the category information display area and the number in the numerical information display area can recognize that the "number of game balls that passed through the discharge passage during normal mode (number of outs during normal mode)" being measured is less than 6,000, and that the number displayed in the numerical information display area is the "base during measurement (during normal mode)" calculated when a sufficient amount of statistical data has not yet been accumulated.

In addition, various basic game history information can be used as the criteria for determining whether to flash or light the display. For example, the "number of game balls that passed through the discharge passage (total number of outs)" during measurement may be used.

<Aspect 72>
In each of the above aspects, during the setting change mode, when numerical information indicating the lottery setting is displayed in the numerical information display area, all of the light-emitting units constituting the middle-right seven-segment display 45z3 are turned off and not used, and only the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 is used to display the numerical information indicating the lottery setting in one digit, but instead of this configuration, the middle-right seven-segment display 45z3 may also be used to display the numerical information indicating the lottery setting in two digits. For example, if the numerical information indicating the lottery setting is only one digit, the middle-right seven-segment display 45z3 may be configured to display "0".

<Aspect 73>
In each of the above aspects, the number of lottery settings is not limited to six (1 to 6), and the number of lottery settings may be five or fewer or seven or more. The number of 7-segment displays constituting the information display unit 45z is not limited to four, but may be three or fewer, or five or more. The number of 7-segment displays constituting the type information display area of the information display unit 45z is not limited to two, but may be one, three, or more. The number of 7-segment displays constituting the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z is not limited to two, but may be one, three, or more. The information display unit 45z may be composed of light-emitting elements other than LEDs, such as organic electroluminescence (EL), or may be composed of non-luminescent display elements (display elements). For example, the information display unit 45z may be composed of liquid crystal or display elements employing an electrophoretic method used in electronic paper.

<Aspect 74>
42 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 74 of the first embodiment. In this aspect 74, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x is configured to calculate the above-mentioned game history information. Below, details of the various components of the main control device 60 will be described, and the other components will be assigned the same reference numerals as in the first embodiment and each aspect described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 42, the main ROM 63 includes a program storage means 63a and a program data storage means 63b. The main RAM 64 includes a data storage means 64a and a stack means 64b.

The primary CPU 62x includes a register set 62x1 and performs various processes by combining and executing multiple programs stored in the program storage means 63a of the primary ROM 63. Each program is composed of a combination of multiple pre-reserved instructions, such as arithmetic instructions, transfer instructions, rotate instructions, shift instructions, jump instructions, call instructions, and return instructions, and the primary CPU 62x sequentially executes the instructions in the order defined in the program.

Register set 62x1 includes an A register (accumulator register), an F register (flag register), a general-purpose register, and a stack pointer (SP). The A register and general-purpose register are 1 byte (8 bits) in size, while the stack pointer (SP) is 2 bytes (16 bits) in size. Register set 62x1 may also include other registers, such as an index register, interrupt register, refresh register, and program counter.

The A register stores the data (value) to be operated on by an arithmetic instruction and the result of the operation.

The F register's state automatically changes depending on the results of calculations performed by arithmetic instructions and the execution of specific instructions such as load instructions.

General-purpose registers are used in the same way as variables in general programs, specifically to temporarily store data (values), form counters, and specify memory addresses.

The stack pointer (SP) stores a stack pointer reference address for accessing the first stack area 64b1 (see Figure 44 described later) and the second stack area 64b2 (see Figure 44 described later) of the stack means 64b configured in the main RAM 64. Specifically, the stack pointer (SP) stores the first stack area reference address SP1 when accessing the first stack area 64b1, and stores the second stack area reference address SP2 when accessing the second stack area 64b2.

Figure 43 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the main ROM 63. As described above, the main ROM 63 includes a program storage means 63a and a program data storage means 63b.

The program storage means 63a has a first program control area 63a1 that stores a first program 63p1, and a second program control area 63a2, which is an area different from the first program control area 63a1 and stores a second program 63p2.

The first program 63p1 includes a game progress program, a storage program, and a change program. The main CPU 62x executes the game progress program to perform game progress processing that controls the progress of the game, executes the storage program to perform storage processing, and executes the change program to perform change processing. Details of the game progress processing, storage processing, and change processing will be described later.

The second program 63p2 includes a gaming history information calculation and display program, a save program, and a restoration program. The master CPU 62x executes the gaming history information calculation and display program to perform the gaming history information calculation and display process that calculates and displays the above-mentioned gaming history information, executes the save program to perform the save process, and executes the restoration program to perform the restoration process. Details of the gaming history information calculation and display process, the save process, and the restoration process will be described later.

The program data storage means 63b has a first program data area 63b1 that stores various data required when executing the first program 63p1, and a second program data area 63b2 that is separate from the first program data area 63b1 and stores various data required when executing the second program 63p2. The first program data area 63b1 stores data such as a win/lose table and allocation table used in the jackpot lottery process described above, while the second program data area 63b2 stores various fixed value data used in the game history information calculation and display process, for example.

As described above, the first program control area 63a1 that stores the first program 63p1 and the first program data area 63b1 that stores data required to execute the first program 63p1, and the second program control area 63a2 that stores the second program 63p2 and the second program data area 63b2 that stores data required to execute the second program 63p2 are each configured in different areas of the main ROM 63.

Figure 44 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the main RAM 64. As described above, the main RAM 64 includes a data storage means 64a and a stack means 64b.

The data storage means 64a has a first data storage area 64a1 corresponding to a first program 63p1 capable of updating data, and a second data storage area 64a2, which is an area different from the first data storage area 64a1 and corresponds to a second program 63p2 capable of updating data. The first data storage area 64a1 stores, for example, various data (various flags such as a high probability mode flag) that are updated during the game progress processing, while the second data storage area 64a2 stores, for example, various data that are updated during the game history information calculation and display processing.

The stack means 64b has a first stack area 64b1 that can be accessed using a first stack area reference address SP1 stored in a stack pointer (SP), and a second stack area 64b2 that is different from the first stack area 64b1 and can be accessed using a second stack area reference address SP2 stored in the stack pointer (SP). The first stack area 64b1 corresponds to the first program 63p1 (game progress program, storage program, change program), and the second stack area 64b2 corresponds to the second program 63p2 (game history information calculation and display program, save program, return program).

As described above, the first stack area 64b1 and first data memory area 64a1, in which data can be updated and referenced through processing by the first program 63p1 (game progress program, storage program, change program), and the second stack area 64b2 and second data memory area 64a2, in which data can be updated and referenced through processing by the second program 63p2 (game history information calculation and display program, save program, return program), are each configured in different areas of the main RAM 64. Note that processing by the first program 63p1 does not allow data to be updated in the second stack area 64b2 and the second data memory area 64a2, but allows data to be referenced, and processing by the second program 63p2 does not allow data to be updated in the first stack area 64b1 and the first data memory area 64a1, but allows data to be referenced.

Figure 45 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a memory map of the main control unit 60. As shown in Figure 45, the memory space in this embodiment is allocated, in this order, an internal ROM area corresponding to the main ROM 63 and an internal RAM area corresponding to the main RAM 64. In this embodiment, the internal ROM area is allocated, in this order, a first program control area 63a1, a first program data area 63b1, an unused area, a second program control area 63a2, and a second program data area 63b2, while the internal RAM area is allocated, in this order, a first data storage area 64a1, a first stack area 64b1, a second data storage area 64a2, a second stack area 64b2, and an unused area.

Figure 46 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the primary CPU 62x in aspect 74 of the first embodiment. Note that in this aspect, the timer interrupt processing is executed at 4 msec intervals, just like in the first embodiment.

The processes shown on the left side of Figure 46 are processes performed by the primary CPU 62x executing the first program 63p1 stored in the first program control area 63a1, and the processes shown on the right side of Figure 46 are processes performed by the primary CPU 62x executing the second program 63p2 stored in the second program control area 63a2.

In step S11101, the master CPU 62x executes the game progress program included in the first program 63p1 to perform game progress processing, which is processing for progressing the game. Specifically, the game progress processing performs the processing group shown in steps S10601 to S10615 in Figure 27 described above. After performing the processing in step S11101, the process proceeds to step S11102.

In step S11102, the primary CPU 62x performs storage processing by executing a storage program included in the first program 63p1. In the storage processing, a push instruction (PUSH) is used to store the values of the A register and F register, among multiple registers, in the first stack area 64b1, which can be accessed using the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP). At this time, a single push instruction (PUSH AF) using the special code AF, which specifies the A register and F register as the transfer target, stores the values of the A register and F register in the first stack area 64b1.

After executing step S11102, the primary CPU 62x executes the evacuation program included in the second program 63p2, thereby performing evacuation processes 1, 2, and 3 shown in steps S11103 to S11105. Specific details are explained below.

In save process 1 shown in step S11103, the load instruction (LD (W21), SP) stores the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) in the area specified by address W21 in the second data storage area 64a2. At this time, the load instruction changes the state of the TZ flag in the F register, which may change the value of the F flag. After performing save process 1 in step S11103, proceed to step S11104.

In save process 2 shown in step S11104, a load command (LD SP, fixed value) is used to store the fixed value, second stack area reference address SP2, in the stack pointer (SP). Note that the second stack area reference address SP2 stored in the stack pointer (SP) at this time is a fixed value previously stored in, for example, the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63. In this embodiment, since no data is stored in the second stack area 64b2 when save process 2 is performed, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in save process 2 is the address value indicating the bottom of the second stack area 64b2. After save process 2 in step S11104 is performed, proceed to step S11105.

In save process 3 shown in step S11105, the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register are stored in the area specified by address W22 in the second data memory area 64a2 using multiple load instructions (LD (W22), register). Note that the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register may also be stored in the second data memory area 64a2 using a single load instruction that uses a special code that specifies the A register, F register, and general-purpose register as the transfer target. After performing the processing of step S11105, proceed to step S11106.

In step S11106, the master CPU 62x performs a gaming history information calculation and display process by executing the gaming history information calculation and display program included in the second program 63p2. The gaming history information calculation and display process calculates the above-described gaming history information and performs processing to display the calculated gaming history information on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, the gaming history information calculation and display process performs the processing group shown in steps S10802 to S10812 in FIG. 29 described above. At this time, the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register change during the gaming history information calculation and display process.

After performing the game history information calculation and display process in step S11106, the master CPU 62x executes the return program included in the second program 63p2, thereby performing return processes 1 and 2 shown in steps S11107 and S11108. This is explained in detail below.

In return processing 1 shown in step S11107, multiple load instructions (LD register, (W22)) are used to set the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register to the values stored in the area specified by address W22 in the second data memory area 64a2 by save processing 3 (step S11105). Note that a single load instruction using a special code may be used to set the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register to the values stored in the second data memory area 64a2 by save processing 3 (step S11105). In this return processing 1, if the value of the F register has changed in save processing 1 (step S11103), a value different from the value stored immediately after the game progress processing ended is stored in the F register. After performing the processing of step S11107, proceed to step S11108.

In return processing 2 shown in step S11108, the load command (LD SP, (W21)) stores the first stack area reference address SP1, which was stored in the area specified by address W21 in the second data memory area 64a2 by save processing 1 (step S11103), in the stack pointer (SP), and the primary CPU 62x terminates execution of the second program 63p2. After performing the processing of step S11108, proceed to step S11109.

In step S11109, the master CPU 62x executes the change program included in the first program 63p1 to perform the change process. In the change process, a pop instruction (POP) is used to change the values of the A register and F register, among the A register, F register, and general-purpose registers whose values were set in the return process 1 (step S11107), to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 in the storage process (step S11102). A single pop instruction (POP AF) using a special code changes the values of the A register and F register to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 in the storage process (step S11102). Even if a value different from that stored in the F register immediately after the game progress process was completed in the return process 1 (step S11107), the value of the F register can be changed to the same value as immediately after the game progress process was completed. After performing step S11109, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

As explained above, according to this embodiment, save process 3 (step S11105 in FIG. 46) and restore process 1 (step S11107 in FIG. 46) are performed, thereby avoiding problems caused by changes in the values of registers used in the first program 63p1 when returning from the second program 63p2 to the first program 63p1.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, there is a risk that the state of the F register may change before performing save processing 3 (for example, when a load command is executed in save processing 1 (step S11103 in FIG. 46)). However, before performing save processing 1, the values of the A register and the F register are stored in the storage process (step S11102 in FIG. 46) by the storage program included in the first program 63p1. After the processing by the second program 63p2 is completed, the values of the A register and the F register are changed to the values stored in the storage process in the change process (step S11109 in FIG. 46) by the change program included in the first program 63p1. Therefore, for example, even if the state of the F register changes in save processing 1, the state of the F register is restored to the same state as immediately after the completion of the game progress processing by the first program 63p1 (step S11101 in FIG. 46), so there is no risk of it affecting the processing performed after returning from the processing by the second program 63p2. As a result, it is possible to configure multiple programs independently.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, simply by adding a game history information calculation and display program for performing the game history information calculation and display process (step S11106 in FIG. 46) to the second program 63p2, the game history information calculation and display process can be added without affecting the game progress process (step S11101 in FIG. 46) that controls the progress of the game. Therefore, the game history information calculation and display program can be easily created independently of the game progress program for performing the game progress process.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, as shown in FIG. 45, the memory space used by the processing by the first program 63p1 and the memory space used by the processing by the second program 63p2 are arranged independently of each other, which prevents the two memory spaces from physically interfering with each other and also prevents, for example, fraudulent activity committed against one process (memory space) from affecting the other process (memory space).

Furthermore, according to this aspect, in save process 3 (step S11105 in FIG. 46 ), rather than storing all of the values of each register in the second stack area 64b2 with a single push command (PUSH ALL), the values of each register are stored in the second data memory area 64a2 with a load command. This makes it possible to store only the registers that were being used in the second data memory area 64a2. This reduces the storage capacity required to store the values of each register in save process 3. Furthermore, according to this aspect, rather than storing the values of each register in the second stack area 64b2, the storage capacity of the second stack area 64b2 in the main RAM 64 can be reduced, and the storage capacity of the second data memory area 64a2 can be expanded.

Furthermore, for example, if a configuration is in place in which a reset process is performed to erase all data stored in a stack area when the amount of data to be stored in the stack area by a push instruction (PUSH) exceeds the upper limit of the storage capacity of the stack area in the main RAM 64, there is a risk that the reset process will be performed if the values of each register are stored in the second stack area 64b2 by a push instruction (PUSH) in save process 3. Furthermore, if all the values of each register are stored in the second stack area 64b2 by a single push instruction (PUSH ALL) in save process 3, the likelihood of the reset process being performed increases even further. In contrast, according to this aspect, a push instruction (PUSH ALL) is not used in save process 3, and the values of each register are stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by a load instruction (LD), thereby avoiding the risk of the stack area being reset.

<Aspect 75>
In the configuration shown in the above aspect 74, the timer interrupt process described below may be carried out instead of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

Figure 47 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the primary CPU 62x in aspect 75 of the first embodiment. The same steps as those included in the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 46 are assigned the same step numbers. The main differences from the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 46 are that save processing 1 shown in step S11103 of Figure 46 is omitted, and the contents of restore processing 2 shown in step S11108 of Figure 46 are different. A detailed explanation is provided below.

In step S11101, the master CPU 62x executes the game progress program included in the first program 63p1 to perform game progress processing, which is processing for progressing the game. Specifically, the game progress processing performs the processing group shown in steps S10601 to S10615 in Figure 27 described above. After performing the processing in step S11101, the process proceeds to step S11102.

In step S11102, the primary CPU 62x performs storage processing by executing a storage program included in the first program 63p1. In the storage processing, a push instruction (PUSH) is used to store the values of the A register and F register, among multiple registers, in the first stack area 64b1, which can be accessed using the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP). At this time, a single push instruction (PUSH AF) using the special code AF, which specifies the A register and F register as the transfer target, stores the values of the A register and F register in the first stack area 64b1.

After executing step S11102, the primary CPU 62x executes the save program included in the second program 63p2, thereby performing save processes 2 and 3 shown in steps S11104 and S11105. In other words, in this embodiment, the primary CPU 62x does not perform save process 1 of step S11103 described above. This is explained in detail below.

In save process 2 shown in step S11104, a load command (LD SP, fixed value) is used to store the fixed value, second stack area reference address SP2, in the stack pointer (SP). Note that the second stack area reference address SP2 stored in the stack pointer (SP) at this time is a fixed value previously stored in, for example, the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63. In this embodiment, since no data is stored in the second stack area 64b2 when save process 2 is performed, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in save process 2 is the address value indicating the bottom of the second stack area 64b2. After save process 2 in step S11104 is performed, proceed to step S11105.

In save process 3 shown in step S11105, the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register are stored in the area specified by address W22 in the second data memory area 64a2 using multiple load instructions (LD (W22), register). Note that the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register may also be stored in the second data memory area 64a2 using a single load instruction that uses a special code that specifies the A register, F register, and general-purpose register as the transfer target. After performing the processing of step S11105, proceed to step S11106.

In step S11106, the master CPU 62x performs a gaming history information calculation and display process by executing the gaming history information calculation and display program included in the second program 63p2. The gaming history information calculation and display process calculates the above-described gaming history information and performs processing to display the calculated gaming history information on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, the gaming history information calculation and display process performs the processing group shown in steps S10802 to S10812 in FIG. 29 described above. At this time, the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register change during the gaming history information calculation and display process.

After performing the game history information calculation and display process of step S11106, the master CPU 62x executes the return program included in the second program 63p2, thereby performing return process 1 and return process A shown in steps S11107 and S11108a. In other words, in this embodiment, the master CPU 62x performs return process A shown in step S11108a instead of return process 2 of step S11108 described above. This is explained in detail below.

In return processing 1 shown in step S11107, multiple load instructions (LD register, (W22)) are used to set the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register to the values stored in the area specified by address W22 in the second data storage area 64a2 by save processing 3 (step S11105). Note that a single load instruction using a special code may be used to set the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register to the values stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by save processing 3 (step S11105). In this return processing 1, if the value of the F register has changed in save processing 1 (step S11103), a value different from the value immediately after the game progress processing ended is stored in the F register. Alternatively, multiple load instructions may be used without using a special code to set the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register to the values stored in the second data storage area 64a2. After performing the processing of step S11107, proceed to step S11108a.

In return processing A shown in step S11108a, a load command (LD SP, fixed value) is used to store the fixed value of the first stack area reference address SP1 in the stack pointer (SP). At this time, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is a fixed value that has been stored in advance in, for example, the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63. This fixed value is described below.

In this embodiment, when all of the processes (steps S10601 to S10615) that make up the game progress process (step S11101) have been completed, there is no data stored in the first stack area 64b1, so the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value that specifies the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

Then, when the primary CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and starts execution of the second program 63p2, a predetermined amount of data is stored in the first stack area 64b1. As a result, immediately after the primary CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and starts execution of the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47), the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value that specifies a position that is moved a predetermined amount from the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

And because the amount of data stored in the first stack area 64b1 by executing the storage process (step S11102) and starting execution of the second program 63p2 is the same each time (for each timer interrupt process), the amount of movement of the first stack area reference address SP1 is also the same each time. Therefore, immediately after the primary CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and starts execution of the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47), the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) will be the same address value each time.

The fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in the return process A (step S11108a) of this embodiment is set to the same address value as the address value stored in the stack pointer each time immediately after the storage process (step S11102) ends and execution of the second program 63p2 begins (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47). As a result, even if the above-mentioned save process 1 (step S11103 in FIG. 46) is omitted, the return process A (step S11108a) of this embodiment can restore the value of the stack pointer (SP) to the value immediately after the storage process (step S11102) ends and execution of the second program 63p2 begins (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47).

The primary CPU 62x ends the processing of step S11108a described above, terminates execution of the second program 63p2, starts execution of the first program 63p1, and proceeds to step S11109.

In step S11109, the master CPU 62x executes the change program included in the first program to perform the change process. In the change process, a pop command (POP) is used to change the values of the A register and F register, among the A register, F register, and general-purpose registers whose values were set in the return process 1 (step S11107), to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage process (step S11102). A single pop command (POP AF) using a special code changes the values of the A register and F register to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage process (step S11102). Even if the value of the F register changes after the storage process (step S11102) is performed and a value different from that stored immediately after the game progress process is completed is stored in the F register in the return process 1 (step S11107), the value of the F register can be changed to the same value as immediately after the game progress process is completed. After performing step S11109, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

As explained above, this aspect can achieve the following effects in addition to the effects described in aspect 74 above.

In this embodiment, when all of the processes (steps S10601 to S10615) constituting the game progress processing (step S11101) are completed, there is no data stored in the first stack area 64b1. Therefore, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value that specifies the bottom of the first stack area 64b1. Therefore, immediately after the master CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and starts executing the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47), the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is the same address value each time the timer interrupt processing is performed. Therefore, since a fixed value can be stored in the stack pointer (SP) by the return processing A (step S11108a) of this embodiment, the save processing 1 described in embodiment 74 can be omitted. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing of the primary CPU 62x and reduce the storage capacity of the second data storage area 64a2 required to save the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP).

<Aspect 76>
Instead of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 47, the timer interrupt processing described below may be performed.

Figure 48 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the primary CPU 62x in aspect 76 of the first embodiment. The same steps as those included in the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 47 are assigned the same step numbers. The main differences from the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 47 are that save processing 3 shown in step S11105 in Figure 47 is omitted, restore processing 1 shown in step S11107 in Figure 47 is omitted, and processing to set the values of all registers to 0 has been added after the processing shown in step S11102 and step S11108a in Figure 48. This is explained in detail below.

In step S11101, the master CPU 62x executes the game progress program included in the first program 63p1 to perform game progress processing, which is processing for progressing the game. Specifically, the game progress processing performs the processing group shown in steps S10601 to S10615 in Figure 27 described above. After performing the processing in step S11101, the process proceeds to step S11102.

In step S11102, the primary CPU 62x performs storage processing by executing a storage program included in the first program 63p1. In the storage processing, a push command (PUSH) is used to store the values of the A register and F register, among multiple registers, in the first stack area 64b1, which can be accessed using the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP). At this time, a single push command (PUSH AF) using the special code AF, which specifies the A register and F register as the transfer target, stores the values of the A register and F register in the first stack area 64b1. After performing the processing of step S11102, the process proceeds to step S11102-2.

In step S11102-2, the primary CPU 62x performs the first clear process by executing the first clear program included in the first program 63p1. In the first clear process, the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register are set to 0 using multiple load instructions (LD register, 0). Note that a single load instruction using a special code may also be used to set the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register to 0.

After executing step S11102-2, the primary CPU 62x executes the evacuation program included in the second program 63p2, thereby performing evacuation process 2 shown in step S11104. In other words, in this embodiment, the primary CPU 62x does not perform the above-mentioned evacuation process 1 in step S11103 or evacuation process 3 in step S11105. A detailed explanation is provided below.

In save process 2 shown in step S11104, a load command (LD SP, fixed value) is used to store the fixed value, second stack area reference address SP2, in the stack pointer (SP). Note that the second stack area reference address SP2 stored in the stack pointer (SP) at this time is a fixed value previously stored in, for example, the second program data area 63b2 of the primary ROM 63. In this embodiment, since no data is stored in the second stack area 64b2 when save process 2 is performed, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in save process 2 is the address value indicating the bottom of the second stack area 64b2. After save process 2 in step S11104 is performed, processing proceeds to step S11106. That is, in this embodiment, the primary CPU 62x does not perform save process 3 in step S11105 described above.

In step S11106, the master CPU 62x performs a gaming history information calculation and display process by executing the gaming history information calculation and display program included in the second program 63p2. The gaming history information calculation and display process calculates the above-described gaming history information and performs processing to display the calculated gaming history information on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, the gaming history information calculation and display process performs the processing group shown in steps S10802 to S10812 in FIG. 29 described above. At this time, the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register change during the gaming history information calculation and display process.

After performing the game history information calculation and display process of step S11106, the master CPU 62x executes the second clear program included in the second program 63p2, thereby performing the second clear process shown in step S11107a. In other words, in this embodiment, the master CPU 62x does not perform the return process 1 of step S11107 described above.

In the second clear process shown in step S11107a, the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register are set to 0 using multiple load instructions (LD register, 0). Note that a single load instruction using a special code may also be used to set the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register to 0.

After performing the second clear process in step S11107a, the primary CPU 62x executes the recovery program included in the second program 63p2, thereby performing recovery process A shown in step S11108a.

In return processing A shown in step S11108a, a load command (LD SP, fixed value) is used to store the fixed value of the first stack area reference address SP1 in the stack pointer (SP). At this time, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is a fixed value that has been stored in advance in, for example, the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63. This fixed value is described below.

In this embodiment, when all of the processes (steps S10601 to S10615) that make up the game progress process (step S11101) have been completed, there is no data stored in the first stack area 64b1, so the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value that specifies the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

Then, when the primary CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and the first clear process (step S11102-2) and starts execution of the second program 63p2, a predetermined amount of data is stored in the first stack area 64b1. As a result, immediately after the primary CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and the first clear process (step S11102-2) and starts execution of the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in Figure 47), the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value specifying a position moved a predetermined amount from the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

And because the amount of data stored in the first stack area 64b1 by executing the storage process (step S11102), the first clear process (step S11102-2), and starting execution of the second program 63p2 is the same each time (for each timer interrupt process), the amount of movement of the first stack area reference address SP1 is also the same each time. Therefore, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) immediately after the primary CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and the first clear process (step S11102-2) and starts execution of the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47) will be the same address value each time.

The fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in the return processing A (step S11108a) of this embodiment is set to the same address value as the address value stored in the stack pointer each time immediately after the storage processing (step S11102) and first clear processing (step S11102-2) have ended and execution of the second program 63p2 has begun (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47). As a result, even if the above-mentioned save processing 1 (step S11103 in FIG. 46) is omitted, the return processing A (step S11108a) of this embodiment can restore the value of the stack pointer (SP) to the value immediately after the storage processing (step S11102) and first clear processing (step S11102-2) have ended and execution of the second program 63p2 has begun (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47).

The primary CPU 62x ends the processing of step S11108a described above, terminates execution of the second program 63p2, starts execution of the first program 63p1, and proceeds to step S11109.

In step S11109, the master CPU 62x performs the change process by executing a change program included in the first program. In the change process, a pop command (POP) changes the values of the A register and the F register to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage process (step S11102). At this time, a single pop command (POP AF) using a special code changes the values of the A register and the F register to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage process (step S11102). At this time, even if the value of the F register has changed after the storage process (step S11102) was performed, the value of the F register can be changed to the same value as immediately after the game progress process was completed. After performing the process of step S11109, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

As explained above, this aspect can achieve the following effects in addition to the effects described in aspects 74 and 75 above.

In this embodiment, the first clear process (step S11102-2 in FIG. 48) is performed by the first program 63p1, and the second clear process (step S11107a in FIG. 48) is performed by the second program 63p2. This makes it possible to match the register values immediately before the start of execution of the second program 63p2 with the register values immediately after the end of execution of the second program 63p2, without performing the above-described save process 3 (step S11105 in FIG. 47) and restore process 1 (step S11107 in FIG. 47). This avoids problems caused by changes to register values used in the first program 63p1 when returning from the second program 63p2 to the first program 63p1. Furthermore, because the above-described save process 3 and restore process 1 can be omitted, the storage capacity of the second data storage area 64a2 required for save process 3 and restore process 1 can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, in one timer interrupt process, the first clear process is performed after all of the various processes included in the game progress process (step S11101 in Figure 48) have been completed, and the game progress process is not performed after the first clear process, so it is possible to avoid malfunctions in the game progress process caused by setting the register value to 0 by the first clear process.

<Aspect 77>
In the storage process of step S11102 in the above-described aspects 74, 75, and 76, the values of the specific registers (A register, F register) may be stored in the first data storage area 64a1 by a load instruction. In this case, in the change process of step S11109, the values of the specific registers (A register, F register) may be changed by a load instruction to the values stored in the first data storage area 64a1 in the storage process. Also, the specific register that is the target of the storage process of step S11102 and the change process of step S11109 may be the F register only.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned aspect 74, the game progress processing by the first program 63p1 (step S11101 in FIG. 46) may be interrupted midway, and the steps from the storage processing of step S11102 to the change processing of step S11109 may be executed in an interrupted manner, after which the execution of the interrupted game progress processing may be resumed.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned aspect 76, the first clear process (step S11102-2) may be performed after the game progress process (step S11101) is performed and before the storage process (step S11102) is performed. Even with this configuration, the same effect as the above-mentioned aspect 76 can be achieved.

<Aspect 78>
Among the above-mentioned aspects, in a configuration capable of executing the setting change mode, various aspects can be adopted as a method for starting the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode and an operation method in the setting change mode. These will be specifically described below.

In this embodiment, the main control board 61 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a setting change keyhole and the RAM clear button described above, but is not provided with the setting change button described above. When an administrator managing the pachinko machine 10 wants to change the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, they first turn the power to the pachinko machine 10 OFF. Then, the inner frame 13 and front door frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened, and a setting change key is inserted into the setting change keyhole. The inserted key is then turned to the setting change side (for example, clockwise). In this state, if the RAM clear button is held down and the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 will start up in setting change mode.

That is, when the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment starts up in the setting change mode if all of the following conditions 1 to 3 are met.
Condition 1: The inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in the open state. Condition 2: The keyhole for changing the settings is located on the setting change side. Condition 3: The RAM clear button is pressed. Note that if condition 3 is met but either condition 1 or 2 is not met when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 will not start up in setting change mode, and will execute a process to initialize the main RAM 64.

When the pachinko machine 10 is started in setting change mode, information indicating the current lottery setting (setting information) is displayed in the information display unit 45z described above. For example, if the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is "Lottery Setting 1," "1" is displayed in the information display unit 45z. Then, each time the administrator presses the RAM clear button, the setting information displayed in the information display unit 45z switches in the following order: "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "1" → "2"...

When the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is set to the administrator's desired value, the administrator places a gaming ball into a designated ball entrance (e.g., outlet 43) and causes a designated ball entrance detection sensor (e.g., discharge passage detection sensor 44h) to detect the gaming ball, and the change to the lottery setting corresponding to the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is confirmed. Specifically, for example, when the setting information "6" is displayed on the information display unit 45z and a gaming ball is detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed to "Lottery Setting 6." When the administrator then turns the setting change key from the setting change side to its original position, the pachinko machine 10 exits setting change mode.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the setting change button can be omitted, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when changing the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, the inner frame 13 and front door frame 14 must be in the open state. Therefore, even if a person without the authority to change the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter also referred to as an unauthorized person) attempts to fraudulently change the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, the lottery settings cannot be changed unless the person has the means to open the inner frame 13 and front door frame 14. This improves the security of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, even if an unauthorized person were to open the inner frame 13 and front door frame 14, when the inner frame 13 and front door frame 14 are opened, a warning sound or warning voice (for example, "The door is open") will be output from the speaker 46 of the pachinko machine 10, allowing the administrator to easily notice that an unauthorized person is attempting to change the lottery settings. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized persons from changing the lottery settings.

In this embodiment, one of the conditions for the pachinko machine 10 to start in setting change mode is that both the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in an open state. However, one of the conditions for the pachinko machine 10 to start in setting change mode may also be that either the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the condition for confirming the change in the lottery settings is the detection of a gaming ball by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, but this configuration is not limited to this, and the detection of a gaming ball by another ball entry detection sensor may also be used as the condition for confirming the change in the lottery settings. For example, the condition for confirming the change in the lottery settings may be the detection of a gaming ball by the first winning opening detection sensor 44d. Note that the first winning opening detection sensor 44d is a sensor that detects the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning opening 32a, which is the general winning opening.

In addition, in this embodiment, each time the administrator presses the RAM clear button in setting change mode, the setting information displayed in the information display unit 45z changes in the following order: "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "1" → "2"... However, this is not limited to this configuration. For example, a setting change button may be provided separately from the RAM clear button, and each time the administrator presses the setting change button, the setting information displayed in the information display unit 45z may change in the following order: "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "1" → "2"...

In addition, while this embodiment is configured with a keyhole for changing settings, a keyhole for changing settings may not be provided. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to start up in setting change mode when the above conditions 1 and 3 are met upon power-on. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute a selection mode in which the administrator selects whether to start up in setting change mode or to execute a RAM clear process to initialize the main RAM 64 when the above conditions 1 and 3 are met upon power-on. In the selection mode, the administrator may be prompted to select whether to start up in setting change mode or to execute a RAM clear process by pressing a RAM clear button, and the selection may be confirmed by holding down the RAM clear button for a predetermined period of time. Furthermore, in the selection mode, the administrator may be configured to select starting up in setting change mode only when a gaming ball enters a predetermined ball entry port (e.g., outlet port 43) and is detected by a predetermined ball entry detection sensor (e.g., discharge passage detection sensor 44h). This configuration also prevents unauthorized changes to the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 by persons other than the administrator.

<Aspect 79>
Of the above aspects, in a configuration in which the setting change mode can be executed, a configuration may be adopted in which, during the setting change mode, a notification is given that the setting change mode is in progress. Specific explanations will be given below.

In this embodiment, when the main control device 60 starts the setting change mode, it sends a setting change mode start command to the audio and light emission control device 90, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has started.

When the audio and light control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, it outputs from the speaker 46 a sound indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, it causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a sound such as "In setting change mode." Furthermore, when the audio and light control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, it causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the audio and light control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "In setting change mode," and upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "In setting change mode." Furthermore, when the audio and light control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, it controls the various lamps 47 to flash alternately between being lit at maximum brightness and being extinguished.

Then, when the main control unit 60 ends the setting change mode, it sends a setting change mode end command to the audio and light emission control unit 90, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended. When the audio and light emission control unit 90 receives the setting change mode end command, it ends the various controls for notifying the user that the setting change mode is in progress, as described above.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the speaker 46, the symbol display device 41, and the various lamps 47 indicate that the pachinko machine 10 is in setting change mode, so the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in setting change mode. Furthermore, even if an unauthorized person fraudulently switches the pachinko machine 10 to setting change mode, the pachinko machine 10 will notify the user that it is in setting change mode via the speaker 46 and the symbol display device 41, so nearby players and administrators can realize that the pachinko machine 10 has been placed in setting change mode by an unauthorized person. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized persons from changing the lottery settings.

Furthermore, when the main control unit 60 starts the setting change mode, it sends information indicating that the setting change mode has started to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. The hall computer, which receives the information indicating that the setting change mode has started, displays information about the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode on the management screen. Then, when the main control unit 60 ends the setting change mode, it sends information indicating that the setting change mode has ended to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal.

With this configuration, even if the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 is not near the pachinko machine 10, the existence of a pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode can be recognized through the management screen of the hall computer. Therefore, for example, even if a pachinko machine 10 is put into setting change mode by an unauthorized person, the administrator can recognize through the management screen of the hall computer that a pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode is present. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized persons from changing the lottery settings.

<Aspect 80>
Among the above-mentioned aspects, in a configuration in which the setting change mode can be executed, if the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, after the setting change mode ends, the information stored in the main RAM 64 may be initialized except for information regarding the game status. This will be explained in detail below.

In this mode, if the lottery settings are changed in the setting change mode, the main RAM 64 is initialized, excluding information related to the game status. If the setting change mode ends without changing the lottery settings, the main RAM 64 is not initialized, and the game progresses to a game progress mode in which game play can continue. Note that in this mode, the "information related to the game status" that is not initialized is the status of the high probability mode flag, the status of the high frequency support mode flag, and the status of the flag indicating whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode (during a jackpot).

In this way, according to this embodiment, when the lottery settings are changed in the setting change mode, the main RAM 64 is initialized. This prevents inconsistencies from occurring between the information stored in the main RAM 64 after the lottery settings are changed and the information stored in the main RAM 64 before the lottery settings were changed, which could cause problems in the progress of the game.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, even if the lottery settings are changed in the setting change mode and the main RAM 64 is initialized, the information stored in the main RAM 64 that relates to the game status is not erased. Therefore, for example, it is possible to change the lottery settings in the pachinko machine 10 while maintaining a game status that is advantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, the main RAM 64 is initialized after the setting change mode ends, but if an operation to start the setting change mode is received when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the main RAM 64 may be initialized, excluding information related to the game status, before starting the setting change mode. Even with this configuration, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies from occurring between the information stored in the main RAM 64 after the lottery settings are changed and the information stored in the main RAM 64 before the lottery settings were changed, which could cause problems in the progress of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, information regarding the game status is not erased when the main RAM 64 is initialized, but it may also be configured to initialize all information stored in the main RAM 64 (including information regarding the game status).

In addition, the "information regarding game status" that is not initialized is not limited to the above, and may also include, for example, pending information.

<Aspect 81>
Among the above-mentioned aspects, in a configuration in which the setting change mode can be executed, when an inconsistency occurs in the information stored in the main RAM 64 due to noise or the like and the main RAM 64 is initialized, the configuration may be such that the mode transitions to the setting change mode before returning to the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed. This will be explained in detail below.

In this embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a monitoring process during timer interrupt processing to monitor whether any abnormalities, such as inconsistencies, have occurred in the information stored in the main RAM 64. Specifically, for example, the monitoring process monitors whether values outside of a range that should not be stored have been stored in each area of the main RAM 64. If the monitoring process determines that an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 64, it halts processing related to game progress and forcibly initializes the main RAM 64. After the initialization of the main RAM 64 is complete, the main control device 60 transitions to the setting change mode described above before transitioning to a game progress mode in which game progress is possible. Note that causes of abnormalities, such as inconsistencies, in the information stored in the main RAM 64 can include, for example, noise from electromagnetic waves, or a player with dishonest intentions bringing a magnet or the like close to the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, similar to the above-described aspect 79, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to notify the user that it is in setting change mode, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 will be able to notice that the pachinko machine 10 has transitioned to setting change mode. The administrator then determines the lottery settings for the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode, and the pachinko machine 10 then transitions to game progress mode.

The reason for this configuration will be explained below. If the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the lottery setting information may have been rewritten to setting information different from the setting information originally intended by the administrator. Furthermore, if the lottery setting information is configured so that it is not initialized (changed) even when the main RAM 64 is initialized, there is a risk that it will still be maintained at setting information different from the setting information originally intended by the administrator. Therefore, if, as in this embodiment, the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the system is configured to transition to setting change mode before returning to a game progress mode in which game play can proceed, the administrator will be able to correct the lottery setting information to the setting information originally intended before the pachinko machine 10 returns to game progress mode.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the information regarding the game status described above may not be initialized. With this configuration, even if the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the information regarding the game status is not initialized (erased), allowing the player to resume play while maintaining the game status. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the forcible initialization of the main RAM 64 due to noise or the like.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that the setting change mode is entered after the main RAM 64 is initialized, but instead of entering the setting change mode after the main RAM 64 is initialized, the configuration may be such that the lottery setting is set to an initial value (for example, "lottery setting 1") and then the mode is entered into a game progress mode in which game play can proceed.

In addition, in this embodiment, information regarding the game status is not erased when the main RAM 64 is initialized, but it may also be configured to erase information regarding the game status when the main RAM 64 is initialized.

<Aspect 82>
In the configuration in which the setting change mode can be executed among the above aspects, a configuration may be adopted in which a notification is made as to whether the lottery setting has been changed or not in the setting change mode. Specific explanations will be given below.

In this embodiment, when the lottery settings are changed in the setting change mode, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 notifies the user that the lottery settings have been changed by outputting a sound from the speaker 46 indicating that the lottery settings have been changed and by displaying text indicating that the lottery settings have been changed on the pattern display device 41.

Specifically, for example, when the main control device 60 transitions to setting change mode, it saves the setting information for the current lottery setting in a specified area of the main RAM 64. It then compares the setting information for the newly determined lottery setting in setting change mode with the saved setting information for the lottery setting before the change, and if the setting information differs, it sends a setting change command to the audio and light emission control device 90, which is a command indicating that the lottery setting has been changed.

When the audio and light control device 90 receives a setting change command, it outputs from the speaker 46 a sound indicating that the lottery settings have been changed. Specifically, for example, it causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a sound such as "The lottery settings have been changed." Furthermore, when the audio and light control device 90 receives a setting change command, it causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the lottery settings have been changed. Specifically, for example, the audio and light control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a string such as "The lottery settings have been changed." Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to display a string such as "The lottery settings have been changed." Furthermore, when the audio and light control device 90 receives a setting change command, it controls the various lamps 47 to flash alternately between lighting at maximum brightness and being turned off.

On the other hand, if the setting change mode is ended with the lottery settings remaining unchanged, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 will output a sound from the speaker 46 indicating that the lottery settings have been maintained unchanged, and will display text on the pattern display device 41 indicating that the lottery settings have been maintained unchanged, thereby notifying the player that the lottery settings have been maintained unchanged.

Specifically, for example, when the main control device 60 transitions to setting change mode, it saves the setting information for the current lottery setting in a specified area of the main RAM 64. It then compares the setting information for the newly determined lottery setting in setting change mode with the saved setting information for the lottery setting before the change, and if the setting information matches, it sends a setting maintenance command to the audio and light emission control device 90, which is a command indicating that the lottery setting has been maintained without change.

When the audio and light control device 90 receives the setting maintenance command, it outputs from the speaker 46 a sound indicating that the lottery settings have been maintained without change. Specifically, for example, it causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a sound such as "The lottery settings have not been changed." Furthermore, when the audio and light control device 90 receives the setting maintenance command, it causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the lottery settings have been maintained without change. Specifically, for example, the audio and light control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a string such as "The lottery settings have not been changed." Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 displays a string such as "The lottery settings have not been changed" on the pattern display device 41. Furthermore, when the audio and light control device 90 receives the setting maintenance command, it controls the various lamps 47 to light up instead of flashing.

In this way, according to this embodiment, if the lottery settings are changed in setting change mode, a notification is sent that the lottery settings have been changed, allowing the administrator and players to confirm whether the lottery settings have been changed.

In particular, in the above-mentioned aspect 81, in the setting change mode after the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, it is expected that a player playing on the pachinko machine 10 will become suspicious as to whether the lottery settings have been changed by the administrator. However, according to this aspect, if the lottery settings are changed, a notification is issued, allowing the player to confirm whether the lottery settings have been changed. More specifically, the player can be made to understand only whether the lottery settings have been changed in the setting change mode, without being able to understand what setting information the current lottery settings contain. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player has to resume play in a state of anxiety, not knowing whether the lottery settings have been changed by the administrator.

In this embodiment, if the lottery settings have not been changed, a notification is given that the lottery settings have been maintained without change. However, if the lottery settings have not been changed, no notification may be given, or a different notification may be given than when the lottery settings have been changed, such as "Exiting setting change mode." Even with this configuration, if the player does not receive a notification such as "The lottery settings have been changed," the player can determine that the lottery settings have not been changed, thereby preventing the player from having to resume play with anxiety.

<Aspect 83>
In the above aspect 82, the main control device 60 may be configured to include setting information for the changed lottery setting in a setting change command, which is a command indicating that the lottery setting has been changed.The sound and light emitting control device 90 may be configured to sequentially store the setting information for the changed lottery setting in RAM, which serves as storage means, provided in the main control device 60 each time it receives a setting change command including setting information for the changed lottery setting.The sound and light emitting control device 90 may be configured to display a history of changes to the lottery setting on the pattern display device 41 when it receives a predetermined operation from the administrator of the pachinko machine 10, etc.

This configuration allows the history of changes to the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 to be stored without using the limited storage capacity of the main RAM 64 of the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10, and allows the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 to easily check how the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 have been operated by looking at the history of changes to the lottery settings displayed on the pattern display device 41.

<Aspect 84>
Among the above aspects, in a configuration in which the setting change mode can be executed, a setting confirmation mode in which the lottery settings cannot be changed but the administrator or the like can check the current lottery settings may be executed. This will be explained in detail below.

When a specific operation is performed under specific conditions, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment enters a game stop state in which game progress is disabled, and then transitions to setting confirmation mode.

In this embodiment, "under specific conditions" refers to a state in which all of the following conditions are met:
Condition 1: The special pattern is not currently changing in the special pattern unit 37. Condition 2: The normal pattern is not currently changing in the normal pattern unit 38. Condition 3: The variable winning device 36 as a special electric device is not operating. Condition 4: The electric device 34a as a normal electric device is not operating. Condition 5: A predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has passed since the last time the game ball was fired. In other words, under certain conditions, the outcome of the game is not affected even if the progress of the game is stopped (interrupted).

In this embodiment, the specific operation is the operation of pressing the RAM clear button located on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

In other words, when the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment detects that the RAM clear button has been pressed during game progress mode, in which game play can proceed, it determines whether the above-mentioned specific conditions are met, and if it determines that the above-mentioned specific conditions are met, it transitions to setting confirmation mode. Then, when it detects that the RAM clear button has been released again, it ends setting confirmation mode and returns to game progress mode, in which game play can proceed.

During setting confirmation mode, the main control unit 60 executes random number update processing to update the jackpot random number counter and other processes, and power supply monitoring processing, but does not execute other processes necessary for game progress (such as various ball entry processes in timer interrupt processing), and places the game in a stopped state (a state in which game progress is impossible), and then displays setting information indicating the current lottery setting on the information display unit 45z. For example, if the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is "Lottery Setting 1," the information display unit 45z displays "1."

Furthermore, in pachinko machines 10 equipped with devices that always continue to perform a certain operation (predetermined operation) during game progress mode regardless of the results of the jackpot lottery or the electric device release lottery (hereinafter also referred to as constantly operating devices), the main control device 60 continues the operation of the constantly operating devices even when transitioning from game progress mode to setting confirmation mode. Specifically, after transitioning to setting confirmation mode, the main control device 60 is configured to continue executing control processing for the constantly operating devices in addition to random number update processing and power supply monitoring processing. Then, when the main control device 60 ends the setting confirmation mode and returns to game progress mode in which game progress is possible, it resumes execution of other processes necessary for game progress that had been avoided.

With this configuration, the operation of the constantly operating device continues at a constant rate without stopping or changing when the game transitions from game progress mode to setting confirmation mode or when the game returns from setting confirmation mode. This prevents players from gaining an unfair advantage by firing game balls at times when the operation of the constantly operating device stops or changes, for example.

In this embodiment, the operation of the constantly operating device continues even during the setting confirmation mode. However, the operation of the constantly operating device may be temporarily stopped when the game progress mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode, and then resumed when the game progress mode is switched back to from the setting confirmation mode. This configuration simplifies processing compared to a configuration in which the operation of the constantly operating device continues. Furthermore, it is possible to ensure that the operation of the constantly operating device is continuous during the game progress mode in which game progress is possible. Furthermore, with this configuration, when returning from setting confirmation mode to game progress mode, the operation of the constantly operating device resumes from the same state as when the game progress mode was switched to setting confirmation mode. This prevents the constantly operating device from resuming operation from a different state (for example, a state that is disadvantageous or advantageous to the player) than when the game progress mode was switched to setting confirmation mode, which would require the player to resume play from a state different from when the game was stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific operation for transitioning to setting confirmation mode is the operation of pressing the RAM clear button, but various operations can be used as the specific operation. For example, the specific operation may be the operation of inserting a setting change key into a setting change keyhole and turning it to the setting change side. With this configuration, a setting change key is required to check the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, and therefore it is possible to prevent someone without a setting change key from being able to check the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10.

<Aspect 85>
In the above-mentioned aspect 84, the operation of the constantly operating role object is continued even during the setting confirmation mode, but when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the constantly operating role object may be shifted to a predetermined initial state (or moved to an initial position) and then stopped operating. This will be explained in detail below.

When the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment transitions from game progress mode to setting confirmation mode, it continues control processing of the constantly operating device until the constantly operating device transitions to its initial state (or moves to its initial position). Then, when the main control device 60 detects that the constantly operating device has transitioned to its initial state (or moved to its initial position), it ceases execution of control processing of the constantly operating device and stops the operation of the constantly operating device. Thereafter, when the main control device 60 ends setting confirmation mode and returns to game progress mode in which game progress is possible, it resumes control processing of the constantly operating device and execution of other processes necessary for game progress that had been avoided.

In addition, when the main control device 60 returns from the setting confirmation mode to the game progress mode before detecting that the constantly operating device has transitioned to its initial state (or moved to its initial position), the control process for the constantly operating device continues as is. In other words, in this mode, the constantly operating device is configured so that it will not stop operating in a state other than its initial state (or in a position other than its initial position).

This configuration can prevent malfunctions, for example, in constantly operating devices that may malfunction if their operation is stopped in a state other than the initial state (or a position other than the initial position).

<Aspect 86>
Of the above aspects, in a configuration capable of executing the setting check mode, a configuration may be adopted in which, during the setting check mode, a notification is given that the setting check mode is in progress. Specific explanations will be given below.

In this embodiment, when the main control device 60 starts the setting check mode, it sends a setting check mode start command to the audio and light emission control device 90, which is a command indicating that the setting check mode has started.

When the audio and light control device 90 receives the setting check mode start command, it outputs from the speaker 46 a sound indicating that the setting check mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, it causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a sound such as "In setting check mode." Furthermore, when the audio and light control device 90 receives the setting check mode start command, it causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting check mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the audio and light control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a string such as "In setting check mode," and upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to display a string such as "In setting check mode." Furthermore, when the audio and light control device 90 receives the setting check mode start command, it controls the various lamps 47 to flash alternately between being lit at maximum brightness and being extinguished.

Then, when the main control device 60 ends the setting confirmation mode, it sends a setting confirmation mode end command to the audio and light emission control device 90, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode end command, it ends the various controls for notifying the user that the setting confirmation mode described above is in progress.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the speaker 46, the symbol display device 41, and the various lamps 47 indicate that the pachinko machine 10 is in setting confirmation mode, so the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in setting confirmation mode. Furthermore, even if a fraudulent person fraudulently switches the pachinko machine 10 to setting confirmation mode, the pachinko machine 10 will indicate that it is in setting confirmation mode using the speaker 46, the symbol display device 41, and the various lamps 47, so nearby players and administrators can realize that the pachinko machine 10 has been placed in setting confirmation mode by a fraudulent person. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent persons from checking the lottery settings.

Furthermore, when the main control device 60 starts the setting check mode, it sends information indicating that the setting check mode has started to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. The hall computer, which receives the information indicating that the setting check mode has started, displays information about the pachinko machine 10 in setting check mode on the management screen. Then, when the main control device 60 ends the setting check mode, it sends information indicating that the setting check mode has ended to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal.

With this configuration, even if the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 is not near the pachinko machine 10, the existence of a pachinko machine 10 in setting confirmation mode can be recognized through the management screen of the hall computer. Therefore, for example, even if a pachinko machine 10 is put into setting confirmation mode by an unauthorized person, the administrator can recognize through the management screen of the hall computer that a pachinko machine 10 in setting confirmation mode exists. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized persons from checking the lottery settings.

<Aspect 87>
Of the above aspects, in a configuration capable of executing the setting change mode and the setting check mode, the configuration may be such that the setting change mode and the setting check mode cannot be executed unless the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned OFF. In other words, the configuration may be such that the pachinko machine 10 executes the setting change mode or the setting check mode when a predetermined operation is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned OFF and then turned ON. This will be explained in detail below.

Note that in this embodiment and the embodiments described below, the "setting change keyhole" and "setting change key" in the above embodiments are used not only when transitioning to a setting change mode in which lottery settings are changed, but also when transitioning to a setting confirmation mode in which lottery settings are confirmed, and are therefore also simply referred to as the "setting keyhole" and "setting key," respectively.

In this embodiment, the main control board 61 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a power switch, a RAM clear button, a setting keyhole, a setting change button, and an information display unit 45z. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that once the power switch is operated to turn the power ON and the game progress mode, in which game play can proceed, is initiated, the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode cannot be entered until the power to the pachinko machine 10 is first turned OFF. Furthermore, the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is executed if certain conditions are met when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes the setting change mode when the power is turned on (ON) and all of the following conditions A1 to A3 are met.
Condition A1: The inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in the open state. Condition A2: The setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and is positioned on the ON side. Condition A3: The RAM clear button is pressed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (ON) and all of the following conditions B1 to B3 are met.
Condition B1: The inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in the open state. Condition B2: The setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and is positioned on the ON side. Condition B3: The RAM clear button is not pressed.

Below, we will explain an example of the work process that a pachinko machine 10 administrator performs to transition the pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode after the game progress mode has begun, and then we will explain an example of the processing that is executed on the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 49 is a process diagram showing the work process when an administrator changes the lottery settings of a pachinko machine 10.

In step W101, the administrator inserts a key into the cylinder lock 17 of the pachinko machine 10 for which the lottery settings are to be changed and turns it to the open side, rotating the inner frame 13 relative to the outer frame 11 to open it, and rotating the front door frame 14 relative to the inner frame 13 to open it. By rotating the inner frame 13 relative to the outer frame 11, the administrator can access the various operating units located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Next, proceed to step W102, where the administrator operates the power switch located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to turn it off. Next, proceed to step W103.

In step W103, the administrator inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole on the back of the pachinko machine 10 and turns it to the setting change side (hereinafter referred to as the ON side). Next, proceeding to step W104, the administrator presses the RAM clear button on the back of the pachinko machine 10 while operating the power switch to turn the power to the pachinko machine 10 ON. After starting up, the pachinko machine 10 then transitions to setting change mode (step W105), and the setting information for the current lottery setting is displayed on the information display unit 45z (step W106). Specifically, for example, if the current setting information for the pachinko machine 10 is "1," the number "1" is displayed lit on the information display unit 45z. Next, proceed to step W107.

In step W107, the administrator changes the setting information by pressing the setting change button located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, each time the administrator presses the setting change button, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z changes in the following order: "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "1" → "2"... The administrator presses the setting change button until the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z becomes the desired setting information. Next, proceed to step W108.

In step W108, the administrator confirms that the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is the desired setting information, and then presses the RAM clear button on the back of the pachinko machine 10 to confirm the changed setting information. Next, proceeding to step W109, the administrator returns the setting key to the OFF position and removes the key from the setting keyhole. The pachinko machine 10 then transitions to a game progress mode in which play can proceed (step W110), and game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z (step W111). Next, proceeding to step W112, the administrator closes the inner frame 13 and front door frame 14 and removes the key from the cylinder lock 17. Through these steps, the administrator can change the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 50 is a process diagram showing the work process when an administrator checks the lottery settings of a pachinko machine 10.

In process W201, the administrator inserts a key into the cylinder lock 17 of the pachinko machine 10 for which the lottery settings are to be checked and turns it to the open side, rotating the inner frame 13 relative to the outer frame 11 to open it, and rotating the front door frame 14 relative to the inner frame 13 to open it. By rotating the inner frame 13 relative to the outer frame 11, the administrator can access the various operating units located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Next, proceed to process W202, where the administrator operates the power switch located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to turn it off. Next, proceed to process W203.

In step W203, the administrator inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole on the back of the pachinko machine 10 and turns it to the ON position. Next, proceeding to step W204, the administrator operates the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 to turn the power of the pachinko machine 10 ON. After starting up, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to setting confirmation mode (step W205), and the setting information for the current lottery setting is displayed on the information display unit 45z (step W206). Specifically, for example, if the current setting information of the pachinko machine 10 is "1," a flashing "1" is displayed on the information display unit 45z. The administrator can confirm the current setting information of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the flashing setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z. Next, proceed to step W207.

In step W207, the administrator checks the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z, then turns the setting key back to the OFF position and removes the key from the setting keyhole. The pachinko machine 10 then transitions to a game progress mode in which play can proceed (step W208), and game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z (step W209). Next, proceeding to step W210, the administrator closes the inner frame 13 and front door frame 14 and removes the key from the cylinder lock 17. Through these steps, the administrator can check the current lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, we will explain the processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of this embodiment of the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 51 is a flowchart showing part of the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 87 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step S11201, initial setting processing is performed in response to power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and a wait process is performed, for example, for approximately one second, to wait for the sub-side control devices (audio/light-emitting control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) to become operable. Access to the main RAM 64 is then permitted. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S11202, where internal function register setting processing is performed. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S11203, where processing is performed to notify the pachinko machine 10 that it has been powered on and started up. Specifically, a startup command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started up is sent to the audio/light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the startup command, the audio/light-emitting control device 90 performs processing to notify the pachinko machine 10 that it has started up. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "Starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11203, the process proceeds to step S11204.

In step S11204, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

Now, let's explain the power recovery flag. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, various information (such as information indicating the game status and control information) stored in the registers of the main CPU 62x is saved to a specified area in the main RAM 64. Then, when this information has been saved to the main RAM 64, the power recovery flag is turned ON, a RAM determination value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. After the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the power supply switches to a backup power source such as a capacitor. In this way, the power recovery flag is a flag that identifies, when the power is turned on, whether or not information for restoring the machine to the state it was in the last time the power was turned OFF is stored in the main RAM 64.

If it is determined in step S11204 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11204: YES), the process proceeds to step S11205, where a RAM judgment value for the main RAM 64 is calculated. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM judgment value. Then, the process proceeds to step S11206, where it is determined whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) is normal, i.e., whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) matches the RAM judgment value (checksum value) stored in the main RAM 64. If it is determined in step S11206 that the RAM judgment value is normal (step S11206: YES), the process proceeds to step S11208, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11204 above that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11204: NO), or if it is determined in step S11206 above that the RAM judgment value is not normal (step S11206: NO), proceed to step S11207, where the RAM abnormality flag is set ON. In other words, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that is set ON when the power recovery flag is OFF, or when the power recovery flag is ON but the RAM judgment value is not normal, and is a flag that indicates that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal. After executing step S11207, proceed to step S11208.

In step S11208, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S11208 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11208: NO), proceed to step S11209, where it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. The frame open switch is a switch that is ON when the inner frame 13 is open relative to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is a switch that is ON when the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13.

If it is determined in step S11209 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S11209: NO), proceed to step S11210 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11210 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11210: NO), the process proceeds to step S11211, where power restoration processing is executed to restore the state of the main CPU 62x to the state it was in the previous power-off state. Specifically, in the power restoration processing, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main CPU 62x to the state it was in before the power was cut off. After executing step S11211, the process proceeds to step S11212, where the power restoration flag of the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the timer interrupt processing interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number update processing, and power supply monitoring processing described in each of the above aspects are executed. By enabling the timer interrupt processing interrupt and executing the timer interrupt processing described above, game progress becomes possible (game progress mode is initiated).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11210 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11210: YES), the process proceeds to step S11213, where RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormality. Please start in setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11213, the process proceeds to the normal game processing described above. However, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update processing and power supply monitoring processing are executed, but other processing necessary for game progress (e.g., ball entry processing for the starting gate, game number control processing, etc.) is not executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not executed. Therefore, although it appears to be the same as the normal game progress mode, the player is unable to progress in the game. In other words, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the machine will not transition to game progress mode. In this state, the administrator can turn the power to the pachinko machine 10 OFF, insert the setting key into the setting keyhole and turn it ON, and then turn the power ON while holding down the RAM clear button to start the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11209 above that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S11209: YES), proceed to step S11214 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11214 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11214: NO), the process proceeds to step S11215, where a setting confirmation process is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process is executed to display the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display unit 45z. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can check the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) will be described later. After executing step S11215, the process proceeds to step S11216, where the above-mentioned power recovery process is executed to restore the state at the time of the last power OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S11217, where the power recovery flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number update process, and power supply monitoring process of the timer interrupt process described in each of the above aspects are executed. By enabling the timer interrupt process and executing the timer interrupt process described above, game progress becomes possible (game progress mode begins).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11214 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11214: YES), the process proceeds to step S11218, where RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormality. Please start in setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11218, the process proceeds to the normal game processing described above. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update processing and power supply monitoring processing (power outage monitoring processing) are executed, but other processing necessary for game progress (e.g., ball entry processing for the starting gate, game number control processing, etc.) is not executed. Specifically, in this mode, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not performed. Therefore, although it appears to be the same as the normal game progress mode, the player is unable to progress in the game. In other words, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the machine will not transition to game progress mode. In this state, the administrator can turn the power to the pachinko machine 10 OFF, insert the setting key into the setting keyhole and turn it ON, and then turn the power ON while holding down the RAM clear button to start the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode.

If it is determined in step S11208 above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11208: YES), proceed to step S11219 and determine whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON.

If it is determined in step S11219 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S11219: NO), proceed to step S11220 to determine whether the RAM abnormality flag described above is ON. If it is determined in step S11220 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11220: NO), proceed to step S11221.

In step S11221, a first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clear process erases (clears to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64, except for the lottery setting information. In other words, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information and various control information indicating the game status are erased, but the lottery setting information is not erased and the setting information is maintained as is. In addition, in this embodiment, the first RAM clear process transmits a first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, to the audio and light control device 90. Upon receiving the first RAM clear process execution command, the audio and light control device 90 outputs a sound from the speaker 46 indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11221, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11220 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11220: YES), the process proceeds to step S11222, where RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormality. Please start in setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11222, the process proceeds to the normal game processing described above. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update processing and power supply monitoring processing (power outage monitoring processing) are executed, but other processing necessary for game progress (e.g., ball entry processing for the starting gate, game number control processing, etc.) is not executed. Specifically, in this mode, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not performed. Therefore, although it appears to be the same as the normal game progress mode, the player is unable to progress in the game. In other words, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the machine will not transition to game progress mode. In this state, the administrator can turn the power to the pachinko machine 10 OFF, insert the setting key into the setting keyhole and turn it ON, and then turn the power ON while holding down the RAM clear button to start the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode.

If it is determined in step S11219 above that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S11219: YES), proceed to step S11223 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11223 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11223: NO), the process proceeds to step S11224, where the first RAM clear process described above is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S11225, where the setting change process is executed. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process is executed to display the setting information for the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z, and a process is executed to accept changes to the setting information for the lottery setting. In other words, the setting change mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can change the setting information for the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. After executing step S11225, the process transitions to the normal game processing described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11223 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11223: YES), the process proceeds to step S11226, where RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light control device 90. Upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio and light control device 90 outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "There is a RAM abnormality" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11226, the process proceeds to step S11227.

In step S11227, a second RAM clearing process is executed. The second RAM clearing process erases (clears to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64, including the lottery setting information. In other words, when the second RAM clearing process is executed, the lottery setting information is also erased, in addition to various flag information indicating the game status and various control information. Here, we explain why the second RAM clearing process, which erases the setting information, is executed instead of the first RAM clearing process when the RAM abnormality flag is ON. When the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 may also be abnormal. For example, the setting information may have been overwritten with information unintended by the administrator due to noise, or a value outside the specified range (e.g., values from 1 to 6) may have been stored, even though the setting information can only take values within the specified range. In this second RAM clearing process, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. Furthermore, the second RAM clearing process also turns the RAM abnormality flag OFF. The process then proceeds to step S11228, where the setting change process is executed. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. After executing step S11228, the process transitions to the normal game process described above.

Figure 52 is a flowchart showing the setting change process executed by the primary MPU 62 (primary CPU 62x) in aspect 87 of the first embodiment. This setting change process is executed as a subroutine of steps S11225 and S11228 in Figure 51.

In step S11301, a setting change notification start process is executed. In the setting change notification start process, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has started, is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 outputs a sound from the speaker 46 indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "You are in setting change mode. Please change your settings" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. Furthermore, upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 displays information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress on the pattern display device 41. Specifically, for example, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a string such as "You are in setting change mode. Please change your settings." Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 displays a string such as "You are in setting change mode. Please change your settings" on the pattern display device 41. Furthermore, upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 to alternately flash between lit at maximum brightness and off.

Furthermore, in the setting change notification start process, information indicating that the setting change mode has started is sent to the gaming hall's hall computer via an external terminal. Upon receiving the information indicating that the setting change mode has started, the hall computer displays information about the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step S11301, proceed to step S11302.

In step S11302, control is initiated to display the lottery setting information on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, the lottery setting information is illuminated on the information display unit 45z. Then, the process proceeds to step S11303, where it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels, from "1" to "6," so it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6." If it is determined in step S11303 that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S11303: YES), the process proceeds to step S11305. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11303 that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S11303: NO), for example, if "0" or "7" is stored as the setting information, or if non-numeric information is stored due to noise, etc., the process proceeds to step S11304, where the setting information is changed to its initial value. In this embodiment, "1" is stored as the initial value in the setting information. Then, proceed to step S11305.

In step S11305, it is determined whether the RAM clear button has been pressed. If it is determined in step S11305 that the RAM clear button has not been pressed (step S11305: NO), the process proceeds to step S11306, where it is determined whether the setting change button has been pressed. If it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button has been pressed (step S11306: YES), the process proceeds to step S11307, where the setting information for the lottery setting is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information stored as the setting information. However, if the setting change button is pressed when the numerical information stored as the setting information is "6", the numerical information is updated to "1". Then, the process returns to step S11303 described above, where it is determined whether the updated setting information is a number within the specified range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button has not been pressed (step S11306: NO), the process returns to step S11303 described above without executing the processing of step S11307, and it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within the specified range.

If it is determined in step S11305 above that the RAM clear button has been pressed (step S11305: YES), the process proceeds to step S11308, where it is determined whether the setting key has been turned OFF. If it is determined in step S11308 that the setting key has not been turned OFF (step S11308: NO), step S11308 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11308 that the setting key has been turned OFF (step S11308: YES), the process proceeds to step S11309. In other words, after the RAM clear button is pressed, an infinite loop is repeated until the setting key is turned OFF, and the process does not proceed to step S11309. Once the setting key is turned OFF, the process proceeds to step S11309.

In step S11309, control for displaying the lottery setting information on the information display unit 45z ends. Then, proceed to step S11310.

In step S11310, a setting change notification end process is executed. In the setting change notification end process, a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode end command, it ends the various controls for notifying the user that the setting change mode is in progress, as described above.

Furthermore, in the setting change notification termination process, information indicating that the setting change mode has ended is sent to the gaming hall's hall computer via an external terminal. Upon receiving the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended, the hall computer displays information on the management screen indicating that the setting change mode for the pachinko machine 10 has ended. After executing step S11310, this setting change process ends. Note that after executing the setting change notification termination process, setting information for the changed lottery settings may be sent to the gaming hall's hall computer via an external terminal, and the hall computer that receives this information may display the setting information for the changed lottery settings for the pachinko machine 10 on the management screen.

Figure 53 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process executed by the primary MPU 62 (primary CPU 62x) in aspect 87 of the first embodiment. This setting confirmation process is executed as a subroutine of step S11215 in Figure 51.

In step S11401, a setting confirmation notification start process is executed. In the setting confirmation notification start process, a setting confirmation mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started, is sent to the audio and light control device 90. Upon receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the audio and light control device 90 outputs an audio signal from the speaker 46 indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the audio signal causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output an audio signal such as "In setting confirmation mode." Furthermore, upon receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the audio and light control device 90 causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the audio and light control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "In setting confirmation mode." Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "In setting confirmation mode." Furthermore, upon receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the audio and light control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 to flash alternately between being lit at maximum brightness and being extinguished.

Furthermore, in the setting confirmation notification start process, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started is sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. Upon receiving the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started, the hall computer displays information about the pachinko machine 10 in setting confirmation mode on the management screen. After executing step S11401, proceed to step S11402.

In step S11402, control is initiated to display the lottery setting information on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, the lottery setting information is displayed in a flashing manner on the information display unit 45z. Then, the process proceeds to step S11403.

In step S11403, it is determined whether the setting key has been turned OFF. If it is determined in step S11403 that the setting key has not been turned OFF (step S11403: NO), step S11403 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11403 that the setting key has been turned OFF (step S11403: YES), the process proceeds to step S11404. In other words, an infinite loop is repeated until the setting key is turned OFF, and the process does not proceed to step S11404, and once the setting key is turned OFF, the process proceeds to step S11404.

In step S11404, control for displaying the lottery setting information on the information display unit 45z ends. Then, proceed to step S11405.

In step S11405, a setting confirmation notification end process is executed. In the setting confirmation notification end process, a setting confirmation mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode end command, it ends the various controls for notifying that the setting confirmation mode described above is in progress.

Furthermore, in the setting confirmation notification termination process, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended is sent to the gaming hall's hall computer via an external terminal. Upon receiving the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended, the hall computer displays information on the management screen indicating that the setting confirmation mode for the pachinko machine 10 has ended. After executing step S11405, this setting confirmation process ends.

As explained above, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on (power ON), the pachinko machine 10 executes the setting change mode if the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON and the RAM clear switch is ON. Conversely, when the power is turned on (power ON), the pachinko machine 10 executes the setting confirmation mode if the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON and the RAM clear switch is OFF. In other words, in this embodiment, a pachinko machine 10 that has already been activated (for example, while the game progress mode is being executed) cannot be transitioned to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode while the power is ON. In order to transition an activated pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the power of the pachinko machine 10 must be turned OFF, and then the power must be turned ON again while performing the above-mentioned specified operations.

Generally, gaming halls are designed so that no one other than the administrator can operate the power switch located on the back of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even if there is a person (hereinafter referred to as an "illegal person") who attempts to change or check the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 with the intent of obtaining an unfair advantage, it is difficult for an unauthorized person other than the administrator to operate the power switch located on the back of the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to prevent an unauthorized person from illegally switching the pachinko machine 10 into setting change mode or setting check mode.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a voice or alarm sound is output from the speaker 46 indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started up, making it even more difficult for an unauthorized person to change or check the lottery settings without being noticed by those around them. As a result, unauthorized persons can be prevented from changing or checking the lottery settings in an unauthorized manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in order to transition the pachinko machine 10 to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the inner frame 13 and front door frame 14 must be in an open state, making it even more difficult for unauthorized persons to change or confirm lottery settings without being noticed by those around them. As a result, unauthorized persons can be prevented from fraudulently changing or confirming lottery settings.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, during the start-up process from when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on until the game progress mode begins (the period during which the processes from step S11201 to step S11228 in FIG. 51 are being executed), game history information is not displayed on the information display unit 45z, and setting information for the lottery setting is displayed when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is executed. In other words, during the start-up process, game history information is not displayed on the information display unit 45z, and only setting information for the lottery setting can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the administrator from becoming confused during the start-up process as to whether the information displayed on the information display unit 45z is setting information for the lottery setting or game history information, and it is also possible to prevent the administrator from mistakenly recognizing the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z as game history information.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if an operation to execute the setting check mode is performed when the power is turned on, the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64 is determined to be normal, and if it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal, the setting check mode is not executed, a notification is issued that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, and the game is not transitioned to a game progress mode in which the game can proceed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting check mode and game progress mode from being executed while leaving open the possibility that the setting information for the lottery settings stored in the main RAM 64 has become an abnormal value unintended by the administrator.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the operation for executing the setting change mode includes pressing the RAM clear button, and the pachinko machine 10 executes a RAM clear process (first RAM clear process or second RAM clear process) when executing the setting change mode. In other words, to execute the setting change mode on the pachinko machine 10, the administrator operates the RAM clear button, and the pachinko machine 10 also executes the RAM clear process when executing the setting change mode. Generally, administrators who manage pachinko machines 10 are aware that the RAM clear process will be executed if the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM clear button pressed. Therefore, according to the configuration of this embodiment, it is possible to make the administrator strongly aware that when the RAM clear button is operated to execute the setting change mode, not only will the setting change mode be executed, but the RAM clear process will also be executed. As a result, for example, if the administrator wishes to start the pachinko machine 10 while maintaining a game state such as high probability mode and resume the game progress mode from the state it was in the last time the power was turned off, in other words, if the RAM clear process must not be executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, the administrator can reliably determine that the setting change mode, which involves executing the RAM clear process, must not be executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first RAM clear process that does not erase the lottery setting information stored in the main RAM 64, and a second RAM clear process that erases the setting information as well. This makes it possible to implement processing steps that can handle both processing steps in which the setting information should be left intact and other information should be erased, and processing steps in which the setting information should be erased as well. For example, it is possible to implement a configuration in which the first RAM clear process is executed in a processing step in which the setting information is normal and therefore should be maintained, but other information should be erased, and a configuration in which the second RAM clear process is executed in a processing step in which the setting information may have become an abnormal value unintended by the administrator.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if it determines that the power recovery flag is not ON or that the RAM determination value is not normal, it will report that the main RAM 64 is abnormal and will not enter a game progress mode in which game play can proceed. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and then turned on again, it is configured not to enter a game progress mode in which game play can proceed unless an operation to execute the setting change mode is performed and the setting change mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress mode from being executed while leaving open the possibility that the lottery setting information stored in the main RAM 64 has become an abnormal value unintended by the administrator.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the setting change mode is executed, a RAM clear process is executed, thereby preventing inconsistencies from occurring between the information stored in the main RAM 64 after the lottery settings are changed and the information stored in the main RAM 64 before the lottery settings are changed, which could cause problems in the progress of the game.

In this embodiment, the first RAM clearing process is executed in step S11224 of FIG. 51, followed by the setting change process (setting change mode) in step S11225. However, instead of this configuration, the first RAM clearing process may be executed after the setting change process (setting change mode). With this configuration, various flag information and control information indicating the game status stored in the main RAM 64 can be erased while maintaining the setting information for the lottery setting established by the setting change process. Furthermore, if it is determined in step S11223 of FIG. 51 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the first RAM clearing process may be executed after the setting change process (setting change mode). Furthermore, if the setting key is turned to the OFF side and removed from the setting keyhole during the setting change process (setting change mode) without changing the lottery setting (or without confirming the changed setting information), the game progress mode may be entered without executing the first RAM clearing process. With this configuration, even if the setting key is accidentally turned ON and the power is turned ON while the RAM clear button is pressed, executing the setting change process (setting change mode), the first RAM clear process can be avoided by not changing the lottery setting information (or not confirming the changed setting information), making it possible to resume the game progress mode from the state it was in the last time the power was turned OFF.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first RAM clearing process is executed in step S11224 of FIG. 51, and then the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed in step S11225. However, instead of this configuration, the setting change process (setting change mode) may be executed after the second RAM clearing process is executed. Even with this configuration, the lottery setting can be erased by the second RAM clearing process and an initial value (e.g., "1") is stored as setting information, and then the lottery setting can be changed to the desired setting information by the setting change process, thereby preventing the game progress mode from being executed while the setting information for the lottery setting remains at its initial value (e.g., "1").

In addition, in this embodiment, the second RAM clearing process is executed in step S11227 of FIG. 51, and then the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed in step S11228. However, instead of this configuration, the first RAM clearing process may be executed after the setting change process (setting change mode). With this configuration, it is possible to erase various information stored in the main RAM 64 that has been determined to be abnormal, while maintaining the setting information for the lottery settings established by the setting change process.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second RAM clearing process is executed in step S11227 of FIG. 51, followed by the setting change process (setting change mode) in step S11228. However, instead of this configuration, the setting change process (setting change mode) may be executed after the first RAM clearing process. With this configuration, even if the setting information for the lottery setting is an abnormal value and remains abnormal even after the first RAM clearing process is executed, the setting information for the lottery setting can be reset to an appropriate value by the setting change process (setting change mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, if it is determined in steps S11210, S11214, and S11220 of FIG. 51 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the RAM abnormality notification process is executed and the game progress mode is not entered. However, instead of this configuration, if it is determined in steps S11210, S11214, and S11220 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the RAM abnormality notification process may be executed, and then the second RAM clear process may be executed to set the lottery setting information to an initial value (e.g., "1"), before entering the game progress mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed in step S11215 of FIG. 51, the power recovery process is executed in step S11216, and the power recovery flag is turned OFF in step S11217. However, instead of this configuration, the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) may be executed after the power recovery process and the process of turning OFF the power recovery flag are executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the setting information is updated when the setting change button is pressed in step S11306 of FIG. 52, and the setting information is confirmed when the RAM clear button is pressed in step S11305. However, the operations for updating and confirming the setting information are not limited to this. For example, the setting information may be updated when the RAM clear button is pressed, and the setting information may be confirmed when the RAM clear button is pressed continuously for a predetermined period of time or more. With this configuration, the setting change button can be omitted, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, the setting information may be confirmed when the setting key is turned OFF, or when a game ball is detected by a ball entry detection sensor installed at a predetermined ball entry port.

In addition, in this embodiment, the conditions for executing the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode include the inner frame 13 and front door frame 14 being in an open state, but the inner frame 13 and front door frame 14 being in an open state are not essential to the conditions. For example, the conditions may include the inner frame 13 being in an open state but not the front door frame 14 being in an open state, or the conditions may include the front door frame 14 being in an open state but not the inner frame 13 being in an open state, or neither the inner frame 13 nor the front door frame 14 may be included in the conditions.

In addition, in this embodiment, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z in the setting change mode is displayed in a lit state, and the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z in the setting confirmation mode is displayed in a flashing state. However, the display state of the setting information in each mode is not limited to this. For example, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z in the setting change mode may be displayed in a flashing state, and the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z in the setting confirmation mode may be displayed in a lit state.

In addition, in this embodiment, once the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode have ended, the game progress mode is executed. However, instead of this configuration, once the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode have ended, the game progress mode is not executed, and the system transitions to a standby state in which game play cannot proceed. Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the game progress mode when the power is turned OFF and then turned ON without performing the specified operation to execute the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, in step S11302 of the setting change process (FIG. 52), the lottery setting information stored in the main RAM 64 (e.g., the setting information at the time the power was last turned off) is displayed by lighting on the information display unit 45z. However, instead of this configuration, when the setting change process is started, the lottery setting information stored in the main RAM 64 may be set to an initial value (e.g., "1") regardless of the value of the lottery setting information, and the setting information set to the initial value may be displayed by lighting on the information display unit 45z. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a RAM clear process that erases (clears to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64, including the lottery setting information, before executing the setting change process.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, while the inner frame 13 is in the open state, the system may be configured to continue to notify the user that the inner frame 13 is in the open state, regardless of whether a setting change process (setting change mode) or a setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is being executed. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "The inner frame is open" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. Similarly, while the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the system may be configured to continue to notify the user that the front door frame 14 is in the open state, regardless of whether a setting change process (setting change mode) or a setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is being executed. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "The door is open" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. This configuration makes it even more difficult for an unauthorized person to execute a setting change process (setting change mode) or a setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) on the pachinko machine 10 without being noticed by those around them.

<Aspect 88>
In the above-mentioned aspect 87, when the power is turned on, if the pachinko machine 10 determines that the power recovery flag is not ON or that the RAM determination value is not normal, it notifies the user that the main RAM 64 is abnormal and does not transition to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. However, instead of this configuration, if the power is turned on and it determines that the power recovery flag is not ON or that the RAM determination value is not normal, it may be configured to notify the user that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, execute the setting change mode, and then transition to the game progress mode, even if no operation to execute the setting change mode has been performed. This will be explained in detail below.

Figure 54 is a flowchart showing part of the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 88 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step S11501, initial setting processing is performed in response to power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and a wait process is performed, for example, for approximately one second, to wait for the sub-side control devices (audio/light-emitting control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) to become operable. Access to the main RAM 64 is then permitted. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S11502, where internal function register setting processing is performed. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S11503, where processing is performed to notify the pachinko machine 10 that it has been powered on and started up. Specifically, a startup command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started up is transmitted to the audio/light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the startup command, the audio/light-emitting control device 90 performs processing to notify the pachinko machine 10 that it has started up. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "Starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11503, the process proceeds to step S11504.

In step S11504, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

Now, let's explain the power recovery flag. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, various information (such as information indicating the game status and control information) stored in the registers of the main CPU 62x is saved to a specified area in the main RAM 64. Then, when this information has been saved to the main RAM 64, the power recovery flag is turned ON, a RAM determination value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. After the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the power supply switches to a backup power source such as a capacitor. In this way, the power recovery flag is a flag that identifies, when the power is turned on, whether or not information for restoring the machine to the state it was in the last time the power was turned OFF is stored in the main RAM 64.

If it is determined in step S11504 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11504: YES), the process proceeds to step S11505, where a RAM judgment value for the main RAM 64 is calculated. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM judgment value. Then, the process proceeds to step S11506, where it is determined whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) is normal, i.e., whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) matches the RAM judgment value (checksum value) stored in the main RAM 64. If it is determined in step S11506 that the RAM judgment value is normal (step S11506: YES), the process proceeds to step S11507.

In step S11507, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S11507 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11507: NO), proceed to step S11508, where it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. The frame open switch is a switch that is ON when the inner frame 13 is open relative to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is a switch that is ON when the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13.

If it is determined in step S11508 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S11508: NO), the process proceeds to step S11509, where a power restoration process is executed to restore the state of the previous power-off. Specifically, the power restoration process writes the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 64 to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and restores the data saved in the main RAM 64 to the register of the main CPU 62x, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step S11509, the process proceeds to step S11510, where the power restoration flag of the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the timer interrupt processing interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number update processing, and power supply monitoring processing (power outage monitoring processing) described in each of the above-mentioned aspects are executed. By enabling the timer interrupt process and executing the timer interrupt process described above, game progress becomes possible (game progress mode begins).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11508 that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S11508: YES), the process proceeds to step S11511, where the setting confirmation process is executed. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as those shown in Figure 53 of mode 87 above. After executing step S11511, the process proceeds to step S11512, where the power recovery process described above is executed to restore the state to the state it was in the last time the power was turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S11513, where the power recovery flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the timer interrupt processing interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number update processing, and power supply monitoring processing (power outage monitoring processing) described in each mode above are executed. By enabling the timer interrupt processing interrupt and executing the timer interrupt processing described above, game progress becomes possible (game progress mode is started).

If it is determined in step S11507 above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11507: YES), proceed to step S11514 and determine whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON.

If it is determined in step S11514 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S11514: NO), proceed to step S11515.

In step S11515, a first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clear process is a process that erases (clears to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the lottery setting information. In other words, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information and various control information indicating the game status are erased, but the lottery setting information is not erased and the setting information is maintained as is. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first RAM clear process transmits a first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, to the audio and light control device 90. Upon receiving the first RAM clear process execution command, the audio and light control device 90 outputs a sound from the speaker 46 indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11515, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

If it is determined in step S11514 above that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S11514: YES), the process proceeds to step S11516, where the first RAM clear process described above is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S11517, where the setting change process is executed. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in Figure 52 of mode 87 described above. After executing step S11517k, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11504 above that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11504: NO), or if it is determined in step S11506 above that the RAM determination value is not normal (step S11506: NO), the process proceeds to step S11518, where RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormality" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11518, the process proceeds to step S11519.

In step S11519, a second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clear process erases (clears to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64, including the lottery setting information. In other words, when the second RAM clear process is executed, the lottery setting information is also erased in addition to various flag information and control information indicating the game status. Note that in the second RAM clear process of this mode, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. Then, the process proceeds to step S11520, where a setting change process is executed. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in Figure 52 of mode 87 described above. After executing step S11520, the process transitions to the normal game processing described above.

As explained above, according to this embodiment, even if no operation to execute the setting change mode is performed when the power is turned on, if it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON, and if it is determined that the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64 is normal, and if it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal, it notifies the user that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, executes the second RAM clear process and the setting change mode to confirm the setting information, and then transitions to a game progress mode in which game play can proceed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress mode from being executed while leaving open the possibility that the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 has become an abnormal value unintended by the administrator.

For example, even if an operation to execute the setting check mode has been performed when the power is turned on, if it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON, and if it is determined that the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64 is not normal after determining whether it is normal, the setting check mode is not executed, a notification is issued that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, and the second RAM clear process and setting change mode are executed to confirm the setting information, and then the game progress mode is entered in which the game can proceed. This makes it possible to prevent the game progress mode from being executed while leaving open the possibility that the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 has become an abnormal value unintended by the administrator.

<Aspect 89>
In the main processing (FIG. 51) in the above-described aspect 87, after determining whether the RAM clear button has been pressed (step S11208), it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (steps S11209 and S11219). However, instead of this configuration, it may be configured to determine whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON, and then determine whether the RAM clear button has been pressed. This will be explained in detail below.

Figure 55 is a flowchart showing part of the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 89 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step S11601, initial setting processing is performed in response to power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and a wait process is performed, for example, for approximately one second, to wait for the sub-side control devices (audio/light-emitting control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) to become operable. Access to the main RAM 64 is then permitted. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S11602, where internal function register setting processing is performed. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S11603, where processing is performed to notify the pachinko machine 10 that it has been powered on and started up. Specifically, a startup command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started up is transmitted to the audio/light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the startup command, the audio/light-emitting control device 90 performs processing to notify the pachinko machine 10 that it has started up. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "Starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11603, the process proceeds to step S11604.

In step S11604, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

Now, let's explain the power recovery flag. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, various information (such as information indicating the game status and control information) stored in the registers of the main CPU 62x is saved to a specified area in the main RAM 64. Then, when this information has been saved to the main RAM 64, the power recovery flag is turned ON, a RAM determination value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. After the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the power supply switches to a backup power source such as a capacitor. In this way, the power recovery flag is a flag that identifies, when the power is turned on, whether or not information for restoring the machine to the state it was in the last time the power was turned OFF is stored in the main RAM 64.

If it is determined in step S11604 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11604: YES), the process proceeds to step S11605, where a RAM judgment value for the main RAM 64 is calculated. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM judgment value. Then, the process proceeds to step S11606, where it is determined whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) is normal, i.e., whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) matches the RAM judgment value (checksum value) stored in the main RAM 64. If it is determined in step S11606 that the RAM judgment value is normal (step S11606: YES), the process proceeds to step S11608, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11604 above that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11604: NO), or if it is determined in step S11606 above that the RAM judgment value is not normal (step S11606: NO), the process proceeds to step S11607, where the RAM abnormality flag is set to ON. In other words, the RAM abnormality flag is set to ON when the power recovery flag is OFF or when the power recovery flag is ON but the RAM judgment value is not normal, and is a flag that indicates that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal. After executing step S11607, the process proceeds to step S11608.

In step S11608, it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. The frame open switch is a switch that is ON when the inner frame 13 is open relative to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is a switch that is ON when the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13. In step S11608, if it is determined that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S11608: NO), proceed to step S11609, where it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON.

If it is determined in step S11609 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11609: NO), proceed to step S11610 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11610 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11610: NO), the process proceeds to step S11611, where power restoration processing is executed to restore the state to the state it was in the last time the power was turned off. Specifically, the power restoration processing writes the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and restores the data saved in the main RAM 64 to the register of the main CPU 62x, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main CPU 62x to the state it was in before the power was cut off. After executing step S11611, the process proceeds to step S11612, where the power restoration flag of the main RAM 64 is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number update processing, and power supply monitoring processing (power outage monitoring processing) of the timer interrupt processing described in each of the above-mentioned aspects are executed. By enabling the timer interrupt process and executing the timer interrupt process described above, game progress becomes possible (game progress mode begins).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11610 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11610: YES), the process proceeds to step S11613, where RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormality. Please start in setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11613, the process proceeds to the normal game processing described above. However, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update processing and power supply monitoring processing (power outage monitoring processing) are executed, but other processing necessary for game progress (for example, ball entry processing for the starting gate, game number control processing, etc.) is not executed. Specifically, in this mode, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not performed. Therefore, although it appears to be the same as the normal game progress mode, the player is unable to progress in the game. In other words, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the machine will not transition to game progress mode. In this state, the administrator can turn the power to the pachinko machine 10 OFF, insert the setting key into the setting keyhole and turn it ON, and then turn the power ON while holding down the RAM clear button to start the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11609 above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11609: YES), proceed to step S11614, where it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11614 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11614: NO), proceed to step S11615.

In step S11615, a first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clear process erases (clears to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64, except for the lottery setting information. In other words, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information and various control information indicating the game status are erased, but the lottery setting information is not erased and the setting information is maintained as is. In addition, in this embodiment, the first RAM clear process transmits a first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, to the audio and light control device 90. Upon receiving the first RAM clear process execution command, the audio and light control device 90 outputs a sound from the speaker 46 indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11615, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11614 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11614: YES), the process proceeds to step S11616, where RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormality. Please start in setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11616, the process proceeds to the normal game processing described above. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update processing and power supply monitoring processing (power outage monitoring processing) are executed, but other processing necessary for game progress (e.g., ball entry processing for the starting gate, game number control processing, etc.) is not executed. Specifically, in this mode, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not performed. Therefore, although it appears to be the same as the normal game progress mode, the player is unable to progress in the game. In other words, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the machine will not transition to game progress mode. In this state, the administrator can turn the power to the pachinko machine 10 OFF, insert the setting key into the setting keyhole and turn it ON, and then turn the power ON while holding down the RAM clear button to start the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode.

If it is determined in step S11608 above that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S11608: YES), proceed to step S11617 and determine whether the RAM clear button is ON.

If it is determined in step S11617 above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11617: YES), proceed to step S11618 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11618 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11618: NO), the process proceeds to step S11619, where a setting confirmation process is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process is executed to display the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display unit 45z. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can check the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as the setting confirmation process shown in Figure 53 of the above-mentioned mode 87. After executing step S11619, the process proceeds to step S11620, where the above-mentioned power recovery process is executed to restore the state to the state it was in when the power was last turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S11621, where the power recovery flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the timer interrupt processing interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number update processing, and power supply monitoring processing (power outage monitoring processing) described in each of the above modes are executed. By enabling the timer interrupt process and executing the timer interrupt process described above, game progress becomes possible (game progress mode begins).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11618 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11618: YES), the process proceeds to step S11622, where RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormality. Please start in setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11622, the process proceeds to the normal game processing described above. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update processing and power supply monitoring processing (power outage monitoring processing) are executed, but other processing necessary for game progress (e.g., ball entry processing for the starting gate, game number control processing, etc.) is not executed. Specifically, in this mode, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not performed. Therefore, although it appears to be the same as the normal game progress mode, the player is unable to progress in the game. In other words, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the machine will not transition to game progress mode. In this state, the administrator can turn the power to the pachinko machine 10 OFF, insert the setting key into the setting keyhole and turn it ON, and then turn the power ON while holding down the RAM clear button to start the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode.

If it is determined in step S11217 above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11217: YES), proceed to step S11223 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11623 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11623: NO), the process proceeds to step S11624, where the first RAM clear process described above is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S11625, where the setting change process is executed. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process is executed to display the setting information for the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z, and a process is executed to accept changes to the setting information for the lottery setting. In other words, the setting change mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can change the setting information for the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as those of the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 of mode 87 described above. After executing step S11625, the process transitions to the normal game processing described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11623 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11623: YES), the process proceeds to step S11626, where RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light control device 90. Upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio and light control device 90 outputs a sound from the speaker 46 indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "There is a RAM abnormality" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11626, the process proceeds to step S11627.

In step S11627, a second RAM clearing process is executed. The second RAM clearing process erases (clears to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64, including the lottery setting information. That is, when the second RAM clearing process is executed, the lottery setting information is also erased, in addition to various flag information indicating the game status and various control information. Here, we explain why, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the second clearing process, which erases the setting information, is executed instead of the first clearing process. When the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 may also be abnormal. For example, the setting information may have been overwritten with setting information unintended by the administrator due to noise, or a value outside the specified range (e.g., values from 1 to 6) may have been stored, even though the setting information can only take values within the specified range. In this second RAM clearing process, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. Furthermore, the RAM abnormality flag is also turned OFF by the second clearing process. The process then proceeds to step S11628, where the setting change process is executed. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 for aspect 87 described above. After executing step S11628, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

The configuration of this embodiment described above can achieve the same effects as embodiment 87 above. Furthermore, the various modified configurations described in embodiment 87 above can also be applied to this embodiment.

<Aspect 90>
In the main processing (FIG. 54) in the above-described mode 88, after determining whether the RAM clear button has been pressed (step S11507), it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (steps S11508 and S11514). However, instead of this configuration, it may be configured to determine whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON, and then determine whether the RAM clear button has been pressed. This will be explained in detail below.

Figure 56 is a flowchart showing part of the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 90 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step S11701, initial setting processing is performed in response to power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and a wait process is performed, for example, for approximately one second, to wait for the sub-side control devices (audio/light-emitting control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) to become operable. Access to the main RAM 64 is then permitted. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S11702, where internal function register setting processing is performed. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S11703, where processing is performed to notify the pachinko machine 10 that it has been powered on and started up. Specifically, a startup command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started up is transmitted to the audio/light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the startup command, the audio/light-emitting control device 90 performs processing to notify the pachinko machine 10 that it has started up. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "Starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11703, the process proceeds to step S11704.

In step S11704, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

Now, let's explain the power recovery flag. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, various information (such as information indicating the game status and control information) stored in the registers of the main CPU 62x is saved to a specified area in the main RAM 64. Then, when this information has been saved to the main RAM 64, the power recovery flag is turned ON, a RAM determination value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. After the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the power supply switches to a backup power source such as a capacitor. In this way, the power recovery flag is a flag that identifies, when the power is turned on, whether or not information for restoring the machine to the state it was in the last time the power was turned OFF is stored in the main RAM 64.

If it is determined in step S11704 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11704: YES), the process proceeds to step S11705, where a RAM judgment value for the main RAM 64 is calculated. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM judgment value. Then, the process proceeds to step S11706, where it is determined whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) is normal, i.e., whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) matches the RAM judgment value (checksum value) stored in the main RAM 64. If it is determined in step S11706 that the RAM judgment value is normal (step S11706: YES), the process proceeds to step S11707.

In step S11707, it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. The frame open switch is a switch that is ON when the inner frame 13 is open relative to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is a switch that is ON when the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13. In step S11707, if it is determined that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S11707: NO), proceed to step S11708, where it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON.

If it is determined in step S11708 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11708: NO), the process proceeds to step S11709, where a power restoration process is executed to restore the state to the state it was in the last time the power was turned off. Specifically, the power restoration process writes the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and restores the data saved in the main RAM 64 to the register of the main CPU 62x, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main CPU 62x to the state it was in before the power was cut off. After executing step S11709, the process proceeds to step S11710, where the power restoration flag of the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number update processing, and power supply monitoring processing (power outage monitoring processing) of the timer interrupt processing described in each of the above-mentioned aspects are executed. By enabling the timer interrupt process and executing the timer interrupt process described above, game progress becomes possible (game progress mode begins).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11708 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11708: YES), the process proceeds to step S11711, where the first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clear process erases (clears to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64, except for the lottery setting information. In other words, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information and control information indicating the game status are erased, but the lottery setting information is not erased, and the setting information is maintained as is. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first RAM clear process transmits a first RAM clear process execution command to the audio and light control device 90, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed. Upon receiving the first RAM clear process execution command, the audio and light control device 90 outputs a sound from the speaker 46 indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11711, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

If it is determined in step S11707 above that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S11707: YES), proceed to step S11712 and determine whether the RAM clear button is ON.

If it is determined in step S11712 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11712: NO), the process proceeds to step S11713, where the setting confirmation process is executed. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as those shown in Figure 53 of mode 87 described above. After executing step S11713, the process proceeds to step S11714, where the power recovery process described above is executed to restore the state to the state it was in the last time the power was turned off. The process then proceeds to step S11715, where the power recovery flag is turned OFF. The process then transitions to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the timer interrupt processing interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number update processing, and power supply monitoring processing (power outage monitoring processing) described in each mode described above are executed. By permitting the timer interrupt processing interrupt and executing the timer interrupt processing described above, game progress becomes possible (game progress mode is initiated).

If it is determined in step S11712 above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11712: YES), the process proceeds to step S11716, where the first RAM clear process described above is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S11717, where the setting change process is executed. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in Figure 52 of mode 87 described above. After executing step S11717, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11704 above that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11704: NO), or if it is determined in step S11706 above that the RAM determination value is not normal (step S11706: NO), the process proceeds to step S11718, where RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormality" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11718, the process proceeds to step S11719.

In step S11719, a second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clear process erases (clears to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64, including the lottery setting information. In other words, when the second RAM clear process is executed, the lottery setting information is also erased in addition to various flag information and control information indicating the game status. Note that in the second RAM clear process of this mode, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. Then, the process proceeds to step S11720, where a setting change process is executed. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in Figure 52 of mode 87 described above. After executing step S11720, the process transitions to the normal game processing described above.

The configuration of this embodiment described above can achieve the same effects as embodiment 88. Furthermore, the various modified configurations described in embodiment 88 can also be applied to this embodiment.

<Aspect 91>
In the setting change process (FIG. 52) in each of the above aspects, the lottery setting information is confirmed when the RAM clear button is pressed (step S11305), but instead of this configuration, the lottery setting information may be confirmed when the setting key is turned OFF. This will be explained in detail below.

Figure 57 is a flowchart showing the setting change processing executed by the primary MPU 62 (primary CPU 62x) in aspect 91 of the first embodiment. The same steps as those included in the setting change processing shown in Figure 52 are assigned the same step numbers. The main difference from the setting change processing shown in Figure 52 is that, in Figure 52, the process for confirming the changed setting information is to press the RAM clear button (step S11305), whereas in this aspect, the process for confirming the changed setting information is to turn the setting key to the OFF side (step S11305a), and therefore step S11308 in Figure 52 is omitted. Specific details are explained below.

In step S11301, a setting change notification start process is executed. In the setting change notification start process, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has started, is sent to the audio and light control device 90. Upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the audio and light control device 90 outputs audio indicating that the setting change mode is in progress from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, audio such as "In setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. Furthermore, upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the audio and light control device 90 displays information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress on the pattern display device 41. Specifically, for example, the audio and light control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "In setting change mode," and upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 displays a character string such as "In setting change mode" on the pattern display device 41. Furthermore, upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the audio and light control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 to flash alternately between lighting at maximum brightness and being extinguished.

Furthermore, in the setting change notification start process, information indicating that the setting change mode has started is sent to the gaming hall's hall computer via an external terminal. Upon receiving the information indicating that the setting change mode has started, the hall computer displays information about the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step S11301, proceed to step S11302.

In step S11302, control is initiated to display the lottery setting information on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, the lottery setting information is illuminated on the information display unit 45z. Then, the process proceeds to step S11303, where it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels, from "1" to "6," so it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within the range of "1" to "6." In step S11303, if it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S11303: YES), the process proceeds to step S11305a. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S11303: NO), for example, if "0" or "7" is stored as the setting information, or if non-numeric information is stored due to noise, etc., the process proceeds to step S11304, where the setting information is changed to its initial value. In this embodiment, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. Then, proceed to step S11305a.

In step S11305a, it is determined whether the setting key has been turned OFF. If it is determined in step S11305a that the setting key has not been turned OFF (step S11305a: NO), the process proceeds to step S11306, where it is determined whether the setting change button has been pressed. If it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button has been pressed (step S11306: YES), the process proceeds to step S11307, where the setting information for the lottery setting is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information stored as the setting information. However, if the setting change button is pressed when the numerical information stored as the setting information is "6," the numerical information is updated to "1." Then, the process returns to step S11303 described above, where it is determined whether the updated setting information is within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button has not been pressed (step S11306: NO), the process returns to step S11303 described above without executing the processing of step S11307, and it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within the specified range.

If it is determined in step S11305a described above that the setting key has been turned OFF (step S11305a: YES), the process proceeds to step S11309, where control for displaying the lottery setting information on the information display unit 45z is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S11310.

In step S11310, a setting change notification end process is executed. In the setting change notification end process, a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode end command, it ends the various controls for notifying the user that the setting change mode is in progress, as described above.

Furthermore, in the setting change notification termination process, information indicating that the setting change mode has ended is sent to the gaming hall's hall computer via an external terminal. Upon receiving the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended, the hall computer displays information on the management screen indicating that the setting change mode for the pachinko machine 10 has ended. After executing step S11310, this setting change process ends. Note that after executing the setting change notification termination process, setting information for the changed lottery settings may be sent to the gaming hall's hall computer via an external terminal, and the hall computer that receives this information may display the setting information for the changed lottery settings for the pachinko machine 10 on the management screen.

The configuration of this aspect described above eliminates the need to press the RAM clear button to confirm changed setting information, thereby simplifying the work process required for an administrator to change setting information.

<Aspect 92>
In a configuration in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode can be executed among the above modes, the main display unit 45 may be configured to display a display pattern (display mode) during execution of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode that is not displayed during execution of the game progress mode in which game progress is possible. This will be specifically described below.

As described above, the main display unit 45 is composed of multiple light-emitting elements. Specifically, the main display unit 45 is composed of a first symbol display unit 37a consisting of multiple segment light-emitting elements, a second symbol display unit 37b consisting of multiple segment light-emitting elements, a first reserved symbol display unit 37c consisting of multiple LED lamps, a second reserved symbol display unit 37d consisting of multiple LED lamps, a general symbol unit 38 consisting of multiple LED lamps, and a round display unit 39 consisting of multiple LED lamps.

The main display unit 45 controls each light-emitting element to display a state that reflects the status of game progress while the game progress mode is in progress. However, in this mode, while the game progress mode is in progress, all of the light-emitting elements that make up the main display unit 45 do not light up at the same time, nor do all of the light-emitting elements flash in sync.

In this embodiment, the main display unit 45 controls all light-emitting elements that make up the main display unit 45 to light up simultaneously while in a setting change mode in which the setting information for the lottery settings can be changed, and controls all light-emitting elements that make up the main display unit 45 to flash in sync while in a setting confirmation mode in which the setting information for the lottery settings can be confirmed.

This configuration makes it possible for an administrator or the like to identify whether the pachinko machine 10 is currently in game progress mode, setting change mode, or setting confirmation mode. Furthermore, this configuration eliminates the need to add a new mode display light-emitting unit to the main display unit 45 to identify the current mode of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the configuration can be changed to one that allows an administrator or the like to identify the current mode of the pachinko machine 10 simply by changing the control program of the pachinko machine 10, without changing the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main display unit 45 may be configured to control all light-emitting elements that make up the main display unit 45 to blink in sync while in a setting change mode in which the setting information for the lottery settings can be changed, and to control all light-emitting elements that make up the main display unit 45 to light up simultaneously while in a setting confirmation mode in which the setting information for the lottery settings can be confirmed.

Furthermore, the display mode displayed by the main display unit 45 during the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode is not limited to a configuration in which all light-emitting elements constituting the main display unit 45 are lit or flashing, and may be any other display mode, as long as it is a display mode (lighting pattern) that is not displayed during the game progress mode.

In addition, a light-emitting element (e.g., an LED) for displaying the mode may be added to the main display unit 45, and the light-emitting element may be turned off when the game progress mode is being executed, turned on when the setting change mode is being executed, and flashing when the setting confirmation mode is being executed. This configuration allows the administrator or other person to clearly recognize the current mode of the pachinko machine 10, and can achieve a simplified configuration compared to a configuration in which the current mode of the pachinko machine 10 is notified using the audio and light-emitting control device 90, display control device 100, and pattern display device 41.

Also, two light-emitting elements (e.g., LEDs) for displaying modes (first and second light-emitting elements) may be added to the main display unit 45, with both the first and second light-emitting elements turned off during the game progress mode, the first light-emitting element turned on and the second light-emitting element turned off during the setting change mode, and the second light-emitting element turned on and the first light-emitting element turned off during the setting confirmation mode. This configuration allows the administrator or other person to clearly recognize the current mode of the pachinko machine 10, and achieves a simplified configuration compared to a configuration in which the current mode of the pachinko machine 10 is notified using the audio and light-emitting control device 90, display control device 100, and pattern display device 41. Furthermore, because it is only necessary to control the two light-emitting elements added to the main display unit 45, an increase in data volume due to the addition of control programs and lighting patterns can be suppressed.

<Aspect 93>
Of the above aspects, in a configuration in which the information display unit 45z is equipped with four 7-segment displays 45z1 to 45z4, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, all of the light-emitting units that make up the information display unit 45z may be configured to light up for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds), and then flash synchronously for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds).

With this configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it is possible to check whether any of the light-emitting elements constituting the information display unit 45z are not lit due to a malfunction such as a broken wire, and it is also possible to check whether any of the light-emitting elements are constantly lit and never extinguished due to a malfunction. For example, if the segment light-emitting elements G and D of the center right seven-segment display 45z3 are not lit due to a malfunction, even if control is being executed to display a "3" on the center right seven-segment display 45z3, the center right seven-segment display 45z3 will display a "7" because the segment light-emitting elements G and D will not be lit. As a result, the administrator may misinterpret the numerical information in the game history information. In contrast, with this configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it is possible to check whether any of the light-emitting elements constituting the information display unit 45z are not lit due to a malfunction such as a broken wire, and it is also possible to check whether any of the light-emitting elements are constantly lit and never extinguished due to a malfunction, thereby preventing such misinterpretation.

Furthermore, an information display unit inspection button may be provided for inspecting the information display unit 45z, and when the information display unit inspection button is pressed, all of the light-emitting units that make up the information display unit 45z may be lit for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds), and then synchronously flashed for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds).

With this configuration, even when the pachinko machine 10 is not powered on, by pressing the information display unit inspection button, it is possible to check whether any of the light-emitting units that make up the information display unit 45z are not lighting up due to a malfunction such as a broken wire, and it is also possible to check whether any of the light-emitting units are constantly lit due to a malfunction and do not turn off. In other words, there is no need to turn the power to the pachinko machine 10 OFF and then ON again to check whether any malfunctions have occurred in the information display unit 45z, thereby improving the work efficiency of the administrator.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the above-mentioned base (during normal mode) is calculated and stored and the stored base (during normal mode) is displayed on the information display unit 45z, the main control unit 60 may be configured to divide the area into sections each time the measured number N _OUT of particles passing through the discharge passage reaches 60,000, calculate and store the base (during normal mode) for each section, and the information display unit 45z may be configured to switch between and display multiple types of base (during normal mode) for different sections that are the subject of calculation.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment calculates and stores bases (during normal mode) for up to seven intervals, and the information display unit 45z switches between and displays the bases (during normal mode) corresponding to up to seven intervals. The seven intervals are as follows:

・"bL": Base being measured (in normal mode)
The ball discharge rate calculated in the current section until the number of balls passing through the discharge passage currently being measured _NOUT reaches 60,000 (in normal mode)
・"b1": Base measured in the previous section (in normal mode)
The ball discharge rate (in normal mode) calculated in the section immediately preceding the section currently being measured, in which the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT reaches 60,000.
・"b2": Base measured in the previous section (in normal mode)
The ball discharge rate (in normal mode) calculated in the section two sections before the section currently being measured, in which the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT reaches 60,000.
・"b3": Base measured in the third section before (in normal mode)
The ball discharge rate (in normal mode) calculated in the section three sections before the section currently being measured, in which the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT reaches 60,000.
・"b4": Base measured in the fourth previous section (in normal mode)
The ball discharge rate (in normal mode) calculated in the section four before the section currently being measured, in which the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT reaches 60,000.
・"b5": Base measured in the 5th section before (in normal mode)
The ball discharge rate (in normal mode) calculated in the section where the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT reaches 60,000 and is five sections before the section currently being measured.
・"b6": Base measured in the 6th section before (in normal mode)
The ball discharge rate (in normal mode) calculated in the section where the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT reaches 60,000 balls and is six sections before the section currently being measured.

In the initial state where basic game history information such as the number of balls entering each entry section is not stored, measurement of the section corresponding to "bL" is started, and the base (during normal mode) for the section corresponding to "bL" is calculated at predetermined times. When the number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT during measurement reaches 60,000, the basic game history information stored as the section for "bL" is shifted to the section corresponding to "b1", and measurement of the new section corresponding to "bL" is started. Then, when the number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT reaches 60,000 in the section corresponding to "bL" for which measurement has been newly started, the basic game history information stored as the section for "b1" is shifted to the section corresponding to "b2", and the basic game history information stored as the section for "bL" is shifted to the section corresponding to "b1", and measurement of the new section corresponding to "bL" is started. In this way, the gaming history basic information for each section is shifted each time the number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT during measurement reaches 60,000, and the gaming history basic information is stored up to the section corresponding to "b6." Then, when the number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT during measurement reaches 60,000 while the gaming history basic information is stored for the section corresponding to "b6," the gaming history basic information stored for the section corresponding to "b6" is erased, and the gaming history basic information stored for the section corresponding to "b5" is shifted to the section corresponding to "b6."

That is, in this embodiment, the basic gaming history information is accumulated and stored until the number _NOUT of balls passing through the discharge passage of a maximum of 60,000 balls x 7 sections is measured.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 45z switches between displaying the bases (during normal mode) of multiple stored intervals every five seconds. Specifically, for example, if the bases (during normal mode) of five intervals, "bL," "b1," "b2," "b3," and "b4," are stored, the information display unit 45z repeatedly displays the bases (during normal mode) of each interval, switching every five seconds in the following order: "bL.31" → "b1.31" → "b2.30" → "b3.31" → "b4.30" → "bL.31" → "b1.31"...

With this configuration, the gaming machine inspector or administrator can compare the base (during normal mode) for each section by checking the display on the information display unit 45z. As a result, if the base (during normal mode) value becomes abnormal due to a malfunction or fraud in the pachinko machine 10, for example, it becomes possible to predict when in the past the malfunction occurred.

In this embodiment, the system is configured to divide the system into sections each time the measured number _NOUT passing through the discharge passage reaches 60,000, calculate and store a base (during normal mode) for each section, and switch the stored base (during normal mode) for each section at predetermined intervals (e.g., every 5 seconds) to display it on the information display unit 45z. However, instead of this configuration, an RTC 96 may be provided, the system may divide the system into sections each time the date changes, calculate and store a base (during normal mode) for each section divided by date, and switch the stored base (during normal mode) for each date (section) at predetermined intervals (e.g., every 5 seconds) to display it on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, for example, "bL" is defined as the section for the current day, "b1" as the section for one day ago, "b2" as the section for two days ago, "b3" as the section for three days ago, "b4" as the section for four days ago, "b5" as the section for five days ago, and "b6" as the section for six days ago.

With this configuration, the gaming machine inspector or administrator can compare the base (during normal mode) for each section divided by date by checking the display on the information display unit 45z. As a result, for example, if the base (during normal mode) value becomes abnormal due to a malfunction or fraud in the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to predict the date on which the malfunction occurred.

In addition, in a configuration in which basic game history information such as information on the number of balls entering each entry section and game history information such as the base (during normal mode) are stored in the main RAM 64, and the basic game history information and game history information are erased (cleared) by a RAM clear process executed by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while the RAM clear button is pressed, after the basic game history information and game history information have been erased, until the measured number N _OUT of balls passing through the discharge passage reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300), when the game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z, type information of the game history information is displayed but numerical information of the game history information is not displayed.

Specifically, for example, in a configuration in which a base (during normal mode) is calculated and stored as game history information and the stored base (during normal mode) is displayed on the information display unit 45z, after the game history basic information and game history information are erased by RAM clear processing, the type information display area of the information display unit 45z _may be configured to display "bL." and the numerical information display area may be configured to display "-- (two hyphens)" until the measured number N OUT of balls passing through the discharge passage reaches 300.

According to this configuration, when "bL.--" is displayed on the information display unit 45z, the gaming machine inspector or manager can recognize that the number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT measured after the basic gaming history information and the gaming history information were erased or after the pachinko machine 10 was shipped from the manufacturer's factory has not reached 300. Furthermore, for example, when a manufacturer ships a pachinko machine 10, the manufacturer may check the operation by having several gaming balls enter each entrance section. In this case, the number of gaming balls entering each entrance section is measured under circumstances other than legitimate play, and therefore, for example, until the initially measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT reaches 300, the basic gaming history information and the gaming history information may be significantly affected by the manufacturer's check. Therefore, according to the configuration of this embodiment, until the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT reaches 300, the information display unit 45z displays "bL.--" and does not display the base (in normal mode) numerical information. This prevents the administrator from checking the numerical values that are heavily influenced by the manufacturer's checks and misunderstanding that a malfunction or the like has occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

<Aspect 94>
In the above-described configurations, in the configuration in which gaming history information is calculated for each of a plurality of sections, after the gaming history basic information corresponding to the section has been stored up to an upper limit and the gaming history information has been calculated and stored, the gaming history basic information that served as the basis for calculating the gaming history information for that section may be erased. Specifically, for example, after the number N _OUT of balls passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000 and the gaming history information has been calculated and stored, the gaming history basic information that served as the basis for calculating the gaming history information may be erased. With such a configuration, the storage capacity required for storing the gaming history basic information can be reduced.

<Aspect 95>
Among the above aspects, in a configuration in which the information display unit 45z switches and sequentially displays a plurality of bases (in normal mode) corresponding to each of a plurality of sections, a configuration may be adopted in which, during the switching, all light-emitting units (segment light-emitting units A to H and the DP light-emitting unit) of the 7-segment display constituting the information display unit 45z are turned off for a predetermined time. The configuration of this aspect will be specifically described below.

Figure 58 is a time chart showing an example of changes in the display mode of the information display unit 45z. This Figure 58 shows an example in which the bases (during normal mode) for three sections, "bL," "b1," and "b2," are calculated and stored in the main RAM 64, and the bases (during normal mode) for these three sections are switched and displayed by the information display unit 45z.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 45z repeatedly displays the bases (in normal mode) in a cyclical manner, tracing back to previous intervals. More specifically, it displays "bL," the base (in normal mode) currently being measured that corresponds to the most recent interval, for a predetermined display duration (e.g., 5000 ms), and then sequentially displays the bases (in normal mode) tracing back to the previous interval. After displaying the base (in normal mode) corresponding to the oldest interval stored in the main RAM 64, it again displays "bL," the base (in normal mode) corresponding to the most recent interval currently being measured.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the information display unit 45z starts displaying a base (in normal mode) corresponding to one of the multiple sections and the display duration of that base (in normal mode) (e.g., 5000 ms) has elapsed, it turns off all light-emitting units (segment light-emitting units A to H and the DP light-emitting unit) of the 7-segment display that constitutes the information display unit 45z for a predetermined time (e.g., 300 ms), and then starts displaying the base (in normal mode) corresponding to the previous section. In other words, in this embodiment, when switching from the display of a base (in normal mode) corresponding to one section to the display of a base (in normal mode) corresponding to another section, all light-emitting units (segment light-emitting units A to H and the DP light-emitting unit) of the 7-segment display that constitutes the information display unit 45z are turned off for a predetermined time (e.g., 300 ms).

In the example shown in FIG. 58, the information display unit 45z displays "bL," the base being measured (in normal mode) for the currently measured section, as "bL.31," for 5,000 ms, then turns off all light-emitting elements for 300 ms. Then, it displays "b1," the measured base (in normal mode) for the immediately preceding section, as "b1.30," for 5,000 ms, then turns off all light-emitting elements for 300 ms. Then, it displays "b2," the measured base (in normal mode) for the immediately preceding section, as "b2.31," for 5,000 ms, then turns off all light-emitting elements for 300 ms. Then, it again displays "bL," the base being measured (in normal mode) for the currently measured section, as "bL.31," for 5,000 ms. In this way, the information display unit 45z repeatedly displays the base (during normal mode) for each section stored in the main RAM 64, with a 300 ms period in between when the display is completely off.

Next, a case where the number _NOUT of particles passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000 will be described.

Fig. 59 is a time chart showing an example of a change in the display mode of the information display unit 45z when the number _NOUT passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000. Fig. 59 shows an example in which the bases (during normal mode) of three sections "bL", "b1", and "b2" are calculated and stored in the main RAM 64, and the number _NOUT passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000 while the information display unit 45z is displaying "b1".

In this embodiment, if the number _NOUT of particles passing through the discharge passage in the currently measured section reaches 60,000 while a base (in normal mode) corresponding to any section is being displayed, the information display unit 45z ends the display of the currently displayed base (in normal mode) even before the display duration (5,000 ms) of the currently displayed base (in normal mode) has elapsed.Then, the information display unit 45z starts displaying the number _NOUT of particles passing through the discharge passage in the currently measured section, which has reached 60,000, and continues this display mode for a predetermined time (e.g., 2,000 ms).In this embodiment, a display mode in which four hyphens are lit is used as the display mode corresponding to the number _NOUT of particles passing through the discharge passage in the currently measured section reaching 60,000. Then, during the period until the four hyphens have been lit for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2000 ms), the main CPU 62x of the main control unit 60 performs a process of calculating the final value of "bL", which is the base (in normal mode) corresponding to the section currently being measured, and a process of shifting the base (in normal mode) corresponding to each section to the previous section one by one, and then begins a process of measuring the number of game balls that have entered each entrance in the current section to calculate a new "bL", and a process of calculating the current value of "bL".

In the example shown in FIG. 59, while "b1" is being displayed, the number _NOUT of particles passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000 before the display duration of "b1", which is 5,000 ms, has elapsed. Therefore, the information display unit 45z ends the display of "b1" and starts a display mode in which four hyphens are lit, and continues this display mode for 2,000 ms.

In this mode, the display then starts cyclically from "bL," which is the newly started measurement, based on the fact that a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since the display mode in which four hyphens are lit began. In other words, after the display mode in which four hyphens are lit ends, the display resumes from "bL," which is the newly started measurement, regardless of the base (normal mode) section in which the display was interrupted.

In this embodiment, if the number N _OUT of particles passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000 before 300 ms has elapsed since the start of the display mode in which all of the light-emitting elements constituting the information display unit 45z are turned off, the information display unit 45z ends the display mode in which all of the light-emitting elements are turned off and transitions to the display mode in which the four hyphens described above are turned on.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the information display unit 45z transitions from a display mode that displays a base (during normal mode) corresponding to one of multiple intervals (e.g., a display mode that displays "bL") to a display mode that displays no bases (during normal mode) (e.g., a display mode in which all segment light-emitting units are turned off), and then transitions to a display mode that displays a base (during normal mode) corresponding to another interval (e.g., a display mode that displays "b1"). Therefore, this embodiment allows the administrator or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 to clearly recognize that the base (during normal mode) displayed on the information display unit 45z has switched to a base (during normal mode) corresponding to another interval. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator or inspector from mistakenly identifying the interval of the displayed base (during normal mode) without realizing that the interval of the displayed base (during normal mode) has switched. In particular, in this aspect, even if the interval of the base (in normal mode) is different, there is a situation where the numerical value of the base (in normal mode) itself is the same, and in this situation, when the interval of the displayed base (in normal mode) is switched, only the display of the second character (e.g., L, 1, 2, etc.) indicating the interval of the base (in normal mode) changes. If a configuration were used in which the display mode displaying the base (in normal mode) corresponding to one interval was directly switched to a display mode displaying the base (in normal mode) corresponding to another interval, it would be difficult for the administrator or the like to notice that the interval of the displayed base (in normal mode) has switched. In contrast, in this embodiment, before switching from a display mode that displays a base (in normal mode) corresponding to one section to a display mode that displays a base (in normal mode) corresponding to another section, the display mode switches to a display mode that does not display any bases (in normal mode) (for example, a display mode in which all segment light emitting units are turned off). Therefore, even if the numerical value of the base (in normal mode) before and after the switch is the same, the administrator or the like can clearly recognize that the base (in normal mode) displayed on the information display unit 45z has switched to a base (in normal mode) corresponding to another section.

In this embodiment, the transition from the display mode displaying the base (in normal mode) corresponding to one section to the display mode displaying the base (in normal mode) corresponding to another section is a transition mode in which all light-emitting elements are turned off for 300 ms. On the other hand, the transition mode in which the display mode is changed based on the number _NOUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000 is a transition mode in which four hyphens are turned on for 2,000 ms. In other words, in this embodiment, the transition mode in which the display mode is changed from the display mode displaying the base (in normal mode) corresponding to one section to the display mode displaying the base (in normal mode) corresponding to another section is different from the transition mode in which the display mode is changed based on the number _NOUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000. Therefore, according to this aspect, by recognizing the difference in the transition mode, the manager or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can clearly distinguish and recognize whether the display mode is transitioning to a display mode that displays the base (during normal mode) corresponding to another section, or whether the display mode is transitioning based on the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the manager or the like from continuing to check the base (during normal mode) without realizing that the base (during normal mode) of each section has shifted to the previous section by one because the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured has reached 60,000.

Furthermore, in this aspect, when the number _NOUT of balls passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000 while the base (in normal mode) is being displayed, even before the display duration of the displayed base (in normal mode) has elapsed, the display mode is switched to a mode (a display mode in which four hyphens are lit) corresponding to the number _NOUT of balls passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000. Therefore, according to this aspect, the manager or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can be made to recognize early on that the number _NOUT of balls passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured has reached 60,000. Furthermore, according to this aspect, it is possible to quickly display the base (during normal mode) for each section after a shift due to the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000, so that the manager or the like can quickly check the base (during normal mode) for each section after a shift due to the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000, thereby improving the efficiency of inspections of pachinko machines 10.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the number _NOUT of balls passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000, a display mode (a display mode in which four hyphens are lit) corresponding to the number _NOUT of balls passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000 is maintained for a predetermined time (2,000 ms in this embodiment), so that the period until the predetermined time has elapsed can be used to ensure time for the main CPU 62x to execute a process of calculating the final value for "bL" and a process of shifting the base (during normal mode) corresponding to each section to the previous section one by one. Furthermore, if the game history basic information used as the basis for calculating "bL" is erased after the final value for "bL" is calculated, the storage capacity required for storing the game history basic information can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display switches between a plurality of bases (in normal mode) corresponding to each of a plurality of sections in a predetermined order, such as going back to the previous section, and when the number _NOUT of balls passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000, the display starts from "bL," which is the base (in normal mode) corresponding to the most recent section in which the new measurement has started, regardless of which section the next base (in normal mode) to be displayed in the predetermined order is. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the manager or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can recognize that the number _NOUT of balls passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured has reached 60,000, and can check it first with priority from "bL."

In this embodiment, a display mode in which all segment light emitting units are turned off is used as the display mode between the display mode displaying the base (in normal mode) corresponding to one of the multiple intervals and the display mode displaying the base (in normal mode) corresponding to another interval. However, other display modes may be used as long as they do not display the base (in normal mode) of any interval. For example, a display mode in which four hyphens are lit or a display mode in which four hyphens flash may be used. This configuration allows the manager or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 to more clearly recognize that the base (in normal mode) displayed on the information display unit 45z has switched to the base (in normal mode) corresponding to another interval.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of lighting four hyphens is used as the display mode corresponding to the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000, but other display modes may be used. For example, the display mode of flashing four hyphens may be used as the display mode corresponding to the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000. Furthermore, for example, the display mode of turning off all light-emitting portions (segment light-emitting portions A to _H and the DP light-emitting portion) of the 7-segment display constituting the information display unit 45z may be used as the display mode corresponding to the number N OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000.

In addition, in this embodiment, the transition mode when the display mode is changed based on the number _NOUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000 is a transition mode in which four hyphens are lit for 2,000 ms, but other transition modes may be used. For example, the transition mode when the display mode is changed based on the number _NOUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000 may be a transition mode in which all light-emitting units (segment light-emitting units A to H and the DP light-emitting unit) of the 7-segment display constituting the information display unit 45z are turned off for 300 ms. With this configuration, the transition mode when changing from a display mode displaying a base (in normal mode) corresponding to one section to a display mode displaying a base (in normal mode) corresponding to another section can be the same as the transition mode when changing the display mode based on the number _NOUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000, so the display mode can be changed without causing any discomfort to the administrator or other person.

In addition, in this embodiment, the base (in normal mode) is displayed as the game history information, but the game history information displayed is not limited to the base (in normal mode), and various game history information (such as the ratio of special features and the ratio of consecutive special features) shown in the first embodiment may also be displayed.

In this embodiment, the section is divided based on the number of articles _NOUT passing through the discharge passage reaching 60,000, but the section may be divided based on the satisfaction of other predetermined conditions. For example, the section may be divided based on the number of articles _NOUT passing through the discharge passage reaching 10,000, or based on the date changing.

<Aspect 96>
In the above-described aspect 95, when the number _NOUT of balls passing through the discharge passage in the currently measured section reaches 60,000 while a base (in normal mode) corresponding to any section is being displayed, the information display unit 45z is configured to end the display of the currently measured base (in normal mode) even before the display duration (5,000 ms) of the currently measured base (in normal mode) has elapsed, and to start displaying in a display mode corresponding to the number _NOUT of balls passing through the discharge passage in the currently measured section reaching 60,000. However, instead of this configuration, when the number _NOUT of balls passing through the discharge passage in the currently measured section reaches 60,000 while a base (in normal mode) corresponding to any section is being displayed, the information display unit 45z may be configured to start displaying in a display mode corresponding to the number _NOUT of balls passing through the discharge passage in the currently measured section reaching 60,000 after the display duration (5,000 ms) of the currently measured base (in normal mode) has elapsed. The configuration of this aspect will be described in detail below.

Fig. 60 is a time chart showing an example of a change in the display mode of the information display unit 45z when the number _NOUT passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000. Fig. 60 shows an example in which the bases (during normal mode) of three sections "bL", "b1", and "b2" are calculated and stored in the main RAM 64, and the number _NOUT passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000 while the information display unit 45z is displaying "b1".

As described above, in this aspect, when the number _NOUT of particles passing through the discharge passage in the section currently being measured reaches 60,000 while the base (in normal mode) corresponding to any section is being displayed, the information display unit 45z starts displaying in a display mode corresponding to the number _NOUT of particles passing through the discharge passage in the section currently being measured reaching 60,000 after the display duration (5,000 ms) of the displayed base (in normal mode) has elapsed. In this aspect, a display mode in which four hyphens are lit is adopted as the display mode corresponding to the number _NOUT of particles passing through the discharge passage in the section currently being measured reaching 60,000.

60, while "b1" is being displayed, the number _NOUT of particles passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000 before the display duration of "b1" of 5,000 ms has elapsed, and the information display unit 45z starts displaying the information in a display mode with four hyphens lit after the display duration of "b1" (5,000 ms) has elapsed, and continues this display mode for 2,000 ms. Thereafter, as in mode 95 described above, cyclic display starts from "bL," which has just started measurement.

In this embodiment, if the number N _OUT of particles passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000 before 300 ms has elapsed since the start of the display mode in which all of the light-emitting elements constituting the information display unit 45z are turned off, the information display unit 45z will transition to a display mode in which the above-mentioned four hyphens are lit after 300 ms has elapsed since the start of the display mode in which all of the light-emitting elements are turned off.

As explained above, in this mode, even if the number N _OUT of balls passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000 while the base (in normal mode) is being displayed, the display of the base (in normal mode) continues until the display duration of the displayed base (in normal mode) has elapsed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the display of the base (in normal mode) ends just when the manager or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 checks the displayed base (in normal mode) and tries to transcribe it onto the inspection sheet, making it impossible to transcribe the base (in normal mode) onto the inspection sheet.

<Aspect 97>
The following processing flow may be employed as a processing flow for realizing the configuration described in Aspect 93 above, in which all light-emitting elements (segment light-emitting elements A to G and DP light-emitting element) constituting the information display unit 45z are lit for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) when the power is turned on, and then synchronously flashed for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds). A specific description is given below.

Figures 61 and 62 are flowcharts showing the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of aspect 97 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. The main difference from the main processing shown in Figure 51 is that after the power recovery processing is executed, processing is executed to light and flash all of the light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z (lighting and flashing processing).

In step S11801, initial setting processing is performed in response to power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and a wait process is performed, for example, for approximately one second, to wait for the sub-side control devices (audio/light-emitting control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) to become operable. Access to the main RAM 64 is then permitted. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S11802, where internal function register setting processing is performed. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S11803, where processing is performed to notify the pachinko machine 10 that it has been powered on and started up. Specifically, a startup command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started up is transmitted to the audio/light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the startup command, the audio/light-emitting control device 90 performs processing to notify the pachinko machine 10 that it has started up. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "Starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11803, the process proceeds to step S11804.

In step S11804, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

Now, let's explain the power recovery flag. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, various information (such as information indicating the game status and control information) stored in the registers of the main CPU 62x is saved to a predetermined area in the main RAM 64. Then, when this information has been saved to the main RAM 64, the power recovery flag is turned ON, a RAM determination value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. After the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the power supply switches to a backup power source such as a capacitor. In this way, the power recovery flag is a flag that determines, when the power is turned on, whether or not information for restoring the machine to the state it was in the last time the power was turned OFF is stored in the main RAM 64.

If it is determined in step S11804 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11804: YES), the process proceeds to step S11805, where a RAM judgment value for the main RAM 64 is calculated. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM judgment value. Then, the process proceeds to step S11806, where it is determined whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) is normal, i.e., whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) matches the RAM judgment value (checksum value) stored in the main RAM 64. If it is determined in step S11806 that the RAM judgment value is normal (step S11806: YES), the process proceeds to step S11808, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11804 above that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11804: NO), or if it is determined in step S11806 above that the RAM judgment value is not normal (step S11806: NO), proceed to step S11807, where the RAM abnormality flag is set to ON. In other words, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that is set to ON when the power recovery flag is OFF, or when the power recovery flag is ON but the RAM judgment value is not normal, and is a flag that indicates that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal. After executing step S11807, proceed to step S11808.

In step S11808, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S11808 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11808: NO), proceed to step S11809, where it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. The frame open switch is a switch that is ON when the inner frame 13 is open relative to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is a switch that is ON when the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13.

If it is determined in step S11809 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S11809: NO), proceed to step S11810 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11810 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11810: NO), the process proceeds to step S11811, where a power recovery process is executed to restore the state to the state it was in the last time the power was turned off. Specifically, the power recovery process writes the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and restores the data saved in the main RAM 64 to the register of the main CPU 62x, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main CPU 62x to the state it was in before the power was cut off. After executing step S11811, the process proceeds to step S11812, where the power recovery flag in the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S11812-2, where a lighting/flashing process is executed to light and flash all of the light-emitting elements (segment light-emitting elements A to G and DP light-emitting element) that make up the information display unit 45z. In the lighting and flashing process, all light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z are lit for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds), and then flashed in sync for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds). After executing step S11812-2, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11810 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11810: YES), the process proceeds to step S11813, where RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormality. Please start in setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11813, the process proceeds to step S11829 (Figure 62), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11809 above that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S11809: YES), proceed to step S11814 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11814 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11814: NO), the process proceeds to step S11815, where the setting confirmation process is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), the information display unit 45z is caused to display the setting information for the current lottery settings. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can check the setting information for the current lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as those of the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 53, and therefore will not be described again. After executing step S11815, the process proceeds to step S11816, where the power recovery process described above is executed to restore the state to the state it was in when the power was last turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S11817, where the power recovery flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S11817-2, where the lighting and flashing process described above is executed. After executing step S11817-2, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11814 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11814: YES), the process proceeds to step S11818, where RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormality. Please start in setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11818, the process proceeds to step S11829 (Figure 62), which will be described later.

If it is determined in step S11808 above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11808: YES), proceed to step S11819 and determine whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON.

If it is determined in step S11819 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S11819: NO), proceed to step S11820 to determine whether the RAM abnormality flag described above is ON. If it is determined in step S11820 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11820: NO), proceed to step S11821.

In step S11821, a first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clear process is a process that erases (clears to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the lottery setting information. In other words, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information and various control information indicating the game status are erased, but the lottery setting information is not erased and the setting information is maintained as is. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first RAM clear process transmits a first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, to the audio and light control device 90. Upon receiving the first RAM clear process execution command, the audio and light control device 90 outputs a sound from the speaker 46 indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11821, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11820 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11820: YES), the process proceeds to step S11822, where RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 causes a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal to be output from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormality. Please start in setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11822, the process proceeds to step S11829 (Figure 62), which will be described later.

If it is determined in step S11819 above that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S11819: YES), proceed to step S11823 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11823 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11823: NO), the process proceeds to step S11824, where the first RAM clear process described above is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11825, where the setting change process is executed. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process is executed to display the setting information for the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z, and a process is executed to accept changes to the setting information for the lottery setting. In other words, the setting change mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can change the setting information for the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as those of the setting change process shown in FIG. 52, and therefore will not be described here. After executing step S11825, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11823 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11823: YES), the process proceeds to step S11826, where RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light control device 90. Upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio and light control device 90 outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "There is a RAM abnormality" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11826, the process proceeds to step S11827.

In step S11827, a second RAM clearing process is executed. The second RAM clearing process erases (clears to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64, including the lottery setting information. That is, when the second RAM clearing process is executed, the lottery setting information is also erased, in addition to various flag information indicating the game status and various control information. Here, we explain why, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the second RAM clearing process, which erases the setting information, is executed instead of the first RAM clearing process. When the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 may also be abnormal. For example, noise or other factors may have caused the setting information to be overwritten with information unintended by the administrator, or a value outside the specified range (e.g., values from 1 to 6) may have been stored, even though the setting information can only take values within the specified range. In this second RAM clearing process, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. Furthermore, the second RAM clearing process also turns the RAM abnormality flag OFF. Then, proceed to step S11828, where setting change processing is executed. Details of the setting change processing (setting change mode) are the same as those shown in FIG. 52, so explanation will be omitted. After executing step S11828, proceed to processing of step S11829 (FIG. 62), which will be described later.

In the processing from step S11829 onward shown in FIG. 62, if the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the timer interrupt processing interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, various random number update processing, and power outage monitoring processing (power supply monitoring processing) are executed, and the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27) described above is also executed. That is, if the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the machine transitions to a game progress mode in which game play can proceed. On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, various random number update processing and power outage monitoring processing are executed, but the timer interrupt processing interrupt permission setting is not executed, and therefore the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27) described above is not executed. That is, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the machine does not transition to a game progress mode in which game play can proceed. In this state, the administrator can turn off the power to the pachinko machine 10, insert the setting key into the setting keyhole and turn it ON, and then turn on the power while holding down the RAM clear button to start the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode. The processing from step S11829 onwards is explained in detail below.

In step S11829 shown in FIG. 62, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11829 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11829: NO), the process proceeds to step S11830, where an interrupt permission setting is performed to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. Then, the process proceeds to step S11831, where an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit timer interrupt processing from occurring. Then, the process proceeds to step S11832, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11829 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11829: YES), the process proceeds to step S11832 without executing the processes of steps S11830 and S11831.

In step S11832, various random number update processes are executed. In the various random number update processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter in the main RAM 64, and the read numerical information is added by 1. After that, the counter from which the information was read is overwritten with the added numerical information. Note that if the read numerical information is the maximum value of the counter, the counter from which the information was read is overwritten with 0. After executing step S11832, the process proceeds to step S11833.

In step S11833, a power outage monitoring process is executed. In the power outage monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply 85 to the main control unit 60 is monitored. If it is determined that the drive voltage has fallen below a predetermined value (e.g., 10 volts), it is determined that the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned OFF or a power outage has occurred, and various information (such as information indicating the game status and control information) stored in the registers of the main CPU 62x is saved to a predetermined area in the main RAM 64. Then, when this information has been saved to the main RAM 64, the power recovery flag is turned ON, a RAM judgment value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM judgment value is stored in the main RAM 64. Thereafter, without proceeding to step S11834 described below, an infinite loop process is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and the machine becomes inoperable. Furthermore, the power supply device 85 of this embodiment is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control device 60, even if the drive voltage supplied to the main control device 60 drops below a predetermined value. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to execute the process of storing the above-mentioned RAM determination value in the main RAM 64.

On the other hand, if the power outage monitoring process in step S11833 determines that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is not below the predetermined value, the process proceeds directly to step S11834.

In step S11834, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11834 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11834: NO), the process proceeds to step S11835 described above, where an interrupt permission setting is performed to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. Thereafter, the process returns to step S11831 described above, where an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit timer interrupt processing from occurring. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11834 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11834: YES), the process does not proceed to step S11835, where interrupt permission setting is performed, but rather returns to step S11832, where various random number update processes are performed.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the lighting and flashing process described above is executed, making it possible to check whether any of the multiple light-emitting elements constituting the information display unit 45z are not lit due to a malfunction such as a broken wire, and whether any of the multiple light-emitting elements are constantly lit and never extinguished due to a malfunction. For example, if the segment light-emitting element G and the segment light-emitting element D of the right-center seven-segment display 45z3 are not lit due to a malfunction, even if control is being executed to display "3" on the right-center seven-segment display 45z3, the segment light-emitting element G and the segment light-emitting element D will not light up, causing the right-center seven-segment display 45z3 to display "7." As a result, the administrator may misinterpret the numerical information of the game history information displayed on the information display unit 45z, for example. In contrast, according to the configuration of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it is possible to check whether any of the multiple light-emitting elements constituting the information display unit 45z are not lit due to a malfunction such as a broken wire, and it is also possible to check whether any of the multiple light-emitting elements are constantly lit and never extinguished due to a malfunction, thereby preventing such misinterpretation.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the lighting and flashing process is executed in response to the execution of the power restoration process. Therefore, when the administrator or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 turns the power switch of a pachinko machine 10 that is powered ON OFF and then ON again, the above-mentioned power restoration process is executed, and the lighting and flashing process is executed in response to the execution of the power restoration process. In other words, the administrator or inspector can cause the pachinko machine 10 to execute the lighting and flashing process by simply turning the power switch OFF and ON. Furthermore, when the administrator or inspector turns the power switch OFF and ON to cause the pachinko machine 10 to execute the lighting and flashing process, the power restoration process is executed in the pachinko machine 10, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (such as the state of the high probability mode flag) is also maintained. Therefore, according to this aspect, even if a player is playing on the pachinko machine 10, the lighting and flashing process can be executed without causing any disadvantage to the player, and the manager or inspector can inspect whether any of the multiple light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z are not lighting up or turning off due to a malfunction.

<Aspect 98>
The following processing flow may be employed as a processing flow for realizing the configuration described in Aspect 93 above, in which all light-emitting elements (segment light-emitting elements A to G and DP light-emitting element) constituting the information display unit 45z are lit for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) when the power is turned on, and then synchronously flashed for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds). A specific description is given below.

Figures 63 and 64 are flowcharts showing the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of aspect 98 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. The main difference from the main processing shown in Figures 61 and 62 is that the lighting flashing processing is not executed in response to the execution of the power recovery processing, but rather the lighting flashing processing is executed regardless of which of the multiple branched processing flows is executed.

In step S11901, initial setting processing is performed in response to power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and a wait process is performed, for example, for approximately one second, to wait for the sub-side control devices (audio/light-emitting control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) to become operable. Access to the main RAM 64 is then permitted. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S11902, where internal function register setting processing is performed. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S11903, where processing is performed to notify the pachinko machine 10 that it has been powered on and started up. Specifically, a startup command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started up is transmitted to the audio/light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the startup command, the audio/light-emitting control device 90 performs processing to notify the pachinko machine 10 that it has started up. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "Starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11903, the process proceeds to step S11904.

In step S11904, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

Now, let's explain the power recovery flag. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, various information (such as information indicating the game status and control information) stored in the registers of the main CPU 62x is saved to a specified area in the main RAM 64. Then, when this information has been saved to the main RAM 64, the power recovery flag is turned ON, a RAM determination value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. After the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the power supply switches to a backup power source such as a capacitor. In this way, the power recovery flag is a flag that identifies, when the power is turned on, whether or not information for restoring the machine to the state it was in the last time the power was turned OFF is stored in the main RAM 64.

If it is determined in step S11904 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11904: YES), the process proceeds to step S11905, where a RAM judgment value for the main RAM 64 is calculated. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM judgment value. Then, the process proceeds to step S11906, where it is determined whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) is normal, i.e., whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) matches the RAM judgment value (checksum value) stored in the main RAM 64. If it is determined in step S11906 that the RAM judgment value is normal (step S11906: YES), the process proceeds to step S11908, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11904 above that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11904: NO), or if it is determined in step S11906 above that the RAM judgment value is not normal (step S11906: NO), proceed to step S11907, where the RAM abnormality flag is set ON. In other words, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that is set ON when the power recovery flag is OFF, or when the power recovery flag is ON but the RAM judgment value is not normal, and is a flag that indicates that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal. After executing step S11907, proceed to step S11908.

In step S11908, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S11908 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11908: NO), proceed to step S11909, where it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. The frame open switch is a switch that is ON when the inner frame 13 is open relative to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is a switch that is ON when the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13.

If it is determined in step S11909 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S11909: NO), proceed to step S11910 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11910 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11910: NO), the process proceeds to step S11911, where power restoration processing is executed to restore the state to the state it was in the previous time the power was turned off. Specifically, in the power restoration processing, the value of the stack pointer saved in the primary RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the primary CPU 62x, and the data saved in the primary RAM 64 is restored to the register of the primary CPU 62x, thereby restoring the state of the register of the primary CPU 62x to the state it was in before the power was cut off. After executing step S11911, the process proceeds to step S11912, where the power restoration flag in the primary RAM 64 is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (Figure 64), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11910 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11910: YES), the process proceeds to step S11913, where RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormality. Please start in setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11913, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (Figure 64), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11909 above that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S11909: YES), proceed to step S11914 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11914 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11914: NO), the process proceeds to step S11915, where the setting confirmation process is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), the information display unit 45z is caused to display the setting information for the current lottery settings. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can check the setting information for the current lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as those of the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 53, and therefore will not be described here. After executing step S11915, the process proceeds to step S11916, where the power recovery process described above is executed to restore the state to the state it was in when the power was last turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S11917, where the power recovery flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11914 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11914: YES), the process proceeds to step S11918, where RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormality. Please start in setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11918, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (Figure 64), which will be described later.

If it is determined in step S11908 above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11908: YES), proceed to step S11919 and determine whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON.

If it is determined in step S11919 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S11919: NO), proceed to step S11920 to determine whether the RAM abnormality flag described above is ON. If it is determined in step S11920 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11920: NO), proceed to step S11921.

In step S11921, a first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clear process is a process that erases (clears to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the lottery setting information. In other words, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information and various control information indicating the game status are erased, but the lottery setting information is not erased and the setting information is maintained as is. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first RAM clear process transmits a first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, to the audio and light control device 90. Upon receiving the first RAM clear process execution command, the audio and light control device 90 outputs a sound from the speaker 46 indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11921, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64) described below.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11920 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11920: YES), the process proceeds to step S11922, where RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormality. Please start in setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11922, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (Figure 64), which will be described later.

If it is determined in step S11919 described above that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S11919: YES), proceed to step S11923 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11923 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11923: NO), the process proceeds to step S11924, where the first RAM clear process described above is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11925, where the setting change process is executed. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process is executed to display the setting information for the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z, and a process is executed to accept changes to the setting information for the lottery setting. In other words, the setting change mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can change the setting information for the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as those of the setting change process shown in FIG. 52, and therefore will not be described here. After executing step S11925, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11923 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11923: YES), the process proceeds to step S11926, where RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 outputs a sound from the speaker 46 indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "There is a RAM abnormality" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11926, the process proceeds to step S11927.

In step S11927, a second RAM clearing process is executed. The second RAM clearing process erases (clears to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64, including the lottery setting information. That is, when the second RAM clearing process is executed, the lottery setting information is also erased, in addition to various flag information indicating the game status and various control information. Here, we explain why, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the second RAM clearing process, which erases the setting information, is executed instead of the first RAM clearing process. When the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 may also be abnormal. For example, noise or other factors may have caused the setting information to be overwritten with information unintended by the administrator, or a value outside the specified range (e.g., values from 1 to 6) may have been stored, even though the setting information can only take values within the specified range. In this second RAM clearing process, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. Furthermore, the second RAM clearing process also turns the RAM abnormality flag OFF. Then, proceed to step S11928, where the setting change process is executed. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as those shown in Figure 52, so explanation will be omitted. After executing step S11928, proceed to processing of step S11928-2 (Figure 64), which will be described later.

In step S11928-2 shown in FIG. 64, a lighting and flashing process is executed, which lights and flashes all of the light-emitting elements (segment light-emitting elements A to G and DP light-emitting element) that make up the information display unit 45z. In the lighting and flashing process, all of the light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z are lit for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds), and then flashed in sync for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds). After executing step S11928-2, the process proceeds to step S11929.

In the processing from step S11929 onwards, if the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the timer interrupt processing interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, various random number update processes, and power outage monitoring process (power supply monitoring process) are executed, and the timer interrupt processing (Figure 27) described above is also executed. That is, if the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the machine transitions to a game progress mode in which game play can proceed. On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, various random number update processes and power outage monitoring processes are executed, but the timer interrupt processing interrupt permission setting is not executed, and therefore the timer interrupt processing (Figure 27) described above is not executed. That is, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the machine does not transition to a game progress mode in which game play can proceed. In this state, the administrator can turn off the power to the pachinko machine 10, insert the setting key into the setting keyhole and turn it ON, and then turn on the power while holding down the RAM clear button to start the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode. The processing from step S11929 onwards is explained in detail below.

In step S11929 shown in FIG. 64, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11929 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11929: NO), the process proceeds to step S11930, where an interrupt permission setting is performed to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. Then, the process proceeds to step S11931, where an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit timer interrupt processing from occurring. Then, the process proceeds to step S11932, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11929 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11929: YES), the process proceeds to step S11932 without executing the processing in steps S11930 and S11931.

In step S11932, various random number update processes are executed. In the various random number update processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter in the main RAM 64, and the read numerical information is added by 1. After that, the counter from which the information was read is overwritten with the added numerical information. Note that if the read numerical information is the maximum value of the counter, the counter from which the information was read is overwritten with 0. After executing step S11932, the process proceeds to step S11933.

In step S11933, a power outage monitoring process is executed. In the power outage monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply 85 to the main control unit 60 is monitored. If it is determined that the drive voltage has fallen below a predetermined value (e.g., 10 volts), it is determined that the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned OFF or a power outage has occurred, and various information (such as information indicating the game status and control information) stored in the registers of the main CPU 62x is saved to a predetermined area in the main RAM 64. Then, when this information has been saved to the main RAM 64, the power recovery flag is turned ON, a RAM judgment value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM judgment value is stored in the main RAM 64. Thereafter, without proceeding to step S11934 described below, an infinite loop process is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and the machine becomes inoperable. Furthermore, the power supply device 85 of this embodiment is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control device 60, even if the drive voltage supplied to the main control device 60 drops below a predetermined value. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to execute the process of storing the above-mentioned RAM determination value in the main RAM 64.

On the other hand, if the power outage monitoring process in step S11933 determines that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is not below the predetermined value, the process proceeds directly to step S11934.

In step S11934, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11934 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11934: NO), the process proceeds to step S11935 described above, where an interrupt permission setting is performed to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. Thereafter, the process returns to step S11931 described above, where an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit timer interrupt processing from occurring. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11934 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11934: YES), the process does not proceed to step S11935, where an interrupt permission setting is performed, but returns to step S11932, where various random number update processes are performed.

As described above, this embodiment executes the above-described lighting and flashing process, thereby enabling inspection of the multiple light-emitting elements constituting the information display unit 45z for any light-emitting elements that are not lit due to a malfunction such as a broken wire, as well as for any light-emitting elements that are constantly lit and never extinguished due to a malfunction. For example, if segment light-emitting element G and segment light-emitting element D of the right-center seven-segment display 45z3 are not lit due to a malfunction, even if control is being executed to display "3" on the right-center seven-segment display 45z3, the right-center seven-segment display 45z3 will display "7" because segment light-emitting element G and segment light-emitting element D are not lit. As a result, the administrator may misinterpret the numerical information of the game history information displayed on the information display unit 45z, for example. In contrast, this embodiment's configuration enables inspection of the multiple light-emitting elements constituting the information display unit 45z for any light-emitting elements that are not lit due to a malfunction such as a broken wire, as well as for any light-emitting elements that are constantly lit and never extinguished due to a malfunction, thereby preventing such misinterpretation.

In addition, in this embodiment, one of the multiple branched processing flows is executed based on the operation mode of each operation unit (RAM clear switch, setting key) when the power switch is turned ON and external power supply begins. For example, if the RAM clear switch is ON, the setting key is ON, and the inner frame 13 and front door frame 14 are open when the power is turned ON, a processing flow including setting change processing is executed. In this embodiment, the lighting flashing processing is executed regardless of which of the multiple branched processing flows is executed. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to execute the lighting flashing processing regardless of the operation mode accepted by each operation unit when the power is turned ON. Specifically, for example, when a manufacturer ships a pachinko machine 10, they may turn on the RAM clear switch, set the setting key to the ON position, open the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, and then turn on the power to execute a setting change process (setting change mode) on the pachinko machine 10 to check whether the lottery settings can be changed. Even in this case, since the pachinko machine 10 executes the lighting and flashing process described above after executing the setting change process (setting change mode), the manufacturer's administrator can check whether any of the light-emitting elements constituting the information display unit 45z of the pachinko machine 10 are not lit or extinguished due to a malfunction after checking the operation in the setting change mode. This dramatically improves the inspection efficiency of pachinko machines 10 at the time of shipment. In this way, the administrator or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can inspect whether any of the multiple light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z are not lighting up or turning off due to a malfunction, regardless of the type of operation accepted by each operation unit when the power is turned on. In other words, it is possible to prevent situations where the inspection cannot be carried out depending on the type of operation accepted by each operation unit when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the power switch is turned ON and external power supply begins, the processing group from step S11901 to step S11928-2 of the main processing (Figures 63 and 64) including the lighting flashing processing is executed, and after execution of this processing group is completed, an interrupt permission setting is executed and the processing group included in the timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the lighting flashing processing can be executed only once after external power supply begins. If the lighting flashing processing were configured to be included in the processing group of the timer interrupt processing, the lighting flashing processing would be executed repeatedly, which would increase the processing load on the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, if the lighting flashing processing were executed repeatedly, there is a risk that the period during which various information can be displayed on the information display unit 45z would be shortened. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the lighting and flashing process can be executed only once after the supply of external power has begun, which reduces the processing load on the pachinko machine 10 and allows the manager or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 to check whether any of the multiple light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z are not lighting up or turning off due to a malfunction.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, after the power switch is turned ON and external power supply begins, the lighting and flashing process is executed before the interrupt permission setting is executed and the timer interrupt process (Figure 27) begins. Therefore, before game play can proceed on the pachinko machine 10, the administrator or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can inspect whether any of the multiple light-emitting elements constituting the information display unit 45z are not lit or extinguished due to a malfunction. If the lighting and flashing process were executed after the timer interrupt process begins, the player could begin playing on the pachinko machine 10 before the administrator or inspector could inspect the information display unit 45z. In this case, there is a risk that the administrator or inspector will inspect the information display unit 45z of the pachinko machine 10 after the player has begun playing and discover a malfunction in the light-emitting element of the information display unit 45z. If an administrator or inspector discovers a malfunction in the light-emitting section of the information display unit 45z of the pachinko machine 10, the player will need to be asked to suspend or stop play in order to repair or replace the information display unit 45z. This could result in significant discomfort to the player. In contrast, this aspect allows the administrator or inspector to inspect the information display unit 45z of the pachinko machine 10 before the player is able to begin play on the pachinko machine 10, thereby preventing the player from being forced to suspend or stop play and causing discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, after the lighting and flashing process is executed, an interrupt permission setting is executed, and the game history process included in the timer interrupt process (step S10616 in FIG. 27) is executed. In other words, in this embodiment, the lighting and flashing process is executed before game history information such as base (in normal mode) is displayed on the information display unit 45z. Therefore, the administrator or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can inspect whether there are any light-emitting elements that do not light up or do not turn off due to a malfunction among the multiple light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z before the game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z in the pachinko machine 10. As a result, it is possible to prevent a user from checking the game history information displayed on the information display unit 45z without realizing that there is a light-emitting element that does not light up or does not turn off due to a malfunction among the multiple light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z.

In this embodiment, the lighting and flashing process (step S11928-2 in FIG. 64) is executed after the setting change process (setting change mode) (steps S11925 and S11928 in FIG. 63). However, instead of this configuration, the lighting and flashing process may be executed before the lottery setting information is displayed on the information display unit 45z during the setting change process (setting change mode). Specifically, for example, the lighting and flashing process in step S11928-2 in FIG. 64 may be omitted, and the lighting and flashing process may be executed prior to the processing of step S11908 in FIG. 63 (processing for determining the state of the RAM clear button). With this configuration, the administrator or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can inspect whether there are any light-emitting elements that do not light up or do not turn off due to a malfunction among the multiple light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z in the pachinko machine 10 before the setting information is displayed on the information display unit 45z. As a result, it is possible to prevent a user from checking the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z without realizing that one of the multiple light-emitting units that make up the information display unit 45z is malfunctioning due to a malfunction. Similarly, with this configuration, the lighting and flashing process is executed before the setting information for the lottery setting is displayed on the information display unit 45z during the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), so it is possible to prevent a user from checking the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z without realizing that one of the multiple light-emitting units that make up the information display unit 45z is malfunctioning due to a malfunction.

In addition, in this embodiment, by configuring step S11928-2 in FIG. 64 to execute the lighting flashing process, the lighting flashing process is executed regardless of which of the multiple branched processing flows is executed. However, this configuration is not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted to execute the lighting flashing process regardless of which of the multiple branched processing flows is executed. For example, the lighting flashing process in step S11928-2 in FIG. 64 may be omitted, and the lighting flashing process may be executed prior to the execution of step S11908 in FIG. 63 (the process of determining the state of the RAM clear button). Furthermore, for example, the lighting flashing process in step S11928-2 in FIG. 64 may be omitted, and the lighting flashing process may be performed between step S11909 and step S11910 in FIG. 63, between step S11909 and step S11914 in FIG. 63, between step S11919 and step S11920 in FIG. 63, and between step S11919 and step S11923 in FIG. 63.

<Aspect 99>
In the above-described aspects 97 and 98, the above-described lighting and flashing process is employed as an inspection process for an administrator or inspector to check whether any of the light-emitting elements constituting the information display unit 45z are malfunctioning and/or not lighting or extinguishing. However, the inspection process is not limited to lighting and flashing processes, and various control modes can be employed. For example, the inspection process may not involve flashing the light-emitting elements, but may involve simultaneously transitioning all of the light-emitting elements constituting the information display unit 45z from an extinguished state to an extinguished state, and then simultaneously transitioning them from the extinguished state to the extinguished state after a predetermined time has elapsed. Furthermore, for example, the inspection process may involve simultaneously flashing all of the light-emitting elements. Furthermore, for example, the inspection process may involve sequentially turning on and then extinguishing all of the light-emitting elements constituting the information display unit 45z. That is, the inspection process may involve transitioning all of the light-emitting elements constituting the information display unit 45z from an extinguished state to an extinguished state at least once, and then transitioning them to the extinguished state. By executing the inspection process for this type of control, the administrator or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check whether there are any light-emitting elements that do not light up or do not turn off due to a malfunction among the multiple light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z.

<Aspect 100>
Of the above modes, in a configuration that can execute the setting change mode and the setting check mode, various main processes and timer interrupt processes can be employed. Specific explanations will be given below.

Figure 65 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of aspect 100 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step S12001, initial setting processing is performed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and a wait process is performed, for example, for approximately one second, to wait for the sub-side control devices (audio/light-emitting control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) to become operable. Access to the main RAM 64 is then permitted. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S12002, where internal function register setting processing is performed. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S12003, where processing is performed to notify the pachinko machine 10 that it has been powered on and started up. Specifically, a startup command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started up is transmitted to the audio/light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the startup command, the audio/light-emitting control device 90 performs processing to notify the pachinko machine 10 that it has started up. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "Starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S12003, the process proceeds to step S12004.

In step S12004, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

Now, let's explain the power recovery flag. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, various information (such as information indicating the game status and control information) stored in the registers of the main CPU 62x is saved to a predetermined area in the main RAM 64. Then, when this information has been saved to the main RAM 64, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a RAM determination value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined group of information stored in the main RAM 64, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. After the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, power is switched to a backup power source such as a capacitor. In this way, the power recovery flag is a flag that determines, when the power is turned on, whether information for restoring the machine to the state it was in the last time it was powered off is stored in the main RAM 64.

If it is determined in step S12004 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S12004: YES), the process proceeds to step S12005, where a RAM judgment value is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined group of information stored in the main RAM 64. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM judgment value. Then, the process proceeds to step S12006, where it is determined whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) is normal, i.e., whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) matches the RAM judgment value (checksum value) stored in the main RAM 64. If it is determined in step S12006 that the RAM judgment value is normal (step S12006: YES), the process proceeds to step S12007.

In step S12007, the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read, and it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels ranging from "1" to "6." Therefore, if the setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6," it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range. On the other hand, if "0" or "7" is stored as the setting information, or if information other than a numerical value is stored due to noise, etc., it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range. In step S12007, if it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12007: YES), the program proceeds to step S12008.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12004 above that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S12004: NO), if it is determined in step S12006 above that the RAM judgment value is not normal (step S12006: NO), or if it is determined in step S12007 above that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12007: NO), proceed to step S12015 and turn the RAM abnormality flag ON. In other words, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that is turned ON when the power recovery flag is OFF, if the RAM judgment value is not normal, or if the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, and is a flag that indicates that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal.

Below, we will explain the processing flow that is executed when the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, and then we will explain the processing flow that is executed when the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

In step S12008, it is determined whether the setting change in progress flag is ON. The setting change in progress flag is a flag that is set ON when the setting change process (setting change mode) described below starts, and is set OFF when the setting change process (setting change mode) ends. Here, a situation in which the setting change in progress flag is ON in step S12008 means that the setting change process (setting change mode) described below was executed the last time the pachinko machine 10 was powered on, and the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 was turned OFF or a power outage occurred while the setting change process (setting change mode) was being executed, causing the setting change in progress flag to remain ON.

If it is determined in step S12008 that the setting change in progress flag is ON (step S12008: YES), the process proceeds to step S12020, where the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. The setting change process (setting change mode) executes a process for displaying the setting information for the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z, and also executes a process for accepting changes to the setting information for the lottery setting. In other words, the setting change mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can change the setting information for the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12008 that the setting change in progress flag is not ON (step S12008: NO), the process proceeds to step S12009.

In step S12009, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S12009 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S12009: NO), proceed to step S12010, where it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. Note that "setting key is ON" means that the setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and positioned on the ON side. Furthermore, the frame open switch is a switch that is ON when the inner frame 13 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is a switch that is ON when the front door frame 14 is in an open state relative to the inner frame 13.

If it is determined in step S12010 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S12010: NO), proceed to step S12011.

In step S12011, it is determined whether the setting confirmation flag is ON. The setting confirmation flag is a flag that is set ON when the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) described below starts, and is set OFF when the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) ends. Here, a situation in which the setting confirmation flag is ON in step S12011 means that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) described below was executed the last time the pachinko machine 10 was powered on, and the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 was turned OFF or a power outage occurred while the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) was being executed, causing the setting confirmation flag to remain ON.

If it is determined in step S12011 that the setting confirmation flag is not ON (step S12011: NO), proceed to step S12013, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12010 that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S12010: YES), or if it is determined in step S12011 that the setting confirmation flag is ON (step S12011: YES), the process proceeds to step S12012. That is, if the RAM clear button was OFF when the pachinko machine 10 was powered on and the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON, or if the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) was executed the last time the pachinko machine 10 was powered on and the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 was turned OFF or a power outage occurred while the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) was being executed, causing the setting confirmation flag to remain ON, the process proceeds to step S12012.

In step S12012, a setting confirmation process is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process is executed to display the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display unit 45z. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can check the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) will be described later. After executing step S12012, the process proceeds to step S12013.

In step S12013, a power restoration process is executed to restore the state to the state it was in the previous time the power was turned off. Specifically, in the power restoration process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main CPU 62x to the state it was in before the power was cut off. After executing step S12013, the process proceeds to step S12014, where the power restoration flag in the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S12022, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12009 above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S12009: YES), proceed to step S12017, where it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. If it is determined in step S12017 that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S12017: YES), proceed to step S12018 above, where the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. Then, proceed to step S12022, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12017 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S12017: NO), proceed to step S12019.

In step S12019, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S12019 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S12019: NO), the process proceeds to step S12020, where the first RAM clearing process is executed. The first RAM clearing process erases (clears to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64, except for the lottery setting information. In other words, when the first RAM clearing process is executed, various flag information and various control information indicating the game status are erased, but the lottery setting information is not erased, and the setting information remains unchanged. In addition, in this embodiment, the first RAM clearing process transmits a first RAM clearing process execution command to the audio and light control device 90, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clearing process has been executed. Upon receiving the first RAM clearing process execution command, the audio and light control device 90 outputs a sound from the speaker 46 indicating that the first RAM clearing process has been executed. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S12020, proceed to step S12022, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12019 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12019: YES), the process proceeds to step S12021, where RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 90. Upon receiving the RAM abnormality command, the audio and light-emitting control device 90 outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormality. Please start in setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S12021, the process proceeds to step S12022. However, in the flow of this explanation, the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, so the process does not proceed to step S12021.

In step S12022, a lighting and flashing process is executed, which lights and flashes all of the light-emitting elements (segment light-emitting elements A to G and DP light-emitting element) that make up the information display unit 45z. In the lighting and flashing process, all of the light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z are lit for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds), and then flashed in sync for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds). After executing step S12022, the process proceeds to step S12023.

In step S12023, an interrupt permission setting is performed to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. After that, an infinite loop is repeated to wait, and the timer interrupt processing described below is executed periodically (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

Next, we will explain the processing flow that is executed when the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON in step S12015.

As described above, if it is determined in step S12004 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S12004: NO), if it is determined in step S12006 that the RAM judgment value is not normal (step S12006: NO), or if it is determined in step S12007 that the setting information is not within the specified range (step S12007: NO), the process proceeds to step S12015, where the RAM abnormality flag is set ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S12016.

In step S12016, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S12016 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S12016: YES), the process proceeds to step S12017, where it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. If it is determined in step S12017 that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S12017: YES), the process proceeds to step S12018, where the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S12022. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12016 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S12016: NO), or if it is determined in step S12017 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S12017: NO), the process proceeds to step S12019.

In step S12019, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag described above is ON. If it is determined in step S12019 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S12019: NO), the process proceeds to step S12020, where the first RAM clear process described above is executed. After executing step S12020, the process proceeds to step S12022. However, in the flow of this explanation, since the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the process does not proceed to step S12020.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12019 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12019: YES), the process proceeds to step S12021, where the RAM abnormality notification process described above is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S12022.

In step S12022, the lighting and blinking process described above is executed. After executing step S12022, the process proceeds to step S12023, where an interrupt permission setting is executed to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. After that, an infinite loop process is repeated and the timer interrupt processing described below is executed periodically (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

As explained above, in this embodiment, the operation for executing the setting change process (setting change mode) is to turn the power switch ON while the RAM clear switch is pressed (ON) and the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. Furthermore, the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is to turn the power switch ON while the RAM clear switch is not pressed (OFF) and the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. Furthermore, the operation for executing the first RAM clear process is to turn the power switch ON while the RAM clear switch is pressed (ON) and any one of the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch is OFF.

Below is a summary of an example of the processing flow achieved by executing the main processing described above.

- When power supply begins, it is determined whether the conditions for setting the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12004, S12006, and S12007). However, if an operation to execute the setting change process (setting change mode) has been performed, the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed (step S12018) regardless of whether the conditions for setting the RAM abnormality flag ON are met or the state of the setting confirmation flag.

- When power supply begins, it is determined whether the conditions for setting the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12004, S12006, S12007). If it is determined that the conditions for setting the RAM abnormality flag ON are not met and it is determined that the setting change in progress flag is ON (step S12008: YES), the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed (step S12018) regardless of whether an operation for executing the setting change process (setting change mode), an operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), or an operation for executing the first RAM clear process has been performed.

- When power supply begins, it is determined whether the conditions for setting the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12004, S12006, S12007). If it is determined that the conditions for setting the RAM abnormality flag ON are not met, it is determined that the setting change in progress flag is not ON (step S12008: NO), and if an operation to execute the first RAM clear process has been performed (step S12009: YES, step S12017: NO, step S12019: NO), the first RAM clear process is executed (step S12020) regardless of the state of the setting confirmation in progress flag.

- When power supply begins, it is determined whether the conditions for setting the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12004, S12006, S12007). If it is determined that the conditions for setting the RAM abnormality flag ON are not met, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step S12008: NO). If an operation has been performed to execute the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) (step S12009: NO, step S12010: YES), the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S12012).

- When power supply begins, it is determined whether the conditions for setting the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12004, S12006, S12007). If it is determined that the conditions for setting the RAM abnormality flag ON are not met, it is determined that the setting change in progress flag is not ON (step S12008: NO). Even if no operation has been performed to execute the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), if the setting confirmation in progress flag is ON (step S12011: YES), the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S12012).

- When power supply begins, it is determined whether the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12004, S12006, S12007). If it is determined that the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON (step S12015), the first RAM clearing process is not executed, and a RAM abnormality notification process is executed (step S12021), even if an operation to execute the first RAM clearing process has been performed.

- When power supply is started, it is determined whether the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12004, S12006, and S12007). If it is determined that the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON (step S12015), even if an operation to execute the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has been performed, the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is not executed, and a RAM abnormality notification process is executed (step S12021).

Next, we will explain the details of the setting change process shown in step S12018 in Figure 65.

Figure 66 is a flowchart showing the setting change process executed by the primary MPU 62 (primary CPU 62x) in aspect 100 of the first embodiment. This setting change process is executed as a subroutine of step S12018 in Figure 65.

In step S12101, the setting change in progress flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. As described above, the setting change in progress flag is a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has started, and also a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has not yet ended. After executing step S12101, proceed to step S12102.

In step S12102, the initial setting process at the start of the setting change is executed. In the initial setting process at the start of the setting change, the initial settings required to start the setting change process are executed. In this embodiment, the initial setting process at the start of the setting change determines whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON, and if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the RAM abnormality flag is turned OFF. After executing step S12102, the process proceeds to step S12103.

In step S12103, a setting change notification start process is executed. In the setting change notification start process, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has started, is sent to the audio and light control device 90. Upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the audio and light control device 90 outputs audio indicating that the setting change mode is in progress from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, audio such as "In setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. Furthermore, upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the audio and light control device 90 displays information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress on the pattern display device 41. Specifically, for example, the audio and light control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a string such as "In setting change mode," and upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 displays a string such as "In setting change mode" on the pattern display device 41. Furthermore, upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the audio and light control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 to flash alternately between lighting at maximum brightness and being extinguished.

Furthermore, in the setting change notification start process, information indicating that the setting change mode has started is sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. Upon receiving the information indicating that the setting change mode has started, the hall computer displays information about the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step S12103, proceed to step S12104.

In step S12104, the lottery setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as updated setting information. Specifically, in this embodiment, the lottery setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read setting information is copied to an updated setting information storage area, which is an area other than the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. After executing step S12104, the process proceeds to step S12105.

In step S12105, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and control is initiated to display the read update setting information on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, the update setting information is displayed by lighting on the information display unit 45z. Then, the process proceeds to step S12106, where it is determined whether the update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels from "1" to "6," so it is determined whether the update setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6." In step S12106, if it is determined that the update setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12106: YES), the process proceeds to step S12108. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12106 that the update setting information is not within the predetermined range (step S12106: NO), for example, if "0" or "7" is stored as the update setting information, or if non-numeric information is stored due to noise or the like, the process proceeds to step S12107, where the update setting information is changed to its initial value. In this embodiment, "1" is stored as the initial value in the update setting information. Then, the process proceeds to step S12108.

In step S12108, it is determined whether the setting key (keyhole) has transitioned from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in this embodiment, a signal indicating a high level is monitored while the setting key (keyhole) is on, and a signal indicating a low level is monitored while the setting key (keyhole) is off. If a falling edge of the signal, which falls from a high level to a low level, is detected in step S12108, it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) has transitioned to the OFF side. If it is determined in step S12108 that the setting key (keyhole) has not transitioned from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12108: NO), the process proceeds to step S12109, where it is determined whether the setting change button has been pressed. If it is determined in step S12109 that the setting change button has been pressed (step S12109: YES), the process proceeds to step S12110, where the update setting information is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information stored as the updated setting information. However, if the setting change button is pressed when the numerical information stored as the updated setting information is "6", the numerical information is updated to "1". Then, the process returns to step S12106 described above, and it is determined whether the updated updated setting information is a numerical value within the specified range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12109 that the setting change button has not been pressed (step S12109: NO), the process returns to step S12106 described above without executing the processing of step S12110, and it is determined whether the updated setting information is a numerical value within the specified range.

If it is determined in step S12108 above that the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12108: YES), proceed to step S12111.

In step S12111, the update setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as setting information. Specifically, in this embodiment, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read update setting information is copied to the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. After executing step S12111, the process proceeds to step S12112, where control for displaying the update setting information on the information display unit 45z is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S12113.

In step S12113, a setting change notification end process is executed. In the setting change notification end process, a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode end command, it ends the various controls for notifying the user that the setting change mode is in progress, as described above.

Furthermore, in the setting change notification termination process, information indicating that the setting change mode has ended is sent to the gaming hall's hall computer via an external terminal. Upon receiving the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended, the hall computer displays information indicating that the setting change mode for the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S12113, the process proceeds to step S12114. Note that after executing the setting change notification termination process, the setting information for the changed lottery settings may be sent to the gaming hall's hall computer via an external terminal, and the hall computer that receives this information may display the setting information for the changed lottery settings for the pachinko machine 10 on the management screen.

In step S12114, the first RAM clear process is executed. In the first RAM clear process, information other than the lottery setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is erased. When this first RAM clear process is executed, the setting change in progress flag described above is also cleared (turned OFF). After step S12114 is executed, this setting change process is terminated.

Next, we will explain the details of the setting confirmation process shown in step S12012 in Figure 65.

Figure 67 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process executed by the primary MPU 62 (primary CPU 62x) in aspect 100 of the first embodiment. This setting confirmation process is executed as a subroutine of step S12012 in Figure 65.

In step S12201, the setting confirmation flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. As described above, the setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has started, and also a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has not yet ended. After executing step S12201, proceed to step S12202.

In step S12202, a setting confirmation notification start process is executed. In the setting confirmation notification start process, a setting confirmation mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started, is sent to the audio and light control device 90. Upon receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the audio and light control device 90 outputs an audio signal from the speaker 46 indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the audio signal causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output an audio signal such as "In setting confirmation mode." Furthermore, upon receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the audio and light control device 90 causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the audio and light control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "In setting confirmation mode." Upon receiving this command, the display control device 100 causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "In setting confirmation mode." Furthermore, upon receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the audio and light control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 to flash alternately between being lit at maximum brightness and being extinguished.

Furthermore, in the setting confirmation notification start process, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started is sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. Upon receiving the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started, the hall computer displays information about the pachinko machine 10 in setting confirmation mode on the management screen. After executing step S12202, proceed to step S12203.

In step S12203, control is initiated to display the lottery setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, the lottery setting information is displayed in a flashing manner on the information display unit 45z. Then, proceed to step S12204.

In step S12204, it is determined whether the setting key (keyhole) has transitioned from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in this embodiment, a signal indicating a high level while the setting key (keyhole) is on and a signal indicating a low level while the setting key (keyhole) is off are monitored. If a falling edge of the signal, which falls from a high level to a low level, is detected, it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) has transitioned from the ON side to the OFF side. If it is determined in step S12204 that the setting key (keyhole) has not transitioned from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12204: NO), step S12204 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12204 that the setting key (keyhole) has transitioned from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12204: YES), proceed to step S12205. In other words, an infinite loop will be repeated until the setting key (keyhole) transitions from the ON side to the OFF side, and the process will not proceed to step S12205; once the setting key (keyhole) transitions from the ON side to the OFF side, the process will proceed to step S12205.

In step S12205, control for displaying the lottery setting information on the information display unit 45z ends. Then, proceed to step S12206.

In step S12206, a setting confirmation notification end process is executed. In the setting confirmation notification end process, a setting confirmation mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode end command, it ends the various controls for notifying that the setting confirmation mode described above is in progress.

Furthermore, in the setting confirmation notification termination process, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended is sent to the gaming hall's hall computer via an external terminal. Upon receiving the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended, the hall computer displays information on the management screen indicating that the setting confirmation mode for the pachinko machine 10 has ended. After executing step S12206, this setting confirmation process ends.

Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x).

Figure 68 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 100 of the first embodiment. In this aspect, the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) executes the timer interrupt processing at a 4 ms cycle.

In step S12301, various random number update processes are executed. In the various random number update processes, current numerical information is read from each counter in the main RAM 64 (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric role release counter C4, etc.), a process is executed to add 1 to the read numerical information, and then a process is executed to overwrite the original counter with the added numerical information. Note that if the read numerical information is the maximum value of the counter, a process is executed to overwrite the original counter with 0. After executing step S12301, proceed to step S12302.

In step S12302, a power outage monitoring process is executed. In this process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply 85 to the main control unit 60 is monitored. If the drive voltage is determined to fall below a predetermined value (e.g., 10 volts), it is determined that the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned OFF or a power outage has occurred. Various pieces of information (e.g., information indicating the game status and control information) stored in the registers of the main CPU 62x are saved to a predetermined area in the main RAM 64. Once this information has been saved to the main RAM 64, the power recovery flag is set to ON, and a RAM determination value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined set of information stored in the main RAM 64. The calculated RAM determination value is then stored in the main RAM 64. Subsequently, without proceeding to step S12303 described below, an infinite loop process is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and the machine becomes inoperable. Furthermore, the power supply device 85 of this embodiment is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control device 60, even if the drive voltage supplied to the main control device 60 drops below a predetermined value. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to execute the process of storing the above-mentioned RAM determination value in the main RAM 64.

On the other hand, if the power outage monitoring process in step S12302 determines that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is not below the predetermined value, the process proceeds directly to step S12303.

In step S12303, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S12303 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S12303: NO), the process proceeds to step S12304. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12303 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12303: YES), the timer interrupt process is terminated without executing the processing from step S12304 onwards. In other words, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the processing to enable game progress from step S12304 onwards is not executed, and the system is configured not to transition to a game progress mode in which game progress is possible. Below, the processing from step S12304 onwards, which is the processing to enable game progress, is explained.

In step S12304, port output processing is executed. In port output processing, if output information was set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to output corresponding to that output information to the various drive units 36c, 34b. For example, if information is set to switch the large prize opening 36a to an open state, output of a drive signal to the variable prize opening drive unit 36c is started, and if information is set to switch it to a closed state, output of the drive signal is stopped. Also, if information is set to switch the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 to an open state, output of a drive signal to the electric device drive unit 34b is started, and if information is set to switch it to a closed state, output of the drive signal is stopped. Then, proceed to step S12305.

In step S12305, a read process is performed. In the read process, signals other than the ball-entering signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S12306.

In step S12306, the signals received from each goal detection sensor 44a-44h are read, and a goal detection process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the read information. The goal detection process is the same as the goal detection process shown in Figure 28, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. After executing step S12306, proceed to step S12307.

In step S12307, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of a specified timer counter stored in the main RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S12308, where the output setting process for the prize ball command is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S12309.

In step S12309, a ball entry process for the start port is executed in response to a game ball entering the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. In the ball entry process for the start port, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 are obtained based on the determination that a game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the obtained counter values are stored in the pending information storage area 64b of RAM 64. After executing step S12309, the process proceeds to step S12310.

In step S12310, a through gate ball entry process is executed in response to a gaming ball entering (passing through) the through gate 35. In the through gate ball entry process, the value of the variable type counter CS is obtained based on the determination that a gaming ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35, and the obtained counter value is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of RAM 64. After executing step S12310, the process proceeds to step S12311.

In step S12311, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. The game round control process includes the jackpot lottery and display control of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. After executing step S12311, the process proceeds to step S12312.

In step S12312, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. In the game state transition process, a process is executed to transition the game state to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, etc. After executing step S12312, the process proceeds to step S12313.

In step S12313, an electric role support process is executed to control the electric role device 34a. In the electric role support process, a determination is made as to whether or not the electric role device 34a should be opened (an electric role device opening lottery), and if it is determined that the electric role device 34a should be opened, the electric role device 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step S12313, the process proceeds to step S12314.

In step S12314, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a process is executed to launch a game ball into the game area PA when the player operates the operating handle 25. After executing step S12314, the process proceeds to step S12315.

In step S12315, external information setting processing is executed to control the start and end of external signal output according to the results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt process. After executing step S12315, proceed to step S12316.

In step S12316, gaming history processing is executed to calculate and display gaming history information. Since the gaming history processing is the same as the gaming history processing shown in FIG. 29, a detailed explanation will be omitted. After step S12316 is executed, this timer interrupt processing is terminated.

As explained above, this embodiment can achieve the following effects in addition to the effects described in the other embodiments above.

In this embodiment, the setting change mode is initiated upon receiving an operation to execute the setting change mode, the setting change flag is set to ON when the setting change mode is initiated, and the setting change flag is transitioned to OFF when the setting change mode is terminated. The main RAM 64 can maintain the state of the setting change flag even if the supply of power to the pachinko machine 10 from the outside is cut off. Therefore, for example, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off while the setting change mode is being executed because the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, the setting change flag stored in the main RAM 64 will be maintained in ON state.

According to this aspect, the setting change mode is initiated based on the determination that the setting change in progress flag is ON when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started from the outside (step S12008 in FIG. 65). In other words, according to this aspect, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off while the setting change mode is being executed, and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed, the setting change mode will be initiated even if an operation to execute the setting change mode has not been received.

Therefore, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off from the outside while the setting change mode is being executed, the administrator can avoid the trouble of having to perform operations to execute the setting change mode again after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed in order to start the setting change mode again on the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off from the outside while the setting change mode is being executed, there is a possibility that the lottery setting information of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a state that the administrator did not intend. However, according to this embodiment, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed from the outside, the setting change mode will be started without the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 having to perform any operation to execute the setting change mode again, thereby preventing the lottery setting information of the pachinko machine 10 from being left in a state that the administrator did not intend and being overlooked.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the setting check mode is started upon receiving an operation to execute the setting check mode, the setting check flag is set to ON when the setting check mode starts, and the setting check flag is transitioned to OFF when the setting check mode ends. The main RAM 64 can maintain the state of the setting check flag even if the supply of power to the pachinko machine 10 from the outside is cut off. Therefore, for example, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off while the setting check mode is being executed because the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, the setting check flag stored in the main RAM 64 will be maintained in ON state.

According to this aspect, the setting check mode is initiated based on the determination that the setting check flag is ON when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started from the outside (step S12011 in FIG. 65). In other words, according to this aspect, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off while the setting check mode is being executed, and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed, the setting check mode will be initiated even if an operation to execute the setting check mode has not been received.

Therefore, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off from the outside while the setting check mode is being executed, the administrator can avoid the trouble of having to perform operations to execute the setting check mode again after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed in order to start the setting check mode again.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the setting change mode is initiated, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and information identical to the setting information is stored as update setting information in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. Then, by accepting the operation of pressing the setting change button, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is updated, and when the setting change mode is terminated, information identical to the update setting information is stored as setting information in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. Therefore, even if the external power supply is cut off during the setting change mode, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 can be maintained at the value it had before the setting change mode was initiated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lottery setting information of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming a value different from the value intended by the administrator due to the external power supply being cut off during the setting change mode. A specific explanation is provided below.

If a configuration is adopted in which update setting information is not used while the setting change mode is being executed, and the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is directly changed by accepting the operation of pressing the setting change button, if the external power supply is cut off at a time when the setting information is a value different from that intended by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting change mode is being executed, the setting information for the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 will have a value different from that intended by the administrator.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is not changed until the setting change mode ends, but the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is changed. Therefore, even if the external power supply is cut off at a time when the update setting information has a value different from that intended by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 during the setting change mode, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 will maintain the value it had before the setting change mode was started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lottery setting information of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming a value different from that intended by the administrator due to the external power supply being cut off during the setting change mode.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, while the setting change mode is in progress, the update setting information stored in the update information storage area of the main RAM 64 is displayed on the information display unit 45z, allowing the administrator to press the setting change button while checking the update setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when external power supply is initiated, a determination is made as to whether the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range, and if it is determined that the setting information is not within the predetermined range, the RAM abnormality flag is set ON, and the game progress process (the processing from step S12304 to step S12316 in FIG. 68) that allows the game to proceed is not executed. This prevents the game progress process from being executed while the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is not within the predetermined range, which could cause problems with the progress of the game on the pachinko machine 10. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent unexpected losses from being incurred by players or administrators.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, when external power supply is initiated, a determination is made as to whether the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, a RAM abnormality flag is set ON, and the first RAM clear process is not executed even if an operation to execute the first RAM clear process is received. This makes it possible to prevent malfunctions caused by the first RAM clear process being executed when the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range. This is explained in detail below.

If a configuration is adopted in which the first RAM clear process is executed even when it is determined that the setting information is not within the specified range, the RAM abnormality flag, which is information from the various information stored in the main RAM 64 that indicates that it has been determined that the setting information is not within the specified range, will be erased (turned OFF).Even though the setting information is not within the specified range, after the first RAM clear process is executed, the game progress process (steps S12304 to S12316 in Figure 68) will be executed, which assumes that the setting information is within the specified range, and a malfunction may occur.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, if it is determined that the setting information is not within a predetermined range, the first RAM clearing process is not executed even if an operation to execute the first RAM clearing process is received. This prevents the first RAM clearing process from being executed even when the setting information is not within the predetermined range, and prevents game progress processing from being executed based on the setting information being within the predetermined range. As a result, it is possible to prevent malfunctions from occurring when the first RAM clearing process is executed when the setting information is not within the predetermined range.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, when external power supply begins, it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range, and if it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, the setting check mode is not executed even if an operation to execute the setting check mode is received. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting check mode from being executed, which displays the setting information, even if the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is not a numerical value within the predetermined range.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the supply of external power is cut off, a predetermined calculation is performed based on a predetermined group of information (including setting information in this embodiment) stored in the main RAM 64, and the RAM judgment value (hereinafter also referred to as the first RAM judgment value) resulting from the predetermined calculation is stored in the main RAM 64. Then, when the supply of external power is resumed, a predetermined calculation is performed based on a predetermined group of information (including setting information in this embodiment, but not the first RAM judgment value) stored in the main RAM 64, and it is determined whether the RAM judgment value (hereinafter also referred to as the second RAM judgment value) resulting from the predetermined calculation matches the first RAM judgment value stored in the main RAM 64. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if it is determined that the second RAM judgment value and the first RAM judgment value match, it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined that the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match (step S12006 in FIG. 65: YES) and that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S12007 in FIG. 65: YES), the RAM abnormality flag is not set ON, and the game progress processing (the processing of steps S12304 to S12316 in FIG. 68) is executed. In other words, if it is determined that the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match (step S12006 in FIG. 65: YES), but that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12007 in FIG. 65: NO), the RAM abnormality flag is set ON (step S12015 in FIG. 65), and the game progress processing (the processing of steps S12304 to S12316 in FIG. 68) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress process from being executed even when the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match but the setting information is not within the specified range. As a result, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by the game progress process being executed even when the setting information is not within the specified range. This is explained in detail below.

If the second RAM judgment value and the first RAM judgment value match, it is highly likely that the contents of the predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64 when external power supply was started are the same as the contents of the predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64 when the previous power supply was cut off, and it is highly likely that the predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64 was maintained normally even when the external power supply was cut off. However, even if the predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64 is not maintained normally, the second RAM judgment value and the first RAM judgment value may coincidentally match.

For this reason, if a configuration were adopted in which a determination was made as to whether the second RAM judgment value and the first RAM judgment value matched, but no determination was made as to whether the setting information was a numerical value within a predetermined range, the second RAM judgment value and the first RAM judgment value could coincidentally match, causing the game progress process to be executed, even if the setting information was not a numerical value within the predetermined range. This could result in a fatal malfunction in the progress of the game.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the game progress processing is executed based on the determination that the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match and that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In other words, if the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match but the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, the game progress processing is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress processing from being executed even when the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match but the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range. As a result, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by the game progress processing being executed even when the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, the setting change mode is terminated upon detecting a transition of the setting key (keyhole) from the ON state to the OFF state while the setting change mode is running (step S12108: YES in Figure 66), thereby preventing the setting change mode from ending immediately after it has started. This is explained in detail below.

For example, let us consider a hypothetical case where a different configuration from the present embodiment is adopted, in which the setting change mode is terminated when it is detected that the setting key (keyhole) is in the OFF state. With this configuration, if the setting change mode is initiated based on an operation to initiate the setting change mode, including the setting key (keyhole) being in the ON state, the setting change mode will continue until the setting key (keyhole) transitions from the ON state to the OFF state. However, if the setting change mode is initiated based on the setting change in progress flag being ON when power supply is started, the setting change mode may be initiated while the setting key (keyhole) is still in the OFF state. In this case, the setting change mode will be terminated immediately after it is initiated, making it difficult to change the setting information for the lottery setting in the setting change mode.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the setting change mode is terminated upon detecting the transition of the setting key (keyhole) from the ON state to the OFF state. Therefore, even if the setting change mode is initiated with the setting key (keyhole) in the OFF state, the setting change mode will continue until an administrator of the pachinko machine 10 or the like transitions the setting key (keyhole) from the OFF state to the ON state, and then transitions it from the ON state to the OFF state again. Therefore, even if the setting change mode is initiated with the setting key (keyhole) in the OFF state, it is possible to avoid the setting change mode being terminated immediately after it is initiated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being terminated immediately after it is initiated, making it difficult to change the lottery setting information.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, even if the setting change mode is initiated because the setting change flag was ON when power supply was started, only someone with the setting key can terminate the setting change mode. This improves the security of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the setting change mode is not only initiated based on an operation to start the setting change mode, including when the setting key (keyhole) is in the ON state, but also based on the setting change in progress flag being ON when power supply is started. Therefore, the setting change mode can be initiated not only when the setting key (keyhole) is in the ON state, but also when the setting key (keyhole) is not in the ON state.

In this embodiment, the operation used to execute the setting change mode is to press the RAM clear switch (to the ON state), turn the power switch ON with the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch all turned ON, but various operations can be used to execute the setting change mode. For example, the operation used to execute the setting change mode may be to press the RAM clear switch (to the ON state), turn the setting key (keyhole) ON, and turn the power switch ON.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation used to execute the setting check mode is to turn on the power switch with the RAM clear switch not pressed (OFF) and with the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch all turned on. However, various operations can be used to execute the setting check mode. For example, the operation used to execute the setting check mode may be to turn on the power switch with the RAM clear switch not pressed (OFF) and with the setting key (keyhole) turned on.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation used to execute the first RAM clear process is to press the RAM clear switch (to the ON state), and turn on the power switch with either the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, or door open switch turned OFF. However, various operations can be used to execute the first RAM clear process. For example, the operation used to execute the first RAM clear process may be to press the RAM clear switch (to the ON state), and turn on the power switch with the setting key (keyhole) turned OFF.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the setting information is included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value (checksum value), but instead of this configuration, the configuration may be such that the setting information is not included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value (checksum value).

In addition, in this embodiment, the RAM judgment value (checksum value) calculated when the power supply is cut off is stored in the main RAM 64. However, instead of this configuration, the RAM judgment value (checksum value) calculated when the power supply is cut off may be stored in a non-volatile storage means separate from the main RAM 64.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the setting change mode is started, the same information as the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is stored as update setting information in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. However, the information stored as update setting information does not have to be exactly the same as the setting information, as long as it corresponds to the setting information. For example, if the setting information is "1", "A" may be stored as update setting information as a value corresponding to the setting information, and if the setting information is "2", "B" may be stored as update setting information as a value corresponding to the setting information.

Similarly, in this embodiment, when the setting change mode is terminated, the same information as the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is stored as setting information in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. However, the information stored as setting information does not have to be exactly the same as the update setting information, as long as it corresponds to the update setting information. For example, if the update setting information is "A," "1" may be stored as the setting information as the value corresponding to the setting information, and if the update setting information is "B," "2" may be stored as the setting information as the value corresponding to the update setting information.

<Aspect 101>
At least some of the various functions described in each of the above embodiments (for example, a function for storing the number of game balls that have entered each entrance, a function for calculating the number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered each entrance, a function for storing the number of game balls paid out as prize balls, a function for calculating game history information such as the ratio of game balls to each entrance, a function for storing the calculated game history information, a function for displaying the stored game history information, a function for erasing various information stored in various storage means such as RAM or flash memory, etc.) may be realized by the game history management chip 300, the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300), or the inspection machine 320. Also, the game history management chip 300, the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300), and the inspection machine 320 may share or cooperate to realize at least some of these various functions.

<Aspect 102>
The first embodiment and the other aspects described above can be applied not only to the pachinko machine 10 but also to other types of gaming machines. For example, they can be applied to reel-type gaming machines such as pachinko-type slot machines. Specifically, for example, they can be applied to a configuration in which the ratio between the number of gaming medals won during a bonus, the number of gaming medals won by a sub-role drawn during a normal period, and the number of gaming medals won during a favorable period (AT, ART) other than the bonus is calculated and the ratio is displayed on a liquid crystal display device, or a configuration in which the ratio is output to an inspection machine and the ratio is displayed on the display unit of the inspection machine.

<Aspect 103>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, some or all of the functions implemented by software (by a CPU executing a program) may be implemented by hardware. For example, the gaming history management chip 300 may be configured with dedicated hardware designed to execute arithmetic processing for calculating gaming history information. This configuration can speed up the arithmetic processing for calculating gaming history information and prevent fraud, such as tampering with the arithmetic program to prevent accurate gaming history information from being calculated. The hardware may be configured with digital or analog circuits. Analog circuits can speed up arithmetic processing even more than digital circuits.

<Aspect 104>
It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one or more configurations included in the first embodiment and the above-mentioned aspects 1 to 103 are appropriately replaced or combined. Furthermore, it is also possible to combine one or more configurations included in the first embodiment and the above-mentioned aspects 1 to 103 with one or more configurations included in embodiments other than the first embodiment. Furthermore, of the configurations included in the first embodiment and the above-mentioned aspects 1 to 103, non-essential configurations can be appropriately omitted as long as they do not deviate from the spirit of the invention.

B. Application to other configurations:
The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-ball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple types of symbols circumferentially attached, and which start the reels by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and which award players with a bonus such as a medal payout if a specific symbol or combination of specific symbols appears on an active line visible through a display window after the reels stop when the stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine main body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, is equipped with a storage section and a take-up device, and the reels begin to rotate when the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the take-up device.

Furthermore, some of the functions implemented by software in the above embodiments may be implemented by hardware, or some of the functions implemented by hardware may be implemented by software.

C. Regarding inventions extracted from the above embodiments:
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. Note that, for ease of understanding, the following will appropriately indicate corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments in parentheses, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

<Features Group A>
The group of features A is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature A1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A processing execution means (a gaming history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means
An information storage means (register 304, calculation result storage memory 309) that is stored inside the housing of the gaming machine main body and stores detection information acquired based on the detection by the detection means in a non-volatile manner;
a transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to Feature A1, the processing execution means includes information storage means for non-volatilely storing detection information, which is information acquired based on detection by the detection means. Because the detection information correlates with the behavior of the gaming ball during a game, the detection information differs for each gaming machine and is unique to each gaming machine. In other words, the detection information reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to Feature A1, the detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in the information storage means of the processing execution means housed inside the housing of the gaming machine. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining the detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine can be obtained by the hall computer installed in the amusement hall. However, because gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, they may be left disconnected from the hall computer. In such cases, conventional gaming machines are unable to retain information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine. A gaming machine with Feature A1 stores detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the information storage means of the processing execution means housed inside the cabinet of the gaming machine main body, so that detection information can be obtained from the gaming machine main body even when the gaming machine is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, a gaming machine with Feature A1 can always maintain a one-to-one link between the gaming machine and detection information, regardless of the state of the gaming machine (whether installed in an amusement hall or in circulation), and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature A2]
A gaming machine according to feature A1,
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the execution of the game is provided.
The gaming machine, wherein the processing execution means is operated by the same power source as the control means.

According to Feature A2, the processing execution means operates on the same power source as the control means. Therefore, for example, if the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall and a hall computer is acquiring information about the characteristics of the gaming machine, even if a malfunction occurs in the power supply system of the hall computer or in the processing of the hall computer, detection information can be acquired as long as power is being supplied to the gaming machine. If the control means and processing execution means operate on different power sources and there is a malfunction in the power supply to the processing execution means, a malfunction will occur in which detection information cannot be acquired even though game play is being performed on the gaming machine. In contrast, according to Feature A2, because the control means and processing execution means operate on the same power source, detection information can always be acquired as long as game play is possible. This improves the reliability of the detection information.

[Feature A3]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The information storage means stores the detection information for each period until a specified number (500) of gaming balls are detected by a predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h).

According to Feature A3, detection information is stored for each period until a specified number of game balls is detected by a specified detection means. Therefore, even if there is variation in the time it takes for each gaming machine to detect the specified number of game balls, it is possible to obtain detection information that is not affected by that variation. In other words, even if there is a difference in the frequency at which game balls are fired, it is possible to obtain highly accurate detection information that is less affected by this.

[Feature A4]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The information storage means stores the detection information for each predetermined period (every hour).

According to feature A4, the information storage means stores detection information for each predetermined period, allowing statistical processing using the concept of time to be performed using the detection information.

[Feature A5]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The information storage means stores the detection information for each period from when power supply to the gaming machine is started to when the power is cut off.

According to Feature A5, the information storage means stores detection information for each period from when power supply to the gaming machine begins to be supplied to when power is interrupted. Therefore, for example, if the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall, detection information can be obtained for each business day of the amusement hall.

[Feature A6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A5,
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
Equipped with
The processing execution means
A prize ball number information acquisition means for acquiring prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information regarding the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out from the payout means as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
A calculation execution means (CPU 308) that executes a predetermined calculation based on the detection information and the prize ball number information;
Equipped with
The information storage means stores calculation result information, which is information relating to the calculation results (such as the ratio of bonus items) calculated by the calculation execution means.

According to feature A6, the processing execution means stores calculation result information. The calculation result information is information calculated based on the detection information and prize ball number information, and therefore reflects information regarding the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine. Therefore, according to feature A6, it is possible to obtain the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the prize balls paid out. As a result, it is possible to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the prize balls paid out.

<Features Group B>
The feature group B is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature B1]
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the execution of the game;
a calculation execution means (CPU 308) for executing calculation processing based on first information acquired based on the executed game and second information set in advance, and acquiring third information;
an information storage means (a memory 309 for storing calculation results) for storing the third information in a non-volatile manner;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the calculation execution means and the information storage means are operated by the same power source as the control means.

According to Feature B1, the first information is information acquired based on the executed game, and the third information is information acquired based on the first information. Therefore, the third information includes information about the executed game. Therefore, since the information storage means stores the third information including information about the executed game, it is possible to acquire information about games previously executed using the third information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, by using the third information, it is possible to manage the game characteristics of the gaming machine. Furthermore, since the calculation execution means and the information storage means operate on the same power source as the control means, the third information can be acquired as long as power is supplied to the gaming machine. If the calculation execution means, the information storage means, and the control means were operated on different power sources, a malfunction in the power supply to the calculation execution means and the information storage means could result in the third information not being acquired even when a game is being executed by the gaming machine. In contrast, according to Feature B2, since the calculation execution means, the information storage means, and the control means operate on the same power source, the third information can always be acquired as long as a game is executable. This improves the reliability of the third information. As a result, the reliability of gaming machine inspections can be improved, and the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature B2]
A gaming machine according to feature B1,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a transmitting means (CPU 308) that transmits the third information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to Feature B2, the gaming machine is provided with a transmission means for transmitting the third information stored in the information storage means to a specified device connected to the gaming machine, making it possible to use the specified device to manage the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine using the third information.

[Feature B3]
A gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2,
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
Equipped with
the first information is information acquired based on detection by the detection means,
The second information is information regarding the number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out from the payout means as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means,
The gaming machine, wherein the third information is information relating to the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine in the executed game.

According to feature B3, the third information is information regarding the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine in the executed game. Therefore, the third information stored in the information storage means can be used to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the prize balls actually paid out.

<Feature Group C>
The group of features C is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the execution of the game;
information storage means (register 304, calculation result storage memory 309) for non-volatilely storing first information acquired based on the executed game;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is stored inside a housing (a base box with a sealing sticker affixed) that shows signs of opening and closing.

According to feature C1, the information storage means is stored inside a cabinet that leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, physical contact with the information storage means leaves traces of the cabinet being opened. Therefore, if the first information stored in the information storage means is altered through physical contact with the information storage means, it is possible to determine this alteration from the traces on the cabinet. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the first information can be prevented. Gaming machines are often circulated and therefore come into contact with various external elements during distribution. However, since the information storage means is stored inside a cabinet that leaves traces of opening and closing, unauthorized alteration of the first information by someone can be prevented, even in situations where gaming machines are circulated frequently. Furthermore, because the first information is information obtained based on games played, it is possible to use the first information to manage and inspect the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. Therefore, feature C1 prevents unauthorized alteration of the first information, which reflects the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine to be properly managed and inspected. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature C2]
A gaming machine according to feature C1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is operated by the same power source as the control means.

According to feature C2, the information storage means operates on the same power source as the control means, and therefore the first information can be acquired as long as power is being supplied to the gaming machine. If the information storage means and the control means were operated on different power sources, a malfunction in the power supply to the information storage means could result in the first information not being acquired even though game play is being performed by the gaming machine. In contrast, according to feature C2, the information storage means and the control means operate on the same power source, and therefore the first information can be acquired as long as game play is possible. This improves the reliability of the first information. As a result, the reliability of gaming machine inspections can be improved, and the soundness of game play can be improved.

[Feature C3]
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
A gaming machine comprising a transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the first information to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

Feature C3 includes a transmission means for transmitting the first information stored in the information storage means to a specified device connected to the gaming machine, making it possible to use the specified device to manage and inspect the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine using the first information.

<Feature Group D>
The group of features D is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature D1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
A first prize ball number information storage means (main ROM 63) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information regarding the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
A processing execution means (a gaming history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means
a prize ball number information acquisition means for acquiring the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means;
A second prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing the prize ball number information acquired by the prize ball number information acquisition means;
a number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
a calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as a combination ratio) that is information relating to the history of a game by performing calculations based on information relating to the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the second prize ball number information storage means;
a game history information storage means (a calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

The prize ball count information set for gaming machines generally has different values set for each type (model) of gaming machine.

According to feature D1, the processing execution means acquires prize ball count information stored in the first prize ball count storage means. Therefore, even if different prize ball count information is set for each type (model) of gaming machine, the processing execution means can calculate correct gaming history information using the prize ball count information set for each type of gaming machine.

If a gaming machine has been illegally modified, the calculated gaming history information may be an unnatural value that differs from the expected value. Therefore, by checking the gaming history information, gaming machine inspectors can properly determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature D2]
A gaming machine according to feature D1,
a prize ball number information transmitting means (CPU 62x) for transmitting a signal including the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number information storage means to the processing execution means;
The acquisition means acquires the prize ball number information by receiving the signal transmitted from the prize ball number information transmission means.

According to feature D2, a signal including the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number information storage means is sent to the processing execution means. Therefore, even if the processing execution means is configured so that it cannot access the first prize ball number storage means or so that it cannot grasp the storage location (memory address) of the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means, the processing execution means can obtain the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means.

[Feature D3]
A gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a gaming history information transmitting means (CPU 308) that transmits the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to feature D3, the gaming machine's gaming history information is transmitted to a specified device, which can then display the gaming history information for that gaming machine. The gaming machine inspector can then confirm the gaming history information displayed on the specified device.

[Feature D4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means.

According to feature D4, the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the gaming history information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information.

[Feature D5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4,
A gaming machine characterized in that the launching means is configured so that it cannot launch game balls until the processing execution means has completed storing the prize ball number information in the second prize ball number information storage means.

According to feature D5, game balls are not launched until the storage of prize ball count information in the second prize ball count information storage means is complete, thereby preventing game balls from being omitted from the calculation of game history information by the calculation execution means.

<Feature Group E>
The group of features E is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature E1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
A processing execution means (a gaming history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means
A prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
a number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
a calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as the ratio of prize balls) that is information about the history of games by performing _calculations based on information about the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means each time the number of game balls (the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N OUT ) detected by a predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h) stored in the number information storage means reaches a specified value (500 balls);
a game history information storage means (a calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1, gaming history information is calculated each time the number of gaming balls detected by a specified detection means reaches a specified value. Therefore, even if there is variation in the time it takes for the number of gaming balls detected by each gaming machine to reach the specified value, gaming history information can be calculated that is not affected by that variation in time. In other words, even if there is a difference in the frequency with which gaming balls are detected, highly accurate gaming history information that is less affected by this can be calculated. As a result, gaming machine inspectors can confirm highly accurate gaming history information and appropriately determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. This can improve the soundness of gaming.

[Feature E2]
A gaming machine according to feature E1,
a first calculation execution condition storage means (main ROM 63) for storing information about the predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h) and the specified value (500) as a calculation execution condition for executing the calculation;
The processing execution means
a calculation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the calculation execution conditions stored in the first calculation execution condition storage means;
a second calculation execution condition storage means (a calculation execution condition storage memory 307) for storing the obtained calculation execution conditions;
Equipped with
The operation execution means executes the operation when the operation execution condition stored in the second operation execution condition storage means is established.

Different types (models) of gaming machines have different gameplay characteristics, and therefore the optimal conditions for executing calculations to calculate gaming history information also differ. For this reason, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of gaming machine.

According to feature E2, the processing execution means acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the first calculation execution condition storage means, and is therefore able to execute a calculation when the calculation execution conditions set for each type (model) of gaming machine are met.

[Feature E3]
A gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2,
The processing execution means
a deletion means for deleting information relating to the number of gaming balls stored in the number information storage means after the calculation execution means executes the calculation.

According to feature E3, after the calculation execution means executes a calculation, the information regarding the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means is erased, making it possible to store information regarding the number of game balls in the number information storage means again. This reduces the storage capacity required for the number information storage means.

[Feature E4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a gaming history information transmitting means (CPU 308) that transmits the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to feature E4, the gaming machine's gaming history information is transmitted to a specified device, which can then display the gaming history information for that gaming machine. An inspector of the gaming machine can then confirm the gaming history information displayed on the specified device.

[Feature E5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means.

According to feature E5, the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the gaming history information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information.

<Feature Group F>
The group of features F is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature F1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
A processing execution means (a gaming history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means
A prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
a number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
a calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as a combination ratio) that is information about the history of a game by performing calculations based on information about the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number information storage means every time a predetermined time (one hour) has elapsed;
a game history information storage means (a calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Feature F1 calculates gaming history information every time a predetermined time period has elapsed. This allows gaming machine inspectors to check the gaming history information calculated through statistical processing that uses the concept of time, enabling them to properly determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. This improves the integrity of gaming.

[Feature F2]
A gaming machine according to feature F1,
a first calculation execution condition storage means (main ROM 63) for storing information on a time interval for executing the calculation as a calculation execution condition for executing the calculation;
The processing execution means
a calculation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage means;
a second calculation execution condition storage means (a calculation execution condition storage memory 307) for storing the obtained calculation execution conditions;
Equipped with
The operation execution means executes the operation when the operation execution condition stored in the second operation execution condition storage means is established.

Different types (models) of gaming machines have different gameplay characteristics, and therefore the optimal conditions for executing calculations to calculate gaming history information also differ. For this reason, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of gaming machine.

According to feature F2, the processing execution means acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the first calculation execution condition storage means, and is therefore able to execute a calculation when the calculation execution conditions set for each type (model) of gaming machine are met.

[Feature F3]
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2,
a measuring means for measuring the elapsed time since the calculation was executed;
a determination means for determining whether a game is being played by a player;
Equipped with
The measuring means suspends measurement of the elapsed time during a period in which the determining means determines that no game is being played.

Feature F3 suspends measurement of the elapsed time since the calculation was performed during periods when it is determined that no play is being performed, allowing game history information to be calculated based only on periods when play is actually being performed.

[Feature F4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a gaming history information transmitting means (CPU 308) that transmits the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to feature F4, the gaming machine's gaming history information is transmitted to a specified device, which can then display the gaming history information for that gaming machine. An inspector of the gaming machine can then confirm the gaming history information displayed on the specified device.

[Feature F5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means.

According to feature F5, the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the gaming history information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information.

<Feature Group G>
The group of features G is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature G1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
A processing execution means (a gaming history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A monitoring means (power outage monitoring circuit 86) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means
A prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
a number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
a calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as a ratio of game devices) that is information relating to the history of games by performing calculations based on the information relating to the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the information relating to the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number information storage means when the monitoring means detects a power outage;
a game history information storage means (a calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature G1, gaming history information is calculated when a power interruption is detected, so that the gaming history information can be calculated based on the number of gaming balls detected during the period from when power is supplied to the gaming machine to when the power interruption occurs. In other words, gaming history information is calculated for each period from when the amusement hall opens to when it closes, so gaming history information is calculated for each business day of the amusement hall. Therefore, gaming machine inspectors can easily determine whether there have been any changes in the characteristics of the gaming history information across business days of the amusement hall, making it possible to appropriately determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature G2]
A gaming machine according to feature G1,
A gaming machine comprising a supply means (capacitor) for supplying power to the calculation execution means even after a power interruption occurs.

Feature G2 includes a supply means for supplying power to the calculation execution means even after a power interruption occurs, thereby ensuring that the calculation execution means can complete the calculation of the game history information and the storage of the game history information in the game history information storage means.

[Feature G3]
A gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a gaming history information transmitting means (CPU 308) that transmits the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to feature G3, the gaming machine's gaming history information is transmitted to a specified device, which can then display the gaming history information for that gaming machine. The gaming machine inspector can then confirm the gaming history information displayed on the specified device.

[Feature G4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means.

According to feature G4, the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the gaming history information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information.

<Feature H group>
The group of features H is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature H1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
a notification means for issuing a notification in a predetermined case;
A processing execution means (a gaming history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means
A prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
a number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
a calculation means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as a ratio of prize balls) that is information relating to a game history based on information relating to the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means;
a game history information storage means (a memory 309 for storing calculation results) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
Equipped with
The notification means issues a notification when the game history information stored in the game history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

Feature H1 provides an alert when the gaming history information does not meet a predetermined condition, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines whose gaming history information does not meet the predetermined condition. Then, by checking the gaming history information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature H2]
A gaming machine according to feature H1,
The notification means issues a notification when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means falls outside a predetermined range.

Feature H2 provides an alert when a specific value included in the gaming history information falls outside of a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines where the specific value included in the gaming history information falls outside of the predetermined range. Then, by checking the gaming history information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature H3]
A gaming machine according to feature H2,
The notification means determines the notification mode (color of the LED lamp) depending on the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

Feature H3 determines the notification mode depending on the degree to which a specific value deviates from a predetermined range, allowing the gaming machine inspector to easily grasp the degree to which a specific value included in the gaming history information deviates from the predetermined range.

[Feature H4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means comprises a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

Feature H4 includes a display means that displays a predetermined message as a notification, allowing the gaming machine inspector to easily know that the gaming machine's play history information does not meet the predetermined conditions.

[Feature H5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a gaming history information transmitting means (CPU 308) that transmits the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to feature H5, the gaming machine's gaming history information is transmitted to a specified device, which can then display the gaming history information for that gaming machine. An inspector of the gaming machine can then confirm the gaming history information displayed on the specified device.

[Feature H6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means.

According to feature H6, the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the gaming history information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information.

<Feature Group I>
The group I of features is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature I1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
A processing execution means (a gaming history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means
A prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
a ball-entry information storage means (a memory 309b for storing ball-entry information) for sequentially storing ball-entry information indicating that a game ball has been detected by the detection means each time the detection means detects a game ball;
a transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the winning ball information stored in the winning ball information storage means and the number of prize balls information stored in the number of prize balls information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to Feature I1, ball entry information and prize ball count information are sent to a specified device, which can then calculate gaming history information, which is information about gaming history, within any range based on the ball entry information and prize ball count information. Therefore, a gaming machine inspector can check the gaming history information of the gaming machine calculated within any range by the specified device, and can properly determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature I2]
A gaming machine according to feature I1,
A time and date information acquisition unit (RTC 96) is provided for acquiring time and date information, which is information relating to time and date;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when storing the ball entry information, the ball entry information storage means stores the ball entry information by adding the date and time information corresponding to the date and time when the gaming ball was detected by the detection means.

According to Feature I2, a specified device that receives ball entry information with added date and time information can specify a date and time range and calculate gaming history information. Therefore, gaming machine inspectors can perform detailed inspections based on gaming history information with a specified date and time range. Furthermore, if the specified device is configured to display ball entry information with added date and time information, gaming machine inspectors can also ascertain the date and time when gaming balls were detected by each detection means.

[Feature I3]
A gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display means (pattern display device 41) for displaying the winning information stored in the winning information storage means.

According to Feature I3, the ball-entry information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the ball-entry information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the ball-entry information.

<Feature J group>
The group of features J is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature J1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A prize ball number information storage means (main ROM 63) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information regarding the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
a processing execution means (main CPU 62x) that executes game progress processing (jackpot lottery processing, electric role release lottery processing, prize ball payout processing, variable pattern display processing on the main display unit 45, opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric role 34a, etc.) which is processing for progressing the game based on the detection of game balls by the detection means, and also executes processing to calculate game history information (role ratio, etc.) which is information about the history of the game by performing calculations based on the detection information of the game balls detected by the detection means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means;
a game history information storage means (main RAM 64, flash memory 64x) that is stored in the cabinet of the gaming machine main body and stores the game history information calculated by the processing execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to Feature J1, the gaming machine is equipped with a gaming history information storage means for storing gaming history information. Because gaming history information is information correlated with the behavior of gaming balls during play, the gaming history information differs for each gaming machine and is information specific to each gaming machine. In other words, the gaming history information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to Feature J1, the gaming history information, which is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in a gaming history information storage means housed in the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining the gaming history information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine can be obtained by the hall computer installed in the amusement hall. However, because gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, they may be left disconnected from the hall computer. In such cases, conventional gaming machines are unable to obtain information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine. A gaming machine with Feature J1 stores game history information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, in a game history information storage means housed in the housing of the gaming machine main body. This means that game history information can be obtained from the gaming machine main body even when the gaming machine is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, Feature J1 makes it possible to link the gaming machine and game history information one-to-one, allowing the characteristics of the gaming machine to be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

Furthermore, according to feature J1, a single processing execution means executes the game progress processing and the processing for calculating game history information, eliminating the need to provide a separate calculation chip or the like for executing the calculation processing, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the gaming machine.

[Feature J2]
A gaming machine according to feature J1,
The processing execution means
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress processing can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when the first condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
is executable,
In the second mode, the gaming machine is configured not to execute the game progress processing even if the gaming ball passes through the predetermined area.

Feature J2 makes it possible to execute a second mode in which game progress processing is not executed even when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, making it possible to execute in the second mode processes that are undesirable to execute in parallel with game progress processing or processes that are likely to cause malfunctions when executed in parallel with game progress processing. Furthermore, because feature J2 does not execute game progress processing in the second mode, when developing a program for processing to be executed in the second mode, there is no need to consider countermeasures for when game progress processing is executed in parallel, which significantly improves the efficiency of developing programs for processing to be executed in the second mode.

[Feature J3]
A gaming machine according to Feature J2,
The gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode in which the gaming history information is output.

The game history information is information whose content changes when a game ball is detected and game progress processing is executed. Therefore, if a configuration were adopted in which processing to output game history information was executed in parallel with game progress processing, the game progress processing would be executed while a gaming machine inspector was inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine using the game history information, causing the content of the game history information to change from time to time, making it difficult to carry out the inspection smoothly. In contrast, feature J3 outputs game history information in a second mode in which game progress processing is not executed even if a game ball has passed through a specified area, thereby preventing the content of the game history information from changing while it is being output. As a result, the gaming machine inspector can carry out the inspection smoothly.

[Feature J4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3,
The processing execution means
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress processing can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when the first condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
is executable,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first condition is met during execution of the game progress processing in the first mode (when the operation of pressing the mode switch button is performed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switch button is performed, when an inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, or when a predetermined time has come), the machine is configured to transition from the first mode to the second mode at the timing when a second condition is met (when the game progress processing has completed up to a predetermined processing stage, such as when the processing of displaying changing patterns has ended, or when all processing of each game progress processing being executed has been completed).

According to feature J4, if the first condition is met in the first mode, the system is configured to transition from the first mode to the second mode when the second condition is met. This reduces the occurrence of processing problems when transitioning to the second mode, compared to a configuration in which the system transitions from the first mode to the second mode immediately after the first condition is satisfied, regardless of whether the second condition is met.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the first mode transitions to the second mode immediately after the first condition is met, regardless of whether the second condition is met, and the first condition is met, that is, a predetermined operation is performed while the variable symbol display process is being executed as part of the game progression process in the first mode, the transition to the second mode will occur in the middle of the variable symbol display, making it difficult to control the timing of the symbol stopping and the symbol change time. In contrast, according to feature J4, for example, if the first condition is met, that is, a predetermined operation is performed while the variable symbol display process is being executed as part of the game progression process in the first mode, the transition to the second mode will occur when the second condition is met, that is, when the variable symbol display process is not being executed, i.e., after the variable symbol has stopped. This prevents processing malfunctions such as difficulty in controlling the timing of the symbol stopping and the symbol change time.

[Feature J5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4,
The processing execution means
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress processing can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when the first condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
is executable,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a third condition is met during the second mode (when 10 minutes have passed since the transition to the inspection mode), the gaming machine is configured to transition from the second mode to the first mode even if a transition operation (an operation of pressing a mode switching button, an operation of pressing a power button while pressing a mode switching button) that is an operation for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode has not been performed.

According to feature J5, if the third condition is met during the second mode, the system is configured to transition from the second mode to the first mode even if the transition operation for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode has not been performed. This prevents a situation in which the transition operation is not performed and the system does not return to the first mode. For example, this prevents a situation in which an administrator or inspector of the gaming machine forgets to perform the transition operation after transitioning to the second mode, causing the gaming machine to not return to the first mode in which game progress processing can be performed, and the player is unable to play on the gaming machine.

[Feature J6]
A gaming machine according to feature J5,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the third condition is that a predetermined time has passed from a predetermined point in time (10 minutes have passed from the point in time when the mode was changed to the inspection mode).

According to feature J6, if a predetermined time has passed from a predetermined point in time during the second mode, the system is configured to transition from the second mode to the first mode even if the transition operation to transition from the second mode to the first mode has not been performed. This reliably prevents a situation in which the transition operation is not performed and the system does not return to the first mode. For example, even if the gaming machine administrator or inspector forgets to perform the transition operation after transitioning to the second mode, the system will return to the first mode once a predetermined time has passed from the predetermined point in time. This prevents a situation in which the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which game progress processing can be performed and the player is unable to play on the gaming machine.

[Feature J7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6,
A game progress processing information storage means (main RAM 64) that is stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body and stores information related to the game progress processing;
an erasing means for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means based on the execution of an erasing operation (an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button) for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means;
Equipped with
The processing execution means
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress processing can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when the first condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
is executable,
The erasing means is configured not to erase the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means even if the erasing operation is executed in a state after transition to the second mode but before transition to the first mode (a state during the inspection mode, or a state in which the power is turned off after transition to the inspection mode).

According to feature J7, even if an erase operation is performed to erase information stored in the game progress processing information storage means after transition to the second mode but before transition to the first mode, the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is not erased. Therefore, even if an erase operation is accidentally performed in an attempt to transition to the first mode after transition to the second mode but before transition to the first mode, the information can be prevented from being accidentally erased.

For example, in a configuration in which the erase operation for erasing information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the erase button, and the operation for transitioning between the first mode and the second mode is the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the transition button, there is a risk that when attempting to transition from the second mode to the first mode by pressing the power button while pressing the transition button, the player may accidentally press the power button while pressing the erase button. However, according to feature J7, even if the operation of accidentally pressing the power button while pressing the erase button is performed after transitioning to the second mode but before transitioning to the first mode, it is possible to prevent the information from being accidentally erased.

More specifically, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which, when transitioning from the first mode to the second mode, the game progress processing being executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped and information for resuming the stopped game progress processing after returning to the second mode is stored in the game progress processing information storage means, if a player intends to press the power button while pressing the transition button to return from the second mode to the first mode, but accidentally presses the power button while pressing the erase button, the information for resuming the game progress processing will be erased, making it impossible to resume the game progress processing after returning to the second mode, which could be detrimental to the player. In contrast, feature J7 prevents the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means from being accidentally erased, even if, after transitioning to the second mode but before transitioning to the first mode, the power button is accidentally pressed while pressing the erase button in an attempt to transition to the first mode. This prevents detrimental effects on the player.

[Feature J8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the gaming history information.

According to feature J8, the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the gaming history information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information.

[Feature J9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming history information storage means is composed of a non-volatile memory (flash memory 64x) that can retain memory even when the power supply is cut off.

According to feature J9, gaming history information is retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, regardless of the state of the gaming machine (for example, a distribution state where the gaming machine is not supplied with power), it is possible to always maintain a one-to-one link between the gaming machine and the gaming history information, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature J10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J9,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the game history information storage means is stored inside a housing (a base box with a sealing sticker affixed) that shows signs of opening and closing.

According to feature J10, the gaming history information storage means is stored inside a cabinet that retains traces of opening and closing. Therefore, physical contact with the gaming history information storage means leaves traces of the cabinet being opened. Therefore, if the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means is altered through physical contact with the gaming history information storage means, it is possible to determine this alteration from the traces on the cabinet. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the gaming history information can be prevented. Gaming machines are often circulated, and therefore are subject to various external contacts during distribution. However, since the gaming history information storage means is stored inside a cabinet that retains traces of opening and closing, unauthorized alteration of the gaming history information by someone can be prevented, even in situations where gaming machines are circulated frequently. Furthermore, because the gaming history information is information acquired based on games played, it is possible to manage and inspect the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine using the gaming history information. Therefore, feature J10 prevents unauthorized alteration of gaming history information that reflects the characteristics of gaming on a gaming machine, allowing for proper management and inspection of gaming machines. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature J11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J10,
A gaming machine comprising: a notification means for notifying when the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

Feature J11 provides an alert when the gaming history information does not meet a predetermined condition, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines whose gaming history information does not meet the predetermined condition. Then, by checking the gaming history information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature J12]
A gaming machine according to Feature J11,
The notification means issues a notification when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means falls outside a predetermined range.

Feature J12 provides an alert when a specific value included in the gaming history information falls outside of a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines where the specific value included in the gaming history information falls outside of the predetermined range. Then, by checking the gaming history information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature J13]
A gaming machine according to Feature J12,
The notification means determines the notification mode (color of the LED lamp) depending on the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

Feature J13 determines the notification mode depending on the degree to which a specific value deviates from a predetermined range, allowing the gaming machine inspector to easily understand how much a specific value included in the gaming history information deviates from the predetermined range.

[Feature J14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J11 to J13,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means comprises a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

Feature J14 provides a display means for displaying a predetermined notification, allowing the gaming machine inspector to easily know that the gaming machine's play history information does not meet the predetermined conditions.

<Feature K group>
The group of features K is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature K1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress processing execution means (main CPU 62x) that executes game progress processing (a jackpot lottery process, an electric role release lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a pattern change display process on the main display unit 45, an opening and closing process of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric role 34a, etc.) that is a process for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress processing can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when a predetermined condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
is executable,
In the second mode, the gaming machine is configured not to execute the game progress processing even if the gaming ball passes through the predetermined area.

Feature K1 makes it possible to execute a second mode in which game progress processing is not executed even when the game ball passes through a specified area, making it possible to execute in the second mode processes that are undesirable to execute in parallel with game progress processing or processes that are likely to cause malfunctions when executed in parallel with game progress processing. Furthermore, because feature K1 does not execute game progress processing in the second mode, when developing a program for processing to be executed in the second mode, there is no need to consider countermeasures for when game progress processing is executed in parallel, which significantly improves the efficiency of developing programs for processing to be executed in the second mode.

[Feature K2]
A gaming machine according to feature K1,
The gaming machine is provided with storage means (a memory for storing calculation results 309, a memory for storing the number of balls 309a, a memory for storing ball information 309b, a main RAM 64, a flash memory 64x) that are stored in the cabinet of the gaming machine body and store detection information (game history information including ball entry information, ball number information, and role ratio information) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means,
The gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode in which the detection information is output.

Feature K2 allows the detection information to be stored and output in the second mode. Because the detection information is information correlated with the behavior of the gaming ball during play, it differs for each gaming machine and is unique to each gaming machine. In other words, the detection information reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. Feature K2 stores the detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, in a memory device housed in the gaming machine's housing. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining the detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine can be obtained by the hall computer installed in the amusement hall. However, because gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, they may be left disconnected from the hall computer. In such cases, conventional gaming machines are unable to obtain information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine. A gaming machine with Feature K2 stores detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, in a memory device housed in the housing of the gaming machine itself, so that the detection information can be obtained from the gaming machine itself even when the gaming machine is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, Feature K2 makes it possible to link the gaming machine and the detection information one-to-one, allowing the characteristics of the gaming machine to be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

Furthermore, the detection information is information whose content changes when a gaming ball is detected and game progress processing is executed. Therefore, if a configuration were adopted in which processing to output detection information was executed in parallel with game progress processing, the game progress processing would be executed while a gaming machine inspector was inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine using the detection information, causing the content of the detection information to change from time to time, making it difficult to carry out the inspection smoothly. In contrast, feature K2 outputs detection information in a second mode in which game progress processing is not executed even when a gaming ball has passed through a specified area, thereby preventing the content of the detection information from changing while it is being output. As a result, gaming machine inspectors can carry out their inspections smoothly.

[Feature K3]
A gaming machine according to feature K2,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature K3, the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the detection information.

[Feature K4]
A gaming machine according to feature K2 or feature K3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the storage means is composed of non-volatile memory (memory 309 for storing calculation results, memory 309a for storing the number of balls scored, memory 309b for storing ball scoring information, flash memory 64x) that can retain data even when the power supply is cut off.

According to feature K4, the detection information is retained even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, regardless of the state the gaming machine is in (for example, a distribution state where the gaming machine is not supplied with power), it is possible to always maintain a one-to-one link between the gaming machine and the detection information, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature K5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K2 to K4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the storage means is stored inside a housing (a base box with a sealing sticker affixed) that shows signs of opening and closing.

According to feature K5, the storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, physical contact with the storage means leaves traces of the cabinet being opened. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to determine that the alteration was made from the traces on the cabinet. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the detection information can be prevented. Gaming machines are often circulated, and as they are subject to various external contacts during distribution, the storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, even in situations where gaming machines are circulated, unauthorized alteration of the detection information by someone can be prevented. Furthermore, because the detection information is obtained based on games played, it is possible to use the detection information to manage and inspect the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. Therefore, feature K5 prevents unauthorized alteration of the detection information that reflects the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine to be properly managed and inspected. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature K6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K2 to K5,
A gaming machine comprising: a notification means for issuing a notification when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

Feature K6 provides an alert when the detection information does not meet a predetermined condition, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines whose detection information does not meet the predetermined condition. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature K7]
A gaming machine according to feature K6,
The notification means issues a notification when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the storage means falls outside a predetermined range.

Feature K7 provides an alert when a specific value included in the detection information falls outside a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines where the specific value included in the detection information falls outside the predetermined range. By checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with in any way. This results in improved game integrity.

[Feature K8]
A gaming machine according to feature K7,
The notification means determines the notification mode (color of the LED lamp) depending on the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

Feature K8 determines the notification mode depending on the degree to which a specific value deviates from a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily understand how much a specific value contained in the detection information deviates from the predetermined range.

[Feature K9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K6 to K8,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means comprises a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

Feature K9 provides a display means for displaying a predetermined message as a notification, allowing the gaming machine inspector to easily know that the gaming machine's detection information does not meet the predetermined conditions.

<Feature L group>
The group of features L is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature L1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress processing execution means (main CPU 62x) that executes game progress processing (a jackpot lottery process, an electric role release lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a pattern change display process on the main display unit 45, an opening and closing process of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric role 34a, etc.) that is a process for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress processing can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when the first condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
is executable,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first condition is met during execution of the game progress processing in the first mode (when the operation of pressing the mode switch button is performed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switch button is performed, when an inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, or when a predetermined time has come), the machine is configured to transition from the first mode to the second mode at the timing when a second condition is met (when the game progress processing has completed up to a predetermined processing stage, such as when the processing of displaying changing patterns has ended, or when all processing of each game progress processing being executed has been completed).

According to feature L1, if the first condition is met in the first mode, the system is configured to transition from the first mode to the second mode when the second condition is met. This reduces the occurrence of processing problems when transitioning to the second mode, compared to a configuration in which the system transitions from the first mode to the second mode immediately after the first condition is satisfied, regardless of whether the second condition is met.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the first mode transitions to the second mode immediately after the first condition is met, regardless of whether the second condition is met, and the first condition is met, that is, a predetermined operation is performed while the variable symbol display process is being executed as part of the game progression process in the first mode, the transition to the second mode will occur in the middle of the variable symbol display, making it difficult to control the timing of the symbol stopping and the symbol change time. In contrast, according to feature L1, for example, if the first condition is met, that is, a predetermined operation is performed while the variable symbol display process is being executed as part of the game progression process in the first mode, the transition to the second mode will occur when the second condition is met, that is, when the variable symbol display process is not being executed, i.e., after the variable symbol has stopped. This prevents processing malfunctions such as difficulty in controlling the timing of the symbol stopping and the symbol change time.

[Feature L2]
A gaming machine according to feature L1,
The gaming machine is provided with storage means (a memory for storing calculation results 309, a memory for storing the number of balls 309a, a memory for storing ball information 309b, a main RAM 64, a flash memory 64x) that are stored in the cabinet of the gaming machine body and store detection information (game history information including ball entry information, ball number information, and role ratio information) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means,
The gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode in which the detection information is output.

According to feature L2, detection information can be stored and output in the second mode. Because the detection information is information correlated with the behavior of the gaming ball during play, the detection information differs for each gaming machine and is unique to each gaming machine. In other words, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to feature L2, the detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in a memory means housed in the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining the detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine can be obtained by the hall computer installed in the amusement hall. However, because gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, they may be left disconnected from the hall computer. In such cases, conventional gaming machines are unable to obtain information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine. A gaming machine with Feature L2 stores detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, in a memory device housed in the housing of the gaming machine itself, so that detection information can be obtained from the gaming machine itself even when the gaming machine is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, Feature L2 makes it possible to link the gaming machine and detection information one-to-one, allowing the characteristics of the gaming machine to be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature L3]
A gaming machine according to feature L2,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature L3, the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the detection information.

[Feature L4]
A gaming machine according to feature L2 or feature L3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the storage means is composed of non-volatile memory (memory 309 for storing calculation results, memory 309a for storing the number of balls scored, memory 309b for storing ball scoring information, flash memory 64x) that can retain data even when the power supply is cut off.

According to feature L4, the detection information is retained even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, no matter what state the gaming machine is in (for example, a distribution state where the gaming machine is not supplied with power), it is possible to always maintain a one-to-one link between the gaming machine and the detection information, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature L5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the storage means is stored inside a housing (a base box with a sealing sticker affixed) that shows signs of opening and closing.

According to feature L5, the storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, physical contact with the storage means leaves traces of the cabinet being opened. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to determine this from the traces on the cabinet. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the detection information can be prevented. Gaming machines are often circulated, and as they are subject to various external contacts during distribution, the storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, even in situations where gaming machines are circulated, unauthorized alteration of the detection information by someone can be prevented. Furthermore, because the detection information is obtained based on games played, it is possible to use the detection information to manage and inspect the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. Therefore, feature L5 prevents unauthorized alteration of the detection information that reflects the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine to be properly managed and inspected. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature L6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L5,
A gaming machine comprising a notification means for issuing a notification when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

Feature L6 provides an alert when the detection information does not meet a predetermined condition, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines whose detection information does not meet the predetermined condition. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature L7]
A gaming machine according to feature L6,
The notification means issues a notification when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the storage means falls outside a predetermined range.

Feature L7 provides an alert when a specific value included in the detection information falls outside a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines where the specific value included in the detection information falls outside the predetermined range. By checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature L8]
A gaming machine according to feature L7,
The notification means determines the notification mode (color of the LED lamp) depending on the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

Feature L8 determines the notification mode depending on the degree to which a specific value deviates from a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily grasp the degree to which a specific value contained in the detection information deviates from the predetermined range.

[Feature L9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L6 to L8,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means comprises a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

Feature L9 includes a display means that displays a predetermined message as a notification, allowing the gaming machine inspector to easily know that the gaming machine's detection information does not meet the predetermined conditions.

<Feature M group>
The group of features M is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature M1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress processing execution means (main CPU 62x) that executes game progress processing (a jackpot lottery process, an electric role release lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a pattern change display process on the main display unit 45, an opening and closing process of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric role 34a, etc.) that is a process for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress processing can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when the first condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
is executable,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a second condition is met during the second mode (when 10 minutes have passed since the transition to the inspection mode), the gaming machine is configured to transition from the second mode to the first mode even if a predetermined operation (such as pressing a mode switching button or pressing a power button while pressing a mode switching button) for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode has not been performed.

According to feature M1, if the second condition is met during the second mode, the system is configured to transition from the second mode to the first mode even if the specified operation for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode is not performed. This prevents a situation in which the specified operation is not performed and the system does not return to the first mode. For example, it prevents a situation in which an administrator or inspector of the gaming machine forgets to perform the specified operation after transitioning to the second mode, causing the gaming machine to not return to the first mode in which game progress processing can be performed, and the player is unable to play on the gaming machine.

[Feature M2]
A gaming machine according to feature M1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second condition is that a predetermined time has passed from a predetermined point in time (10 minutes have passed from the point in time when the mode was changed to the inspection mode).

According to feature M2, if a predetermined time has passed from a predetermined point in time during the second mode, the system is configured to transition from the second mode to the first mode even if the predetermined operation for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode has not been performed. This reliably prevents a situation in which the predetermined operation is not performed and the system does not return to the first mode. For example, even if the gaming machine administrator, inspector, etc. forgets to perform the predetermined operation after transitioning to the second mode, the system will return to the first mode once a predetermined time has passed from the predetermined point in time. This prevents a situation in which the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which game progress processing can be executed, and the player is unable to play on the gaming machine.

[Feature M3]
A gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2,
The gaming machine is provided with storage means (a memory for storing calculation results 309, a memory for storing the number of balls 309a, a memory for storing ball information 309b, a main RAM 64, a flash memory 64x) that are stored in the cabinet of the gaming machine body and store detection information (game history information including ball entry information, ball number information, and role ratio information) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means,
The gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode in which the detection information is output.

Feature M3 allows the detection information to be stored and output in the second mode. Because the detection information is information correlated with the behavior of the gaming ball during play, it differs for each gaming machine and is unique to each gaming machine. In other words, the detection information reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. Feature M3 allows the detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, to be stored in a memory device housed in the gaming machine's housing. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining the detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine can be obtained by the hall computer installed in the amusement hall. However, because gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, they may be left disconnected from the hall computer. In such cases, conventional gaming machines are unable to obtain information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine. A gaming machine with Feature M3 stores detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, in a memory device housed in the housing of the gaming machine itself, so that detection information can be obtained from the gaming machine itself even when the gaming machine is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, Feature M3 makes it possible to link the gaming machine and detection information one-to-one, allowing the characteristics of the gaming machine to be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

Furthermore, feature M3 can prevent situations in which an inspector of a gaming machine inspects the characteristics of the gaming machine using the detection information output in the second mode, then forgets to perform a specified operation, causing the gaming machine to not return to the first mode in which game progress processing can be executed, and preventing the player from playing the gaming machine.

[Feature M4]
A gaming machine according to feature M3,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature M4, the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the detection information.

[Feature M5]
A gaming machine according to feature M3 or feature M4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the storage means is composed of non-volatile memory (memory 309 for storing calculation results, memory 309a for storing the number of balls scored, memory 309b for storing ball scoring information, flash memory 64x) that can retain data even when the power supply is cut off.

According to feature M5, the detection information is retained even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, regardless of the state the gaming machine is in (for example, a distribution state where the gaming machine is not supplied with power), it is possible to always maintain a one-to-one link between the gaming machine and the detection information, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature M6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M5,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the storage means is stored inside a housing (a base box with a sealing sticker affixed) that shows signs of opening and closing.

According to feature M6, the storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, physical contact with the storage means leaves traces of the cabinet being opened. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to determine this from the traces on the cabinet. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the detection information can be prevented. Gaming machines are often circulated, and as they are subject to various external contacts during distribution, the storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, even in situations where gaming machines are circulated, unauthorized alteration of the detection information by someone can be prevented. Furthermore, because the detection information is obtained based on games played, it is possible to use the detection information to manage and inspect the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. Therefore, feature M6 prevents unauthorized alteration of the detection information that reflects the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine to be properly managed and inspected. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature M7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M6,
A gaming machine comprising a notification means for issuing a notification when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

Feature M7 provides an alert when the detection information does not meet a predetermined condition, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines whose detection information does not meet the predetermined condition. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature M8]
A gaming machine according to feature M7,
The notification means issues a notification when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the storage means falls outside a predetermined range.

Feature M8 provides an alert when a specific value included in the detection information falls outside a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines where the specific value included in the detection information falls outside the predetermined range. By checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature M9]
A gaming machine according to feature M8,
The notification means determines the notification mode (color of the LED lamp) depending on the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

Feature M9 determines the notification mode depending on the degree to which a specific value deviates from a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily understand how much a specific value contained in the detection information deviates from the predetermined range.

[Feature M10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M7 to M9,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means comprises a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

Feature M10 includes a display means that displays a predetermined message as a notification, allowing the gaming machine inspector to easily know that the gaming machine's detection information does not meet the predetermined conditions.

<Feature N group>
The group of N features is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature N1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress processing execution means (main CPU 62x) that executes game progress processing (a jackpot lottery process, an electric role release lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a pattern change display process on the main display unit 45, an opening and closing process of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric role 34a, etc.) that is a process for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
A storage means (main RAM 64) that is stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body and stores information related to the game progress processing;
an erasing means for erasing information stored in the storage means when a predetermined operation (an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button) is performed;
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress processing can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when a predetermined condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
is executable,
The erasing means is configured not to erase the information stored in the memory means even if the specified operation is performed in a state after transition to the second mode but before transition to the first mode (a state during the inspection mode, or a state in which the power is turned off after transition to the inspection mode).

According to feature N1, even if a predetermined operation for erasing information stored in the storage means is performed after transition to the second mode but before transition to the first mode, the information stored in the storage means is not erased. Therefore, even if a predetermined operation is mistakenly performed in an attempt to transition to the first mode after transition to the second mode but before transition to the first mode, the information can be prevented from being accidentally erased.

For example, in a configuration in which the predetermined operation for erasing information stored in the storage means is to press the power button while pressing the erase button, and the operation for transitioning between the first mode and the second mode is to press the power button while pressing the transition button, there is a risk that when attempting to transition from the second mode to the first mode by pressing the power button while pressing the transition button, the user may accidentally press the power button while pressing the erase button. However, according to feature N1, even if the operation of accidentally pressing the power button while pressing the erase button is performed after transitioning to the second mode but before transitioning to the first mode, it is possible to prevent the information from being accidentally erased.

More specifically, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which, when transitioning from the first mode to the second mode, the game progress processing being executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped and information for resuming the stopped game progress processing after returning to the second mode is stored in the storage means, if a player intends to press the power button while pressing the transition button to return from the second mode to the first mode, but accidentally presses the power button while pressing the erase button, the information for resuming the game progress processing will be erased, making it impossible to resume the game progress processing after returning to the second mode, which could be detrimental to the player. In contrast, feature N1 prevents the information stored in the storage means from being accidentally erased, even if, after transitioning to the second mode but before transitioning to the first mode, the power button is accidentally pressed while pressing the erase button in an attempt to transition to the first mode. This prevents detrimental effects on the player.

[Feature N2]
A gaming machine according to feature N1,
The gaming machine is provided with a detection information storage means that is stored in the cabinet of the gaming machine body and stores detection information (game history information including ball entry information, ball number information, and bonus item ratios) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means,
The second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information (game history information including ball entry information, ball count information, and bonus item ratios).

According to Feature N2, detection information can be stored and output in the second mode. Because the detection information is information correlated with the behavior of the gaming ball during play, the detection information differs for each gaming machine and is unique to each gaming machine. In other words, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to Feature N2, the detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in a detection information storage means housed in the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining the detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine can be obtained by the hall computer installed in the amusement hall. However, because gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, they may be left disconnected from the hall computer. In such cases, conventional gaming machines are unable to obtain information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine. A gaming machine with Feature N2 stores detection information, which reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, in a detection information storage means housed in the housing of the gaming machine main body. This means that detection information can be obtained from the gaming machine main body even when the gaming machine is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, Feature N2 makes it possible to link the gaming machine and detection information one-to-one, allowing the characteristics of the gaming machine to be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature N3]
A gaming machine according to feature N2,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature N3, the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine inspector to check the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the detection information.

[Feature N4]
A gaming machine according to feature N2 or feature N3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the detection information storage means is stored inside a housing (a base box with a sealing sticker affixed) that leaves traces of opening and closing.

According to feature N4, the detection information storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, physical contact with the detection information storage means leaves traces of the cabinet being opened. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the detection information storage means is altered through physical contact with the detection information storage means, it is possible to determine this alteration from the traces on the cabinet. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the detection information can be prevented. Gaming machines are often circulated, and as they are subject to various external contacts during distribution, the detection information storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, even in situations where gaming machines are circulated, unauthorized alteration of the detection information by someone can be prevented. Furthermore, because the detection information is obtained based on games played, it is possible to use the detection information to manage and inspect the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. Therefore, feature N4 prevents unauthorized alteration of the detection information that reflects the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine to be properly managed and inspected. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature N5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N2 to N4,
A gaming machine comprising: a notification means for issuing a notification when the detection information stored in the detection information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

Feature N5 provides an alert when the detection information does not meet the specified conditions, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines whose detection information does not meet the specified conditions. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature N6]
A gaming machine according to feature N5,
The notification means issues a notification when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the detection information storage means falls outside a predetermined range.

Feature N6 provides an alert when a specific value included in the detection information falls outside a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily find gaming machines where the specific value included in the detection information falls outside the predetermined range. By checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be improved.

[Feature N7]
A gaming machine according to feature N6,
The notification means determines the notification mode (color of the LED lamp) depending on the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

Feature N7 determines the notification mode depending on the degree to which a specific value deviates from a predetermined range, allowing gaming machine inspectors to easily grasp the degree to which a specific value contained in the detection information deviates from the predetermined range.

[Feature N8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N5 to N7,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means comprises a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

Feature N8 includes a display means that displays a predetermined message as a notification, allowing the gaming machine inspector to easily know that the gaming machine's detection information does not meet the predetermined conditions.

The inventions of Feature Group A to Feature Group N above solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made in various aspects, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the entertainment value of the game.

In addition to increasing the enjoyment of gaming, various technological improvements have also been made with the aim of improving the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

For example, if a player engages in fraudulent behavior (so-called cheating), or if the nails on the game board of a pachinko machine are bent or modified in an unauthorized manner, the rate at which game balls enter each entry port, such as the general entry port or the starting port, may differ from what was originally expected, thereby compromising the expected performance and playability of the pachinko machine. However, detecting such fraud has been extremely difficult.

This type of fraud may be committed by a player during the amusement hall's business hours. It may also be committed by someone who tampered with the machine after the amusement hall's business hours. It may also be committed when a gaming machine is being transported before it is installed in the amusement hall. It may also be committed when a gaming machine is being shipped to the amusement hall. It is also possible that tampering may occur even earlier than that.

In light of this situation, the aim is to detect fraudulent activities and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines and improve the integrity of gaming.

<Feature O group>
The group of features O is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature O1]
A gaming machine equipped with a process execution means (main CPU 62x) that starts the execution of a predetermined process (timer interrupt process) at a predetermined interval (4 msec interval),
the process execution means is capable of executing a specific process (a calculation process that calculates gaming history information) as one process included in the predetermined process;
The specific process is composed of multiple process steps (task 1 and task 2 in FIG. 29 ),
The processing execution means
In one execution of the predetermined process, one processing step among the plurality of processing steps constituting the specific process can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that all of the plurality of processing steps constituting the specific processing are executed by executing the predetermined processing a plurality of times.

According to Feature O1, one of the multiple processing steps that make up a specific process can be executed in a single execution of the specified process, and by executing the specified process multiple times, all of the multiple processing steps that make up the specific process are executed. This reduces the time required for a single execution of the specified process compared to a configuration in which all of the multiple processing steps that make up the specific process are executed in a single execution of the specified process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for a single execution of the specified process from becoming longer than the specified interval for starting execution of the specified process, making it impossible to execute the specified process at the specified interval.

[Feature O2]
A gaming machine according to feature O1,
the specific process is composed of a series of processes whose execution order is determined,
the plurality of processing steps are obtained by dividing the series of processing steps that constitute the specific processing;
The processing execution means executes one of the plurality of processing steps (task 1 in FIG. 29), and then specifies the processing step (task 2 in FIG. 29) to be executed next to the one processing step.

Feature O2 divides a series of processes with a set execution order, and in one execution of the specified process, one of the multiple processing steps is executed, and then the processing step to be executed after that is specified. Therefore, even if a series of processes would take longer to execute than the specified interval if incorporated into the specified process, they can be incorporated into the specified process and executed at the specified interval.

[Feature O3]
A gaming machine according to feature O2,
The processing execution means is capable of executing a game progress processing, which is a processing related to the progress of a game, as a processing included in the predetermined processing,
The specific processing is a processing (arithmetic processing) different from the game progress processing.

According to Feature O3, even in gaming machines configured such that when a process other than game progress processing is incorporated into a predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval, the process other than the game progress processing can be incorporated into the predetermined process executed at predetermined intervals and executed. Furthermore, since the process other than game progress processing does not affect game progress even if not all processing steps are executed in one execution of the predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process can be allocated to the execution time of the game progress processing included in the predetermined process, thereby improving the flexibility of gaming machine design. Note that the process other than game progress processing can be any of a variety of arbitrary processes, such as a process for calculating game history information, which is information related to the history of games, or a transmission process for transmitting information about the status of games at predetermined times to a hall computer installed in the gaming hall.

[Feature O4]
A gaming machine according to feature O3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific processing is a calculation processing (arithmetic processing) that calculates gaming history information, which is information related to gaming history.

According to Feature O4, even in gaming machines configured such that when a calculation process for calculating game history information is incorporated into a predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process would be longer than the predetermined interval, the calculation process can be incorporated into the predetermined process that is executed at predetermined intervals. Furthermore, since the calculation process for calculating game history information does not affect the progress of play even if not all processing steps are executed in one execution of the predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process can be allocated to the execution time of the game progress process included in the predetermined process, thereby improving the flexibility of gaming machine design.

<Feature P group>
The group of features P is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature P1]
A gaming machine equipped with a process execution means (main CPU 62x) that starts the execution of a predetermined process (timer interrupt process) at a predetermined interval (4 msec interval),
The processing execution means
As one of the processes included in the predetermined process, a specific process (a prize ball counting process) can be executed,
In one execution of the predetermined process, some of the processing target candidates (two bits) from among a plurality of processing target candidates (eight bits in the buffer area) are set as processing targets for the specific process (prize ball counting process), and the specific process can be executed on the set processing targets.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific process is executed for all of the plurality of process target candidates by executing the predetermined process multiple times.

According to feature P1, in a single execution of a predetermined process, some of the multiple processing target candidates can be set as processing targets for a specific process, and the specific process can be executed on the set processing targets. By executing the predetermined process multiple times, the specific process is executed on all of the multiple processing target candidates. Therefore, the time required for a single execution of the predetermined process can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the specific process is executed on all of the multiple processing target candidates in a single execution of the predetermined process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for a single execution of the predetermined process from becoming longer than the specified interval for starting execution of the predetermined process, which would make it impossible to execute the predetermined process at the specified interval.

[Feature P2]
A gaming machine according to feature P1,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the plurality of processing target candidates are fixed in advance.

According to feature P2, since the multiple processing target candidates are fixed in advance, there is no need to execute a process to select multiple processing target candidates, which simplifies the process and, as a result, improves processing speed. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity required to store information such as programs and parameters required to select multiple processing target candidates.

[Feature P3]
A gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2,
The processing target setting means, when setting the part of the processing target candidates from the plurality of processing target candidates as the processing target for the specific processing, sets them in a predetermined order.

According to feature P3, when some of the processing target candidates from multiple processing target candidates are set as the processing target for a specific process, they are set in a predetermined order. This eliminates the need to perform a determination process to determine which processing target candidate to set as the processing target for the specific process, simplifying the process and thereby improving processing speed. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity required to store information such as programs and parameters required to perform the determination process.

[Feature P4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3,
It has multiple ball entry areas where game balls can enter,
each of the plurality of processing target candidates corresponds to each of the plurality of ball entry portions;
Each of the processing target candidates is information (ball entry detection information stored in each bit of the buffer area) that is updated based on the detection of a game ball entering each of the ball entry sections,
The processing execution means is capable of executing the specified processing for all of the processing target candidates by executing the specified processing multiple times (four times) in a time shorter than the shortest interval (approximately 18 msec) between two game balls successively entering one of the ball entry sections and being detected.

According to feature P4, the time required for specific processing to be performed on all candidate processing targets can be made shorter than the shortest interval between the detection of two consecutive game balls entering one ball entry point. Therefore, information updated based on the detection of game balls entering each ball entry point can be stored as information updated based on the detection of a single game ball entering. Specifically, if two game balls enter a ball entry point in succession, the information updated based on the detection of the first game ball entering the ball entry point is set as the processing target and specific processing is performed. Even if the remaining candidate processing targets are then set as processing targets and specific processing is performed, all of these specific processing can be completed before the next game ball is detected at the ball entry point. In other words, by the time the information updated based on the detection of the second game ball entering the ball entry section is set as the processing target and specific processing is executed, the specific processing for the information updated based on the detection of the first game ball entering the ball entry section has already been completed, and the information updated based on the detection of the second game ball entering the ball entry section can be treated as information updated based on the detection of the new first game ball entering the ball entry section. Therefore, information updated based on the detection of a game ball entering each ball entry section can be stored as information updated based on the detection of a single game ball entering the ball entry section. As a result, for example, information updated based on the detection of a game ball entering each ball entry section can be stored as binary information indicating whether or not a ball has entered the ball. In this case, the memory capacity required to store information updated based on the detection of a game ball entering each ball entry section can be reduced, and the processing speed of the specific processing can be improved.

<Feature Q group>
The group of features Q is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature Q1]
A process execution means (main CPU 62x) capable of executing a specific process (a process for a game history) and other processes (a process related to the progress of a game) other than the specific process;
A storage area (main RAM 64) into which information can be written;
A gaming machine comprising:
the process execution means includes a storage means (register) for storing information (register information) for executing the process;
The specific processing is
a first process (saving process) of writing information (register information) held by the holding means for executing the other process into the storage area;
a second process (recovery process) for causing the storage unit to store the information written in the storage area in the first process;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to Feature Q1, the specific process includes a first process that writes information stored in the storage means for the execution of another process to a memory area. Therefore, if the storage means is storing information for the execution of another process that was being executed immediately before the specific process began when the process execution means begins the specific process, the information for the execution of the other process stored in the storage means can be temporarily moved (saved) by writing it to a memory area. Therefore, the information for the execution of the other process stored in the storage means can be erased, and when the process execution means executes the specific process, the information for the execution of the specific process can be stored in the storage means. Furthermore, the specific process includes a second process that causes the storage means to store the information written in the memory area during the first process. Therefore, when the specific process is terminated, the information for the execution of the other process can be stored again in the storage means, and the other process that was being executed before the specific process began can be executed again from the state it was in immediately before the specific process began. Furthermore, because the first and second processes are included in the specific process, a gaming machine can be provided in which processes other than the specific process can be executed without any problems even if only the program for executing the specific process is deleted. In other words, it is possible to easily delete only the program that executes a specific process without modifying the programs that execute other processes. As a result, it is possible to minimize design changes, for example, when improving the gaming machine so that it does not execute a specific process, or when developing a new gaming machine based on the gaming machine that does not execute a specific process.

[Feature Q2]
A gaming machine according to feature Q1,
The processing execution means
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first process included in the specific process, information for executing the other process is written to a predetermined specific area (second area) of the memory area, and the writing of information in the specific process is executed only to the specific area (second area) of the memory area.

According to feature Q2, in a first process included in a specific process, the process execution means writes information for executing other processes to a predetermined specific area in the storage area, and writes information for the specific process only to the specific area in the storage area. This prevents information written in areas other than the specific area in the storage area from being overwritten by the execution of the specific process. Therefore, when a process using the other area is executed by the process execution means, it is possible to prevent the specific process from affecting the process.

[Feature Q3]
A gaming machine according to feature Q1 or feature Q2,
The processing execution means
The gaming machine is characterized in that the writing of information in the other process is executed only to an area (first area) other than the specific area of the memory area.

According to feature Q3, writing of information in other processes is performed only in areas other than the specific area of the storage area, thereby preventing information written in the specific area of the storage area from being overwritten by the execution of other processes. Therefore, when a specific process is executed by the process execution means using the specific area, it is possible to prevent the other process from affecting the specific process.

[Feature Q4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q3,
The specific processing is a processing different from a game progress processing, which is a processing related to the progress of a game,
The gaming machine, wherein the other processing is the game progress processing.

Feature Q4 makes it possible to provide a gaming machine in which game progress processing can be executed without any problems even if only the program for executing processing other than the game progress processing is deleted. In other words, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing processing other than the game progress processing. As a result, it is possible to minimize design changes, for example, when improving the gaming machine so that it does not execute processing other than the game progress processing, or when developing a new gaming machine that does not execute processing other than the game progress processing. Note that various arbitrary processes can be used as processing other than the game progress processing, such as a process for calculating and displaying game history information, which is information related to the history of games, or a transmission process for transmitting information about the status of games at a predetermined timing to a hall computer installed in the gaming hall.

[Feature Q5]
The gaming machine according to Feature Q4,
The specific processing is a gaming history information related processing (processing for gaming history) that calculates and displays gaming history information (role ratio, consecutive role ratio), which is information related to gaming history.

Feature Q5 makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that allows game progress processing to be executed without any problems even if only the program for executing game history information-related processing is deleted. In other words, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing game history information-related processing. As a result, it is possible to minimize design changes, for example, when improving the gaming machine so that it does not execute game history information-related processing, or when developing a new gaming machine that does not execute game history information-related processing.

<Feature R group>
The group of features R is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature R1]
A process execution means (main CPU 62x) capable of executing a plurality of processes including a specific process (a game history process);
A storage area (main RAM 64) into which information can be written;
A gaming machine comprising:
The processing execution means
The gaming machine is characterized in that the writing of information in the specific process is executed only in a predetermined specific area (second area) of the memory area.

According to feature R1, the process execution means writes information for a specific process only to a predetermined specific area of the storage area, thereby preventing information written in areas other than the specific area of the storage area from being overwritten by the execution of the specific process. Therefore, when the process execution means executes a process that uses an area other than the specific area of the storage area, it is possible to prevent the specific process from affecting that process.

[Feature R2]
A gaming machine according to feature R1,
The processing execution means
A gaming machine characterized in that writing of information for processes other than the specific process (processes related to the progress of the game) is performed only to an area (first area) other than the specific area of the memory area.

According to feature R2, the process execution means writes information for processes other than the specific process only to areas other than the specific area of the storage area, thereby preventing information written in the specific area of the storage area from being overwritten by the execution of the other process. Therefore, when a specific process is executed by the process execution means using the specific area, it is possible to prevent the other process from affecting the specific process.

[Feature R3]
A gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2,
The processing execution means
a storage means (register) for storing information (register information) for executing a process, and the specific process and the other process are executed exclusively;
The specific processing is
a first process (saving process) of writing information (register information) held by the holding means for executing the other process into the specific area;
a second process (recovery process) for causing the storage unit to store the information written in the specific area in the first process;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to Feature R3, the specific process includes the first process. Therefore, if the storage means holds information for the execution of another process that was being executed immediately before the specific process began when the process execution means begins the specific process, the information for the execution of the other process held in the storage means can be temporarily moved (saved) by writing it to a specific area. Therefore, the information for the execution of the other process held in the storage means can be erased, and when the process execution means executes the specific process, the information for the execution of the specific process can be stored in the storage means. Furthermore, since the specific process includes the second process, when the specific process ends, the information for the execution of the other process can be stored again in the storage means, and the other process that was being executed before the specific process began can be executed again from the state it was in immediately before the specific process began. Furthermore, because the first and second processes are included in the specific process, a gaming machine can be provided in which processes other than the specific process can be executed without any problems even if only the program for executing the specific process is deleted. In other words, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the specific process without modifying the programs for executing processes other than the specific process. As a result, it is possible to minimize design changes, for example, when improving a gaming machine so that it does not execute a specific process, or when developing a new gaming machine based on the gaming machine that does not execute a specific process.

[Feature R4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R3,
The specific processing is a processing different from a game progress processing, which is a processing related to the progress of a game,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the processing other than the specific processing is the game progress processing.

According to feature R4, the processing execution means writes information for processing other than the game progress processing only to a predetermined specific area of the memory area. Therefore, when the game progress processing is executed by the processing execution means, it is possible to prevent processing other than the game progress processing from affecting the game progress processing.

[Feature R5]
A gaming machine according to feature R4,
The specific processing is a gaming history information related processing (processing for gaming history) that calculates and displays gaming history information (role ratio, consecutive role ratio), which is information related to gaming history.

According to feature R5, the processing execution means writes information in the game history information-related processing only to a predetermined specific area of the memory area, thereby preventing the game history information-related processing from affecting the game progress processing when the game progress processing is executed by the processing execution means.

<Feature S group>
The group of features S is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature S1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
A ball entry detection means (ball entry detection sensor) for detecting a game ball entering the ball entry section;
A parameter storage means (a prize ball tally buffer) for storing a predetermined parameter (a prize ball tally value);
A processing execution means (main CPU 62x) that starts execution of a predetermined process (timer interrupt process) at a predetermined interval (4 msec interval),
The processing execution means
As the predetermined processing,
A parameter update process (a prize ball tallying process) for updating the predetermined parameters stored in the parameter storage means when a game ball enters the ball entry section;
A calculation process (task 1 and task 2 in FIG. 29) for calculating game history information, which is information relating to game history, based on the predetermined parameters stored in the parameter storage means;
is executable,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in one of the predetermined processes, when the parameter update process is executed, the calculation process is not executed.

According to feature S1, when a parameter update process is executed in a single predetermined process, a calculation process is not executed. In other words, since both a parameter update process and a calculation process are not executed in a single predetermined process, the time required for a single execution of the predetermined process can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for a single execution of the predetermined process from becoming longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, which would result in the predetermined process being unable to be executed at the predetermined interval. Furthermore, according to feature S1, parameter update processes in which the game ball entry status and processing load are correlated are executed with priority over calculation processes in which the game ball entry status and processing load are not correlated. This prevents the interval between parameter update processes from becoming too long, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the processing result of the parameter update process (prize ball tally value) from being unable to accurately reflect the game ball entry status.

[Feature S2]
A gaming machine according to feature S1,
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute the calculation process (the process of step S10810 in FIG. 29 ),
The processing execution means
a game machine that executes the calculation process when the parameter update process is not executed and the determination means determines that the calculation process is to be executed.

According to feature S2, when the parameter update process is not executed and the determination means determines that the calculation process should be executed, the calculation process is executed. Therefore, neither the parameter update process nor the calculation process is executed in the specified process, and in that situation, it is possible to execute another process independent of the parameter update process and the calculation process (for example, a process for determining the validity of updated parameters or the calculation results of the calculation process). Furthermore, if the configuration is such that when either the parameter update process or the calculation process is executed in a single execution of the specified process, the time required for one execution of the specified process is shorter than the predetermined interval, then by executing a process with a shorter processing time than the parameter update process and the calculation process in that situation, it is possible to reliably prevent the time required for one execution of the specified process from becoming longer than the predetermined interval.

[Feature S3]
A gaming machine according to feature S1 or feature S2,
The processing execution means is capable of calculating multiple types of game history information (role ratio, consecutive role ratio) in the calculation process, but in the calculation process for one of the predetermined processes, executes processing (task 1 or task 2 in Figure 29) for calculating one type of game history information.

According to feature S3, even though multiple types of gaming history information can be calculated in the calculation process, the calculation process in a single predetermined process only executes the calculation of one type of gaming history information. This reduces the time required for one execution of the predetermined process compared to a configuration in which the calculation process in a single predetermined process executes the calculation of multiple types of gaming history information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required to execute the predetermined process from becoming longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, resulting in the predetermined process being unable to be executed at the predetermined interval. It is also possible to reduce the storage capacity required for temporarily storing calculated gaming history information.

[Feature S4]
A gaming machine according to feature S3,
The processing execution means
A gaming machine characterized by calculating the gaming history information of one type by executing the process for calculating the gaming history information of the one type (task 1 or task 2 in Figure 29) over multiple times of the specified process.

According to feature S4, the processing for calculating one type of gaming history information is performed over multiple predetermined processes to calculate the one type of gaming history information. This reduces the time required to perform one predetermined process compared to a configuration in which the calculation of one type of gaming history information is completed in a single predetermined process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required to perform the predetermined process from exceeding the interval between executions of the predetermined process.

The inventions of Feature Group O to Feature Group S solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, and simplifying control.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

Further technological improvements are desired for gaming machines such as those described above, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and providing a more sound gaming experience.

<Feature T group>
The group of features T is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature T1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (the master CPU 62x of the first embodiment)
An information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball total value, handicap ratio, number of balls entered, etc.);
an operation means (flash memory clear button) for accepting a predetermined operation;
an erasing means (an IC chip for erasing processing) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the operation of the operating means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operating means is stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (inside a base box with a sealing sticker affixed).

According to Feature T1, the operating means is stored inside a space that leaves traces of its opening. Therefore, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine must be opened and the operating means must be operated, leaving traces of its opening in the space of the gaming machine. In other words, based on whether traces of its opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the information stored in the information storage means may have been erased.

If a gaming machine has been illegally modified, the effects of the illegal modifications will be apparent in the game that is played, and may also be apparent in the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. A person who inspects whether a gaming machine is operating normally (hereinafter referred to as an "inspector") can discover any illegal modifications to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. For this reason, there may be someone (hereinafter referred to as an "illegal person") who wishes to erase the information in order to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally modified.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to open the space in the gaming machine and operate the operating means. This leaves evidence of the opening in the space in the gaming machine, so even if the information stored in the information storage means is erased, there will remain evidence that the information may have been erased to conceal fraud. This makes it difficult to conceal fraudulent modifications made to a gaming machine, which in turn makes it possible to curb the motivation to make fraudulent modifications to a gaming machine, thereby improving the soundness of gaming.

Gaming machines are sometimes traded and circulated, and those who wish to distribute a gaming machine that has already been played on (a so-called second-hand gaming machine) may have a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system were established in which only those who have a legitimate reason to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine could erase all traces of the machine's opening, it would be possible to promote the smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the integrity of gaming.

[Feature T2]
A gaming machine according to feature T1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is capable of retaining the stored information even when the power supply is cut off.

Feature T2 allows information acquired based on games played to be retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, for example, even if power is not supplied to the gaming machine during the distribution process, it is possible to check whether normal games were played on the gaming machine.

[Feature T3]
A gaming machine according to feature T1 or feature T2,
The information acquired based on the executed game includes information on the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls (a prize ball total value).

Feature T3 makes it possible to check whether normal play has been performed on the gaming machine by using information regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature T4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is stored inside a space that shows signs of being opened (inside a base box with a sealing sticker affixed).

According to feature T4, the information storage means is stored inside a space that leaves traces of opening. Therefore, in order to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, the space of the gaming machine must be opened, leaving traces of opening in the space of the gaming machine. In other words, based on whether or not traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the information stored in the information storage means may have been unauthorizedly changed. This makes it difficult to conceal unauthorized changes made to the information stored in the information storage means, and ultimately makes it possible to suppress the motivation to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, thereby improving the integrity of gaming.

<Feature U group>
The group of features U is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature U1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (the master CPU 62x of the aspect 39 of the first embodiment);
An information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball total value, handicap ratio, number of balls entered, etc.);
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) can be connected;
an erasing means (an IC chip for erasing processing) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The erasing means is provided with means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on receipt of a predetermined signal (erasure command signal) from the predetermined device connected to the connection means.

According to Feature U1, the erasing means includes means for erasing information stored in the information storage means upon receiving a predetermined signal from a predetermined device connected to the connection means, so that anyone who has the predetermined device can erase the information stored in the information storage means. In other words, it is possible to restrict the erasure of the information by anyone who does not have the predetermined device.

If a gaming machine has been illegally modified, the effects of the illegal modifications will be apparent in the game that is played, and may also be apparent in the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. A person who inspects whether a gaming machine is operating normally (hereinafter referred to as an "inspector") can discover any illegal modifications to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. For this reason, there may be someone (hereinafter referred to as an "illegal person") who wishes to erase the information in order to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally modified.

However, according to this feature, erasing the information stored in the information storage means requires a specific device that can be connected to the connection means of the gaming machine. By restricting who can own this specific device, it is possible to prevent unauthorized individuals from erasing the information stored in the information storage means, which in turn makes it possible to prevent the emergence of motivations to make unauthorized modifications to gaming machines, thereby improving the integrity of gaming.

Gaming machines are sometimes traded and circulated, and those who wish to distribute a gaming machine that has already been played on (a so-called second-hand gaming machine) may have a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system were established in which only those who have a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the information storage means of a gaming machine can own the required equipment, it would be possible to promote the smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the integrity of gaming.

[Feature U2]
A gaming machine according to feature U1,
a transmitting means for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to the specified device connected to the connection means before the erasing means erases the information stored in the information storage means.

According to Feature U2, a transmission means is provided that transmits the information stored in the information storage means to a specified device connected to the connection means before the erasure means erases the information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, even if the information stored in the information storage means is accidentally erased by an operation against the will of the owner of the specified device, the information that has been erased from the information storage means can be confirmed using the specified device.

[Feature U3]
A gaming machine according to feature U1 or feature U2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is capable of retaining the stored information even when the power supply is cut off.

Feature U3 allows information acquired based on games played to be retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, for example, even if power is not supplied to the gaming machine during the distribution process, it is possible to check whether normal games have been played on the gaming machine.

[Feature U4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U3,
The information acquired based on the executed game includes information on the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls (a prize ball total value).

Feature U4 makes it possible to check whether normal play has been performed on the gaming machine by using information regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature U5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is stored inside a space that shows signs of having been opened (inside a base box with a sealing sticker affixed).

According to feature U5, the information storage means is stored inside a space that leaves traces of opening. Therefore, in order to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, the space of the gaming machine must be opened, leaving traces of opening in the space of the gaming machine. In other words, based on whether or not traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the information stored in the information storage means may have been unauthorizedly changed. This makes it difficult to conceal unauthorized changes made to the information stored in the information storage means, and ultimately makes it possible to suppress the motivation to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, thereby improving the integrity of gaming.

<Feature Group V>
The group of features V is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature V1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (the main CPU 62x of the first embodiment mode 40);
An information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball total value, handicap ratio, number of balls entered, etc.);
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) can be connected;
an operation means (flash memory clear button) for accepting a predetermined operation;
an erasing means (an IC chip for erasing processing) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The operating means is stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (inside a board box with a seal attached),
The erasing means is provided with means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the operation means accepting the specified operation and receiving a specified signal (erasure command signal) from the specified device connected to the connection means.

According to Feature V1, the operating means is stored inside a space that leaves traces of opening. Therefore, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine must be opened and the operating means must be operated, leaving traces of opening in the space of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the erasing means includes means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on receiving a predetermined signal from a predetermined device connected to the connection means. Therefore, anyone who possesses the predetermined device can erase the information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, based on whether traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether the space of the gaming machine may have been opened and the information stored in the information storage means may have been erased, and it is also possible to restrict the erasure of that information by anyone who does not possess the predetermined device.

If a gaming machine has been illegally modified, the effects of the illegal modifications will be apparent in the game that is played, and may also be apparent in the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. A person who inspects whether a gaming machine is operating normally (hereinafter referred to as an "inspector") can discover any illegal modifications to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. For this reason, there may be someone (hereinafter referred to as an "illegal person") who wishes to erase the information in order to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally modified.

However, according to this feature, erasing information stored in the information storage means requires a specific device that can be connected to the connection means of the gaming machine. By restricting who can have the specific device, it is possible to prevent unauthorized individuals from erasing information stored in the information storage means. Furthermore, even if an unauthorized individual does obtain the specific device, they must open the relevant space of the gaming machine and operate the operation means in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means. This leaves evidence of the opening in the relevant space of the gaming machine, so even if information stored in the information storage means is erased, evidence remains that the information may have been erased to conceal fraud. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized individuals from erasing information stored in the information storage means and to make it more difficult to conceal fraudulent modifications made to the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the motivation to make fraudulent modifications to gaming machines, thereby improving the integrity of gaming.

Gaming machines are sometimes traded and circulated, and those who wish to distribute a gaming machine that has already been played on (a so-called second-hand gaming machine) may have a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system were established in which only those with a legitimate desire to erase the information stored in the information storage means of a gaming machine could obtain the appropriate equipment and all traces of the space having been opened could be erased, it would be possible to promote the smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the integrity of gaming.

[Feature V2]
A gaming machine according to feature V1,
a transmitting means for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to the specified device connected to the connection means before the erasing means erases the information stored in the information storage means.

According to Feature V2, a transmission means is provided that transmits the information stored in the information storage means to a specified device connected to the connection means before the erasure means erases the information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, even if the information stored in the information storage means is accidentally erased by an operation against the will of the owner of the specified device, the information that has been erased from the information storage means can be confirmed using the specified device.

[Feature V3]
A gaming machine according to feature V1 or feature V2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is capable of retaining the stored information even when the power supply is cut off.

Feature V3 allows information acquired based on games played to be retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, for example, even if power is not supplied to the gaming machine during the distribution process, it is possible to check whether normal games were played on the gaming machine.

[Feature V4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V3,
The information acquired based on the executed game includes information on the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls (a prize ball total value).

Feature V4 makes it possible to check whether normal play has been performed on the gaming machine by using information regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature V5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is stored inside a space that shows signs of having been opened (inside a base box with a sealing sticker affixed).

According to Feature V5, the information storage means is stored inside a space that leaves traces of opening. Therefore, in order to tamper with the information stored in the information storage means, the space of the gaming machine must be opened, leaving traces of opening in the space of the gaming machine. In other words, based on whether or not traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the information stored in the information storage means may have been tampered with. This makes it difficult to conceal tampering with the information stored in the information storage means, and ultimately reduces the motivation to tamper with the information stored in the information storage means, thereby improving the integrity of gaming.

<Feature W group>
The group of features W is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature W1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (the master CPU 62x of the first embodiment)
an information storage means (main RAM 64) for storing first information (information used in game progress processing stored in a first area of the main RAM 64) which is information used to control the execution of the game by the control means, and second information (game history information such as prize ball totals, bonus item ratios, and ball number information stored in a second area of the main RAM 64) which is information acquired based on the game that has been executed;
erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The erasing means comprises means for erasing the first information stored in the information storage means when erasing the second information stored in the information storage means.

According to feature W1, the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information when erasing the second information, thereby preventing the occurrence of a situation in which the first information, which is information used to control the execution of a game, is not erased but remains as is even though the second information, which is information acquired based on the game that has been executed, has been erased.

Specifically, for example, the second information, which is information obtained based on the executed game, serves as a guarantee for determining the fairness of the game executed on the gaming machine. Therefore, when the second information is erased, it is preferable to erase the first information used to control the execution of the game on the gaming machine (for example, information related to a high probability mode flag or a high frequency support mode flag indicating the game status) and initialize the game status of the gaming machine. According to this feature, the erasing means includes a means for erasing the first information when erasing the second information. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which the game status of the gaming machine is maintained as is because the first information is not erased even though the second information, which serves as a guarantee for determining the fairness of the game, has been erased.

[Feature W2]
A gaming machine according to feature W1,
The erasing means comprises means for erasing the first information and not erasing the second information from among the information stored in the information storage means.

According to feature W2, the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information but not the second information stored in the information storage means, making it possible to erase the first information, which is information used to control the execution of a game, while leaving the second information, which is information obtained based on the game that has been executed.

Specifically, for example, when a malfunction occurs in controlling game execution or when an amusement hall opens or closes for business, there is a desire to erase the first information used to control game execution and initialize the control of the gaming machine, but not erase the second information, which is information acquired based on the game that has been played. This feature makes it possible to erase the first information used to control game execution while leaving the second information, which is information acquired based on the game that has been played, and initialize the control of the gaming machine.

<Feature X group>
The group of features X is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature X1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (the main CPU 62x of the aspect 42 of the first embodiment);
an information storage means (main RAM 64) for storing first information (information used in game progress processing stored in a first area of the main RAM 64) which is information used to control the execution of the game by the control means, and second information (game history information such as prize ball totals, bonus item ratios, and ball number information stored in a second area of the main RAM 64) which is information acquired based on the game that has been executed;
A first operation means (RAM clear button and power switch) that accepts a first operation (an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while the RAM clear button is pressed);
an erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information from the information stored in the information storage means, based on the first operation being received by the first operation means, and not erasing the second information.

According to feature X1, the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information from the information stored in the information storage means and not erasing the second information based on the first operation being received by the first operating means. This makes it possible to erase the first information, which is information used to control the execution of a game, while leaving the second information, which is information obtained based on the game that has been executed.

Specifically, for example, when a malfunction occurs in controlling game execution or when an amusement parlor opens or closes, there is a desire to erase the first information used to control game execution and initialize the control of the gaming machine, but not erase the second information, which is information acquired based on the game that has been played. According to this feature, by operating the first operating means, it is possible to erase the first information used to control game execution while leaving the second information acquired based on the game that has been played, and initialize the control of the gaming machine.

[Feature X2]
A gaming machine according to feature X1,
a second operation means (a second RAM clear button) for accepting a second operation (an operation of pressing the second RAM clear button for a predetermined time while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON);
The erasing means includes means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the second operation being accepted by the second operation means.

According to feature X2, the erasing means includes means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the second operation being received by the second operating means, so that the second information that cannot be erased by operating the first operating means can be erased by operating the second operating means.

[Feature X3]
A gaming machine according to feature X2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second operating means (second RAM clear button) is stored inside a space where traces of opening remain (inside a board box with a sealing sticker affixed).

According to feature X3, the second operating means is stored inside a space that leaves traces of its opening. Therefore, in order to erase the second information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine must be opened and the second operating means must be operated, leaving traces of its opening in the space of the gaming machine. In other words, based on whether traces of its opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the second information stored in the information storage means may have been erased.

If a gaming machine has been illegally modified, the effects of the illegal modifications will be apparent in the game that is played, and may also be apparent in the second information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. A person who inspects whether a gaming machine is operating normally (hereinafter referred to as an "inspector") can discover any illegal modifications made to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. For this reason, there may be a person (hereinafter referred to as an "illegal person") who wishes to erase the information in order to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally modified.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the second information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to open the space of the gaming machine and operate the second operating means. This leaves traces of the opening in the space of the gaming machine, so even if the second information stored in the information storage means is erased, there will remain traces that the information may have been erased to conceal fraud. This makes it difficult to conceal fraudulent modifications made to a gaming machine, which in turn makes it possible to curb the motivation to make fraudulent modifications to a gaming machine, thereby improving the soundness of gaming.

Gaming machines are sometimes traded and circulated, and those who wish to distribute a gaming machine that has already been played on (a so-called second-hand gaming machine) may have a legitimate desire to erase the secondary information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system were established in which only those who have a legitimate desire to erase the secondary information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine could erase any traces of the space being opened, it would be possible to promote the smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the integrity of gaming.

<Characteristic Group Y>
The group of features Y is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature Y1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (the main CPU 62x in aspects 43 and 44 of the first embodiment);
an information storage means (main RAM 64) for storing first information (information used in game progress processing stored in a first area of the main RAM 64) which is information used to control the execution of the game by the control means, and second information (game history information such as prize ball totals, bonus item ratios, and ball number information stored in a second area of the main RAM 64) which is information acquired based on the game that has been executed;
Operation means for accepting predetermined operations (RAM clear button and power switch);
an erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The erasing means is
The operation means erases the first information stored in the information storage means based on the acceptance of a first operation (an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button, and setting the RAM clear button to a state where it is not pressed within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the operation means accepting a second operation different from the first operation (an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing a RAM clear button and continuing to hold the RAM clear button pressed for a predetermined period of time).

According to Feature Y1, the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information stored in the information storage means based on the operation means accepting a first operation, and for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the operation means accepting a second operation different from the first operation. Therefore, by performing different operations on the operation means, it is possible to select the information to be erased from the information stored in the information storage means. In other words, since the information to be erased can be selected without providing a separate operation means for selecting the information to be erased, the structure of the gaming machine can be simplified.

Specifically, for example, if a malfunction occurs in controlling game execution or when an amusement hall opens or closes, and you want to erase the first information used to control game execution and initialize the control of the gaming machine, you can execute the first operation. Conversely, if you want to erase the second information obtained based on the game that has been played and put the gaming machine into circulation anew, you can execute the second operation. In this way, by executing different operations on the operating means, it is possible to select the information to be erased from the information stored in the information storage means.

[Feature Y2]
A gaming machine according to feature Y1,
The erasing means is provided with a means for erasing the first information in addition to erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the operation means accepting the second operation (an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button and continuing to hold the RAM clear button pressed for a predetermined period of time).

According to feature Y2, the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information in addition to erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the operation means accepting the second operation, so that both the first information and the second information can be erased by executing the second operation on the operation means.

<Feature Z group>
The group of features Z is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature Z1]
A control means for controlling the execution of the game (the main CPU 62x of the first embodiment)
An information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball total value, handicap ratio, number of balls entered, etc.);
an erasing means (an IC chip for erasing processing) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A reception means for receiving authentication information (PIN number);
A gaming machine comprising:
The erasing means is provided with a means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the authentication information accepted by the accepting means satisfying a predetermined condition.

According to Feature Z1, the erasing means includes means for erasing information stored in the information storage means based on the authentication information accepted by the accepting means satisfying a predetermined condition, allowing a person who has authentication information that satisfies the predetermined condition to erase the information stored in the information storage means. In other words, it is possible to restrict the erasure of information by a person who does not have authentication information that satisfies the predetermined condition.

If a gaming machine has been illegally modified, the effects of the illegal modifications will be apparent in the game that is played, and may also be apparent in the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. A person who inspects whether a gaming machine is operating normally (hereinafter referred to as an "inspector") can discover any illegal modifications to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. For this reason, there may be someone (hereinafter referred to as an "illegal person") who wishes to erase the information in order to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally modified.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to have authentication information that meets the specified conditions. By restricting the individuals who can have authentication information that meets the specified conditions, it is possible to prevent information stored in the information storage means from being erased by unauthorized individuals, which in turn makes it possible to prevent the emergence of motivations to make unauthorized modifications to gaming machines, thereby improving the integrity of gaming.

Gaming machines are sometimes traded and circulated, and those who wish to distribute a gaming machine that has already been played on (a so-called used gaming machine) may have a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system were established in which only those who have a legitimate reason to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine could obtain authentication information that meets the specified conditions, it would be possible to promote the smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the integrity of gaming.

[Feature Z2]
A gaming machine according to feature Z1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is capable of retaining the stored information even when the power supply is cut off.

Feature Z2 allows information acquired based on games played to be retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, for example, even if power is not supplied to the gaming machine during the distribution process, it is possible to check whether normal games were played on the gaming machine.

[Feature Z3]
A gaming machine according to feature Z1 or feature Z2,
The information acquired based on the executed game includes information on the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls (a prize ball total value).

Feature Z3 makes it possible to check whether normal play has been performed on the gaming machine by using information regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature Z4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Z1 to Z3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information storage means is stored inside a space that shows signs of being opened (inside a base box with a sealing sticker affixed).

According to Feature Z4, the information storage means is stored inside a space that leaves traces of opening. Therefore, in order to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, the space of the gaming machine must be opened, leaving traces of opening in the space of the gaming machine. In other words, based on whether or not traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the information stored in the information storage means may have been unauthorizedly changed. This makes it difficult to conceal unauthorized changes made to the information stored in the information storage means, and ultimately makes it possible to suppress the motivation to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, thereby improving the integrity of gaming.

The inventions of Feature Group T to Feature Group Z solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and simplifying the structure.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

In gaming machines like those mentioned above, further technological improvements are desired in order to increase the enjoyment of the game, reduce the processing load on the gaming machine, optimize processing, simplify control, simplify the structure, and provide a more sound gaming experience.

<Feature αA group>
The group of features αA is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αA1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
A signal output means (each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a determination information output means (ball entry detection IC 62c) that determines whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry section based on the signal and outputs determination information (ball entry information) based on the determination;
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the judgment information;
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to feature αA1, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that the specified device can receive judgment information that is not affected by the control means.

For example, if a configuration that does not feature this characteristic were adopted and instead outputs assessment information to a specific device connected to the connection means via a control means, and if the control means were to malfunction or be tampered with, the malfunction or tampering could affect the assessment information output to the specific device.

In contrast, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Therefore, even if the control means has a malfunction or has been tampered with, the malfunction or tampering will not affect the determination information output to the specified device. As a result, the specified device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or tampering.

[Feature αA2]
A gaming machine according to feature αA1,
a plurality of ball entry sections into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of signal output means for outputting a signal based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the judgment information output means is equipped with a means for determining whether or not a gaming ball has entered each of the multiple ball entry sections based on the signals output from each of the multiple signal output means, and for outputting the judgment information (ball entry information), which is information based on the judgment and corresponds to each of the multiple ball entry sections, to the specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method.

According to Feature αA2, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry points to a specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which judgment information is output via a parallel transmission method, for example, the configuration of the connection means that routes the judgment information to the specified device can be simplified, and the configuration of the specified device that receives the judgment information can also be simplified.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which judgment information corresponding to each of multiple ball entry sections is output using a parallel transmission method, the connection means must be equipped with an output section corresponding to the number of ball entry sections. Similarly, the specified device must be equipped with an input section corresponding to the number of ball entry sections. Furthermore, since the number of ball entry sections equipped in a gaming machine differs depending on the type (model) of gaming machine, it becomes necessary to prepare a specified device equipped with a different number of terminals for each type (model) of gaming machine.

In contrast, according to this feature, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections to a specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means only needs to be configured to include at least one output unit that can output judgment information via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine. This allows for a simplified configuration of the connection means. Similarly, the specified device only needs to be configured to include at least one input unit that can input judgment information output via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine, allowing for a simplified configuration of the specified device. Furthermore, even when the specified device is connected to a gaming machine with a different number of ball entry sections, the specified device can input judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections via a serial transmission method. In other words, the specified device can be used with other gaming machines with a different number of ball entry sections. This increases the versatility of the specified device.

[Feature αA3]
A gaming machine according to feature αA1 or feature αA2,
The connection means is configured to be able to connect to the specified device that can calculate game history information (game history information such as the ratio of special devices), which is information regarding the history of games, based on the judgment information.

According to feature αA3, a specified device connected to the connection means can calculate game history information based on determination information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector inspecting the performance of the gaming machine can use the specified device to confirm game history information that is not affected by the control means. As a result, the integrity of the game can be ensured.

<Feature αB group>
The group of features αB is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αB1]
A plurality of ball entry sections into which game balls can enter;
A plurality of signal output means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for outputting signals based on the balls entering each of the plurality of ball entry sections;
a judgment information output means (ball entry detection IC 62c) that judges whether or not a game ball has entered each of the plurality of ball entry sections based on the signals output from each of the plurality of signal output means, and outputs judgment information (ball entry information) that is information based on the judgment and corresponds to each of the plurality of ball entry sections;
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the judgment information;
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising:
A gaming machine characterized in that the judgment information output means includes means for outputting the judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections to the specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method.

According to feature αB1, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry points to a specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which judgment information is output via a parallel transmission method, for example, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the connection means that routes the judgment information to the specified device, and it is also possible to simplify the configuration of the specified device that receives the judgment information.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which judgment information corresponding to each of multiple ball entry sections is output using a parallel transmission method, the connection means must be equipped with an output section corresponding to the number of ball entry sections. Similarly, the specified device must be equipped with an input section corresponding to the number of ball entry sections. Furthermore, since the number of ball entry sections equipped in a gaming machine differs depending on the type (model) of gaming machine, it becomes necessary to prepare a specified device equipped with a different number of terminals for each type (model) of gaming machine.

In contrast, according to this feature, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections to a specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means only needs to be configured to include at least one output unit that can output judgment information via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine. This allows for a simplified configuration of the connection means. Similarly, the specified device only needs to be configured to include at least one input unit that can input judgment information output via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine, allowing for a simplified configuration of the specified device. Furthermore, even when the specified device is connected to a gaming machine with a different number of ball entry sections, the specified device can input judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections via a serial transmission method. In other words, the specified device can be used with other gaming machines with a different number of ball entry sections. This increases the versatility of the specified device.

[Feature αB2]
A gaming machine according to feature αB1,
The connection means is configured to be able to connect to the specified device that can calculate game history information (game history information such as the ratio of special devices), which is information regarding the history of games, based on the judgment information.

According to feature αB2, a specified device connected to the connection means can calculate game history information based on determination information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector inspecting the performance of a gaming machine can use the specified device to confirm game history information that is not affected by the control means. As a result, the integrity of the game can be ensured.

[Feature αB3]
A gaming machine according to feature αB1 or feature αB2,
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to feature αB3, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that the specified device can receive judgment information that is not affected by the control means.

For example, if a configuration that does not feature this characteristic were adopted and instead outputs assessment information to a specific device connected to the connection means via a control means, and if the control means were to malfunction or be tampered with, the malfunction or tampering could affect the assessment information output to the specific device.

In contrast, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Therefore, even if the control means has a malfunction or has been tampered with, the malfunction or tampering will not affect the determination information output to the specified device. As a result, the specified device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or tampering.

<Feature αC group>
The group of features αC is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αC1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
A signal output means (each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a determination information output means (ball entry detection IC 62c) that determines whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry section based on the signal and outputs determination information (ball entry information) based on the determination;
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the judgment information;
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the judgment information output means is equipped with an output control means that outputs the judgment information to the specified device only when the relationship with the specified device connected to the connection means satisfies specified conditions (when a Hi level signal is input from the inspection machine 320).

According to Feature αC1, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information to a specified device connected to the connection means only when the relationship with the specified device satisfies a specified condition. This prevents the determination information of the gaming machine from being output to the outside when the specified condition is not met. This prevents the determination information of the gaming machine from being analyzed and misused by malicious individuals.

[Feature αC2]
A gaming machine according to feature αC1,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition includes receiving a predetermined signal from the predetermined device connected to the connection means.

Feature αC2 prevents the gaming machine's judgment information from being output to the outside when certain conditions, including receiving a certain signal from a certain device connected to the connection means, are not met. This prevents the gaming machine's judgment information from being analyzed and misused by malicious individuals.

[Feature αC3]
A gaming machine according to feature αC1 or feature αC2,
a plurality of ball entry sections into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of signal output means for outputting a signal based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the judgment information output means is equipped with a means for determining whether or not a gaming ball has entered each of the multiple ball entry sections based on the signals output from each of the multiple signal output means, and for outputting the judgment information (ball entry information), which is information based on the judgment and corresponds to each of the multiple ball entry sections, to the specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method.

According to feature αC3, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry points to a specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which judgment information is output via a parallel transmission method, for example, the configuration of the connection means that routes the judgment information to the specified device can be simplified, and the configuration of the specified device that receives the judgment information can also be simplified.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which judgment information corresponding to each of multiple ball entry sections is output using a parallel transmission method, the connection means must be equipped with output units corresponding to the number of ball entry sections. Similarly, the specified device must be equipped with input units corresponding to the number of ball entry sections. Furthermore, since the number of ball entry sections equipped in a gaming machine differs depending on the type (model) of gaming machine, it becomes necessary to prepare a specified device equipped with a different number of input units for each type (model) of gaming machine.

In contrast, according to this feature, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections to a specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means only needs to be configured to include at least one output unit that can output judgment information via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine. This allows for a simplified configuration of the connection means. Similarly, the specified device only needs to be configured to include at least one input unit that can input judgment information output via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine, allowing for a simplified configuration of the specified device. Furthermore, even when the specified device is connected to a gaming machine with a different number of ball entry sections, the specified device can input judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections via a serial transmission method. In other words, the specified device can be used with other gaming machines with a different number of ball entry sections. This increases the versatility of the specified device.

[Feature αC4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC3,
The connection means is configured to be able to connect to the specified device that can calculate game history information (game history information such as the ratio of special devices), which is information regarding the history of games, based on the judgment information.

According to feature αC4, a specified device connected to the connection means can calculate game history information based on determination information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector inspecting the performance of the gaming machine can use the specified device to confirm game history information that is not affected by the control means. As a result, the integrity of the game can be ensured.

[Feature αC5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC4,
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to feature αC5, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that the specified device can receive judgment information that is not affected by the control means.

For example, if a configuration that does not feature this characteristic were adopted and instead outputs assessment information to a specific device connected to the connection means via a control means, and if the control means were to malfunction or be tampered with, the malfunction or tampering could affect the assessment information output to the specific device.

In contrast, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Therefore, even if the control means has a malfunction or has been tampered with, the malfunction or tampering will not affect the determination information output to the specified device. As a result, the specified device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or tampering.

<Feature αD group>
The group of features αD is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αD1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
A signal output means (each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a determination information output means (ball entry detection IC 62c) that determines whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry section based on the signal and outputs determination information (ball entry information) based on the determination;
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the judgment information;
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising:
the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means,
The gaming machine further comprises:
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a prize ball number information output means for outputting prize ball number information, which is information that can identify the number of gaming balls that will be paid out as prize balls when one gaming ball enters the ball entry section, to the specified device connected to the connection means.

Feature αD1 includes a prize ball number information output means that outputs prize ball number information to a specified device connected to the connection means, thereby eliminating the need to manually input prize ball number information into the specified device and preventing incorrect prize ball number information from being input to the specified device. As a result, the specified device can perform processing based on the judgment information and the accurate prize ball number information output from the prize ball number information output means.

[Feature αD2]
A gaming machine according to feature αD1,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a type information output means for outputting type information, which is information that can identify the type of the ball entry section, to the specified device connected to the connection means.

Feature αD2 includes a type information output means for outputting type information to a specified device connected to the connection means, eliminating the need to manually input type information into the specified device and preventing incorrect type information from being input to the specified device. As a result, the specified device can execute processing based on the determination information output from the determination information output means and the accurate type information output from the type information output means. The type of ball entry area refers to the type of ball entry area that is provided with signal output means (ball entry detection sensors 44a-44h), such as a first start opening, a second start opening, a big prize opening, or an ejection passage.

[Feature αD3]
A gaming machine according to feature αD1 or feature αD2,
a plurality of ball entry sections into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of signal output means for outputting a signal based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the judgment information output means is equipped with a means for determining whether or not a gaming ball has entered each of the multiple ball entry sections based on the signals output from each of the multiple signal output means, and for outputting the judgment information (ball entry information), which is information based on the judgment and corresponds to each of the multiple ball entry sections, to the specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method.

According to feature αD3, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry points to a specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which judgment information is output via a parallel transmission method, for example, the configuration of the connection means that routes the judgment information to the specified device can be simplified, and the configuration of the specified device that receives the judgment information can also be simplified.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which judgment information corresponding to each of multiple ball entry sections is output using a parallel transmission method, the connection means must be equipped with an output section corresponding to the number of ball entry sections. Similarly, the specified device must be equipped with an input section corresponding to the number of ball entry sections. Furthermore, since the number of ball entry sections equipped in a gaming machine differs depending on the type (model) of gaming machine, it becomes necessary to prepare a specified device equipped with a different number of terminals for each type (model) of gaming machine.

In contrast, according to this feature, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections to a specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means only needs to be configured to include at least one output unit that can output judgment information via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine. This allows for a simplified configuration of the connection means. Similarly, the specified device only needs to be configured to include at least one input unit that can input judgment information output via a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine, allowing for a simplified configuration of the specified device. Furthermore, even when the specified device is connected to a gaming machine with a different number of ball entry sections, the specified device can input judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections via a serial transmission method. In other words, the specified device can be used with other gaming machines with a different number of ball entry sections. This increases the versatility of the specified device.

[Feature αD4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD3,
A gaming machine characterized in that the prize ball number information output means includes means for outputting the prize ball number information based on receiving a predetermined signal (a ball entrance information transmission request command) from the predetermined device connected to the connection means.

According to feature αD4, the prize ball number information output means includes means for outputting prize ball number information based on receiving a specified signal from a specified device connected to the connection means, thereby preventing prize ball number information from being output to the outside in inappropriate circumstances or at inappropriate times.

[Feature αD5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD4,
A gaming machine characterized in that the prize ball number information output means includes a means for outputting the prize ball number information when the specified device is connected to the connection means.

According to feature αD5, the prize ball number information output means includes means for outputting prize ball number information when a specified device is connected to the connection means, so the specified device can quickly obtain the prize ball number information after being connected to the connection means. Therefore, for example, after being connected to the connection means, the specified device can quickly execute processing that requires the prize ball number information.

[Feature αD6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD5,
The connection means is configured to be able to connect to the specified device that can calculate game history information (game history information such as the ratio of special devices), which is information regarding the history of games, based on the judgment information.

According to feature αD6, a specified device connected to the connection means can calculate game history information based on determination information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector inspecting the performance of the gaming machine can use the specified device to confirm game history information that is not affected by the control means. As a result, the integrity of the game can be ensured.

[Feature αD7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD6,
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to feature αD7, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that the specified device can receive judgment information that is not affected by the control means.

For example, if a configuration that does not feature this characteristic were adopted and instead outputs assessment information to a specific device connected to the connection means via a control means, and if the control means were to malfunction or be tampered with, the malfunction or tampering could affect the assessment information output to the specific device.

In contrast, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Therefore, even if the control means has a malfunction or has been tampered with, the malfunction or tampering will not affect the determination information output to the specified device. As a result, the specified device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or tampering.

[Feature αD8]
A gaming machine according to feature αD2,
The type information output means is provided with a means for outputting the type information based on receiving a predetermined signal (a command requesting transmission of entrance information) from the predetermined device connected to the connection means.

According to feature αD8, the type information output means includes means for outputting type information based on receiving a predetermined signal from a predetermined device connected to the connection means, thereby preventing type information from being output to the outside in inappropriate circumstances or at inappropriate times.

[Feature αD9]
A gaming machine according to feature αD2 or feature D8,
The gaming machine, wherein the type information output means comprises means for outputting the type information when the predetermined device is connected to the connection means.

According to feature αD9, the type information output means includes means for outputting type information when a specific device is connected to the connection means, so the specific device can quickly obtain type information after connecting to the connection means. Therefore, for example, after connecting to the connection means, the specific device can quickly execute processing that requires the type information.

<Feature αE group>
The group of features αE is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αE1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
A signal output means (each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a determination information output means (ball entry detection IC 62c) that determines whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry section based on the signal and outputs determination information (ball entry information) based on the determination;
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the judgment information;
A calculation means (main CPU 62x, game history management chip 300) for calculating game history information (game history information such as bonus ratios) that is information related to the game history based on the judgment information;
a storage means (flash memory 64x, gaming history management chip 300) for storing the gaming history information calculated by the calculation means;
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising:
the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means,
The gaming machine further comprises:
a game history information output means for outputting the game history information stored in the storage means to the predetermined device connected to the connection means;

Feature αE1 includes means for outputting game history information stored in the storage means and means for outputting judgment information to a specified device connected to the connection means, so that the specified device connected to the connection means can receive the game history information stored in the storage means and can execute processing based on the judgment information.

Specifically, for example, a specified device can display gaming history information (hereinafter also referred to as first gaming history information) stored in the memory means of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the specified device can calculate gaming history information based on assessment information received during a specified inspection period while connected to the connection means of the gaming machine, and display the gaming history information (hereinafter also referred to as second gaming history information). Therefore, for example, an inspector inspecting a gaming machine can compare the first gaming history information stored in the memory means of the gaming machine with the second gaming history information based on assessment information received by the specified device during a specified inspection period.

If a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine or unauthorized modifications (such as tampering with the nails) cause a change in the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine, a difference may arise between the first gaming history information stored in the memory means of the gaming machine (the gaming history information calculated by the calculation means based on judgment information from a predetermined period in the past) and the second gaming history information calculated by a predetermined device based on judgment information from a predetermined inspection period. Therefore, by noting the difference between the two pieces of gaming history information, an inspector inspecting the gaming machine can check whether a malfunction or unauthorized modifications (such as tampering with the nails) have occurred in the gaming machine.

[Feature αE2]
A gaming machine according to feature αE1,
A gaming machine characterized by having a prize ball number information output means for outputting prize ball number information, which is information that can identify the number of gaming balls that will be paid out as prize balls when one gaming ball enters the ball entry section, to the specified device connected to the connection means.

According to feature αE2, a prize ball number information output means is provided that outputs prize ball number information to a specified device connected to the connection means, thereby eliminating the need to manually input prize ball number information into the specified device and preventing incorrect prize ball number information from being input to the specified device. As a result, the specified device can perform processing based on the judgment information output from the judgment information output means and the accurate prize ball number information output from the prize ball number information output means.

[Feature αE3]
A gaming machine according to feature αE1 or feature αE2,
The connection means is configured to be able to connect to the specified device that can calculate game history information (game history information such as the ratio of special devices), which is information regarding the history of games, based on the judgment information.

According to feature αE3, a specified device connected to the connection means can calculate game history information based on determination information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector inspecting the performance of a gaming machine can use the specified device to confirm game history information that is not affected by the control means. As a result, the integrity of gaming can be ensured.

[Feature αE4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αE1 to αE3,
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to feature αE4, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, thereby enabling the specified device to receive determination information that is not affected by the control means.

For example, if a configuration that does not feature this characteristic were adopted and instead outputs assessment information to a specific device connected to the connection means via a control means, and if the control means were to malfunction or be tampered with, the malfunction or tampering could affect the assessment information output to the specific device.

In contrast, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes means for outputting determination information to a specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Therefore, even if the control means has a malfunction or has been tampered with, the malfunction or tampering will not affect the determination information output to the specified device. As a result, the specified device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or tampering.

<Feature αF group>
The group of features αF is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αF1]
a first process group execution means for repeatedly executing a first process group (remaining processes of the main process);
a second processing group execution means for interrupting the first processing group and executing a second processing group (a game progress processing including a game number control processing, etc.) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the previous execution of the second processing group);
A gaming machine comprising:
the first process group execution means includes means for repeatedly executing the first process group during a period (remaining time) from the end of execution of one of the second process groups to the start of execution of the next of the second process group;
The first processing group includes a gaming history information related process (gaming history process) which is a process related to the calculation of gaming history information (role ratio, consecutive role ratio, etc.), which is information relating to the gaming history.

According to feature αF1, the first process group including the gaming history information-related processing is repeatedly executed during the period from the end of execution of one second process group to the start of execution of the next second process group, thereby preventing the first process group including the gaming history information-related processing from starting even though the execution of one second process group has not yet finished. In other words, by prioritizing the execution of the second process group and repeatedly executing the first process group including the gaming history information-related processing during the period when the second process group is not being executed, it is possible to quickly calculate gaming history information.

Furthermore, if this characteristic configuration were not adopted and a configuration were adopted in which the game history information-related processing was included in the second processing group and executed, the time required from start to finish for one execution of the second processing group would be long. For example, when a predetermined condition that triggers the start of execution of the next second processing group is met, execution of one second processing group may not have yet finished, and execution of the next second processing group may not be able to start until execution of the first second processing group has finished. In this case, there is a risk of a malfunction occurring due to the delay in starting execution of the next second processing group.

In contrast, according to this feature, since the gaming history information-related processing is executed as part of the first processing group, the time required from start to finish for one execution of the second processing group can be shortened compared to a configuration in which the gaming history information-related processing is executed as part of the second processing group. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which execution of one second processing group has not yet finished when a predetermined condition that triggers the start of execution of the next second processing group is met, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which execution of the next second processing group cannot start until execution of the one second processing group has finished. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions due to delays in the start of execution of the next second processing group.

As described above, this feature makes it possible to efficiently and quickly calculate gaming history information by repeatedly executing the first processing group, which includes gaming history information-related processing, during periods when the second processing group is not being executed, while preventing malfunctions caused by delays in the start of execution of the next second processing group.

[Feature αF2]
A gaming machine according to feature αF1,
The gaming machine, wherein the second processing group includes a game progress processing that is a processing related to the progress of a game.

Feature αF2 prevents delays in the start of execution of the second processing group, which includes game progress processing, which is processing related to the progress of the game. This prevents problems from occurring in the progress of the game, and makes it possible to quickly calculate game history information by repeatedly executing the first processing group, which includes game history information-related processing, during periods when the second processing group is not being executed.

[Feature αF3]
A gaming machine according to feature αF1 or feature αF2,
the gaming history information-related process includes a plurality of processing steps (a plurality of types of tasks) that are executed sequentially to complete calculation of the gaming history information;
The first process group execution means executes a part of the plurality of process steps in one execution of the game history information related process.

According to feature αF3, the first processing group execution means executes some of the multiple processing steps in one execution of the gaming history information-related processing. This reduces the time required from start to finish for one execution of the gaming history information-related processing, compared to, for example, a configuration in which all of the multiple processing steps are executed in one execution of the gaming history information-related processing. Specifically, for example, even if a predetermined condition is met during the execution of the gaming history information-related processing, the currently executing gaming history information-related processing is completed in a short time, thereby reducing the time from the fulfillment of the predetermined condition to the start of execution of the second processing group. As a result, it is possible to quickly calculate gaming history information by repeatedly executing the first processing group, while suppressing the occurrence of malfunctions caused by delays in the start of execution of the second processing group.

[Feature αF4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αF1 to αF3,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition includes that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the previous execution of the second process group.

According to feature αF4, the predetermined condition includes the passage of a predetermined time since the start of the previous execution of the second process group, allowing the second process group to be executed periodically. Then, after the execution of the second process group has finished and during the period from the start of execution of the second process group until the predetermined time has elapsed, the first process group, including the game history information-related processing, can be repeatedly executed, thereby enabling the game history information to be calculated quickly.

The inventions of the above feature group αA to feature group αF solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, and simplifying control (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

Further technological improvements are desired for gaming machines such as those described above, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, simplifying control, and providing a more sound gaming experience.

<Characteristic αG group>
The group of features αG is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αG1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
A change means for changing the probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different probability of winning by accepting a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball total value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, etc.) that is information related to the game history based on the detection information;
a display means for displaying a display based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The storage means includes means for storing the detection information for a plurality of periods each having a boundary defined by a change in the winning probability,
the calculation means includes means for calculating game history information for each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of the plurality of periods;
The display means comprises a means for displaying information based on the gaming history information for each of the plurality of periods.

Feature αG1 allows a gaming machine inspector to check the display based on the gaming history information for multiple periods bounded by changes in the winning probability of the gaming machine. For example, if the display based on the gaming history information is the numerical value of the gaming history information itself, the inspector can check whether there was a situation in which the gaming history information was outside the appropriate range during the process of past changes to the winning probability of the gaming machine.

<Characteristic αH group>
The group of features αH is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αH1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
A change means for changing the probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different probability of winning by accepting a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball total value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, etc.) that is information related to the game history based on the detection information;
a display means for displaying a display based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
a predetermined information display means for displaying predetermined information (short-term change information) when the winning probability is changed again before the detection information stored in the storage means is accumulated to a predetermined amount after the winning probability has been changed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature αH1, by checking the specified information, the gaming machine inspector can determine whether the winning probability has been changed again before the detection information has accumulated to a specified amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine administrator from intentionally changing the winning probability.

For example, if a configuration were adopted in which the detection information stored before the change in winning probability was erased based on a change in the winning probability, there is a possibility that the manager of the gaming machine would change the winning probability again and erase the detection information stored in the gaming machine before the gaming machine is inspected by an inspector, even though not many games have been played on the gaming machine since the change in winning probability. However, according to this embodiment, if the winning probability is changed again within a short period of time even though not many games have been played on the gaming machine since the change in winning probability, the above-mentioned short-term change information is recorded and displayed. Therefore, by checking the short-term change information, the inspector can recognize that the winning probability may have been changed within a short period of time with fraudulent intent, such as by erasing the detection information. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent changes to the winning probability by the manager of the gaming machine.

[Feature αH2]
A gaming machine according to feature αH1,
an erasing means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means;
The storage means includes means for storing the detection information for a plurality of periods each having a boundary defined by a change in the winning probability,
the calculation means includes means for calculating the gaming history information for each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of the plurality of periods;
the display means includes means for displaying information based on the gaming history information for each of the plurality of periods;
The erasing means is provided with a means for erasing the detection information for the oldest period among the plurality of periods when the winning probability is changed.

Feature αH2 allows a gaming machine inspector to check the display based on the gaming history information for multiple periods bounded by changes in the winning probability of the gaming machine. For example, if the display based on the gaming history information is the numerical value of the gaming history information itself, the inspector can check whether there was a situation in which the gaming history information was outside the appropriate range during the process of past changes to the winning probability of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, with this feature, the gaming machine inspector can check the specified information to see whether the winning probability has been changed again before the detection information has accumulated to a specified amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine administrator from intentionally changing the winning probability.

Specifically, for example, before an inspector inspects a gaming machine, the manager of the gaming machine may repeatedly change the winning probability over a short period of time, erasing detection information for multiple periods bounded by the change in winning probability. However, with this feature, if the winning probability is repeatedly changed over a short period of time, the above-mentioned short-term change information is recorded and displayed. Therefore, by checking the short-term change information, the inspector can recognize that the winning probability may have been changed over a short period of time with fraudulent intent. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manager of the gaming machine from changing the winning probability with fraudulent intent.

<Characteristic αI group>
The group of features αI is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αI1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
A change means for changing the probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different probability of winning by accepting a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball total value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, etc.) that is information related to the game history based on the detection information;
a display means for displaying a display based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
an erasing means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The erasing means is provided with means for erasing, when the winning probability is changed, the detection information stored in the storage means after the winning probability is changed and the detection information stored in the storage means before the winning probability is changed, after the detection information has accumulated to a predetermined amount.

According to feature αI1, detection information stored in the storage means before the change in winning probability is not erased until a predetermined amount of detection information has been accumulated in the storage means after the change in winning probability. This prevents the detection information stored before the change in winning probability from being intentionally erased by changing the winning probability of the gaming machine. For example, if a configuration were adopted in which detection information acquired and stored before the change in winning probability was erased immediately after the change in winning probability of the gaming machine, there is a possibility that the administrator of the gaming machine could change the winning probability and erase the detection information stored before the change in winning probability before the gaming machine is inspected by an inspector. In contrast, according to this feature, detection information stored before the change in winning probability is not erased until a predetermined amount of detection information acquired and stored after the change in winning probability has been accumulated. This prevents the administrator of the gaming machine from intentionally changing the winning probability.

[Feature αI2]
A gaming machine according to feature αI1,
an erasing means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means;
The storage means includes means for storing the detection information for a plurality of periods each having a boundary defined by a change in the winning probability,
the calculation means includes means for calculating the gaming history information for each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of the plurality of periods;
the display means includes means for displaying information based on the gaming history information for each of the plurality of periods;
The erasing means is provided with means for erasing the detection information for the oldest period among the plurality of periods after the detection information stored in the memory means after the winning probability has been changed has accumulated to a predetermined amount when the winning probability has been changed.

Feature αI2 allows a gaming machine inspector to check the display based on the gaming history information for multiple periods, each of which is bounded by a change in the winning probability of the gaming machine. For example, if the display based on the gaming history information is the numerical value of the gaming history information itself, the inspector can check whether there was a situation in which the gaming history information was outside the appropriate range during the process of past changes to the winning probability of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, this feature makes it possible to prevent the intentional erasure of detection information from multiple periods bounded by changes in the winning probability due to repeated changes to the winning probability of a gaming machine. For example, if a configuration were adopted in which detection information from the oldest of multiple periods bounded by changes in the winning probability were erased immediately after the gaming machine's winning probability was changed, there is a possibility that the manager of the gaming machine would repeatedly change the winning probability and erase the detection information from the gaming machine from multiple periods before the gaming machine is inspected by an inspector. In contrast, this feature makes it possible to prevent the detection information from the oldest of multiple periods bounded by changes in the winning probability from being erased until a predetermined amount of detection information has been accumulated after the change in the winning probability. This makes it possible to prevent the manager of the gaming machine from intentionally changing the winning probability.

<Feature αJ group>
The group of features αJ is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αJ1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
A change means for changing the probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different probability of winning by accepting a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball total value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, etc.) that is information related to the game history based on the detection information;
a display means for displaying a display based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The storage means includes a means for storing the detection information by distinguishing it according to the winning probability at the time when the detection means detects the gaming ball,
the calculation means includes means for calculating the gaming history information for each of the winning probabilities,
The display means comprises a means for displaying information based on the gaming history information for each of the winning probabilities.

According to feature αJ1, for example, if the display based on the gaming history information is the numerical value of the gaming history information itself, the gaming machine inspector can confirm whether the gaming history information calculated and displayed for each winning probability falls within an appropriate range. In other words, the inspector can confirm whether there are any winning probability settings on the gaming machine where the gaming history information does not fall within an appropriate range.

The inventions of the above feature groups αG to αJ solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, and simplifying control (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

Further technological improvements are desired for gaming machines such as those described above, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, simplifying control, and providing a more sound gaming experience.

<Characteristic αK group>
The group of features αK is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αK1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
A change means for changing the probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different probability of winning by accepting a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball total value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) that is information related to the game history based on the detection information;
a display means having a first display area and a second display area each composed of a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting units, CP light emitting units), and capable of displaying predetermined information in the first display area and the second display area;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means
a means for displaying, in the first display area, information relating to the type of the gaming history information using the display elements, and displaying, in the second display area, numerical information of the gaming history information using the display elements, when displaying the gaming history information;
a means for displaying, in the first display area when changing the winning probability, a display mode using only display elements that are not displayed when displaying information related to the type of the gaming history information, and that is used when displaying information related to the type of the gaming history information, and for displaying, in the second display area, numerical information related to the setting of the winning probability using the display elements;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature αK1, the display mode of the first display area is clearly different when the second display area of the display means displays numerical information about the game history and when it displays numerical information about the winning probability setting. Therefore, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine administrator to clearly distinguish and recognize whether the second display area of the display means displays numerical information about the game history or numerical information about the winning probability setting. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine administrator from mistaking the numerical information displayed in the second display area for numerical information about the game history or numerical information about the winning probability setting.

Furthermore, according to this feature, display elements in the first display area that are not used when displaying game history information (for example, segment light emitting units A, B, and the DP light emitting unit of the leftmost seven-segment display 45z1, and segment light emitting unit B of the center-left seven-segment display 45z2) are not used when changing the winning probability, and therefore the first display area contains display elements that are not used (hereinafter, unused display elements). Therefore, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in an unused display element in the first display area, the display mode in the first display area is not affected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a malfunction in a display element in the first display area will affect the display mode.

Furthermore, for example, if light-emitting elements such as LEDs are used as display elements, the light-emitting elements that are unused display elements do not need to emit light, so the components required to make those light-emitting elements emit light can be omitted. This allows for reduced costs of the display means.

<Feature αL group>
The group of features αL is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αL1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
A change means for changing the probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different probability of winning by accepting a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball total value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) that is information related to the game history based on the detection information;
a display means having a first display area and a second display area and capable of displaying predetermined information in the first display area and the second display area;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means
means for displaying information relating to the type of the gaming history information in the first display area and displaying numerical information of the gaming history information in the second display area when displaying the gaming history information;
means for displaying nothing in the first display area and displaying numerical information relating to the setting of the winning probability in the second display area when the winning probability is changed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature αL1, the display mode of the first display area is clearly different when the second display area of the display means displays numerical information about the game history and when it displays numerical information about the winning probability setting. Therefore, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine administrator to clearly distinguish and recognize whether the second display area of the display means displays numerical information about the game history or numerical information about the winning probability setting. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine administrator from mistaking the numerical information displayed in the second display area for numerical information about the game history or numerical information about the winning probability setting.

Furthermore, according to this feature, for example, if the first display area is composed of multiple light-emitting elements (LEDs), and certain information is displayed when certain light-emitting elements are lit, and nothing is displayed when all light-emitting elements are turned off, even if a malfunction occurs in which some of the light-emitting elements constituting the first display area do not emit light, as long as there is no serious malfunction such as all of the light-emitting elements not emitting light, the display mode of the first display area will be different when displaying game history information and when displaying numerical information related to the winning probability setting. Therefore, according to this feature, even if there is a malfunction in which some of the light-emitting elements constituting the first display area do not emit light, as long as there is no serious malfunction such as all of the light-emitting elements not emitting light, the administrator can distinguish between whether the numerical information displayed in the second display area is game history information and numerical information related to the winning probability setting. In other words, the administrator can determine that the numerical information displayed in the second display area is game history information when at least some of the light-emitting elements in the first display area are lit, and can determine that the numerical information displayed in the second display area is numerical information related to the winning probability setting only when all of the light-emitting elements constituting the first display area are turned off.

<Characteristic αM group>
The group of features α M is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αM1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
A change means for changing the probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different probability of winning by accepting a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball total value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) that is information related to the game history based on the detection information;
a display means having a predetermined display area and capable of displaying predetermined information in the predetermined display area;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means
means for displaying numerical information of the gaming history information in the predetermined display area with a predetermined number of digits (two digits) when displaying the gaming history information;
a means for displaying, in the predetermined display area, numerical information relating to the setting of the winning probability with a number of digits (one digit) different from the predetermined number of digits when the winning probability is changed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature αM1, the number of digits of the displayed numerical value will differ when numerical information related to game history information is displayed in the designated display area from when numerical information related to the winning probability setting is displayed. Therefore, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine administrator to clearly distinguish and recognize whether numerical information related to game history information or numerical information related to the winning probability setting is displayed in the designated display area of the display means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine administrator from mistaking the numerical information displayed in the designated display area of the display means for numerical information related to game history information or numerical information related to the winning probability setting.

<Feature αN group>
The group of features αN is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αN1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
A change means for changing the probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different probability of winning by accepting a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball total value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) that is information related to the game history based on the detection information;
a display means having a first display area and a second display area and capable of displaying predetermined information in the first display area and the second display area;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means
means for displaying information relating to the type of the gaming history information in the first display area and displaying numerical information of the gaming history information in the second display area when displaying the gaming history information;
a means for switching and repeatedly displaying, in the first display area, a plurality of display modes (display pattern A and display pattern B) that are not displayed when information relating to the type of the game history information is displayed, and displaying, in the second display area, numerical information relating to the setting of the winning probability, when the winning probability is changed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature αN1, the display mode of the first display area is clearly different when the second display area of the display means displays numerical information about the gaming history and when it displays numerical information about the winning probability setting. Therefore, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine administrator to clearly distinguish and recognize whether the second display area of the display means displays numerical information about the gaming history or numerical information about the winning probability setting. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine administrator from mistaking the numerical information displayed in the second display area for numerical information about the gaming history or numerical information about the winning probability setting.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the display mode in the first display area changes dynamically while the numerical information related to the winning probability setting is displayed in the second display area, thereby alerting the gaming machine administrator to an important state in which changes to the winning probability should be made with caution.

<Feature αO group>
The group of features αO is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αO1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball total value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) that is information related to the game history based on the detection information;
a display means for displaying (displaying type information and numerical information) based on the gaming history information calculated by the calculation means;
a determining means for determining a display mode (a lit display or a flashing display) of a display based on the game history information on the display means based on an amount of information of the detection information (the number of game balls that passed through the discharge passage during the normal mode (the number of outs during the normal mode)) that is the basis for calculating the game history information;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to Feature αO1, by checking the display mode on the display means, the gaming machine administrator can ascertain how much detected information has been accumulated, which is the basis for calculating the gaming history information. For example, this allows the administrator to determine whether the numerical values of the displayed gaming history information have been calculated based on a sufficient amount of accumulated statistical data.

The inventions of the above feature αK group to feature αO group solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, and simplifying control (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

Further technological improvements are desired for gaming machines such as those described above, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, simplifying control, and providing a more sound gaming experience.

<Feature αP group>
The group of features αP is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αP1]
A gaming machine equipped with a control means for controlling a game,
The control means
a CPU (primary CPU 62x) that includes a plurality of registers including a flag register and a stack pointer, and that executes a plurality of types of programs including a first program and a second program;
a program storage means (program storage means 63a of the main ROM 63) having a first program storage area for storing the first program and a second program storage area that is different from the first program storage area and stores the second program;
a stack means (stack means 64b of the primary RAM 64) having a first stack area corresponding to the first program and accessible by a first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer, and a second stack area different from the first stack area and corresponding to the second program and accessible by a second stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer;
a data storage means (data storage means 64a of the main RAM 64) having a first data storage area corresponding to the first program capable of updating data, and a second data storage area which is an area different from the first data storage area and corresponds to the second program capable of updating data,
The flag register is a register whose value changes in a predetermined case,
In a process by the first program, data in the first stack area and the first data storage area can be updated and referenced, and data in the second stack area and the second data storage area cannot be updated but can be referenced,
In a process by the second program, data in the second stack area and the second data storage area can be updated and referenced, and data in the first stack area and the first data storage area cannot be updated but can be referenced,
The CPU
A first process (game progress process) is carried out by executing a program included in the first program;
After the first process is performed, a program included in the first program is executed to perform a storage process of storing the value of the flag register in the first stack area or the first data storage area;
after the storage process is performed, a program included in the second program is executed to store the address for referencing the first stack area stored in the stack pointer in the second data storage area, store the address for referencing the second stack area in the stack pointer, and perform a save process of storing the values of each of the plurality of registers in the second data storage area;
After the saving process is performed, a program included in the second program is executed to perform a second process (a game history information calculation and display process);
after the second process is performed, a program included in the second program is executed to set the values of the plurality of registers to the values stored in the second data storage area by the saving process, and a restoring process is performed to store the address for referring to the first stack area, stored in the second data storage area by the saving process, in the stack pointer;
A gaming machine characterized in that, after the return process is performed, a program included in the first program is executed to perform a change process in which the value of the flag register, one of the plurality of registers whose values are set by the return process, is changed to the value stored in the first stack area or the first data memory area by the storage process.

Feature αP1 performs save and restore processes, which can prevent problems caused by changes to register values used in the first program when returning from the second program to the first program.

Furthermore, according to this feature, even if the value of the flag register changes after the storage process is performed but before the save process is performed, the change process restores the value of the flag register to the same value as immediately after the first process by the first program ends, so there is no risk of affecting the process by the first program that is performed after returning from the process by the second program. As a result, it is possible to configure multiple programs independently.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the second process can be added without affecting the processing by the first program, simply by adding a program for performing the second process to the second program. Therefore, it is easy to create a program for performing the second process independently of the first program.

Furthermore, for example, in a configuration in which a reset process is performed to erase all data stored in a stack area when the amount of data to be stored in the stack area exceeds the upper limit of the stack area's storage capacity, if the values of multiple registers are stored in the second stack area during the save process, there is a risk that the reset process will be performed. In contrast, with this feature, the values of multiple registers are stored in the second data storage area during the save process, thereby avoiding the risk of the stack area being reset.

<Feature αQ group>
The group of features αQ is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αQ1]
A gaming machine equipped with a control means for controlling a game,
The control means
a CPU (primary CPU 62x) that includes a plurality of registers including a flag register and a stack pointer, and that executes a plurality of types of programs including a first program and a second program;
a program storage means (program storage means 63a of the main ROM 63) having a first program storage area for storing the first program and a second program storage area that is different from the first program storage area and stores the second program;
a stack means (stack means 64b of the primary RAM 64) having a first stack area corresponding to the first program and accessible by a first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer, and a second stack area different from the first stack area and corresponding to the second program and accessible by a second stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer;
a data storage means (data storage means 64a of the main RAM 64) having a first data storage area corresponding to the first program capable of updating data, and a second data storage area which is an area different from the first data storage area and corresponds to the second program capable of updating data,
The flag register is a register whose value changes in a predetermined case,
In a process by the first program, data in the first stack area and the first data storage area can be updated and referenced, and data in the second stack area and the second data storage area cannot be updated but can be referenced,
In a process by the second program, data in the second stack area and the second data storage area can be updated and referenced, and data in the first stack area and the first data storage area cannot be updated but can be referenced,
The CPU
A first process (game progress process) is carried out by executing a program included in the first program;
After the first process is performed, a program included in the first program is executed to perform a storage process of storing the value of the flag register in the first stack area or the first data storage area;
after the storage process is performed, a program included in the second program is executed to store the address for referencing the second stack area in the stack pointer and to perform a save process of storing the values of each of the plurality of registers in the second data storage area;
After the saving process is performed, a program included in the second program is executed to perform a second process (a game history information calculation and display process);
after the second process is performed, a program included in the second program is executed to set the values of the plurality of registers to the values stored in the second data storage area by the saving process, and a restoring process is performed to store the address for referring to the first stack area, which is a fixed value, in the stack pointer;
A gaming machine characterized in that, after the return process is performed, a program included in the first program is executed to perform a change process in which the value of the flag register, one of the plurality of registers whose values are set by the return process, is changed to the value stored in the first stack area or the first data memory area by the storage process.

Feature αQ1 performs save and restore processes, which can prevent problems caused by changes to register values used in the first program when returning from the second program to the first program.

Furthermore, according to this feature, even if the value of the flag register changes after the storage process is performed but before the save process is performed, the change process restores the value of the flag register to the same value as immediately after the first process by the first program ends, so there is no risk of affecting the process by the first program that is performed after returning from the process by the second program. As a result, it is possible to configure multiple programs independently.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the second process can be added without affecting the processing by the first program, simply by adding a program for performing the second process to the second program. Therefore, it is easy to create a program for performing the second process independently of the first program.

Furthermore, for example, in a configuration in which a reset process is performed to erase all data stored in a stack area when the amount of data to be stored in the stack area exceeds the upper limit of the stack area's storage capacity, if the values of multiple registers are stored in the second stack area during the save process, there is a risk that the reset process will be performed. In contrast, with this feature, the values of multiple registers are stored in the second data storage area during the save process, thereby avoiding the risk of the stack area being reset.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the address for referencing the first stack area, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer during the return process, so there is no need to save the address for referencing the first stack area stored in the stack pointer to the second data storage area during the save process. This not only simplifies CPU processing, but also reduces the storage capacity of the second data storage area required to save the address for referencing the first stack area stored in the stack pointer.

<Feature αR group>
The group of features αR is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αR1]
A gaming machine equipped with a control means for controlling a game,
The control means
a CPU (primary CPU 62x) that includes a plurality of registers including a flag register and a stack pointer, and that executes a plurality of types of programs including a first program and a second program;
a program storage means (program storage means 63a of the main ROM 63) having a first program storage area for storing the first program and a second program storage area that is different from the first program storage area and stores the second program;
a stack means (stack means 64b of the primary RAM 64) having a first stack area corresponding to the first program and accessible by a first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer, and a second stack area different from the first stack area and corresponding to the second program and accessible by a second stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer;
a data storage means (data storage means 64a of the main RAM 64) having a first data storage area corresponding to the first program capable of updating data, and a second data storage area which is an area different from the first data storage area and corresponds to the second program capable of updating data,
The flag register is a register whose value changes in a predetermined case,
In a process by the first program, data in the first stack area and the first data storage area can be updated and referenced, and data in the second stack area and the second data storage area cannot be updated but can be referenced,
In a process by the second program, data in the second stack area and the second data storage area can be updated and referenced, and data in the first stack area and the first data storage area cannot be updated but can be referenced,
The CPU
A first process (game progress process) is carried out by executing a program included in the first program;
After the first process is performed, a program included in the first program is executed to perform a storage process of storing the value of the flag register in the first stack area or the first data storage area;
After the storage process is performed, a program included in the first program is executed to perform a first clear process of setting the values of the plurality of registers to 0;
After the first clearing process is performed, a program included in the second program is executed to perform a first storing process of storing the address for referring to the second stack area in the stack pointer;
After the first storage process is performed, a program included in the second program is executed to perform a second process (a game history information calculation and display process);
After the second process is performed, a program included in the second program is executed to perform a second storing process of storing the address for referring to the first stack area, which is a fixed value, in the stack pointer;
After the second storing process is performed, a program included in the second program is executed to perform a second clearing process of setting the values of the plurality of registers to 0;
A gaming machine characterized in that, after performing the second clear process, a program included in the first program is executed to perform a change process that changes the value of the flag register to the value stored in the first stack area or the first data memory area by the storage process.

According to Feature αR1, the first clear process is performed by a program included in the first program, and the second clear process is performed by a program included in the second program. This makes it possible to match the values of each of the multiple registers immediately before the start of execution of the second program with the values of each of the multiple registers immediately after execution of the second program ends. This prevents problems caused by changes to the values of each of the multiple registers used in the first program when returning from the second program to the first program.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since the storage process and change process are performed, the value of the flag register is restored to the same value as immediately after the first process by the first program ends. Therefore, there is no risk of affecting the process by the first program that is performed after returning from the process by the second program. As a result, it is possible to configure multiple programs independently.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the second process can be added without affecting the processing by the first program, simply by adding a program for performing the second process to the second program. Therefore, it is easy to create a program for performing the second process independently of the first program.

Furthermore, according to this feature, during the return process, the address for referencing the first stack area, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer, so during the save process, there is no need to save the address for referencing the first stack area stored in the stack pointer to the second data storage area. This not only simplifies CPU processing, but also reduces the storage capacity of the second data storage area required to save the address for referencing the first stack area stored in the stack pointer.

<Feature αS group>
The group of features αS is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αS1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a change mode execution means for executing a change mode capable of changing the winning probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from an external device;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing information relating to the progress of a game;
a detection means for detecting an abnormality in the storage means;
an initialization means for initializing the storage means when the detection means detects the abnormality;
A gaming machine comprising:
The change mode execution means is provided with a means for executing the change mode when the initialization is executed, even if the predetermined operation is not accepted.

If an abnormality in the storage means causes the storage means to be initialized, it is possible that the winning probability setting information will also be overwritten with setting information that differs from the setting information originally intended by the administrator. Furthermore, if the winning probability setting information is configured so that it is not initialized (changed) even when the storage means is initialized, there is a risk that the setting information will still be maintained as setting information that differs from the setting information originally intended by the administrator.

According to Feature αS1, when the storage means is initialized due to an abnormality in the storage means, the change mode is executed, allowing the gaming machine administrator to change the winning probability setting information to the originally intended setting information in the change mode before play is resumed on the gaming machine.

[Feature αS2]
A gaming machine according to feature αS1,
The initialization means includes means for initializing information relating to a game status among information stored in the storage means when initializing the storage means.

According to feature αS2, even if the storage means is initialized, information about the game status is not initialized, allowing the player to resume play while maintaining the game status. This makes it possible to prevent the initialization of the storage means from causing a disadvantage to the player.

[Feature αS3]
A gaming machine according to feature αS1 or feature αS2,
The gaming machine further comprises a notification means for notifying a player that the winning probability has been changed when the winning probability is changed in the change mode.

If an abnormality in the storage means causes the storage means to be initialized and the change mode is executed, it is expected that players playing on the gaming machine will become suspicious as to whether the administrator has changed the winning probabilities in the change mode following the initialization of the storage means. However, with this feature, if the winning probabilities have been changed, a notification is sent to the player, allowing the player to confirm whether the winning probabilities have changed. More specifically, the player is not allowed to know what the current setting information for the winning probabilities is, but is only allowed to know whether the winning probabilities have been changed in the change mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent situations in which players are forced to resume play in a state of anxiety, not knowing whether the winning probabilities have been changed by the administrator.

<Feature αT group>
The group of features αT is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αT1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a change mode execution means for executing a change mode capable of changing the winning probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from an external device;
a notification means for notifying the user that the winning probability has been changed when the winning probability has been changed in the change mode;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Feature αT1 allows the player to recognize that the winning probability has been changed in change mode. Specifically, for example, the player can be made to understand only whether the winning probability has been changed in change mode, without being able to understand what the current winning probability setting is.

[Feature αT2]
A gaming machine according to feature αT1,
a second notification means for making a notification in a manner different from that made by the notification means when the winning probability is not changed in the change mode;

Feature αT2 allows the player to recognize that the winning probability has not changed in change mode.

[Feature αT3]
A gaming machine according to feature αT1 or feature αT2,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the second notification means includes means for notifying that the winning probability has not been changed when the winning probability has not been changed in the change mode.

Feature αT3 allows the player to clearly recognize that the winning probability has not changed in change mode.

<Feature αU group>
The group of features αU is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αU1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a change mode execution means for executing a change mode capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a first operation from an external device;
an information display mode execution means for executing an information display mode in which progress of a game is stopped and information relating to the winning probability is displayed by receiving a second operation different from the first operation from the outside;
A device that continues a certain operation regardless of the result of the predetermined lottery process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the accessory continues the certain operation even during the information display mode.

Feature αU1 allows the action of the reel to continue at a constant rate without stopping or changing even when the information display mode, which stops the game's progress, is started or ended. This prevents players from gaining an unfair advantage by firing a game ball at a time when the action of the reel stops or changes, for example.

<Feature αV group>
The group of features αV is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αV1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a change mode execution means for executing a change mode capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a first operation from an external device;
an information display mode execution means for executing an information display mode in which progress of a game is stopped and information relating to the winning probability is displayed by receiving a second operation different from the first operation from the outside;
A device that continues a certain operation regardless of the result of the predetermined lottery process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the accessory is in a predetermined state and stops the fixed operation during the information display mode.

Feature αV1 can, for example, prevent malfunctions in devices that may malfunction if their operation is stopped in a state other than a predetermined state.

The inventions of the above feature αP group to feature αV group solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, improving the efficiency of gaming machine development, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, and providing gaming machines that are considerate of players.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

Further technological improvements are desired for gaming machines such as those described above, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, improving the efficiency of gaming machine development, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, providing gaming machines that are considerate of players, and providing a more sound gaming experience.

<Feature αW group>
The group of features αW is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αW1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving an external operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting change mode execution means executes the setting change mode when a first condition (the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON, and the RAM clear button is ON) is met at the time the gaming machine is powered on, but is also provided with a means for not executing the setting change mode even if the first condition is met after the power is turned on.

According to feature αW1, in order to execute the setting change mode on a gaming machine that has already been powered on, it is necessary to turn the power of the gaming machine OFF and then ON again. Generally, in an amusement parlor, it is difficult for anyone other than the gaming machine manager to operate the power switch on the back of the gaming machine to turn the power OFF and then ON again. This makes it possible to prevent the winning probability settings of a gaming machine from being fraudulently changed by someone with fraudulent intentions who is not the gaming machine manager.

[Feature αW2]
A gaming machine according to feature αW1,
a setting information display mode execution means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information relating to setting of the winning probability, is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed;
The setting information display mode execution means executes the setting information display mode when a second condition (the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON, and the RAM clear button is OFF) is met at the time the gaming machine is powered on, but is also provided with means for not executing the setting information display mode even if the second condition is met after the power is turned on.

According to feature αW2, in order to execute the setting information display mode on a gaming machine that is already powered on, it is necessary to turn the power of the gaming machine OFF and then ON again. Generally, in an amusement parlor, it is difficult for anyone other than the gaming machine manager to operate the power switch on the back of the gaming machine to turn the power OFF and then ON again. This prevents the winning probability settings of the gaming machine from being illegally discovered by someone with fraudulent intentions who is not the gaming machine manager.

[Feature αW3]
A gaming machine according to feature αW1 or feature αW2,
A gaming machine comprising a notification means for notifying when the power to the gaming machine is turned on.

Feature αW3 makes it difficult for a person with fraudulent intentions who is not the gaming machine administrator to turn the gaming machine off and then back on again without being noticed by those around. This further prevents a person with fraudulent intentions who is not the gaming machine administrator from changing or checking the winning probability settings of the gaming machine.

<Feature αX group>
The group of features αX is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αX1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting an external operation;
a setting information display mode execution means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) that displays setting information that is information related to the setting of the winning probability, but does not allow the setting of the winning probability to be changed;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing information including the setting information;
a determination process execution means for executing a predetermined determination process (a process for calculating a RAM determination value and determining whether or not the RAM is normal) based on the information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting information display mode execution means is provided with a means for not executing the setting information display mode if the result of the predetermined judgment process is a predetermined result (a result that the RAM judgment value is not normal), even if the condition for executing the setting information display mode is met.

If the result of a predetermined determination process based on information stored in the storage means is a predetermined result, there is a possibility that the setting information stored in the storage means has an abnormal value unintended by the administrator of the gaming machine. Feature αX1 makes it possible to prevent the setting information display mode from being executed while leaving open the possibility that the winning probability setting information stored in the storage means has an abnormal value unintended by the administrator.

<Feature αY group>
The group of features αY is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αY1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving an external operation;
an operation means (RAM clear button) for accepting a predetermined operation (pressing operation);
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing information relating to the progress of a game;
an erasure process execution means for executing an erasure process (RAM clear process) for erasing the information stored in the storage means when the power is turned on in a state in which the operation means has accepted the predetermined operation (a state in which the RAM clear button has been pressed);
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting change mode execution means includes a means for executing the setting change mode when a predetermined condition is met, including the state in which the operation means has accepted the predetermined operation (when the power is turned on, the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch are all ON, and the RAM clear button is pressed);
The erasure process execution means comprises means for executing the erasure process before or after the setting change mode is executed when the predetermined condition is met.

Generally, the administrator in charge of a gaming machine is aware that when the gaming machine is turned on with the operating means accepting a predetermined operation, an erasure process is executed to erase the information stored in the storage means. Therefore, feature αY1 makes it possible to make the administrator strongly aware that when the setting change mode is executed by meeting predetermined conditions, including the operating means accepting a predetermined operation, not only will the setting change mode be executed, but the erasure process will also be executed. As a result, for example, if the administrator wants to start the gaming machine while maintaining a game state such as high probability mode and resume play from the state it was in when the power was last turned off, i.e., if the erasure process should not be executed when the gaming machine is started, the administrator can reliably determine that the setting change mode should not be executed. In other words, this feature makes it possible to provide a gaming machine whose operation is easy for the administrator to understand.

<Feature αZ group>
The group of features αZ is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αZ1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving an external operation;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing information including setting information which is information relating to the setting of the winning probability;
an erasing means for erasing the information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The erasing means is
a first erasure process (first RAM clear process) for erasing information other than the setting information, but not the setting information, from among the information stored in the storage means;
a second erasure process (second RAM clear process) for erasing information including the setting information from among the information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute the above.

Feature αZ1 makes it possible to realize processing steps that can handle both processing steps in which the setting information stored in the storage means should be retained and other information should be erased, and processing steps in which the setting information should be erased as well. For example, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the setting information is normal and therefore left unchanged, but the setting information is not erased in processing steps in which the setting information may have become an abnormal value unintended by the administrator, and the information including the setting information is erased.

[Feature αZ2]
A gaming machine according to feature αZ1,
a determination process execution means for executing a predetermined determination process (a process for calculating a RAM determination value and determining whether or not the RAM is normal) based on the information stored in the storage means,
The erasing means is provided with a means for executing the second erasing process when the result of the predetermined judgment process is a predetermined result (a result that the RAM judgment value is not normal).

If the result of a predetermined determination process based on information stored in the storage means is a predetermined result, it is possible that the setting information stored in the storage means has an abnormal value unintended by the administrator of the gaming machine. Feature αZ2 makes it possible to prevent a game from being played while leaving open the possibility that the winning probability setting information stored in the storage means has an abnormal value unintended by the administrator.

<Characteristic βA group>
The feature group βA is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βA1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving an external operation;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing information including setting information which is information relating to the setting of the lottery probability;
a determination process execution means for executing a predetermined determination process (a process for calculating a RAM determination value and determining whether or not the RAM is normal) based on the information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
A gaming machine characterized in that the setting change mode execution means is provided with a means for executing the setting change mode if the result of the predetermined judgment process is a predetermined result (a result that the RAM judgment value is not normal), even if the setting change mode execution means has not accepted a predetermined operation for executing the setting change mode (an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 with the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch all ON and the RAM clear button pressed).

If the result of a predetermined determination process based on information stored in the storage means is a predetermined result, there is a possibility that the setting information stored in the storage means has an abnormal value unintended by the administrator of the gaming machine. According to feature βA1, if the result of the predetermined determination process is a predetermined result, the setting change mode is executed, allowing the administrator to change the win probability setting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent games from being played while leaving open the possibility that the win probability setting information stored in the storage means has an abnormal value unintended by the administrator.

<Characteristic βB group>
The feature group βB is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βB1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving an external operation;
a display means (main display unit 45) for displaying information about the game including the result of the predetermined lottery process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for displaying a first display mode (a display pattern in which all LEDs are lit) that is not displayed when displaying information about the game while the setting change mode is being executed.

According to feature βB1, the setting change mode can be notified to an administrator or player using a display means that displays information about the game. Furthermore, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that is equipped with a display means that displays information about the game, the configuration can be changed to one that can notify an administrator or player that the setting change mode is in progress simply by changing the control program of the gaming machine, without changing the hardware configuration of the gaming machine. Therefore, for example, the manufacturing costs of the gaming machine can be reduced compared to a configuration in which a dedicated display means is added to notify that the setting change mode is in progress.

[Feature βB2]
A gaming machine according to feature βB1,
a setting information display mode execution means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information relating to setting of the winning probability, is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed;
The display means
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for displaying a second display mode (a display mode in which all LEDs flash simultaneously) that is different from the first display mode and is not displayed when displaying information related to the game while the setting information display mode is being executed.

According to feature βB2, a display means for displaying information about the game can be used to notify an administrator or player that the setting information display mode, rather than the setting change mode, is being executed. Furthermore, for example, in the case of a gaming machine equipped with a display means for displaying information about the game, the configuration can be changed to one that can notify an administrator or player that the setting information display mode is being executed simply by changing the control program of the gaming machine, without changing the hardware configuration of the gaming machine. Therefore, for example, the manufacturing costs of the gaming machine can be reduced compared to a configuration in which an additional display means dedicated to notifying that the setting information display mode is being executed is provided.

<Characteristic βC group>
The group of features βC is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βC1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball total value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) that is information related to the game history based on the detection information;
a display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying (displaying type information and numerical information) based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
a control means for controlling the display means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is composed of a plurality of light-emitting elements,
The control means is provided with a control means for controlling all of the plurality of light-emitting units constituting the display means to be in a lit state when power is applied to the gaming machine.

According to feature βC1, when the gaming machine's administrator turns on the gaming machine's power, they can check whether any of the light-emitting elements that make up the display means are not lit due to a malfunction such as a broken wire.

[Feature βC2]
A gaming machine according to feature βC1,
The control means is provided with a control means for controlling all of the plurality of light-emitting elements constituting the display means to flash when power is applied to the gaming machine.

According to feature βC2, when the gaming machine administrator turns on the gaming machine's power, they can check whether any of the light-emitting elements that make up the display means are constantly lit due to a malfunction and never turn off.

<Feature βD group>
The group of features βD is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βD1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball total value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) that is information related to the game history based on the detection information;
a display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying (displaying type information and numerical information) based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
a control means for controlling the display means;
an operating means (information display section inspection button) for accepting a predetermined operation from the outside;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is composed of a plurality of light-emitting elements,
The control means is provided with a control means for controlling all of the plurality of light-emitting units constituting the display means to be lit up based on the operation means accepting the predetermined operation.

According to feature βD1, the gaming machine manager can, by operating the operating means, check at any time whether any of the light-emitting elements that make up the display means are not lit due to a malfunction such as a broken wire.

[Feature βD2]
A gaming machine according to feature βD1,
The control means is provided with a control means for controlling all of the plurality of light-emitting units constituting the display means to flash on and off based on the operation means accepting the predetermined operation.

According to feature βD2, the gaming machine manager can, by operating the operating means, check at any time whether any of the light-emitting elements that make up the display means are constantly lit due to a malfunction and never turn off.

<Feature βE group>
The group of features βE is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βE1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball total value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) that is information related to the game history based on the detection information;
a display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising:
the storage means includes means for storing the detection information for a plurality of periods with a predetermined timing as a boundary,
the calculation means includes means for calculating the gaming history information for each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of the plurality of periods;
The display means includes means for switching between and displaying the plurality of pieces of gaming history information for each of the plurality of periods.

Feature βE1 allows a gaming machine inspector to check multiple pieces of gaming history information for multiple periods bounded by predetermined timings on the gaming machine. For example, the inspector can check whether there were any situations in which the gaming history information on the gaming machine was outside the appropriate range for multiple periods bounded by predetermined timings.

[Feature βE2]
A gaming machine according to feature βE1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined timing is the timing when the date changes.

Feature βE2 allows a gaming machine inspector to check multiple pieces of gaming history information for each date on the gaming machine. For example, the inspector can check for each date whether there was a situation in which the gaming history information was not within the appropriate range.

<Feature βF group>
The feature group βF is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βF1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball total value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) that is information related to the game history based on the detection information;
a display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
an erasing means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means when a predetermined operation is received;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is provided with a means for not displaying the numerical information of the game history information until a predetermined condition is met (until the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT reaches a predetermined number) after the detection means is erased by the erasing means.

According to feature βF1, if the display means does not display numerical information about the gaming history information, the gaming machine inspector can recognize that the specified condition has not been met after the detection means is erased by the erasing means.

The inventions of the above feature group αW to feature group βF solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, improving the efficiency of gaming machine development, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, and providing gaming machines that are considerate of players.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

Further technological improvements are desired for gaming machines such as those described above, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, improving the efficiency of gaming machine development, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, providing gaming machines that are considerate of players, and providing a more sound gaming experience.

<Characteristic βG group>
The group of features βG is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βG1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball total value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) that is information related to the game history based on the detection information;
a display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The calculation means includes means for calculating a _plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each of a plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of a plurality of periods, the boundaries of which are defined by the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (the measured number N OUT of balls passing through the discharge passage reaching a predetermined number);
The display means
a means for switching and displaying the plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each of the plurality of periods, and when switching the display of the game history information, means for transitioning from a display mode that displays the game history information corresponding to one of the plurality of periods (a display mode that displays a base corresponding to the bL section) to a display mode that does not display any of the plurality of pieces of game history information (all off), and then to a display mode that displays the game history information corresponding to another of the plurality of periods (a display mode that displays a base corresponding to the b1 section).

According to feature βG1, when switching the display of the gaming history information, the display means transitions from a display mode that displays gaming history information corresponding to one of the multiple periods to a display mode that displays none of the multiple periods, and then transitions to a display mode that displays gaming history information corresponding to another of the multiple periods. This allows the manager or inspector of the gaming machine to clearly recognize that the gaming history information displayed on the display means has switched to gaming history information corresponding to a different period. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the manager or inspector from mistaking the period and checking the gaming history information without realizing that the period of the displayed gaming history information has switched to a different period.

<Characteristic βH group>
The group of features βH is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βH1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball total value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) that is information related to the game history based on the detection information;
a display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The calculation means includes means for calculating a _plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each of a plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of a plurality of periods, the boundaries of which are defined by the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (the measured number N OUT of balls passing through the discharge passage reaching a predetermined number);
The display means
a means for transitioning the display mode in a first transition mode (a transition mode in which all lights are turned off for 300 ms) when transitioning from a display mode in which the game history information corresponding to one of the plurality of periods is displayed (a display mode in which bL is displayed) to a display mode in which the game history information corresponding to another of the plurality of periods is displayed (a display mode in which b1 is displayed);
and when the display mode is to be changed based on the predetermined condition being satisfied, a means for changing the display mode in a second change mode (a change mode in which a hyphen is lit for 3000 ms and then changed) different from the first change mode.

According to feature βH1, the transition mode when switching from a display mode displaying game history information corresponding to one period to a display mode displaying game history information corresponding to another period is different from the transition mode when switching display modes based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Therefore, by recognizing the difference in transition modes, the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can clearly distinguish and recognize whether the display mode is switching to a display mode displaying game history information corresponding to another period, or whether the display mode is switching based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the manager or other person from continuing to check game history information without realizing that the predetermined condition has been met.

<Characteristic βI group>
The feature βI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βI1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball total value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) that is information related to the game history based on the detection information;
a display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The calculation means includes means for calculating a _plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each of a plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of a plurality of periods, the boundaries of which are defined by the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (the measured number N OUT of balls passing through the discharge passage reaching a predetermined number);
The display means
A gaming machine comprising: means for switching and displaying the plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each of the plurality of periods based on the lapse of a predetermined display duration (5000 ms), and means for transitioning to a display mode (hyphen lit, all lights off) corresponding to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the game history information is being displayed, even before the predetermined display duration of the game history information being displayed has elapsed.

According to Feature βI1, if a predetermined condition is met while the game history information is being displayed, the display mode will change to one that corresponds to the predetermined condition being met, even before the predetermined display duration of the displayed game history information has elapsed. This allows the manager or inspector of the gaming machine to quickly recognize that the predetermined condition has been met. Furthermore, for example, after the display mode changes to one that corresponds to the predetermined condition being met, it is possible to quickly display the game history information for each period after the predetermined condition was met. As a result, the manager or inspector can quickly check the game history information for each period after the predetermined condition was met, thereby improving the efficiency of gaming machine inspections.

<Feature βJ group>
The group of features βJ is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βJ1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball total value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) that is information related to the game history based on the detection information;
a display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The calculation means includes means for calculating a _plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each of a plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of a plurality of periods, the boundaries of which are defined by the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (the measured number N OUT of balls passing through the discharge passage reaching a predetermined number);
The display means
A gaming machine comprising: means for switching and displaying the plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each of the plurality of periods based on the lapse of a predetermined display duration (5000 ms), and means for, when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the game history information is being displayed, transitioning to a display mode (hyphen lit, all lights off) corresponding to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition after the predetermined display duration of the game history information being displayed has elapsed.

According to feature βJ1, even if a predetermined condition is met while the gaming history information is being displayed, the display of the gaming history information continues until the display duration of the currently displayed gaming history information has elapsed. This prevents situations such as, for example, the display of the gaming history information ending just as the manager or inspector of the gaming machine is about to check the currently displayed gaming history information and transcribe it onto an inspection sheet, making it impossible to transcribe the gaming history information onto the inspection sheet.

<Characteristic βK group>
The group of features βK is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βK1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball total value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) that is information related to the game history based on the detection information;
a display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The calculation means includes means for calculating a _plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each of a plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of a plurality of periods, the boundaries of which are defined by the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (the measured number N OUT of balls passing through the discharge passage reaching a predetermined number);
The display means
A gaming machine comprising: a means for switching and displaying the plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each of the plurality of periods in a predetermined order, and a means for starting display from game history information (bL) corresponding to a specific period among the plurality of periods regardless of the predetermined order when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to feature βK1, when a specified condition is met, the display begins with the gaming history information corresponding to a specific period out of multiple periods, regardless of the specified order. This allows the manager or inspector of the gaming machine to recognize that the specified condition has been met and to prioritize checking the gaming history information corresponding to the specific period.

The inventions of the above feature group βG to feature group βK solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, improving the efficiency of gaming machine development, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, and providing gaming machines that are considerate of players.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

Further technological improvements are desired for gaming machines such as those described above, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, improving the efficiency of gaming machine development, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, providing gaming machines that are considerate of players, and providing a more sound gaming experience.

<Feature βL group>
The group of features βL is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βL1]
A gaming machine,
a storage means (main RAM 64) for storing predetermined information (various flag information, etc.) when the supply of external power is cut off;
a recovery means for executing a recovery process (power restoration process) for restoring the gaming machine to the state before the power supply was cut off based on the predetermined information when the power supply from the outside is started;
a display means (information display unit 45z) that is configured by a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting units, CP light emitting units) and is capable of displaying various information;
an inspection process execution means for executing an inspection process (lighting and blinking process) which is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined manner;
Equipped with
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process execution means comprises a means for executing the inspection process in response to execution of the return process.

According to Feature βL1, the execution of the recovery process triggers the execution of the inspection process, so the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can cause the gaming machine to execute the inspection process by performing an operation to cause the gaming machine to execute the recovery process (for example, by turning the power switch OFF and then ON again). The manager or inspector can then inspect whether any of the multiple display elements that make up the display means are not operating in the specified manner due to a malfunction.

[Feature βL2]
A gaming machine according to feature βL1,
each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display mode (off state) and a second display mode (on state) different from the first display mode;
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode.

According to feature βL2, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements that make up the display means to be in the second display mode, so the gaming machine manager or inspector can inspect whether there are any display elements that cannot be in the second display mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements that make up the display means (for example, a light-emitting element that does not light up due to a broken wire).

[Feature βL3]
A gaming machine according to feature βL1 or feature βL2,
each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display mode (off state) and a second display mode (on state) different from the first display mode;
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode.

According to feature βL3, the inspection process includes control processing to cause all of the multiple display elements constituting the display means to alternate between the first display mode and the second display mode. This allows the gaming machine manager or inspector to inspect whether there are any display elements among the multiple display elements constituting the display means that are unable to transition from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a malfunction (for example, a light-emitting element that remains constantly lit and never turns off).

<Feature βM group>
The group of features β M is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βM1]
Operation acceptance means for accepting operations from the outside (RAM clear button, keyhole for settings, button for changing settings);
a process execution means for executing one of a plurality of branched process flows based on the operation mode accepted by the operation acceptance means when the supply of power from an external source is started;
a display means (information display unit 45z) that is configured by a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting units, CP light emitting units) and is capable of displaying various information;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the processing execution means is provided with a means for executing an inspection process (lighting and flashing process) which is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined manner, regardless of which of the plurality of branched processing flows is executed.

According to Feature βM1, the inspection process is executed regardless of which of the multiple branched processing flows is executed, so the gaming machine can be made to execute the inspection process regardless of the type of operation accepted by the operation acceptance means when power supply is started. Therefore, the gaming machine manager or inspector can inspect whether there are any display elements that do not operate in a specified manner due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements that make up the display means, regardless of the type of operation accepted by the operation acceptance means when power supply is started. In other words, it is possible to prevent situations where the inspection cannot be carried out depending on the type of operation accepted by the operation acceptance means when power supply is started.

[Feature βM2]
A gaming machine according to feature βM1,
each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display mode (off state) and a second display mode (on state) different from the first display mode;
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode.

According to feature βM2, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements that make up the display means to be in the second display mode, so the gaming machine manager or inspector can inspect whether there are any display elements that cannot be in the second display mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements that make up the display means (for example, a light-emitting element that does not light up due to a broken wire).

[Feature βM3]
A gaming machine according to feature βM1 or feature βM2,
each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display mode (off state) and a second display mode (on state) different from the first display mode;
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode.

According to feature βM3, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements constituting the display means to alternate between the first display mode and the second display mode. This allows the gaming machine manager or inspector to inspect whether there are any display elements among the multiple display elements constituting the display means that cannot transition from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a malfunction (for example, a light-emitting element that remains constantly lit and never turns off).

<Feature βN group>
The group of features βN is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βN1]
a first process group execution means for executing a first process group (the processes from step S12001 to step S12028 in FIGS. 63 and 64) based on the start of external power supply;
After the execution of the first process group is completed, a second process group (various processes included in the timer interrupt process, various random number update processes, and power outage monitoring process) is repeatedly executed by a second process group execution means;
a display means (information display unit 45z) that is configured by a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting units, CP light emitting units) and is capable of displaying various information;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first process group execution means includes means for executing an inspection process (lighting and flashing process) as one process included in the first process group, which is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined manner.

According to feature βN1, a first process group including a test process is executed upon the start of external power supply, and after the execution of the first process group is completed, a second process group is repeatedly executed. This allows the test process to be executed only once after the start of external power supply. If the test process were included in the second process group, the test process would be executed repeatedly, increasing the processing load on the gaming machine. Furthermore, if the test process were executed repeatedly, there is a risk that the period during which various information can be displayed on the display means would be shortened. In contrast, this feature allows the test process to be executed only once after the start of external power supply, thereby reducing the processing load on the gaming machine and allowing the gaming machine manager or inspector to check whether there are any display elements among the multiple display elements constituting the display means that are not operating in the specified manner due to a malfunction.

[Feature βN2]
A gaming machine according to feature βN1,
each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display mode (off state) and a second display mode (on state) different from the first display mode;
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode.

According to Feature βN2, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements that make up the display means to be in the second display mode, so the gaming machine administrator or inspector can inspect whether there are any display elements that cannot be in the second display mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements that make up the display means (for example, a light-emitting element that does not light up due to a broken wire).

[Feature βN3]
A gaming machine according to feature βN1 or feature βN2,
each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display mode (off state) and a second display mode (on state) different from the first display mode;
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode.

According to Feature βN3, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements constituting the display means to alternate between the first display mode and the second display mode. This allows the gaming machine manager or inspector to inspect whether there are any display elements constituting the display means that cannot transition from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a malfunction (for example, a light-emitting element that remains constantly lit and never turns off).

<Characteristic βO group>
The group of features βO is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βO1]
A game progress processing execution means for executing game progress processing (such as a ball entry detection process included in a timer interrupt process, a ball entry process for a starting hole, and a game number control process) which is a process for enabling the progress of a game;
a display means (information display unit 45z) that is configured by a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting units, CP light emitting units) and is capable of displaying various information;
an inspection process execution means for executing an inspection process (lighting and blinking process) which is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined manner;
A gaming machine comprising:
The inspection process execution means comprises means for executing the inspection process after the supply of power from an external source is started and before the execution of the game progress process is started.

According to Feature βO1, after the supply of external power begins and before the execution of the game progress process begins, the inspection process is executed. This allows the gaming machine manager or inspector to inspect whether any of the multiple display elements constituting the display means are malfunctioning and not operating in the specified manner before game progress becomes possible on the gaming machine.

If the inspection process were to be executed after the game progress process had begun, it would be possible for a player to begin playing before an administrator or inspector could inspect the display means. In this case, there is a risk that after a player has started playing on a gaming machine, the administrator or inspector may inspect the display means of the gaming machine and discover a malfunction in a display element of the display means. If the administrator or inspector discovers a malfunction in a display element of the gaming machine's display means, the player would need to suspend or stop playing in order to repair or replace the display means. This could result in significant discomfort for the player.

In contrast, this feature allows an administrator or inspector to inspect the display means of a gaming machine before the player is able to begin playing on the gaming machine, thereby preventing the player from being forced to interrupt or stop play and causing discomfort to the player.

[Feature βO2]
A gaming machine according to feature βO1,
each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display mode (off state) and a second display mode (on state) different from the first display mode;
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode.

According to Feature βO2, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements that make up the display means to be in the second display mode, so the gaming machine administrator or inspector can inspect whether there are any display elements that cannot be in the second display mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements that make up the display means (for example, a light-emitting element that does not light up due to a broken wire).

[Feature βO3]
A gaming machine according to feature βO1 or feature βO2,
each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display mode (off state) and a second display mode (on state) different from the first display mode;
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode.

According to Feature βO3, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements constituting the display means to alternate between the first display mode and the second display mode. This allows the gaming machine manager or inspector to inspect whether there are any display elements among the multiple display elements constituting the display means that are unable to transition from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a malfunction (for example, a light-emitting element that remains constantly lit and never turns off).

<Characteristic βP group>
The group of features βP is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βP1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball total value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) that is information related to the game history based on the detection information;
a display means (information display unit 45z) that is configured by a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting units, CP light emitting units) and is capable of displaying various information;
a game history information display processing execution means for executing a game history information display processing (a game history processing included in a timer interrupt processing) which is a processing for displaying information corresponding to the game history information on the display means;
an inspection process execution means for executing an inspection process (lighting and blinking process) which is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined manner;
A gaming machine comprising:
The inspection process execution means is provided with a means for executing the inspection process before information corresponding to the gaming history information is displayed on the display means by executing the gaming history information display process.

According to Feature βP1, the inspection process is executed before information corresponding to the gaming history information is displayed on the display means. This allows the gaming machine manager or inspector to inspect whether any of the multiple display elements constituting the display means are malfunctioning and not operating in a predetermined manner before the information corresponding to the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from checking the information corresponding to the gaming history information displayed on the display means without realizing that there is a display element malfunctioning among the multiple display elements constituting the display means.

[Feature βP2]
A gaming machine according to feature βP1,
each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display mode (off state) and a second display mode (on state) different from the first display mode;
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode.

According to feature βP2, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements that make up the display means to be in the second display mode, so the gaming machine administrator or inspector can inspect whether there are any display elements that cannot be in the second display mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements that make up the display means (for example, a light-emitting element that does not light up due to a broken wire).

[Feature βP3]
A gaming machine according to feature βP1 or feature βP2,
each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display mode (off state) and a second display mode (on state) different from the first display mode;
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode.

According to feature βP3, the inspection process includes control processing to cause all of the multiple display elements constituting the display means to alternate between the first display mode and the second display mode. This allows the gaming machine manager or inspector to inspect whether there are any display elements among the multiple display elements constituting the display means that are unable to transition from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a malfunction (for example, a light-emitting element that remains constantly lit and never turns off).

<Feature βQ group>
The group of features βQ is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βQ1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting an external operation;
a display means (information display unit 45z) that is configured by a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting units, CP light emitting units) and that is capable of displaying setting information, which is information related to the setting of the winning probability, during execution of the setting change mode;
an inspection process execution means for executing an inspection process (lighting and blinking process) which is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined manner;
A gaming machine comprising:
The inspection process execution means comprises means for executing the inspection process before the setting information is displayed on the display means by executing the setting change mode.

According to feature βQ1, the inspection process is executed before the setting information is displayed on the display means, so the gaming machine manager or inspector can inspect whether any of the multiple display elements constituting the display means of the gaming machine are malfunctioning and not operating in a predetermined manner before the setting information is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to prevent a user from checking the setting information displayed on the display means without realizing that there is a display element malfunctioning and not operating properly among the multiple display elements constituting the display means.

[Feature βQ2]
A gaming machine according to feature βQ1,
each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display mode (off state) and a second display mode (on state) different from the first display mode;
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode.

According to feature βQ2, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements that make up the display means to be in the second display mode, so the gaming machine administrator or inspector can inspect whether there are any display elements that cannot be in the second display mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements that make up the display means (for example, a light-emitting element that does not light up due to a broken wire).

[Feature βQ3]
A gaming machine according to feature βQ1 or feature βQ2,
each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display mode (off state) and a second display mode (on state) different from the first display mode;
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode.

According to feature βQ3, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements that make up the display means to alternate between the first display mode and the second display mode. This allows the gaming machine manager or inspector to inspect whether there are any display elements that cannot transition from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements that make up the display means (for example, light-emitting elements that remain constantly lit and never turn off).

The inventions of the above feature group βL to feature group βQ solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, improving the efficiency of gaming machine development, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, and providing gaming machines that are considerate of players.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

Further technological improvements are desired for gaming machines such as those described above, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, improving the efficiency of gaming machine development, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, providing gaming machines that are considerate of players, and providing a more sound gaming experience.

<Feature βR group>
The group of features βR is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (for example, aspect 100).

[Feature βR1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing predetermined identification information (setting change in progress flag);
an identification information transition means for setting the identification information to a first state (ON) when the setting change mode is started, and for transitioning the identification information to a second state (OFF) different from the first state when the setting change mode is ended;
A gaming machine comprising:
The storage means is capable of maintaining the state of the identification information even when the supply of power to the gaming machine from the outside is cut off,
The setting change mode execution means
A first starting means for starting the setting change mode based on the reception of a predetermined starting operation (an operation of turning on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 with the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch all turned on and the RAM clear button being pressed);
a second starting means for starting the setting change mode based on the determination that the identification information is in the first state when power supply to the gaming machine is started from an external device;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to Feature βR1, the first starting means starts the setting change mode upon receiving a predetermined starting operation, and the identification information transition means sets the identification information to a first state when the setting change mode starts and transitions the identification information to a second state when the setting change mode ends. The storage means is capable of maintaining the state of the identification information even when the supply of power to the gaming machine from an external source is cut off. Therefore, for example, if the supply of power to the gaming machine is cut off while the setting change mode is being executed because the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off or a power outage occurs, the identification information stored in the storage means is maintained in the first state.

According to this feature, the second starting means starts the setting change mode based on determining that the identification information is in the first state when the supply of power to the gaming machine is started from outside. In other words, according to this feature, if the supply of power to the gaming machine is cut off while the setting change mode is being executed, and the supply of power to the gaming machine is resumed, the setting change mode will be started even if the specified start operation has not been received.

Therefore, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off from an external source while the setting change mode is running, the administrator can avoid the hassle of having to perform the required start-up operation again after the power supply to the gaming machine is restored in order to restart the setting change mode on the gaming machine.

Furthermore, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off from an external source while the setting change mode is running, the winning probability setting of the gaming machine may be set to a state that the administrator did not intend. However, with this feature, when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed from an external source, the setting change mode will start without the administrator having to perform the specified start operation again, thereby preventing the winning probability setting of the gaming machine from being set to a state that the administrator did not intend and overlooked.

<Feature βS group>
The group of features βS is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (for example, aspect 100).

[Feature βS1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
a setting information display mode execution means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) that displays setting information that is information related to the setting of the winning probability, but does not allow the setting of the winning probability to be changed;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing predetermined identification information (setting confirmation flag);
an identification information transition means for setting the identification information to a first state (ON) when the setting information display mode is started, and for transitioning the identification information to a second state (OFF) different from the first state when the setting information display mode is ended;
A gaming machine comprising:
The storage means is capable of maintaining the state of the identification information even when the supply of power to the gaming machine from the outside is cut off,
The setting information display mode execution means
A first starting means for starting the setting information display mode based on receiving a predetermined starting operation (an operation of turning on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 with the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch all turned on and the RAM clear button not pressed);
a second starting means for starting the setting information display mode based on the determination that the identification information is in the first state when power supply to the gaming machine is started from an external device;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature βS1, the first starting means starts the setting information display mode upon receiving a predetermined starting operation, and the identification information transition means sets the identification information to a first state when the setting information display mode starts and transitions the identification information to a second state when the setting information display mode ends. The storage means is capable of maintaining the state of the identification information even when the supply of power to the gaming machine from an external source is cut off. Therefore, for example, if the supply of power to the gaming machine is cut off while the setting information display mode is being executed because the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off or a power outage occurs, the identification information stored in the storage means is maintained in the first state.

According to this feature, the second starting means starts the setting information display mode based on determining that the identification information is in the first state when the supply of power to the gaming machine is started from outside. In other words, according to this feature, if the supply of power to the gaming machine is cut off while the setting information display mode is being executed, and the supply of power to the gaming machine is resumed, the setting information display mode will be started even if the specified start operation has not been received.

Therefore, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off from an external source while the setting information display mode is running, the administrator can avoid the hassle of having to perform the required start-up operation again after the power supply to the gaming machine is restored in order to restart the setting information display mode.

<Feature βT group>
The feature βT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (for example, aspect 100).

[Feature βT1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
A first storage means (a setting information storage area of the main RAM 64) that stores setting information related to the setting of the winning probability and that can maintain the state of the setting information even when the supply of external power is cut off;
A second storage means (an update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64) for storing change setting information (update setting information) that is information used during execution of the setting change mode;
a change means for changing the setting information to be changed while the setting change mode is being executed;
A gaming machine comprising:
the second storage means includes means for storing information corresponding to the setting information as the setting information for change when the setting change mode is started,
the change means includes means for changing the change setting information stored in the second storage means by accepting the predetermined change operation;
The gaming machine, wherein the first storage means includes means for storing information corresponding to the change setting information as the setting information when the setting change mode is terminated.

According to Feature βT1, when the setting change mode is initiated, the second storage means stores information corresponding to the setting information as change setting information, the change means changes the change setting information stored in the second storage means by accepting a predetermined change operation, and the first storage means stores the information corresponding to the change setting information as setting information when the setting change mode is terminated. Therefore, even if the supply of external power is cut off while the setting change mode is being executed, the setting information stored in the first storage means can be maintained at the value it had before the setting change mode was initiated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the winning probability setting information of the gaming machine from becoming a value different from the value intended by the administrator due to the supply of external power being cut off while the setting change mode is being executed. This is explained in detail below.

If a configuration is adopted in which change setting information is not used during execution of the setting change mode, and the setting information stored in the first storage means is directly changed by accepting a specified change operation, if the external power supply is cut off at a time during execution of the setting change mode when the setting information has a value different from that intended by the manager of the gaming machine, the setting information for the winning probability of the gaming machine will have a value different from that intended by the manager.

In contrast, according to this feature, the setting information stored in the first storage means is not changed until the setting change mode ends, and only the change setting information stored in the second storage means is changed. Therefore, even if the external power supply is cut off at a time when the change setting information has a value different from that intended by the manager of the gaming machine during the setting change mode, the setting information stored in the first storage means will maintain the value it had before the setting change mode was started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the winning probability setting information of the gaming machine from becoming a value different from that intended by the manager due to the external power supply being cut off during the setting change mode.

[Feature βT2]
A gaming machine according to feature βT1,
a display means for displaying the setting information for change stored in the second storage means while the setting change mode is being executed.

According to feature βT2, the display means displays the change setting information stored in the second storage means while the setting change mode is running, allowing the administrator to perform the specified change operations while checking the change setting information displayed on the display means.

<Feature βU group>
The group of features βU is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (for example, aspect 100).

[Feature βU1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
A storage means for storing setting information, which is information relating to the setting of the winning probability, and capable of maintaining the state of the setting information even when the supply of external power is cut off (a setting information storage area of the main RAM 64);
a setting information determination means for determining whether the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition when the supply of power from an external source is started (executing the process of step S12007 in FIG. 65);
A game progress processing execution means for executing a game progress processing (the processing of steps S12304 to S12316 in FIG. 68) which is a processing for progressing a game;
A gaming machine comprising:
A gaming machine characterized in that the game progress processing execution means does not execute the game progress processing when the setting information determination means determines that the setting information does not satisfy the specified condition (when the setting information is determined to be outside the specified range in step S12007 of Figure 65 and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON in step S12015).

According to Feature βU1, the storage means maintains the state of the setting information even when the external power supply is cut off, and the game progress processing execution means determines whether the setting information satisfies predetermined conditions when the external power supply is started, and does not execute game progress processing to progress the game if it determines that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined conditions. Therefore, it is possible to prevent game progress processing from being executed while the setting information stored in the storage means does not satisfy the predetermined conditions, which could cause problems with the progress of game play on the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent unexpected losses from being caused to players or managers, for example.

<Characteristic βV group>
The group of features βV is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (for example, aspect 100).

[Feature βV1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
A storage means (main RAM 64) capable of storing various information including setting information which is information relating to the setting of the winning probability, and capable of maintaining the various information even when the supply of external power is cut off;
a setting information determination means for determining whether the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition when the supply of power from an external source is started (executing the process of step S12007 in FIG. 65);
an erasure processing execution means for executing an erasure processing (first RAM clear processing) for erasing all of the various information stored in the storage means except for the setting information;
A gaming machine comprising:
The erasure process execution means
means for executing the erasure process based on receipt of a predetermined erasure operation (an operation of turning on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 with the setting key turned off and the RAM clear button pressed);
means for not executing the erasure process when it is determined by the setting information determination means that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (when it is determined in step S12007 of FIG. 65 that the setting information is not within the predetermined range and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON in step S12015), even if the predetermined erasure operation is accepted;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature βV1, the storage means maintains the state of the setting information even when the supply of external power is cut off, and the erasure process execution means determines whether the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition when the supply of external power is started, and if it determines that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, does not execute the erasure process even if a predetermined erasure operation is received. This makes it possible to prevent problems from occurring when the erasure process is executed while the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Specific details are explained below.

If a configuration were adopted in which the erasure process was executed even when it was determined that the setting information did not satisfy the predetermined conditions, various information stored in the storage means, such as information indicating that it was determined that the setting information did not satisfy the predetermined conditions (e.g., a RAM abnormality flag), would be erased. Even though the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined conditions, after the erasure process is executed, processing that assumes that the setting information satisfies the predetermined conditions (e.g., game progress processing that allows the game to proceed) may be executed, potentially resulting in a malfunction.

In contrast, with this feature, if it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the specified conditions, the erasure process is not executed even if the specified erasure operation is received. This prevents the erasure process from being executed even when the setting information does not satisfy the specified conditions, and prevents processing that assumes the setting information satisfies the specified conditions from being executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent problems from occurring when the erasure process is executed when the setting information does not satisfy the specified conditions.

<Characteristic βW group>
The group of features βW is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (for example, aspect 100).

[Feature βW1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
a setting information display mode execution means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) that displays setting information that is information related to the setting of the winning probability, but does not allow the setting of the winning probability to be changed;
a storage means (a setting information storage area of the main RAM 64) capable of storing various information including the setting information, and capable of maintaining the various information even when the supply of power from the outside is cut off;
a setting information determination means for determining whether the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition when the supply of power from an external source is started (executing the process of step S12007 in FIG. 65);
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting information display mode execution means
means for executing the setting information display mode based on the reception of a predetermined start operation (an operation of turning on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 with the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch all turned on and the RAM clear button not being pressed);
means for not executing the setting information display mode when it is determined by the setting information determination means that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (when it is determined in step S12007 of FIG. 65 that the setting information is not within the predetermined range and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON in step S12015), even when the predetermined start operation is accepted;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature βW1, the storage means maintains the state of various information, including the setting information, even when the external power supply is cut off, and the setting information display mode execution means does not execute the setting information display mode when it determines that the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, even if a predetermined start operation is received. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting information display mode, which displays the setting information, from being executed even when the setting information stored in the storage means does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Feature βX group>
The group of features βX is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (for example, aspect 100).

[Feature βX1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
A storage means (main RAM 64) capable of storing various information including setting information which is information relating to the setting of the winning probability, and capable of maintaining the various information even when the supply of external power is cut off;
When the supply of power from the outside is cut off, a predetermined calculation is performed based on a predetermined information group stored in the storage means, and a first calculation result, which is the result of the predetermined calculation, is stored in the storage means (a RAM determination value is calculated in the power outage monitoring process and stored in the main RAM 64). Calculation execution means;
a calculation result determination means for, when the supply of electric power from an external source is started, executing the predetermined calculation based on the predetermined information group stored in the storage means, and determining whether or not a second calculation result, which is a result of the predetermined calculation, matches the first calculation result (performing the processing of steps S12005 to S12006 in FIG. 65 );
a setting information determination means for determining whether the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition when the supply of power from an external source is started (executing the process of step S12007 in FIG. 65);
a predetermined processing execution means for executing a predetermined process (the process of steps S12304 to S12316 in FIG. 68, which is a process for progressing a game) based on the determination by the calculation result determination means that the second calculation result and the first calculation result match, and the determination by the setting information determination means that the setting information satisfies the predetermined condition;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature βX1, the predetermined processing execution means executes the predetermined processing based on the determination that the second calculation result matches the first calculation result and that the setting information satisfies the predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined processing from being executed even when the second calculation result matches the first calculation result but the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. As a result, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by the predetermined processing being executed even when the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. This is explained in detail below.

If the second calculation result and the first calculation result match, it is highly likely that the contents of the predetermined information group stored in the storage means when external power supply was started are the same as the contents of the predetermined information group stored in the storage means when the previous power supply was cut off, and it is highly likely that the predetermined information group stored in the storage means was maintained normally even when the external power supply was cut off. However, even if the predetermined information group stored in the storage means is not maintained normally, there are cases where the second calculation result and the first calculation result match by chance.

For this reason, if a configuration were adopted in which a determination was made as to whether the second calculation result and the first calculation result matched, but no determination was made as to whether the setting information satisfied a predetermined condition, there is a possibility that the second calculation result and the first calculation result would coincidentally match, resulting in the execution of a predetermined process, even if the setting information did not satisfy the predetermined condition. If the predetermined process included, for example, a process that allowed the game to proceed, there is a risk that a fatal malfunction would occur in the progress of the game.

In contrast, according to this feature, a predetermined process is executed when it is determined that the second calculation result matches the first calculation result and that the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition. In other words, if the second calculation result matches the first calculation result but the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the predetermined process is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined process from being executed even when the second calculation result matches the first calculation result but the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. As a result, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by the predetermined process being executed even when the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic βY group>
The feature group βY is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (for example, aspect 100).

[Feature βY1]
An entry area where game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
an operation receiving means (setting keyhole) that can transition from a first state (OFF side state) to a second state (ON side state) different from the first state by receiving a predetermined operation (an operation of inserting a setting key into the setting keyhole and turning it);
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting change mode execution means
a termination means for terminating the setting change mode based on detection of a transition of the operation acceptance means from the second state to the first state (an OFF edge falling from an ON state to an OFF state) while the setting change mode is being executed.

According to feature βY1, the setting change mode execution means terminates the setting change mode upon detecting a transition of the operation acceptance means from the second state to the first state while the setting change mode is being executed, thereby preventing the setting change mode from being terminated immediately after it has started. This is explained in detail below.

For example, in a configuration in which the setting change mode is initiated when a first start condition is met, including the operation acceptance means being in the second state (e.g., the setting key (keyhole), frame release switch, and door release switch are all ON, and the RAM clear button is pressed, and the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON), and when a second start condition is met that is independent of whether the operation acceptance means is in the second state (e.g., the setting change in progress flag is ON when the power is ON), this section describes a hypothetical configuration that differs from this feature and terminates the setting change mode when it is detected that the operation acceptance means is in the first state. In this configuration, if the setting change mode is initiated based on the first start condition being met, including the operation acceptance means being in the second state, the setting change mode will continue until the operation acceptance means transitions from the second state to the first state. However, if the setting change mode is initiated based on the second start condition being met, regardless of whether the operation acceptance means is in the second state, the setting change mode may be initiated while the operation acceptance means remains in the first state. In this case, the operation acceptance means is detected to be in the first state immediately after the setting change mode is initiated, and the setting change mode ends. In other words, the setting change mode ends immediately after it is initiated, making it difficult to change the winning probability setting in the setting change mode.

In contrast, according to this feature, the setting change mode is terminated upon detection of a transition of the operation acceptance means from the second state to the first state. Therefore, even if the setting change mode is initiated due to the second start condition being satisfied and the setting change mode is initiated while the operation acceptance means is still in the first state, the setting change mode will continue until an administrator of the gaming machine or the like transitions the operation acceptance means from the first state to the second state, and then transitions it again from the second state to the first state. Therefore, even if the setting change mode is initiated while the operation acceptance means is still in the first state, it is possible to avoid the setting change mode being terminated immediately after it is initiated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being terminated immediately after it is initiated, making it difficult to change the win probability settings.

Furthermore, according to this feature, even if the setting change mode is initiated by the satisfaction of the second initiation condition, only those who can change the state of the operation acceptance means can terminate the setting change mode. This improves the security of the gaming machine.

[Feature βY2]
A gaming machine according to feature βY1,
The setting change mode execution means
a first starting means for starting the setting change mode based on the establishment of a first starting condition including the operation accepting means being in the second state (the setting keyhole being in the ON side state);
a second starting means for starting the setting change mode when a second starting condition (a setting change in progress flag being ON when the power is ON) is satisfied, regardless of whether the operation accepting means is in the second state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature βY2, the first starting means starts the setting change mode based on the satisfaction of a first starting condition, which includes the operation receiving means being in the second state, and the second starting means starts the setting change mode based on the satisfaction of a second starting condition, which is independent of whether the operation receiving means is in the second state. Therefore, the setting change mode can be started not only when the operation receiving means is in the second state, but also when the operation receiving means is not in the second state.

The inventions of the above feature group βR to feature group βY solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, improving the efficiency of gaming machine development, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, and providing gaming machines that are considerate of players.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made to improve the integrity of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

Further technological improvements are desired for gaming machines such as those described above, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, improving the efficiency of gaming machine development, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, providing gaming machines that are considerate of players, and providing a more sound gaming experience.

It is also possible to adopt a configuration that appropriately combines one or more of the features included in the above feature group A to feature group βY. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect from the combined configuration.

Below is the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or to which each feature can be applied.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a launching means that launches gaming balls toward a gaming area based on a launch operation by a player, a starting ball entry section that is provided in the gaming area and into which gaming balls flowing down the gaming area can enter, an information acquisition means that acquires special information based on a gaming ball entering the starting ball entry section, and an acquired information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a pattern display means for variably displaying multiple patterns, a start means for starting the variable display of the multiple patterns in response to operation of a start operation means, a stop means for stopping the variable display of the multiple patterns in response to operation of a stop operation means or the passage of a predetermined time, and a bonus award means for awarding a bonus to a player according to the pattern after the stop.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and variations, and can be realized in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and variations corresponding to the technical features in each aspect described in the Summary of the Invention section can be replaced or combined as appropriate to solve some or all of the above-described problems or achieve some or all of the above-described effects. Furthermore, if a technical feature is not described as essential in this specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

10...Pachinko machine 11...Outer frame 12...Pachinko machine body 13...Inner frame 14...Front door frame 15...Hinge 16...Hinge 17...Cylinder lock 18...Window section 19...Glass unit 20...Upper tray 21...Lower tray 22...Discharge outlet 23...Lever 24...Performance operation button 25...Operation handle 25a...Touch sensor 25b...Weight button 25c...Variable resistor 26...Game ball launch button 30...Game board 31...Guide rail 31a...Inner rail section 31b...Outer rail section 32...General winning port 32a...First winning port 32b...Second winning port 32c...Third winning port 33...First starting port 34...Second starting port 34a...Electric device 34b...Electric device drive section 35...Through gate 36...Variable winning device 36a...Large winning opening 36b...Opening and closing door 36c...Variable winning drive unit 37...Special pattern unit 37a...First pattern display unit 37b...Second pattern display unit 37c...First reserved display unit 37d...Second reserved display unit 38...Normal pattern unit 39...Round display unit 40...Variable display unit 41...Pattern display device 42...Peg 43...Outlet 45...Main display unit 45z...Game history information display unit (information display unit)
46...Speaker 47...Various lamps 51...First control unit 52...Second control unit 53...Third control unit 54...Tank 55...Tank rail 56...Case rail 60...Main control device 61...Main control board 62...Main side MPU
62x...Main CPU
63...Main ROM
64...Main RAM
64x... flash memory 70... payout control device 71... payout device 80... launch control device 81... game ball launch mechanism 85... power supply device 86... power failure monitoring circuit 90... sound and light emitting control device 91... sound and light emitting control board 96... RTC
100...Display control device 300...Game history management chip 302...Buffer 304...Register 306...Memory for storing prize ball number data 307...Memory for storing calculation execution conditions 307a...Memory for storing storage execution conditions 308...CPU
309...Memory for storing calculation results 309a...Memory for storing the number of balls entered 309b...Memory for storing ball entry information 320...Inspection machine 321...CPU
328...Display unit 329...Connection cable

Claims (1)

a predetermined detection means for detecting a predetermined operation;
a game value granting means electrically connected to the predetermined detection means and executing a process for granting a game value for a game;
a game media providing means electrically connected to the game value providing means and configured to perform a process for providing game media;
a processing execution means electrically connected to the game value providing means by a signal line capable of transmitting various signals, and which executes a specific processing which is a processing different from the processing for providing the game medium;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming value providing means
a first reference information storage means for storing reference information used in a process for awarding a game value to the game, the reference information being referenced in response to detection by the predetermined detection means;
a first transmitting means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means to the processing executing means after a predetermined supply of power to the gaming machine has started and before the execution of a predetermined game processing for progressing a game is started;
a second transmitting means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on information acquired based on detection by the predetermined detecting means to the processing executing means;
Equipped with
The processing execution means
a second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value providing means;
an execution means for executing the specific process based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means;
a processing result information storage means for storing processing result information which is information relating to the processing result of the specific processing performed by the execution means;
Equipped with
the game value providing means is provided in a main control means for progressing the game, and the processing execution means is provided in a performance control means for controlling the performance,
the processing execution means is configured to make it impossible to rewrite the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means of the game value granting means,
This gaming machine is
When a predetermined abnormality occurs, information corresponding to the predetermined abnormality is transmitted from the game value providing means, and the information corresponding to the predetermined abnormality is stored in the processing execution means;
This gaming machine is
When erasing information acquired based on the execution of a game, the information used to control the progress of the game is erased.
A gaming machine characterized by: